diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/bpike10.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/bpike10.txt | 13132 |
1 files changed, 13132 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/bpike10.txt b/old/bpike10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..74cd437 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/bpike10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13132 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of By Pike and Dyke: A Tale of the Rise of the Dutch Republic +by G.A. Henty +(#11 in our series by G.A. Henty) + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: By Pike and Dyke: A Tale of the Rise of the Dutch Republic + +Author: G.A. Henty + +Release Date: November, 2004 [EBook #6952] +[This file was first posted on February 17, 2003] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, BY PIKE AND DYKE: A TALE OF THE RISE OF THE DUTCH REPUBLIC *** + + + + +By Pike and Dyke: A Tale of the Rise of the Dutch Republic +by G. A. Henty +This etext was produced by Martin Robb (MartinRobb@ieee.org) + + + +PREFACE. + +MY DEAR LADS, + +In all the pages of history there is no record of a struggle so +unequal, so obstinately maintained, and so long contested as that +by which the men of Holland and Zeeland won their right to worship +God in their own way, and also -- although this was but a secondary +consideration with them -- shook off the yoke of Spain and achieved +their independence. The incidents of the contest were of a singularly +dramatic character. Upon one side was the greatest power of the +time, set in motion by a ruthless bigot, who was determined either +to force his religion upon the people of the Netherlands, or +to utterly exterminate them. Upon the other were a scanty people, +fishermen, sailors, and agriculturalists, broken up into communities +with but little bond of sympathy, and no communication, standing +only on the defensive, and relying solely upon the justice of their +cause, their own stout hearts, their noble prince, and their one +ally, the ocean. Cruelty, persecution, and massacre had converted +this race of peace loving workers into heroes capable of the most +sublime self sacrifices. Women and children were imbued with a +spirit equal to that of the men, fought as stoutly on the walls, +and died as uncomplainingly from famine in the beleaguered towns. +The struggle was such a long one that I have found it impossible +to recount all the leading events in the space of a single volume; +and, moreover, before the close, my hero, who began as a lad, would +have grown into middle age, and it is an established canon in books +for boys that the hero must himself be young. I have therefore +terminated the story at the murder of William of Orange, and hope +in another volume to continue the history, and to recount the +progress of the war, when England, after years of hesitation, threw +herself into the fray, and joined Holland in its struggle against +the power that overshadowed all Europe, alike by its ambition and +its bigotry. There has been no need to consult many authorities. +Motley in his great work has exhausted the subject, and for all +the historical facts I have relied solely upon him. + +Yours very sincerely, G. A. HENTY + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE "GOOD VENTURE" + + +Rotherhithe in the year of 1572 differed very widely from the +Rotherhithe of today. It was then a scattered village, inhabited +chiefly by a seafaring population. It was here that the captains +of many of the ships that sailed from the port of London had their +abode. Snug cottages with trim gardens lay thickly along the banks +of the river, where their owners could sit and watch the vessels +passing up and down or moored in the stream, and discourse with +each other over the hedges as to the way in which they were handled, +the smartness of their equipage, whence they had come, or where +they were going. For the trade of London was comparatively small +in those days, and the skippers as they chatted together could form +a shrewd guess from the size and appearance of each ship as to the +country with which she traded, or whether she was a coaster working +the eastern or southern ports. + +Most of the vessels, indeed, would be recognized and the captains +known, and hats would be waved and welcomes or adieus shouted as +the vessels passed. There was something that savoured of Holland +in the appearance of Rotherhithe; for it was with the Low Countries +that the chief trade of England was carried on; and the mariners +who spent their lives in journeying to and fro between London and +the ports of Zeeland, Friesland, and Flanders, who for the most part +picked up the language of the country, and sometimes even brought +home wives from across the sea, naturally learned something from +their neighbours. Nowhere, perhaps, in and about London were the +houses so clean and bright, and the gardens so trimly and neatly +kept, as in the village of Rotherhithe, and in all Rotherhithe not +one was brighter and more comfortable than the abode of Captain +William Martin. + +It was low and solid in appearance; the wooden framework was +unusually massive, and there was much quaint carving on the beams. +The furniture was heavy and solid, and polished with beeswax until +it shone. The fireplaces were lined with Dutch tiles; the flooring +was of oak, polished as brightly as the furniture. The appointments +from roof to floor were Dutch; and no wonder that this was so, for +every inch of wood in its framework and beams, floor and furniture, +and had been brought across from Friesland by William Martin in +his ship, the Good Venture. It had been the dowry he received with +his pretty young wife, Sophie Plomaert. + +Sophie was the daughter of a well-to-do worker in wood near +Amsterdam. She was his only daughter, and although he had nothing +to say against the English sailor who had won her heart, and who +was chief owner of the ship he commanded, he grieved much that +she should leave her native land; and he and her three brothers +determined that she should always bear her former home in her +recollection. They therefore prepared as her wedding gift a facsimile +of the home in which she had been born and bred. The furniture +and framework were similar in every particular, and it needed only +the insertion of the brickwork and plaster when it arrived. Two of +her brothers made the voyage in the Good Venture, and themselves +put the framework, beams, and flooring together, and saw to the +completion of the house on the strip of ground that William Martin +had purchased on the bank of the river. + +Even a large summer house that stood at the end of the garden was a +reproduction of that upon the bank of the canal at home; and when +all was completed and William Martin brought over his bride she +could almost fancy that she was still at home near Amsterdam. Ever +since, she had once a year sailed over in her husband's ship, and +spent a few weeks with her kinsfolk. When at home from sea the great +summer house was a general rendezvous of William Martin's friends +in Rotherhithe, all skippers like himself, some still on active +service, others, who had retired on their savings; not all, however, +were fortunate enough to have houses on the river bank; and the +summer house was therefore useful not only as a place of meeting +but as a lookout at passing ships. + +It was a solidly built structure, inclosed on the land side but open +towards the river, where, however, there were folding shutters, so +that in cold weather it could be partially closed up, though still +affording a sight of the stream. A great Dutch stove stood in one +corner, and in this in winter a roaring fire was kept up. There +were few men in Rotherhithe so well endowed with this world's goods +as Captain Martin. His father had been a trader in the city, but +William's tastes lay towards the sea rather than the shop, and as +he was the youngest of three brothers he had his way in the matter. +When he reached the age of twenty-three his father died, and with +his portion of the savings William purchased the principal share +of the Good Venture, which ship he had a few months before come to +command. + +When he married he had received not only his house but a round sum +of money as Sophie's portion. With this he could had he liked have +purchased the other shares of the Good Venture; but being, though +a sailor, a prudent man, he did not like to put all his eggs into +one basket, and accordingly bought with it a share in another ship. +Three children had been born to William and Sophie Martin -- a boy +and two girls. Edward, who was the eldest, was at the time this +story begins nearly sixteen. He was an active well built young +fellow, and had for five years sailed with his father in the Good +Venture. That vessel was now lying in the stream a quarter of +a mile higher up, having returned from a trip to Holland upon the +previous day. The first evening there had been no callers, for it +was an understood thing at Rotherhithe that a captain on his return +wanted the first evening at home alone with his wife and family; but +on the evening of the second day, when William Martin had finished +his work of seeing to the unloading of his ship, the visitors +began to drop in fast, and the summer house was well nigh as full +as it could hold. Mistress Martin, who was now a comely matron +of six-and-thirty, busied herself in seeing that the maid and her +daughters, Constance and Janet, supplied the visitors with horns +of home brewed beer, or with strong waters brought from Holland +for those who preferred them. + +"You have been longer away than usual, Captain Martin," one of the +visitors remarked. + +"Yes," the skipper replied. "Trade is but dull, and though the Good +Venture bears a good repute for speed and safety, and is seldom +kept lying at the wharves for a cargo, we were a week before she +was chartered. I know not what will be the end of it all. I verily +believe that no people have ever been so cruelly treated for their +conscience' sake since the world began; for you know it is not against +the King of Spain but against the Inquisition that the opposition +has been made. The people of the Low Countries know well enough +it would be madness to contend against the power of the greatest +country in Europe, and to this day they have borne, and are bearing, +the cruelty to which they are exposed in quiet despair, and without +a thought of resistance to save their lives. There may have been +tumults in some of the towns, as in Antwerp, where the lowest part +of the mob went into the cathedrals and churches and destroyed the +shrines and images; but as to armed resistance to the Spaniards, +there has been none. + +"The first expeditions that the Prince of Orange made into the +country were composed of German mercenaries, with a small body of +exiles. They were scarce joined by any of the country folk. Though, +as you know, they gained one little victory, they were nigh all +killed and cut to pieces. So horrible was the slaughter perpetrated +by the soldiers of the tyrannical Spanish governor Alva, that when +the Prince of Orange again marched into the country not a man joined +him, and he had to fall back without accomplishing anything. The +people seemed stunned by despair. Has not the Inquisition condemned +the whole of the inhabitants of the Netherlands -- save only a few +persons specially named -- to death as heretics? and has not Philip +confirmed the decree, and ordered it to be carried into instant +execution without regard to age or sex? Were three millions of men, +women, and children ever before sentenced to death by one stroke +of the pen, only because they refused to change their religion? +Every day there are hundreds put to death by the orders of Alva's +Blood Council, as it is called, without even the mockery of a +trial." + +There was a general murmur of rage and horror from the assembled +party. + +"Were I her queen's majesty," an old captain said, striking his fist +on the table, "I would declare war with Philip of Spain tomorrow, +and would send every man who could bear arms to the Netherlands to +aid the people to free themselves from their tyrants. + +"Ay, and there is not a Protestant in this land but would go +willingly. To think of such cruelty makes the blood run through +my veins as if I were a lad again. Why, in Mary's time there were +two or three score burnt for their religion here in England, and we +thought that a terrible thing. But three millions of people! Why, +it is as many as we have got in all these islands! What think you +of this mates?" + +"It is past understanding," another old sailor said. "It is too +awful for us to take in." + +"It is said," another put in, "that the King of France has leagued +himself with Philip of Spain, and that the two have bound themselves +to exterminate the Protestants in all their dominions, and as that +includes Spain, France, Italy, the Low Countries, and most of +Germany, it stands to reason as we who are Protestants ought to +help our friends; for you may be sure, neighbours, that if Philip +succeeds in the Low Countries he will never rest until he has tried +to bring England under his rule also, and to plant the Inquisition +with its bonfires and its racks and tortures here." + +An angry murmur of assent ran round the circle. + +"We would fight them, you may be sure," Captain Martin said, "to +the last; but Spain is a mighty power, and all know that there are +no soldiers in Europe can stand against their pikemen. If the Low +Countries, which number as many souls as we, cannot make a stand +against them with all their advantages of rivers, and swamps, and +dykes, and fortified towns, what chance should we have who have +none of these things? What I say, comrades, is this: we have got +to fight Spain -- you know the grudge Philip bears us -- and it is +far better that we should go over and fight the Spaniards in the +Low Countries, side by side with the people there, and with all the +advantages that their rivers and dykes give, and with the comfort +that our wives and children are safe here at home, than wait till +Spain has crushed down the Netherlands and exterminated the people, +and is then able, with France as her ally, to turn her whole strength +against us. That's what I say." + +"And you say right, Captain Martin. If I were the queen's majesty +I would send word to Philip tomorrow to call off his black crew +of monks and inquisitors. The people of the Netherlands have no +thought of resisting the rule of Spain, and would be, as they have +been before, Philip's obedient subjects, if he would but leave +their religion alone. It's the doings of the Inquisition that have +driven them to despair. And when one hears what you are telling us, +that the king has ordered the whole population to be exterminated +-- man, woman, and child -- no wonder they are preparing to fight +to the last; for it's better to die fighting a thousand times, than +it is to be roasted alive with your wife and children!" + +"I suppose the queen and her councillors see that if she were to +meddle in this business it might cost her her kingdom, and us our +liberty," another captain said. "The Spaniards could put, they say, +seventy or eighty thousand trained soldiers in the field, while, +except the queen's own bodyguard, there is not a soldier in England; +while their navy is big enough to take the fifteen or twenty ships +the queen has, and to break them up to burn their galley fires." + +"That is all true enough," Captain Martin agreed; "but our English +men have fought well on the plains of France before now, and I don't +believe we should fight worse today. We beat the French when they +were ten to one against us over and over, and what our fathers did +we can do. What you say about the navy is true also. They have a +big fleet, and we have no vessels worth speaking about, but we are +as good sailors as the Spaniards any day, and as good fighters; +and though I am not saying we could stop their fleet if it came +sailing up the Thames, I believe when they landed we should show +them that we were as good men as they. They might bring seventy +thousand soldiers, but there would be seven hundred thousand +Englishmen to meet; and if we had but sticks and stones to fight +with, they would not find that they would have an easy victory." + +"Yes, that's what you think and I think, neighbour; but, you see, +we have not got the responsibility of it. The queen has to think +for us all. Though I for one would be right glad if she gave the +word for war, she may well hesitate before she takes a step that +might bring ruin, and worse than ruin, upon all her subjects. +We must own, too, that much as we feel for the people of the Low +Countries in their distress, they have not always acted wisely. +That they should take up arms against these cruel tyrants, even +if they had no chance of beating them, is what we all agree would +be right and natural; but when the mob of Antwerp broke into the +cathedral, and destroyed the altars and carvings, and tore up the +vestments, and threw down the Manes and the saints, and then did the +same in the other churches in the town and in the country round, +they behaved worse than children, and showed themselves as intolerant +and bigoted as the Spaniards themselves. They angered Philip beyond +hope of forgiveness, and gave him something like an excuse for his +cruelties towards them." + +"Ay, ay, that was a bad business," Captain Martin agreed; "a very +bad business, comrade. And although these things were done by a mere +handful of the scum of the town the respectable citizens raised no +hand to stop it, although they can turn out the town guard readily +enough to put a stop to a quarrel between the members of two of +the guilds. There were plenty of men who have banded themselves +together under the name of 'the beggars,' and swore to fight for +their religion, to have put these fellows down if they had chosen. +They did not choose, and now Philip's vengeance will fall on them +all alike." + +"Well, what think you of this business, Ned?" one of the captains +said, turning to the lad who was standing in a corner, remaining, as +in duty bound, silent in the presence of his elders until addressed. + +"Were I a Dutchman, and living under such a tyranny," Ned said +passionately, "I would rise and fight to the death rather than see +my family martyred. If none other would rise with me, I would take +a sword and go out and slay the first Spaniard I met, and again +another, until I was killed." + +"Bravo, Ned! Well spoken, lad!" three or four of the captains said; +but his father shook his head. + +"Those are the words of hot youth, Ned; and were you living there +you would do as the others -- keep quiet till the executioners +came to drag you away, seeing that did you, as you say you would, +use a knife against a Spaniard, it would give the butchers a pretext +for the slaughtering of hundreds of innocent people." + +The lad looked down abashed at the reproof, then he said: "Well, +father, if I could not rise in arms or slay a Spaniard and then +be killed, I would leave my home and join the sea beggars under La +Marck." + +"There is more reason in that," his father replied; "though La +Marck is a ferocious noble, and his followers make not very close +inquiry whether the ships they attack are Spanish or those of other +people. Still it is hard for a man to starve; and when time passes +and they can light upon no Spanish merchantmen, one cannot blame +them too sorely if they take what they require out of some other +passing ship. But there is reason at the bottom of what you say. +Did the men of the sea coast, seeing that their lives and those of +their families are now at the mercy of the Spaniards, take to their +ships with those dear to them and continually harass the Spaniards, +they could work them great harm, and it would need a large fleet to +overpower them, and that with great difficulty, seeing that they +know the coast and all the rivers and channels, and could take +refuge in shallows where the Spaniards could not follow them. At +present it seems to me the people are in such depths of despair, +that they have not heart for any such enterprise. But I believe that +some day or other the impulse will be given -- some more wholesale +butchery than usual will goad them to madness, or the words of some +patriot wake them into action, and then they will rise as one man +and fight until utterly destroyed, for that they can in the end +triumph over Spain is more than any human being can hope." + +"Then they must be speedy about it, friend Martin," another said. +"They say that eighty thousand have been put to death one way +or another since Alva came into his government. Another ten years +and there will be scarce an able bodied man remaining in the Low +Country. By the way, you were talking of the beggars of the sea. +Their fleet is lying at present at Dover, and it is said that the +Spanish ambassador is making grave complaints to the queen on the +part of his master against giving shelter to these men, whom he +brands as not only enemies of Spain, but as pirates and robbers of +the sea." + +"I was talking with Master Sheepshanks," another mariner put in, +"whose ships I sailed for thirty years, and who is an alderman and +knows what is going on, and he told me that from what he hears it +is like enough that the queen will yield to the Spanish request. So +long as she chooses to remain friends with Spain openly, whatever +her thoughts and opinions may be, she can scarcely allow her ports +to be used by the enemies of Philip. It must go sorely against +her high spirit; but till she and her council resolve that England +shall brave the whole strength of Spain, she cannot disregard the +remonstrances of Philip. It is a bad business, neighbours, a bad +business; and the sooner it comes to an end the better. No one +doubts that we shall have to fight Spain one of these days, and +I say that it were better to fight while our brethren of the Low +Countries can fight by our side, than to wait till Spain, having +exterminated them, can turn her whole power against us." + +There was a general chorus of assent, and then the subject changed +to the rates of freight to the northern ports. The grievous need for +the better marking of shallows and dangers, the rights of seamen, +wages, and other matters, were discussed until the assembly broke +up. Ned's sisters joined him in the garden. + +"I hear, Constance," the boy said to the elder, "there has been no +news from our grandfather and uncles since we have been away." + +"No word whatever, Ned. Our mother does not say much, but I know +she is greatly troubled and anxious about it." + +"That she may well be, Constance, seeing that neither quiet conduct +nor feebleness nor aught else avail to protect any from the rage +of the Spaniards. You who stay at home here only hear general tales +of the cruelties done across the sea, but if you heard the tales +that we do at their ports they would drive you almost to madness. +Not that we hear much, for we have to keep on board our ships, and +may not land or mingle with the people; but we learn enough from +the merchants who come on board to see about the landing of their +goods to make our blood boil. They do right to prevent our landing; +for so fired is the sailors' blood by these tales of massacre, that +were they to go ashore they would, I am sure, be speedily embroiled +with the Spaniards. + +"You see how angered these friends of our father are who are +Englishmen, and have no Dutch blood in their veins, and who feel +only because they are touched by these cruelties, and because +the people of the Low Country are Protestants; but with us it is +different, our mother is one of these persecuted people, and we +belong to them as much as to England. We have friends and relations +there who are in sore peril, and who may for aught we know have +already fallen victims to the cruelty of the Spaniards. Had I +my will I would join the beggars of the sea, or I would ship with +Drake or Cavendish and fight the Spaniards in the Indian seas. They +say that there Englishmen are proving themselves better men than +these haughty dons." + +"It is very sad," Constance said; "but what can be done?" + +"Something must be done soon," Ned replied gloomily. "Things cannot +go on as they are. So terrible is the state of things, so heavy the +taxation, that in many towns all trade is suspended. In Brussels, +I hear, Alva's own capital, the brewers have refused to brew, the +bakers to bake, the tapsters to draw liquors. The city swarms with +multitudes of men thrown out of employment. The Spanish soldiers +themselves have long been without pay, for Alva thinks of nothing +but bloodshed. Consequently they are insolent to their officers, care +little for order, and insult and rob the citizens in the streets. +Assuredly something must come of this ere long; and the people's +despair will become a mad fury. If they rise, Constance, and my +father does not say nay, I will assuredly join them and do my best. + +"I do not believe that the queen will forbid her subjects to give +their aid to the people of the Netherlands; for she allowed many to +fight in France for Conde and the Protestants against the Guises, +and she will surely do the same now, since the sufferings of our +brothers in the Netherlands have touched the nation far more keenly +than did those of the Huguenots in France. I am sixteen now, and +my father says that in another year he will rate me as his second +mate, and methinks that there are not many men on board who can pull +more strongly a rope, or work more stoutly at the capstan when we +heave our anchor. Besides, as we all talk Dutch as well as English, +I should be of more use than men who know nought of the language +of the country." + +Constance shook her head. "I do not think, Ned, that our father +would give you leave, at any rate not until you have grown up into +a man. He looks to having you with him, and to your succeeding +him some day in the command of the Good Venture, while he remains +quietly at home with our mother." + +Ned agreed with a sigh. "I fear that you are right, Constance, and +that I shall have to stick to my trade of sailoring; but if the +people of the Netherlands rise against their tyrants, it would be +hard to be sailing backwards and forwards doing a peaceful trade +between London and Holland whilst our friends and relatives are +battling for their lives." + +A fortnight later, the Good Venture filled up her hold with a cargo +for Brill, a port where the united Rhine, Waal, and Maas flow into +the sea. On the day before she sailed a proclamation was issued +by the queen forbidding any of her subjects to supply De la Marck +and his sailors with meat, bread, or beer. The passage down the +river was slow, for the winds were contrary, and it was ten days +afterwards, the 31st of March, when they entered the broad mouth +of the river and dropped anchor off the town of Brill. It was late +in the evening when they arrived. In the morning an officer came +off to demand the usual papers and documents, and it was not until +nearly two o'clock that a boat came out with the necessary permission +for the ship to warp up to the wharves and discharge her cargo. + +Just as Captain Martin was giving the order for the capstan bars +to be manned, a fleet of some twenty-four ships suddenly appeared +round the seaward point of the land. + +"Wait a moment, lads," the captain said, "half an hour will make no +great difference in our landing. We may as well wait and see what +is the meaning of this fleet. They do not look to me to be Spaniards, +nor seem to be a mere trading fleet. I should not wonder if they +are the beggars of the sea, who have been forced to leave Dover, +starved out from the effect of the queen's proclamation, and have +now come here to pick up any Spaniard they may meet sailing out." + +The fleet dropped anchor at about half a mile from the town. Just +as they did so, a ferryman named Koppelstok, who was carrying +passengers across from the town of Maaslandluis, a town on the +opposite bank a mile and a half away, was passing close by the Good +Venture. + +"What think you of yon ships?" the ferryman shouted to Captain +Martin. + +"I believe they must be the beggars of the sea," the captain replied. +"An order had been issued before I left London that they were not +to be supplied with provisions, and they would therefore have had +to put out from Dover. This may well enough be them." + +An exclamation of alarm broke from the passengers, for the sea +beggars were almost as much feared by their own countrymen as by the +Spaniards, the latter having spared no pains in spreading tales to +their disadvantage. As soon as the ferryman had landed his passengers +he rowed boldly out towards the fleet, having nothing of which he +could be plundered, and being secretly well disposed towards the +beggars. The first ship he hailed was that commanded by William +de Blois, Lord of Treslong, who was well known at Brill, where his +father had at one time been governor. + +His brother had been executed by the Duke of Alva four years before, +and he had himself fought by the side of Count Louis of Nassau, +brother to the Prince of Orange, in the campaign that had terminated +so disastrously, and though covered with wounds had been one of +the few who had escaped from the terrible carnage that followed the +defeat at Jemmingen. After that disaster he had taken to the sea, +and was one of the most famous of the captains of De la Marck, who +had received a commission of admiral from the Prince of Orange. + +"We are starving, Koppelstok; can you inform us how we can get some +food? We have picked up two Spanish traders on our way here from +Dover, but our larders were emptied before we sailed, and we found +but scant supply on board our prizes." + +"There is plenty in the town of Brill," the ferryman said; "but none +that I know of elsewhere. That English brig lying there at anchor +may have a few loaves on board." + +"That will not be much," William de Blois replied, "among five +hundred men, still it will be better than nothing. Will you row +and ask them if they will sell to us?" + +"You had best send a strongly armed crew," Koppelstok replied. +"You know the English are well disposed towards us, and the captain +would doubtless give you all the provisions he had to spare; but to +do so would be to ruin him with the Spaniards, who might confiscate +his ship. It were best that you should make a show of force, so +that he could plead that he did but yield to necessity." + +Accordingly a boat with ten men rowed to the brig, Koppelstok +accompanying it. The latter climbed on to the deck. + +"We mean you no harm, captain," he said; "but the men on board these +ships are well nigh starving. The Sieur de Treslong has given me +a purse to pay for all that you can sell us, but thinking that you +might be blamed for having dealings with him by the authorities of +the town, he sent these armed men with me in order that if questioned +you could reply that they came forcibly on board." + +"I will willingly let you have all the provisions I have on board," +Captain Martin said; "though these will go but a little way among +so many, seeing that I only carry stores sufficient for consumption +on board during my voyages." + +A cask of salt beef was hoisted up on deck, with a sack of biscuits, +four cheeses, and a side of bacon. Captain Martin refused any +payment. + +"No," he said, "my wife comes from these parts, and my heart is with +the patriots. Will you tell Sieur de Treslong that Captain Martin +of the Good Venture is happy to do the best in his power for him +and his brave followers. That, Ned," he observed, turning to his +son as the boat rowed away, "is a stroke of good policy. The value +of the goods is small, but just at this moment they are worth much +to those to whom I have given them. In the first place, you see, +we have given aid to the good cause, in the second we have earned +the gratitude of the beggars of the sea, and I shall be much more +comfortable if I run among them in the future than I should have +done in the past. The freedom to come and go without molestation +by the sea beggars is cheaply purchased at the price of provisions +which do not cost many crowns." + +On regaining the Sieur de Treslong's ship some of the provisions +were at once served out among the men, and the rest sent off among +other ships, and William de Blois took Koppelstok with him on board +the admiral's vessel. + +"Well, De Blois, what do you counsel in this extremity?" De la +Marck asked. + +"I advise," the Lord of Treslong replied, "that we at once send a +message to the town demanding its surrender." + +"Are you joking or mad, Treslong?" the admiral asked in surprise. +"Why, we can scarce muster four hundred men, and the town is well +walled and fortified." + +"There are no Spanish troops here, admiral, and if we put a bold +front on the matter we may frighten the burghers into submission. +This man says he would be willing to carry the summons. He says the +news as to who we are has already reached them by some passengers +he landed before he came out, and he doubts not they are in a rare +panic." + +"Well, we can try," the admiral said, laughing; "it is clear we +must eat, even if we have to fight for it; and hungry as we all +are, we do not want to wait." + +Treslong gave his ring to Koppelstok to show as his authority, and +the fisherman at once rowed ashore. Stating that the beggars of +the sea were determined to take the town, he made his way through +the crowd of inhabitants who had assembled at the landing place, +and then pushed on to the town hall, where the magistrates were +assembled. He informed them that he had been sent by the Admiral of +the Fleet and the Lord of Treslong, who was well known to them, to +demand that two commissioners should be sent out to them on behalf +of the city to confer with him. The only object of those who sent +him was to free the land from the crushing taxes, and to overthrow +the tyranny of Alva and the Spaniards. He was asked by the magistrates +what force De la Marck had at his disposal, and replied carelessly +that he could not say exactly, but that there might be five thousand +in all. + +This statement completed the dismay that had been caused at the +arrival of the fleet. The magistrates agreed that it would be madness +to resist, and determined to fly at once. With much difficulty two +of them were persuaded to go out to the ship as deputies, and as +soon as they set off most of the leading burghers prepared instantly +for flight. The deputies on arriving on board were assured that no +injury was intended to the citizens or private property, but only +the overthrow of Alva's government, and two hours were given them +to decide upon the surrender of the town. + +During this two hours almost all the inhabitants left the town, +taking with them their most valuable property. At the expiration of +the time the beggars landed. A few of those remaining in the city +made a faint attempt at resistance; but Treslong forced an entrance +by the southern gate, and De la Marck made a bonfire against the +northern gate and then battered it down with the end of an old +mast. Thus the patriots achieved the capture of the first town, and +commenced the long war that was to end only with the establishment +of the Free Republic of the Netherlands. No harm was done to such +of the inhabitants of the town as remained. The conquerors established +themselves in the best of the deserted houses; they then set to work +to plunder the churches. The altars and images were all destroyed; +the rich furniture, the sacred vessels, and the gorgeous vestments +were appropriated to private use. Thirteen unfortunates, among +them some priests who had been unable to effect their escape, were +seized and put to death by De la Marck. + +He had received the strictest orders from the Prince of Orange to +respect the ships of all neutral nations, and to behave courteously +and kindly to all captives he might take. Neither of these injunctions +were obeyed. De la Marck was a wild and sanguinary noble; he had +taken a vow upon hearing of the death of his relative, the Prince +of Egmont, who had been executed by Alva, that he would neither +cut his hair nor his beard until that murder should be revenged, +and had sworn to wreak upon Alva and upon Popery the deep vengeance +that the nobles and peoples of the Netherlands owed them. This vow +he kept to the letter, and his ferocious conduct to all priests +and Spaniards who fell into his hands deeply sullied the cause for +which he fought. + +Upon the day after the capture of the city, the Good Venture went +into the port. The inhabitants, as soon as they learned that the +beggars of the sea respected the life and property of the citizens, +returned in large numbers, and trade was soon re-established. +Having taken the place, and secured the plunder of the churches +and monasteries, De la Marck would have sailed away upon other +excursions had not the Sieur de Treslong pointed out to him the +importance of Brill to the cause, and persuaded him to hold the +place until he heard from the Prince of Orange. + + + +CHAPTER II + +TERRIBLE NEWS + + +A few days after Brill had been so boldly captured, Count Bossu +advanced from Utrecht against it. The sea beggars, confident as +they were as to their power of meeting the Spaniards on the seas, +knew that on dry land they were no match for the well trained +pikemen; they therefore kept within the walls. A carpenter, however, +belonging to the town, who had long been a secret partisan of the +Prince of Orange, seized an axe, dashed into the water, and swam +to the sluice and burst open the gates with a few sturdy blows. +The sea poured in and speedily covered the land on the north side +of the city. + +The Spaniards advanced along the dyke to the southern gate, but +the sea beggars had hastily moved most of the cannon on the wall +to that point, and received the Spaniards with so hot a fire that +they hesitated. In the meantime the Lord of Treslong and another +officer had filled two boats with men and rowed out to the ships +that had brought the enemy, cut some adrift, and set others on fire. +The Spaniards at the southern gate lost heart; they were exposed +to a hot fire, which they were unable to return. On one side they +saw the water rapidly rising above the level of the dyke on which +they stood, on the other they perceived their only means of retreat +threatened. They turned, and in desperate haste retreated along +the causeway now under water. In their haste many slipped off the +road and were drowned, others fell and were smothered in the water, +and the rest succeeded in reaching such of the vessels as were +still untouched, and with all speed returned to Utrecht. + +From the highest point of the masts to which they could climb, +Captain Martin, Ned, and the crew watched the struggle. Ned had +begged his father to let him go along the walls to the south gate +to see the conflict, but Captain Martin refused. + +"We know not what the upshot of the business may be," he said. "If +the Spaniards, which is likely enough, take the place, they will +slaughter all they meet, and will not trouble themselves with +questioning anyone whether he is a combatant or a spectator. Besides, +when they have once taken the town, they will question all here, +and it would be well that I should be able to say that not only +did we hold ourselves neutral in the affair, but that none of my +equipage had set foot on shore today. Lastly, it is my purpose and +hope if the Spaniards capture the place, to take advantage of the +fact that all will be absorbed in the work of plunder, and to slip +my hawsers and make off. Wind and tide are both favourable, and +doubtless the crews of their ships will, for the most part, land +to take part in the sack as soon as the town is taken." + +However, as it turned out, there was no need of these precautions; +the beggars were victorious and the Spaniards in full flight, +and great was the rejoicing in Brill at this check which they had +inflicted upon their oppressors. Bossu, retiring from Brill, took +his way towards Rotterdam. He found its gates closed; the authorities +refused to submit to his demands or to admit a garrison. They +declared they were perfectly loyal, and needed no body of Spanish +troops to keep them in order. Bossu requested permission for his +troops to pass through the city without halting. This was granted +by the magistrates on condition that only a corporal's company should +be admitted at a time. Bossu signed an agreement to this effect. +But throughout the whole trouble the Spaniards never once respected +the conditions they had made and sworn to with the inhabitants, +and no sooner were the gates opened than the whole force rushed in, +and the usual work of slaughter, atrocity, and plunder commenced. +Within a few minutes four hundred citizens were murdered, and +countless outrages and cruelties perpetrated upon the inhabitants. + +Captain Martin completed the discharging of his cargo two days after +Bossu made his ineffectual attempt upon the town. A messenger had +arrived that morning from Flushing, with news that as soon as the +capture of Brill had become known in that seaport, the Seigneur de +Herpt had excited the burghers to drive the small Spanish garrison +from the town. + +Scarcely had they done so when a large reinforcement of the enemy +arrived before the walls, having been despatched there by Alva, to +complete the fortress that had been commenced to secure the possession +of this important port at the mouth of the Western Scheldt. Herpt +persuaded the burghers that it was too late to draw back now. They +had done enough to draw the vengeance of the Spaniards upon them; +their only hope now was to resist to the last. A half witted man +in the crowd offered, if any one would give him a pot of beer, to +ascend the ramparts and fire two pieces of artillery at the Spanish +ships. + +The offer was accepted, and the man ran up to the ramparts and +discharged the guns. A sudden panic seized the Spaniards, and the +whole fleet sailed away at once in the direction of Middelburg. + +The governor of the island next day arrived at Flushing and was +at once admitted. He called the citizens together to the market +place and there addressed them, beseeching them to return to their +allegiance, assuring them that if they did so the king, who was the +best natured prince in all Christendom, would forget and forgive +their offenses. The effect of the governor's oratory was sadly marred +by the interruptions of De Herpt and his adherents, who reminded +the people of the fate that had befallen other towns that had +revolted, and scoffed at such good nature as the king displayed in +the scores of executions daily taking place throughout the country. + +The governor, finding his efforts unavailing, had left the town, +and as soon as he did so the messenger was sent off to Brill, saying +that the inhabitants of Flushing were willing to provide arms and +ammunition if they would send them men experienced in partisan +warfare. Two hundred of the beggars, under the command of Treslong, +accordingly started the next day for Flushing. The Good Venture +threw off her hawsers from the wharf at about the same time that +these were starting, and for some time kept company with them. + +"Did one ever see such a wild crew?" Captain Martin said, shaking +his head. "Never, I believe, did such a party set out upon a warlike +adventure." + +The appearance of Treslong's followers was indeed extraordinary. +Every man was attired in the gorgeous vestments of the plundered +churches -- in gold and embroidered cassocks, glittering robes, or +the sombre cowls and garments of Capuchin friars. As they sailed +along their wild sea songs rose in the air, mingled with shouts +for vengeance on the Spaniards and the Papacy. + +"One would not think that this ribald crew could fight," Captain +Martin went on; "but there is no doubt they will do so. They must +not be blamed altogether; they are half maddened by the miseries +and cruelties endured by their friends and relations at the hands +of the Spaniards. I knew that when at last the people rose the +combat would be a terrible one, and that they would answer cruelty +by cruelty, blood by blood. The Prince of Orange, as all men know, +is one of the most clement and gentle of rulers. All his ordinances +enjoin gentle treatment of prisoners, and he has promised every +one over and over again complete toleration in the exercise of +religion; but though he may forgive and forget, the people will +not. + +"It is the Catholic church that has been their oppressor. In its +name tens of thousands have been murdered, and I fear that the +slaughter of those priests at Brill is but the first of a series +of bloody reprisals that will take place wherever the people get +the upper hand." + +A fresh instance of this was shown a few hours after the Good +Venture put into Flushing. A ship arrived in port, bringing with +it Pacheco, the Duke of Alva's chief engineer, an architect of +the highest reputation. He had been despatched by the duke to take +charge of the new works that the soldiers had been sent to execute, +and ignorant of what had taken place he landed at the port. He was +at once seized by the mob. An officer, willing to save his life, +took him from their hands and conducted him to the prison; but the +populace were clamorous for his blood, and Treslong was willing +enough to satisfy them and to avenge upon Alva's favourite officer +the murder of his brother by Alva's orders. The unfortunate officer +was therefore condemned to be hung, and the sentence was carried +into effect the same day. + +A few days later an officer named Zeraerts arrived at Flushing with +a commission from the Prince of Orange as Governor of the Island +of Walcheren. He was attended by a small body of French infantry, +and the force under his command speedily increased; for as soon +as it was known in England that Brill and Flushing had thrown off +the authority of the Spaniards, volunteers from England began to +arrive in considerable numbers to aid their fellow Protestants in +the struggle before them. + +The Good Venture had stayed only a few hours in Flushing. In +the present condition of affairs there was no chance of obtaining +a cargo there, and Captain Martin therefore thought it better not +to waste time, but to proceed at once to England in order to learn +the intention of the merchants for whom he generally worked as to +what could be done under the changed state of circumstances that +had arisen. + +Every day brought news of the extension of the rising. The Spanish +troops lay for the most part in Flanders, and effectually deterred +the citizens of the Flemish towns from revolting; but throughout +Holland, Zeeland, and Friesland the flame of revolt spread rapidly. +The news that Brill and Flushing had thrown off the Spanish yoke +fired every heart. It was the signal for which all had been so long +waiting. They knew how desperately Spain would strive to regain her +grip upon the Netherlands, how terrible would be her vengeance if +she conquered; but all felt that it was better to die sword in hand +than to be murdered piecemeal. And accordingly town after town rose, +expelled the authorities appointed by Spain and the small Spanish +garrisons, and in three months after the rising of Brill the greater +part of the maritime provinces were free. Some towns, however, still +remained faithful to Spain. Prominent among these was Amsterdam, a +great trading city, which feared the ruin that opposition to Alva +might bring upon it, more than the shame of standing aloof when +their fellow countrymen were fighting for freedom and the right to +worship God in their own way. + +On the 23rd of May, Louis of Nassau, with a body of troops from +France, captured the important town of Mons by surprise, but was +at once beleaguered there by a Spanish army. In June the States of +Holland assembled at Dort and formally renounced the authority of +the Duke of Alva, and declared the Prince of Orange, the royally +appointed stadtholder, the only legal representative of the Spanish +crown in their country; and in reply to an eloquent address of +Sainte Aldegonde, the prince's representative, voted a considerable +sum of money for the payment of the army the prince was raising +in Germany. On the 19th of June a serious misfortune befell the +patriot cause. A reinforcement of Huguenot troops, on the way to +succour the garrison of Mons, were met and cut to pieces by the +Spaniards, and Count Louis, who had been led by the French King to +expect ample succour and assistance from him, was left to his fate. + +On the 7th of July the Prince of Orange crossed the Rhine with +14,000 foot and 7,000 horse. He advanced but a short distance when +the troops mutinied in consequence of their pay being in arrears, +and he was detained four weeks until the cities of Holland guaranteed +their payment for three months. A few cities opened their gates +to him; but they were for the most part unimportant places, and +Mechlin was the only large town that admitted his troops. Still +he pressed on toward Mons, expecting daily to be joined by 12,000 +French infantry and 3,000 cavalry under the command of Admiral +Coligny. + +The prince, who seldom permitted himself to be sanguine, believed +that the goal of his hopes was reached, and that he should now be +able to drive the Spaniards from the Netherlands. But as he was +marching forward he received tidings that showed him that all his +plans were shattered, and that the prospects were darker than they +had ever before been. While the King of France had throughout been +encouraging the revolted Netherlanders, and had authorized his +minister to march with an army to their assistance, he was preparing +for a deed that would be the blackest in history, were it not +that its horrors are less appalling than those inflicted upon the +captured cities of the Netherlands by Alva. On St. Bartholomew's Eve +there was a general massacre of the Protestants in Paris, followed +by similar massacres throughout France, the number of victims being +variously estimated at from twenty-five to a hundred thousand. + +Protestant Europe was filled with horror at this terrible crime. +Philip of Spain was filled with equal delight. Not only was the +danger that seemed to threaten him in the Netherlands at once and +forever, as he believed, at an end, but he saw in this destruction +of the Protestants of France a great step in the direction he had +so much at heart -- the entire extirpation of heretics throughout +Europe. He wrote letters of the warmest congratulation to the King +of France, with whom he had formerly been at enmity; while the +Pope, accompanied by his cardinals, went to the church of St. Mark +to render thanks to God for the grace thus singularly vouchsafed +to the Holy See and to all Christendom. To the Prince of Orange +the news came as a thunderclap. His troops wholly lost heart, and +refused to keep the field. The prince himself almost lost his life +at the hands of the mutineers, and at last, crossing the Rhine, he +disbanded his army and went almost alone to Holland to share the +fate of the provinces that adhered to him. He went there expecting +and prepared to die. + +"There I will make my sepulcher," was his expression in the letter +in which he announced his intention to his brother. Count Louis +of Nassau had now nothing left before him but to surrender. His +soldiers, almost entirely French, refused any longer to resist, +now that the king had changed his intentions, and the city was +surrendered, the garrison being allowed to retire with their weapons. + +The terms of the capitulation were so far respected; but instead +of the terms respecting the townspeople being adhered to, a council +of blood was set up, and for many months from ten to twenty of the +inhabitants were hanged, burned, or beheaded every day. The news +of the massacre of St. Bartholomew, of the treachery of the King +of France towards the inhabitants of the Netherlands, and of the +horrible cruelties perpetrated upon the inhabitants of Mechlin and +other towns that had opened their gates to the Prince of Orange, +excited the most intense indignation among the people of England. + +The queen put on mourning, but was no more inclined than before +to render any really efficient aid to the Netherlands. She allowed +volunteers to pass over, furnished some meagre sums of money, but +held aloof from any open participation in the war; for if before, +when France was supposed to be favourable to the Netherlands and +hostile to Spain, she felt unequal to a war with the latter power, +still less could she hope to cope with Spain when the deed of St. +Bartholomew had reunited the two Catholic monarchs. + +Captain Martin, married to a native of the Netherlands, and mixing +constantly with the people in his trade, was naturally ardent, even +beyond the majority of his countrymen, in their cause, and over +and over again declared that were he sailing by when a sea fight +was going on between the Dutch and the Spaniards, he would pull +down his English flag, hoist that of Holland, and join in the fray; +and Ned, as was to be expected, shared to the utmost his father's +feelings on the subject. Early in September the Good Venture started +with a cargo for Amsterdam, a city that almost alone in Holland +adhered to the Spanish cause. + +Sophie Martin was pleased when she heard that this was the ship's +destination; for she was very anxious as to the safety of her +father and brothers, from whom she had not heard for a long time. +Postage was dear and mails irregular. Few letters were written or +received by people in England, still more seldom letters sent across +the sea. There would, therefore, under the ordinary circumstances, +have been no cause whatever for uneasiness had years elapsed without +news coming from Amsterdam; and, indeed, during her whole married +life Sophie Martin had only received one or two letters by post from +her former home, although many communications had been brought by +friends of her husband's trading there. But as many weeks seldom +passed without the Good Venture herself going into Amsterdam, for +that town was one of the great trading centres of Holland, there +was small occasion for letters to pass. It happened, however, that +from one cause or another, eighteen months had passed since Captain +Martin's business had taken him to that port, and no letter had +come either by post or hand during that time. + +None who had friends in the Netherlands could feel assured that +these must, either from their station or qualities, be safe from +the storm that was sweeping over the country. The poor equally +with the rich, the artisan equally with the noble, was liable to +become a victim of Alva's Council of Blood. The net was drawn so +as to catch all classes and conditions; and although it was upon +the Protestants that his fury chiefly fell, the Catholics suffered +too, for pretexts were always at hand upon which these could also +be condemned. + +The Netherlands swarmed with spies and informers, and a single +unguarded expression of opinion was sufficient to send a man to +the block. And, indeed, in a vast number of cases, private animosity +was the cause of the denunciation; for any accusation could be +safely made where there was no trial, and the victims were often +in complete ignorance as to the nature of the supposed crime for +which they were seized and dragged away to execution. + +When the vessel sailed Sophie Martin gave her husband a letter +to her father and brothers, begging them to follow the example of +thousands of their countrymen, and to leave the land where life and +property were no longer safe, and to come over to London. They would +have no difficulty in procuring work there, and could establish +themselves in business and do as well as they had been doing at +home. + +They had, she knew, money laid by in London; for after the troubles +began her father had sold off the houses and other property he had +purchased with his savings, and had transmitted the result to England +by her husband, who had intrusted it for investment to a leading +citizen with whom he did business. As this represented not only +her father's accumulations but those of her brothers who worked +as partners with him, it amounted to a sum that in those days was +regarded as considerable. + +"I feel anxious, Ned," Captain Martin said as he sailed up the Zuider +Zee towards the city, "as to what has befallen your grandfather and +uncles. I have always made the best of the matter to your mother, +but I cannot conceal from myself that harm may have befallen them. +It is strange that no message has come to us through any of our +friends trading with the town, for your uncles know many of my +comrades and can see their names in the shipping lists when they +arrive. They would have known how anxious your mother would be +at the news of the devil's work that is going on here, and, being +always tender and thoughtful for her, would surely have sent her +news of them from time to time as they had a chance. I sorely fear +that something must have happened. Your uncles are prudent men, +going about their work and interfering with none; but they are men, +too, who speak their mind, and would not, like many, make a false +show of affection when they feel none. + +"Well, well; we shall soon know. As soon as the ship is moored and +my papers are declared in order, you and I will go over to Vordwyk +and see how they are faring. I think not that they will follow +your mother's advice and sail over with us; for it was but the last +time I saw them that they spoke bitterly against the emigrants, +and said that every man who could bear arms should, however great +his danger, wait and bide the time until there was a chance to strike +for his religion and country. They are sturdy men these Dutchmen, +and not readily turned from an opinion they have taken up; and +although I shall do my best to back up your mother's letter by my +arguments, I have but small hope that I shall prevail with them." + +In the evening they were moored alongside the quays of Amsterdam, +at that time one of the busiest cities in Europe. Its trade was +great, the wealth of its citizens immense. It contained a large number +of monasteries, its authorities were all Catholics and devoted to +the cause of Spain, and although there were a great many well wishers +to the cause of freedom within its walls, these were powerless to +take action, and the movement which, after the capture of Brill +and Flushing, had caused almost all the towns of Holland to declare +for the Prince of Orange, found no echo in Amsterdam. The vessel +anchored outside the port, and the next morning after their papers +were examined and found in order she ranged up alongside the crowded +tiers of shipping. Captain Martin went on shore with Ned, visited +the merchants to whom his cargo was consigned, and told them that +he should begin to unload the next day. + +He then started with Ned to walk to Vordwyk, which lay two miles +away. On reaching the village they stopped suddenly. The roof of +the house they had so often visited was gone, its walls blackened +by fire. After the first exclamation of surprise and regret they +walked forward until opposite the ruin, and stood gazing at it. +Then Captain Martin stepped up to a villager, who was standing at +the door of his shop, and asked him when did this happen, what had +become of the old man Plomaert? + +"You are his son-in-law, are you not?" the man asked in reply. "I +have seen you here at various times." Captain Martin nodded. The +man looked round cautiously to see that none were within sound of +his voice. + +"You have not heard, then?" he said. "It was a terrible business, +though we are growing used to it now. One day, it is some eight +months since, a party of soldiers came from Amsterdam and hauled +away my neighbour Plomaert and his three sons. They were denounced +as having attended the field preaching a year ago, and you know +what that means." + +"And the villains murdered them?" Captain Martin asked in horror +stricken tones. + +The man nodded. "They were hung together next day, together with +Gertrude, the wife of the eldest brother. Johan was, as you know, +unmarried. Elizabeth, the wife of Louis, lay ill at the time, or +doubtless she would have fared the same as the rest. She has gone +with her two daughters to Haarlem, where her family live. All their +property was, of course, seized and confiscated, and the house burnt +down; for, as you know, they all lived together. Now, my friend, +I will leave you. I dare not ask you in for I know not who may be +watching us, and to entertain even the brother-in-law of men who +have been sent to the gallows might well cost a man his life in +our days." + +Then Captain Martin's grief and passion found vent in words, and +he roundly cursed the Spaniards and their works, regardless of +who might hear him; then he entered the garden, visited the summer +house where he had so often talked with the old man and his sons, +and then sat down and gave full vent to his grief. Ned felt almost +stunned by the news; being so often away at sea he had never given +the fact that so long a time had elapsed since his mother had +received a letter from her family much thought. It had, indeed, +been mentioned before him; but, knowing the disturbed state of the +country, it had seemed to him natural enough that his uncles should +have had much to think of and trouble them, and might well have +no time for writing letters. His father's words the evening before +had for the first time excited a feeling of real uneasiness about +them, and the shock caused by the sight of the ruined house, and +the news that his grandfather, his three uncles, and one of his +aunts, had been murdered by the Spaniards, completely overwhelmed +him. + +"Let us be going, Ned," his father said at last; "there is nothing +for us to do here, let us get back to our ship. I am a peaceable +man, Ned, but I feel now as if I could join the beggars of the +sea, and go with them in slaying every Spaniard who fell into their +hands. This will be terrible news for your mother, lad." + +"It will indeed," Ned replied. "Oh, father, I wish you would let me +stay here and join the prince's bands and fight for their freedom. +There were English volunteers coming out to Brill and Flushing when +we sailed from the Thames, and if they come to fight for Holland who +have no tie in blood, why should not I who am Dutch by my mother's +side and whose relations have been murdered?" + +"We will talk of it later on, Ned," his father said. "You are young +yet for such rough work as this, and this is no common war. There +is no quarter given here, it is a fight to the death. The Spaniards +slaughter the Protestants like wild beasts, and like wild beasts +they will defend themselves. But if this war goes on till you have +gained your full strength and sinew I will not say you nay. As you +say, our people at home are ready to embark in a war for the cause +of liberty and religion, did the queen but give the word; and when +others, fired solely by horror at the Spaniards' cruelty, are ready +to come over here and throw in their lot with them, it seems to +me that it will be but right that you, who are half Dutch and have +had relatives murdered by these fiends, should come over and side +with the oppressed. If there is fighting at sea, it may be that I +myself will take part with them, and place the Good Venture at the +service of the Prince of Orange. But of that we will talk later +on, as also about yourself. When you are eighteen you will still +be full young for such work." + +As they talked they were walking fast towards Amsterdam. "We will +go straight on board, Ned; and I will not put my foot ashore again +before we sail. I do not think that I could trust myself to meet +a Spaniard now, but should draw my knife and rush upon him. I have +known that these things happened, we have heard of these daily +butcherings, but it has not come home to me as now, when our own +friends are the victims." + +Entering the gate of the town they made their way straight down +to the port, and were soon on board the Good Venture where Captain +Martin retired to his cabin. Ned felt too restless and excited to +go down at present; but he told the crew what had happened, and +the exclamations of anger among the honest sailors were loud and +deep. Most of them had sailed with Captain Martin ever since he had +commanded the Good Venture, and had seen the Plomaerts when they +had come on board whenever the vessel put in at Amsterdam. The fact +that there was nothing to do, and no steps to take to revenge the +murders, angered them all the more. + +"I would we had twenty ships like our own, Master Ned," one of +them said. "That would give us four hundred men, and with those we +could go ashore and hang the magistrates and the councillors and +all who had a hand in this foul business, and set their public +buildings in a flame, and then fight our way back again to the +port." + +"I am afraid four hundred men would not be able to do it here as +they did at Brill. There was no Spanish garrison there, and here +they have a regiment; and though the Spaniards seem to have the +hearts of devils rather than men, they can fight." + +"Well, we would take our chance," the sailor replied. "If there was +four hundred of us, and the captain gave the word, we would show +them what English sailors could do, mates -- wouldn't we?" + +"Aye, that would we;" the others growled in a chorus. + +The next morning the work of unloading began. The sailors worked +hard; for, as one of them said, "This place seems to smell of blood +-- let's be out of it, mates, as soon as we can." At four in the +afternoon a lad of about Ned's age came on board. He was the son +of the merchant to whom the larger part of the cargo of the Good +Venture was consigned. + +"I have a letter that my father charged me to give into your hands, +Captain Martin. He said that the matter was urgent, and begged me +to give it you in your cabin. He also told me to ask when you think +your hold will be empty, as he has goods for you for the return +voyage." + +"We shall be well nigh empty by tomorrow night," Captain Martin +said, as he led the way to his cabin in the poop. "The men have +been working faster than usual, for it generally takes us three +days to unload." + +"I do not think my father cared about that," the lad said when he +entered the cabin; "it was but an excuse for my coming down here, +and he gave me the message before all the other clerks. But methinks +that the letter is the real object of my coming." + +Captain Martin opened the letter. Thanks to his preparation for +taking his place in his father's business, he had learnt to read +and write; accomplishments by no means general among sea captains +of the time. + +"It is important, indeed," he said, as he glanced through the +letter. It ran as follows: "Captain Martin, -- A friend of mine, +who is one of the council here, has just told me that at the meeting +this afternoon a denunciation was laid against you for having +publicly, in the street of Vordwyk, cursed and abused his Majesty +the King of Spain, the Duke of Alva, the Spaniards, and the Catholic +religion. Some were of opinion that you should at once be arrested +on board your ship, but others thought that it were better to wait +and seize you the first time you came on shore, as it might cause +trouble were you taken from under the protection of the British +flag. On shore, they urged, no question could arise, especially +as many English have now, although the two nations are at peace, +openly taken service under the Prince of Orange. + +"I have sent to tell you this, though at no small risk to myself +were it discovered that I had done so; but as we have had dealings +for many years together, I think it right to warn you. I may say +that the counsel of those who were for waiting prevailed; but if, +after a day or two, they find that you do not come ashore, I fear +they will not hesitate to arrest you on your own vessel. Please +to destroy this letter at once after you have read it, and act as +seems best to you under the circumstances. I send this to you by +my son's hand, for there are spies everywhere, and in these days +one can trust no one." + +"I am much obliged to you, young sir, for bringing me this letter. +Will you thank your father from me, and say that I feel deeply +indebted to him, and will think over how I can best escape from +this strait. Give him the message from me before others, that I +shall be empty and ready to receive goods by noon on the day after +tomorrow." + +When the lad had left, Captain Martin called in Ned and William +Peters, his first mate, and laid the case before them. + +"It is an awkward business, Captain Martin," Peters said. "You +sha'n't be arrested on board the Good Venture, as long as there is +a man on board can wield a cutlass; but I don't know whether that +would help you in the long run. + +"Not at all, Peters. We might beat off the first party that came +to take me, but it would not be long before they brought up a force +against which we should stand no chance whatever. No, it is not by +fighting that there is any chance of escape. It is evident by this +that I am safe for tomorrow; they will wait at least a day to see +if I go ashore, which indeed they will make certain I shall do +sooner or later. As far as my own safety is concerned, and that +of Ned here, who, as he was with me, is doubtless included in the +denunciation, it is easy enough. We have only to get into the boat +after dark, to muffle the oars, and to row for Haarlem, which lies +but ten miles away, and has declared for the Prince of Orange. But +I do not like to leave the ship, for if they found us gone they +might seize and declare it confiscated. And although, when we got +back to England, we might lay a complaint before the queen, there +would be no chance of our getting the ship or her value from the +Spaniards. There are so many causes of complaint between the two +nations, that the seizure of a brig would make no difference one +way or another. The question is, could we get her out?" + +"It would be no easy matter," Peters said, shaking his head. "That +French ship that came in this afternoon has taken up a berth outside +us, and there would be no getting out until she moved out of the +way. If she were not there it might be tried, though it would be +difficult to do so without attracting attention. As for the Spanish +war vessels, of which there are four in the port, I should not fear +them if we once got our sails up, for the Venture can sail faster +than these lubberly Spaniards; but they would send rowboats after +us, and unless the wind was strong these would speedily overhaul +us." + +"Well, I must think it over," Captain Martin said. "I should be +sorry indeed to lose my ship, which would be well nigh ruin to me, +but if there is no other way we must make for Haarlem by boat." + +The next day the work of unloading continued. In the afternoon the +captain of the French ship lying outside them came on board. He had +been in the habit of trading with Holland, and addressed Captain +Martin in Dutch. + +"Are you likely to be lying here long?" he asked. "I want to get +my vessel alongside the wharf as soon as I can, for it is slow work +unloading into these lighters. There are one or two ships going +out in the morning, but I would rather have got in somewhere about +this point if I could, for the warehouses of Mynheer Strous, to +whom my goods are consigned, lie just opposite." + +"Will you come down into my cabin and have a glass of wine with +me," Captain Martin said, "and then we can talk it over?" + +Captain Martin discovered, without much trouble, that the French +captain was a Huguenot, and that his sympathies were all with the +people of the Netherlands. + +"Now," he said, "I can speak freely to you. I was ashore the day +before yesterday, and learned that my wife's father, her three +brothers, and one of their wives have been murdered by the Spaniards. +Well, you can understand that in my grief and rage I cursed the +Spaniards and their doings. I have learnt that some spy has denounced +me, and that they are only waiting for me to set foot on shore to +arrest me, and you know what will come after that; for at present, +owing to the volunteers that have come over to Brill and Flushing, +the Spaniards are furious against the English. They would rather +take me on shore than on board, but if they find that I do not +land they will certainly come on board for me. They believe that I +shall not be unloaded until noon tomorrow, and doubtlessly expect +that as soon as the cargo is out I shall land to arrange for a +freight to England. Therefore, until tomorrow afternoon I am safe, +but no longer. Now, I am thinking of trying to get out quietly +tonight; but to do so it is necessary that you should shift your +berth a ship's length one way or the other. Will you do this for +me?" + +"Certainly I will, with pleasure," the captain replied. "I will +give orders at once." + +"No, that will never do," Captain Martin said. "They are all the +more easy about me because they know that as long as your ship is +there I cannot get out, but if they saw you shifting your berth it +would strike them at once that I might be intending to slip away. +You must wait until it gets perfectly dark, and then throw off your +warps and slacken out your cable as silently as possible, and let +her drop down so as to leave me an easy passage. As soon as it is +dark I will grease all my blocks, and when everything is quiet try +to get her out. What wind there is is from the southwest, which +will take us well down the Zuider Zee." + +"I hope you may succeed," the French captain said. "Once under +sail you would be safe from their warships, for you would be two +or three miles away before they could manage to get up their sails. +The danger lies in their rowboats and galleys." + +"Well, well, we must risk it," Captain Martin said. "I shall have +a boat alongside, and if I find the case is desperate we will take +to it and row to the shore, and make our way to Haarlem, where we +should be safe." + +Ned, who had been keeping a sharp lookout all day, observed that +two Spanish officials had taken up their station on the wharf, not +far from the ship. They appeared to have nothing to do, and to be +indifferent to what was going on. He told his father that he thought +that they were watching. Presently the merchant himself came down +to the wharf. He did not come on board, but spoke to Captain Martin +as he stood on the deck of the vessel, so that all around could +hear his words. + +"How are you getting on, Captain Martin?" he asked in Dutch. + +"Fairly well," Captain Martin replied. "I think if we push on we +shall have her empty by noon tomorrow." + +"I have a cargo to go back with you, you know," the merchant said, +"and I shall want to see you at the office, if you will step round +tomorrow after you have cleared." + +"All right, Mynheer, you may expect me about two o'clock. + +"But you won't see me," he added to himself. + +The merchant waved his hand and walked away, and a few minutes +later the two officials also strolled off. + +"That has thrown dust into their eyes," Captain Martin said, "and +has made it safe for Strous. He will pretend to be as surprised as +any one when he hears I have gone. + + + +CHAPTER III + +A FIGHT WITH THE SPANIARDS + + +As soon as it became dark, and the wharves were deserted, Captain +Martin sent two sailors aloft with grease pots, with orders that +every block was to be carefully greased to ensure its running +without noise. A boat which rowed six oars was lowered noiselessly +into the water, and flannel was bound round the oars. The men, +who had been aware of the danger that threatened their captain, +sharpened the pikes and axes, and declared to each other that +whether the captain ordered it or not no Spaniards should set foot +on board as long as one of them stood alive on the decks. The cook +filled a great boiler with water and lighted a fire under it, and +the carpenter heated a caldron of pitch without orders. + +"What are you doing, Thompson?" the captain asked, noticing the +glow of the fire as he came out of his cabin. + +The sailor came aft before he replied, "I am just cooking up a +little hot sauce for the dons, captain. We don't ask them to come, +you know; but if they do, it's only right that we should entertain +them." + +"I hope there will be no fighting, lad," the captain said. + +"Well, your honour, that ain't exactly the wish of me and my mates. +After what we have been hearing of, we feel as we sha'n't be happy +until we have had a brush with them 'ere Spaniards. And as to +fighting, your honour; from what we have heard, Captain Hawkins and +others out in the Indian seas have been ashowing them that though +they may swagger on land they ain't no match for an Englishman on +the sea. Anyhow, your honour, we ain't going to stand by and see +you and Master Ned carried away by these 'ere butchering Spaniards. + +"We have all made up our minds that what happens to you happens to +all of us. We have sailed together in this ship the Good Venture +for the last seventeen or eighteen years, and we means to swim +or sink together. No disrespect to you, captain; but that is the +fixed intention of all of us. It would be a nice thing for us to +sail back to the port of London and say as we stood by and saw our +captain and his son carried off to be hung or burnt or what not +by the Spaniards, and then sailed home to tell the tale. We don't +mean no disrespect, captain, I says again; but in this 'ere business +we take our orders from Mr. Peters, seeing that you being consarned +as it were in the affair ain't to be considered as having, so to +speak, a right judgment upon it." + +"Well, well, we shall see if there is a chance of making a +successful fight," Captain Martin said, unable to resist a smile +at the sailor's way of putting it. + +The night was dark, and the two or three oil lamps that hung suspended +from some of the houses facing the port threw no ray of light which +extended to the shipping. It was difficult to make out against the +sky the outline of the masts of the French vessel lying some twenty +yards away; but presently Ned's attention was called towards her +by a slight splash of her cable. Then he heard the low rumble as +the ropes ran out through the hawse holes, and saw that the masts +were slowly moving. In two or three minutes they had disappeared +from his sight. He went into the cabin. + +"The Frenchman has gone, father; and so noiselessly that I could +hardly hear her. If we can get out as quietly there is little fear +of our being noticed." + +"We cannot be as quiet as that, Ned. She has only to slack away +her cables and drift with the tide that turned half an hour ago, +we have got to tow out and set sail. However, the night is dark, +the wind is off shore, and everything is in our favour. Do you see +if there be anyone about on the decks of the ships above and below +us. + +Ned went first on to the stern, and then to the bow. He could +hear the voices of men talking and singing in the forecastles, but +could hear no movement on the deck of either ship. He went down +and reported to his father. + +"Then, I think, we may as well start at once, Ned. There are +still sounds and noises in the town, and any noise we may make is +therefore less likely to be noticed than if we waited until everything +was perfectly still." + +The sailors were all ready. All were barefooted so as to move as +noiselessly as possible. The four small cannon that the Good Venture +carried had been loaded to the muzzle with bullets and pieces of +iron. A search had been made below and several heavy lumps of stone, +a part of the ballast carried on some former occasion, brought +up and placed at intervals along the bulwarks. The pikes had been +fastened by a loose lashing to the mast, and the axes leaned in +readiness against the cannon. + +"Now, Peters," Captain Martin said, "let the boat be manned. Do you +send a man ashore to cast off the hawser at the bow. Let him take +a line ashore with him so as to ease the hawser off, and not let +the end fall in the water. The moment he has done that let him +come to the stern and get on board there, and do you and he get +the plank on board as noiselessly as you can. As soon as the bow +hawser is on board I will give the men in the boat the word to +row. Ned will be on board her, and see that they row in the right +direction. The moment you have got the plank in get out your knife +and cut the stern warp half through, and directly her head is out, +and you feel the strain, sever it. The stern is so close to the +wharf that the end will not be able to drop down into the water +and make a splash." + +Ned's orders were that as soon as the vessel's head pointed seaward +he was to steer rather to the right, so as to prevent the stream, +which, however, ran but feebly, from carrying her down on the bows +of the French ship. Once beyond the latter he was to go straight +out, steering by the lights on shore. The men were enjoined to drop +their oars as quietly as possible into the water at each stroke, +and to row deeply, as having the vessel in tow they would churn up +the water unless they did so. The boat rowed off a stroke or two, +and then, as the rope tightened, the men sat quiet until Captain +Martin was heard to give the order to row in a low tone; then they +bent to their oars. Peters had chosen the six best rowers on board +the ship for the purpose, and so quietly did they dip their oars +in the water that Captain Martin could scarce hear the sound, and +only knew by looking over the other side, and seeing that the shore +was receding, that the ship was in motion. Two minutes later Peters +came forward. + +"I have cut the warp, Captain Martin, and she is moving out. I have +left Watson at the helm." Scarce a word was spoken for the next +five minutes. It was only by looking at the light ashore that they +could judge the progress they were making. Every one breathed more +freely now the first danger was over. They had got out from their +berth without attracting the slightest notice, either from the +shore or from the ships lying next to them. Their next danger was +from the ships lying at anchor off the port waiting their turn to +come in. Were they to run against one of these, the sound of the +collision, and perhaps the breaking of spars and the shouts of the +crew, would certainly excite attention from the sentries on shore. + +So far the boat had been rowing but a short distance in advance of +the end of the bowsprit, but Captain Martin now made his way out +to the end of that spar, and told Ned that he was going to give +him a good deal more rope in order that he might keep well ahead, +and that he was to keep a sharp lookout for craft at anchor. Another +quarter of an hour passed, and Captain Martin thought that they +must now be beyond the line of the outer shipping. They felt the +wind more now that they were getting beyond the shelter of the +town, and its effect upon the hull and spars made the work lighter +for those in the boat ahead. + +"Now, Peters, I think that we can safely spread the foresail and +call them in from the boat." + +The sail had been already loosed and was now let fall; it bellied +out at once. + +"Haul in the sheets, lads," Captain Martin said, and going forward +gave a low whistle. A minute later the boat was alongside. "Let +her drop astern, Peters," the captain said, as Ned and the rowers +clambered on board; "we may want her presently. Hullo! what's that? +It's one of the guard boats, I do believe, and coming this way." +The men heard the sound of coming oars, and silently stole to the +mast and armed themselves with the pikes, put the axes in their +belts, and ranged themselves along by the side of the ship towards +which the boat was approaching. "Will she go ahead of us or astern?" +Captain Martin whispered to the mate. + +"I cannot tell yet, sir. By the sound she seems making pretty nearly +straight for us." + +"How unfortunate," Captain Martin murmured; "just as it seemed that +we were getting safely away." + +In another minute the mate whispered, "She will go astern of us, +sir, but not by much." + +"I trust that she will not see us," the captain said. "But now we +are away from the town and the lights, it doesn't seem so dark, +besides their eyes are accustomed to it." + +There was dead silence in the ship as the boat approached. She was +just passing the stern at the distance of about a ship's length, +when there was a sudden exclamation, and a voice shouted, "What +ship is that? Where are you going?" Captain Martin replied in Dutch. +"We are taking advantage of the wind to make to sea." + +"Down with that sail, sir!" the officer shouted: "this is against +all regulations. No ship is permitted to leave the port between +sunrise and sunset. Pull alongside, lads; there is something strange +about this!" + +"Do not come alongside," Captain Martin said sternly. "We are +peaceable traders who meddle with no one, but if you interfere with +us it will be the worse for you." + +"You insolent hound!" the officer exclaimed furiously, "do you +dare to threaten me. Blow your matches, lads, and shoulder your +arquebuses. There is treason and rebellion here." + +Those on board saw six tiny sparks appear, two in the bow and four +in the stern. A minute later the boat dashed alongside. As it did +so three great pieces of stone were cast into it, knocking down +two of the rowers. + +"Fire!" the officer exclaimed as he sprang up to climb the ship's +side. The six muskets were discharged, and the men rose to follow +their leader, when there was a cry from the rowers "The boat is +sinking! She is staved in!" + +At the same moment the officer fell back thrust through with a pike. +Two of the soldiers were cut down with axes, the other sprang back +into the sinking boat, which at once drifted astern. + +"Up with her sails, lads!" Captain Martin shouted; "it is a question +of speed now. The alarm is spread on shore already." The sentries +of the various batteries were discharging their muskets and shouting, +and the roll of a drum was heard almost immediately. The crew soon +had every stitch of sail set upon the brig. She was moving steadily +through the water; but the wind was still light, although occasionally +a stronger puff gave ground for hope that it would ere long blow +harder. + +"They will be some time before they make out what it is all about, +Peters," Captain Martin said. "The galleys will be manned, and will +row to the spot where the firing was heard. Some of the men in the +boat are sure to be able to swim, and will meet them as they come +out and tell them what has happened. The worst of it is, the moon +will be up in a few minutes. I forgot all about that. That accounts +for its being lighter. However, we have got a good start. One or +two guard boats may be out here in a quarter of an hour, but it +will take the galleys twice as long to gather their crews and get +out. It all depends on the wind. It is lucky it is not light yet, +or the batteries might open on us; I don't think now they will get +sight of us until we are fairly out of range." + +Now that there was no longer occasion for silence on board the Good +Venture, the crew laughed and joked at the expense of the Spaniards. +They were in high spirits at their success, and their only regret +was that the brush with their pursuers had not been a more serious +one. It was evident from the talk that there was quite as much hope +as fear in the glances that they cast astern, and that they would +have been by no means sorry to see a foe of about their own strength +in hot pursuit of them. A quarter of an hour after the shattered +boat had dropped astern the moon rose on the starboard bow. It was +three-quarters full, and would assuredly reveal the ship to those +on shore. Scarcely indeed did it show above the horizon when there +was the boom of a gun astern, followed a second or two later by a +heavy splash in the water close alongside. + +"That was a good shot," Captain Martin said; "but luck rather than +skill I fancy. There is little chance of their hitting us at this +distance. We must be a mile and a half away; don't you think so, +Peters?" + +"Quite that, captain; and they must have given their gun a lot of +elevation to carry so far. I almost wonder they wasted their powder." + +"Of course they can't tell in the least who they are firing at," +the captain said. "They cannot have learnt anything yet, and can +have only known that there was firing off the port, and that a +craft is making out. We may be one of the sea beggars' vessels for +anything they know, and may have come in to carry off a prize from +under their very noses." + +"That is so," the mate replied; "but the gun may have been fired +as a signal as much as with any hope of hitting us." + +"So it may, so it may, Peters; I did not think of that. Certainly +that is likely enough. We know they have several ships cruising in +the Zuider Zee keeping a lookout for the beggars. On a night like +this, and with the wind astern, the sound will be heard miles away. +We may have trouble yet. I was not much afraid of the galleys, for +though the wind is so light we are running along famously. You see +we have nothing in our hold, and that is all in our favour so long +as we are dead before the wind. Besides, if the galleys did come +up it would probably be singly, and we should be able to beat them +off, for high out of water as we are they would find it difficult +to climb the sides; but if we fall in with any of their ships it +is a different matter altogether." + +Four or five more shots were fired, but they all fell astern; and +as they were fully two miles and a half away when the last gun was +discharged, and the cannoneers must have known that they were far +out of range, Captain Martin felt sure that the mate's idea was a +correct one, and that the cannon had been discharged rather as a +signal than with any hope of reaching them. + +"Ned, run up into the foretop," the captain said, "and keep a +sharp lookout ahead. The moon has given an advantage to those who +are on our track behind, but it gives us an advantage as against +any craft there may be ahead of us. We shall see them long before +they can see us." + +Peters had been looking astern when the last gun was fired, and +said that by its flash he believed that he had caught sight of three +craft of some kind or other outside the ships moored off the port. + +"Then we have two miles' start if those are their galleys," the +captain said. "We are stealing through the water at about the rate +of four knots, and perhaps they may row six, so it will take them +an hour to come up." + +"Rather more than that, I should say, captain, for the wind at times +freshens a little. It is likely to be an hour and a half before +they come up." + +"All the better, Peters. They will have learnt from those they +picked up from that boat that we are not a large craft, and that +our crew probably does not exceed twenty men; therefore, as those +galleys carry about twenty soldiers besides the twenty rowers, they +will not think it necessary to keep together, but will each do his +best to overtake us. One of them is sure to be faster than the +others, and if they come up singly I think we shall be able to +beat them off handsomely. It is no use discussing now whether it +is wise to fight or not. By sinking that first boat we have all +put our heads in a noose, and there is no drawing back. We have +repulsed their officers with armed force, and there will be no +mercy for any of us if we fall into their hands." + +"We shall fight all the better for knowing that," Peters said +grimly. "The Dutchmen are learning that, as the Spaniards are finding +to their cost. There is nothing like making a man fight than the +knowledge that there is a halter waiting for him if he is beaten." + +"You had better get two of the guns astern, Peters, so as to fire +down into them as they come up. You may leave the others, one on +each side, for the present, and run one of them over when we see +which side they are making for. Ah! that's a nice little puff. If +it would but hold like that we should show them our heels altogether." + +In two or three minutes the puff died out and the wind fell even +lighter than before. + +"I thought that we were going to have more of it," the captain said +discontentedly; "it looked like it when the sun went down." + +"I think we shall have more before morning," Peters agreed; "but +I am afraid it won't come in time to help us much." + +As the moon rose they were able to make out three craft astern of +them. Two were almost abreast of each other, the third some little +distance behind. + +"That is just what I expected, Peters; they are making a race of +it. We shall have two of them on our hands at once; the other will +be too far away by the time they come up to give them any assistance. +They are about a mile astern now, I should say, and unless the wind +freshens up a bit they will be alongside in about twenty minutes. +I will give you three men here, Peters. As soon as we have fired +load again, and then slew the guns round and run them forward to +the edge of the poop, and point them down into the waist. If the +Spaniards get on board and we find them too strong for us, those +of us who can will take to the forecastle, the others will run up +here. Then sweep the Spaniards with your guns, and directly you +have fired charge down among them with pike and axe. We will do +the same, and it is hard if we do not clear the deck of them." + +Just at this moment Ned hailed them from the top. "There is a ship +nearly ahead of us, sir; she is lying with her sails brailed up, +evidently waiting." + +"How far is she off, do you think, Ned?" + +"I should say she is four miles away," Ned replied. + +"Well, we need not trouble about her for the present; there will +be time to think about her when we have finished with these fellows +behind. You can come down now, Ned." + +In a few words the captain now explained his intentions to his men. + +"I hope, lads, that we shall be able to prevent their getting +a footing on the deck; but if they do, and we find we can't beat +them back, as soon as I give the word you are to take either to +the forecastle or to the poop. Mr. Peters will have the two guns +there ready to sweep them with bullets. The moment he has fired give +a cheer and rush down upon them from both sides. We will clear them +off again, never fear. Ned, you will be in charge in the waist until +I rejoin you. Get ready to run one of the guns over the instant I +tell you on which side they are coming up. Depress them as much as +you can. I shall take one gun and you take the other, and be sure +you don't fire until you see a boat well under the muzzle of your +gun. Mind it's the boat you are to aim at, and not the men." + +Captain Martin again ascended to the poop and joined Peters. The +two boats were now but a few hundred yards astern, and they could +hear the officers cheering on the rowers to exert themselves to +the utmost. The third boat was fully a quarter of a mile behind +the leaders. When they approached within a hundred yards a fire of +musketry was opened. + +"Lie down under the bulwarks, men," Captain Martin said to the three +sailors. "It is no use risking your lives unnecessarily. I expect +one boat will come one side and one the other, Peters. If they do +we will both take the one coming up on the port side. One of us +may miss, and it is better to make sure of one boat if we can. I +think we can make pretty sure of beating off the other. Yes, there +they are separating. Now work your gun round a bit, so that it +bears on a point about twenty yards astern and a boat's length on +the port side. I will do the same. Have you done that?" + +"Yes, I think I have about got it, sir." + +"Very well, then. Stoop down now, or we may get hit before it is +time to fire." + +The bulwarks round the poop were only about a foot high, but sitting +back from them the captain and the mate were protected from the +bullets that were now singing briskly over the stern of the ship. + +"They are coming up, Peters," Captain Martin said. "Now kneel +up and look along your gun; get your match ready, and do not fire +till you see right into the boat, then clap on your match whether +I fire or not." + +The boat came racing along until when within some twenty yards of +the stern, the cannons were discharged almost simultaneously. The +sound was succeeded by a chorus of screams and yells; the contents +of both guns had struck the boat fairly midships, and she sank +almost instantly. As soon as they had fired Captain Martin ran +forward and joined the crew in the waist. He had already passed +the word to Ned to get both guns over to the starboard side, and +he at once took charge of one while Ned stood at the other. The +Spaniards had pushed straight on without waiting to pick up their +drowning comrades in the other boat, and in a minute were alongside. +So close did the helmsman bring the boat to the side that the guns +could not be depressed so as to bear upon her, and a moment later +the Spaniards were climbing up the sides of the vessel, the rowers +dropping their oars and seizing axes and joining the soldiers. + +"Never mind the gun, Ned; it is useless at present. Now, lads, +drive them back as they come up." + +With pike and hatchet the sailors met the Spaniards as they tried +to climb up. The cook had brought his caldron of boiling water to +the bulwarks, and threw pailful after pailful down into the boat, +while the carpenter bailed over boiling pitch with the great ladle. +Terrible yells and screams rose from the boat, and the soldiers in +vain tried to gain a footing upon the ship's deck. As they appeared +above the level of the bulwarks they were met either with thrust +of pike or with a crashing blow from an axe, and it was but three +or four minutes from the moment that the fight began that the boat +cast off and dropped behind, more than half those on board being +killed or disabled. A loud cheer broke from the crew. + +"Shall I run the guns back to the stern again," Peters asked from +above, "and give them a parting dose?" + +"No, no," Captain Martin said, "let them go, Peters; we are fighting +to defend ourselves, and have done them mischief enough. See what +the third boat is doing, though." + +"They have stopped rowing," Peters said, after going to the stern. +"I think they are picking up some swimmers from the boat we sank. +There cannot be many of them, for most of the rowers would have +been killed by our discharges, and the soldiers in their armour +will have sunk at once." + +Captain Martin now ascended to the poop. In a short time the boat +joined that which had dropped astern, which was lying helpless in +the water, no attempt having been made to man the oars, as most of +the unwounded men were scalded more or less severely. Their report +was evidently not encouraging, and the third boat made no attempt +to pursue. Some of her oarsmen were shifted to the other boat, and +together they turned and made back for Amsterdam. + +"Now then for this vessel ahead," Captain Martin said; "that is a +much more serious business than the boats." + +The vessel, which was some two miles ahead of them, had now set +some of her sails, and was heading towards them. + +"They can make us out now plainly enough, Peters, and the firing +will of course have told them we are the vessel that they are in +search of. I don't think that there is any getting away from them." + +"I don't see that there is," the mate agreed. "Whichever way we +edged off they could cut us off. The worst of it is, no doubt she +has got some big guns on board, and these little things of ours are +of no good except at close quarters. It would be no use trying to +make a running fight with her?" + +"Not in the least, Peters. We had better sail straight at her." + +"You don't mean to try and carry her by boarding?" Peters asked +doubtfully. "She looks a large ship, and has perhaps a hundred and +fifty men on board; and though the Spaniards are no sailors they +can fight on the decks of their ships." + +"That is so, Peters. What I think of doing is to bear straight +down upon her as if I intended to board. We shall have to stand one +broadside as we come up, and then we shall be past her, and with +our light draught we should run right away from her with this wind. +There is more of it than there was, and we are slipping away fast. +Unless she happens to knock away one of our masts we shall get away +from her." + +When they were within half a mile of the Spanish ship they saw her +bows bear off. + +"Lie down, lads," the captain ordered, "she is going to give us a +broadside. When it is over start one of those sea beggar songs you +picked up at Brill; that will startle them, and they will think we +are crowded with men and going to board them." + +A minute later eight flashes of fire burst from the Spanish ship, +now lying broadside to them. One shot crashed through the bulwarks, +two others passed through the sails, the rest went wide of their +mark. As soon as it was over the crew leapt to their feet and burst +into one of the wild songs sung by the sea beggars. + +"Keep our head straight towards her, Peters," Captain Martin said. +"They will think we mean to run her down, and it will flurry and +confuse them." + +Loading was not quick work in those days, and the distance between +the vessels was decreased by half before the guns were again fired. +This time it was not a broadside; the guns went off one by one as +they were loaded, and the aim was hasty and inaccurate, for close +as they were not a shot struck the hull of the Good Venture, though +two or three went through the sails. In the bright moonlight men +could be seen running about and officers waving their arms and giving +orders on board the Spaniard, and then her head began to pay off. + +"We have scared them," Captain Martin laughed. "They thought we were +going to run them down. They know the sea beggars would be quite +content to sink themselves if they could sink an enemy. Follow +close in her wake, Peters, and then bear off a little as if you +meant to pass them on their starboard side; then when you get close +give her the helm sharp and sweep across her stern. We will give +her the guns as we pass, then bear off again and pass her on her +port side; the chances are they will not have loaded again there." + +The Spanish ship was little more than a hundred yards ahead. When +she got before the wind again Captain Martin saw with satisfaction +that the Good Venture sailed three feet to her two. The poop and +stern galleries of the Spaniard were clustered with soldiers, who +opened a fire with their muskets upon their pursuer. The men were +all lying down now at their guns, which were loaded with musket +balls to their muzzles. + +"Elevate them as much as you can. She is much higher out of the +water than we are. Now, Peters, you see to the guns, I will take +the helm." + +"I will keep the helm, sir," the mate replied. + +"No, you won't, Peters; my place is the place of danger. But if +you like you can lie under the bulwark there after you have fired, +and be ready to take my place if you see me drop. Now, lads, get +ready." + +So saying the captain put down the tiller. The Good Venture swept +round under the stern of the Spaniard at a distance of some forty +yards, and as she did so the guns loaded with bullets to the +muzzle were fired one after the other. The effect was terrible, +and the galleries and poop were swept by the leaden shower. Then +the captain straightened the helm again. The crew burst into the +wild yells and cries the beggars raised when going into battle. The +Spaniards, confused by the terrible slaughter worked by the guns +of their enemies, and believing that they were about to be boarded +on the port side by a crowd of desperate foemen, hastily put up +the tiller, and the ship bore away as the Good Venture swept up, +presenting her stern instead of her broadside to them. + +To the momentary relief of the Spaniards their assailant instead +of imitating their maneuvers kept straight upon her course before +the wind, and instead of the wild cries of the beggars a hearty +English cheer was raised. As Captain Martin had expected, the guns +on the port side had not been reloaded after the last discharge, +and the Good Venture was two or three hundred yards away before +the Spaniards recovered from their surprise at what seemed the +incomprehensible maneuver of their foes, and awoke to the fact +that they had been tricked, and that instead of a ship crowded with +beggars of the sea their supposed assailant had been an English +trader that was trying to escape from them. + +A dozen contradictory orders were shouted as soon as the truth +dawned upon them. The captain had been killed by the discharge of +grape, and the first lieutenant severely wounded. The officer in +command of the troops shouted to his men to load the guns, only to +find when this was accomplished that the second lieutenant of the +ship had turned her head in pursuit of the enemy, and that not a +single gun would bear. There was a sharp altercation between the +two authorities, but the military chief was of the highest rank. + +"Don't you see," he said furiously, "that she is going away from +us every foot. She was but a couple of hundred yards away when I +gave the order to load, and now she is fully a quarter of a mile." + +"If I put the helm down to bring her broadside on," the seaman +said, "she will be half a mile ahead before we can straighten up +and get in her wake again; and unless you happen to cripple her +she will get away to a certainty." + +"She will get away anyhow," the soldier roared, "if we don't cripple +her. Put your helm down instantly." + +The order was given and the ship's head swayed round. There was a +flapping of sails and a rattling of blocks, and then a broadside +was fired; but it is no easy matter for angry and excited men to +hit a mast at the distance of nearly half a mile. One of the shots +ploughed up the deck within a yard of the foot of the mainmast, +another splintered a boat, three others added to the holes in the +sails, but no damage of importance was done. By the time the Spaniard +had borne round and was again in chase, the Good Venture was over +half a mile ahead. + +"It is all over now, captain," Peters said as he went aft. "Unless +we light upon another of these fellows, which is not likely, we +are safe." + +"Are any of the men hit, Peters?" + +"The carpenter was knocked down and stunned by a splinter from the +boat, sir; but I don't think it is serious." + +"Thank God for that," the captain said. "Now, will you take the +helm?" There was something in the voice that startled the mate. + +"Is anything the matter, sir? Don't say you are hit." + +"I am hit, Peters, and I fear rather badly; but that matters little +now that the crew and ship are safe." + +Peters caught the captain, for he saw that he could scarce stand, +and called two men to his assistance. The captain was laid down on +the deck. + +"Where are you hit, sir?" + +"Halfway between the knee and the hip," Captain Martin replied +faintly. "If it hadn't been for the tiller I should have fallen, +but with the aid of that I made shift to stand on the other leg. It +was just before we fired, at the moment when I put the helm down." + +"Why didn't you call me?" Peters said reproachfully. + +"It was of no good getting two of us hit, Peters; and as long as +I could stand to steer I was better there than you." + +Ned came running aft as the news was passed along that the captain +was wounded, and threw himself on his knees by his father's side. + +"Bear up, Ned; bear up like a man," his father said. "I am hit +hard, but I don't know that it is to death. But even if it is, it +is ten thousand times better to die in battle with the Spaniards +than to be hung like a dog, which would have befallen me and perhaps +all of us if they had taken us." + +By Peters' directions a mattress was now brought up, and the captain +carried down to his cabin. There was no thought on board now of the +pursuers astern, or of possible danger lying ahead. The news that +Captain Martin was badly wounded damped all the feelings of triumph +and enthusiasm which the crew had before been feeling at the success +with which they had eluded the Spaniard while heavily punishing +her. As soon as the captain was laid on a sofa Peters examined the +wound. It was right in front of the leg, some four inches above +the knee. + +"There is nothing to be done for it," Captain Martin said. "It has +smashed the bone, I am sure." + +"I am afraid it has, captain," Peters said ruefully; "and it is no +use my saying that it has not. I think, sir, we had best put in at +Enkhuizen. We are not above four or five miles from it now, and we +shall find surgeons there who will do all they can for you." + +"I think that will be the best plan, Peters." + +The orders were given at once, and the ship's course altered, and +half an hour later the lights of Enkhuizen were seen ahead. + + + +CHAPTER IV + +WOUNDED + + +They dropped anchor a short distance off the port, and then lit +some torches and waved them. + +"The firing is sure to have been heard," Peters said, "and they +will be sending off to know what is going on, otherwise there would +have been small chance of getting in tonight." + +As the mate anticipated, the sound of oars was soon heard, and a +large boat rowed out towards them. It stopped at a distance of a +hundred yards, and there was a shout of "What ship is that?" + +"The English brig Good Venture. We pray you to allow us to bring our +captain, who has been sorely wounded by the Spaniards, on shore." + +"What has been the firing we have heard? We could see the flashes +across the water." + +"We have been twice engaged," Peters shouted; "first with two +Spanish galleys, and then with a large ship of war, which we beat +off with heavy loss." + +"Well done, Englishmen!" the voice exclaimed, and the boat at once +rowed out to the brig. "You cannot come in tonight," the Dutch +official said, "for the chain is up across the harbour, and the +rule is imperative and without exception; but I will gladly take +your captain on shore, and he shall have, I promise you, the best +surgical aid the town can give him. Is he the only one hurt?" + +"One of the men has been injured with a splinter, but he needs but +bandaging and laying up for a few days. We have had a shot or two +through our bulwarks, and the sails are riddled. The captain's son +is below with him; he acts as second mate, and will tell you all +about this affair into which we were forced." + +"Very well; we will take him ashore with us then. There is quite +an excitement there. The news that a sea fight was going on brought +all the citizens to the walls." + +The mattress upon which Captain Martin was lying was brought out +and lowered carefully into the stern of the boat. Ned took his +seat beside it, and the boat pushed off. Having passed the forts +they entered the port and rowed to the landing place. A number of +citizens, many of them carrying torches, were assembled here. + +"What is the news?" a voice asked as the boat approached. + +"It is an English ship, burgomaster. She has been hotly engaged; +first with Spanish galleys, and then with a warship, which was +doubtless the one seen beating up this afternoon. She sank one of +the galleys and beat off the ship." A loud cheer broke from the +crowd. When it subsided the official went on: "I have the English +captain and his son on board. The captain is sorely wounded, and +I have promised him the best medical aid the town can give him." + +"That he shall have," the burgomaster said. "Let him be carried to +my house at once. Hans Leipart, do you hurry on and tell my wife +to get a chamber prepared instantly. You have heard who it is, and +why he is coming, and I warrant me she will do her best to make the +brave Englishman comfortable. Do two others of you run to Doctors +Zobel and Harreng, and pray them to hasten to my house. Let a +stretcher be fetched instantly from the town hall." + +As soon as the stretcher was brought the mattress was placed on it, +and six of the sailors carried it on shore. The crowd had by this +time greatly increased, for the news had rapidly spread. Every +head was bared in token of sympathy and respect as the litter was +brought up. The crowd fell back and formed a lane, and, led by the +burgomaster, the sailors carried the wounded man into the town. He +was taken upstairs to the room prepared for him, and the surgeons +were speedily in attendance. Medicine in those days was but a +primitive science, but the surgery, though rough and rude, was far +ahead of the sister art. Wars were of such constant occurrence that +surgeons had ample opportunity for practice; and simple operations +such as the amputation of limbs, were matters of very common +occurrence. It needed but a very short examination by the two surgeons +to enable them to declare that the leg must at once be amputated. + +"The bone appears to be completely smashed," one of them said. +"Doubtless the ball was fired at a very short distance." A groan +burst from Ned when he heard the decision. + +"I knew that it would be so, Ned," his father said. "I never doubted +it for a moment. It is well that I have been able to obtain aid so +speedily. Better a limb than life, my boy. I did not wince when I +was hit, and with God's help I can stand the pain now. Do you go +away and tell the burgomaster how it all came about, and leave me +with these gentlemen. + +As soon as Ned had left the room, sobbing in spite of his efforts +to appear manly, the captain said: "Now, gentlemen, since this must +be done, I pray you to do it without loss of time. I will bear it +as best I can, I promise you; and as three or four and twenty years +at sea makes a man pretty hard and accustomed to rough usage, I +expect I shall stand it as well as another." + +The surgeons agreed that there was no advantage in delay, and +indeed that it was far better to amputate it before fever set in. +They therefore returned home at once for their instruments, the +knives and saws, the irons that were to be heated white hot to stop +the bleeding, and the other appliances in use at the time. Had Ned +been aware that the operation would have taken place so soon, he +would have been unable to satisfy the curiosity of the burgomaster +and citizens to know how it had happened that an English trader had +come to blows with the Spaniards; but he had no idea that it would +take place that night, and thought that probably some days would +elapse before the surgeons finally decided that it was necessary +to amputate it. + +One of the surgeons had, at the captain's request, called the +burgomaster aside as he left the house, and begged him to keep the +lad engaged in conversation until he heard from him that all was +over. This the burgomaster willingly promised to do; and as many +of the leading citizens were assembled in the parlour to hear the +news, there was no chance of Ned's slipping away. + +"Before you begin to tell us your story, young sir, we should be +glad to know how it is that you speak our language so well; for +indeed we could not tell by your accent that you are not a native +of these parts, which is of course impossible, seeing that your +father is an Englishman and captain of the ship lying off there." + +"My mother comes from near here," Ned said. "She is the daughter of +Mynheer Plomaert, who lived at Vordwyk, two miles from Amsterdam. +She went over to England when she married my father, but when he +was away on his voyages she always spoke her own language to us +children, so that we grew to speak it naturally as we did English." + +Ned then related the news that met them on their arrival at his +grandfather's home, and the exclamation of fury on the part of his +father. + +"It is a common enough story with us here," the burgomaster said, +"for few of us but have lost friends or relatives at the hands +of these murderous tyrants of ours. But to you, living in a free +land, truly it must have been a dreadful shock; and I wonder not +that your father's indignation betrayed him into words which, if +overheard, might well cost a man his life in this country." + +"They were overheard and reported," Ned said; and then proceeded to +relate the warning they had received, the measures they had taken +to get off unperceived, the accidental meeting with the guard boat +and the way in which it had been sunk, the pursuit by the galleys +and the fight with them, and then the encounter with the Spanish +ship of war. + +"And you say your father never relaxed his hold of the tiller when +struck!" the burgomaster said in surprise. "I should have thought +he must needs have fallen headlong to the ground." + +"He told me," Ned replied, "that at the moment he was hit he was +pushing over the tiller, and had his weight partly on that and +partly on his other leg. Had it been otherwise he would of course +have gone down, for he said that for a moment he thought his leg +had been shot off." + +When Ned finished his narrative the burgomaster and magistrates +were loud in their exclamations of admiration at the manner in +which the little trader had both fought and deceived her powerful +opponent. + +"It was gallantly done indeed," the burgomaster said. "Truly it +seems marvellous that a little ship with but twenty hands should +have fought and got safely away from the Don Pedro, for that was +the ship we saw pass this afternoon. We know her well, for she has +often been in port here before we declared for the Prince of Orange +a month ago. The beggars of the sea themselves could not have done +better, -- could they, my friends? though we Dutchmen and Zeelanders +believe that there are no sailors that can match our own." + +The story had taken nearly an hour to tell, and Ned now said: + +"With your permission, sir, I will now go up to my father again." + +"You had best not go for the present," the burgomaster said. "The +doctor asked me to keep you with me for awhile, for that he wished +his patient to be entirely undisturbed. He is by his bedside now, +and will let me know at once if your father wishes to have you with +him." + +A quarter of an hour later a servant called the burgomaster out. +The surgeon was waiting outside. + +"It is finished," he said, "and he has borne it well. Scarce a +groan escaped him, even when we applied the hot irons; but he is +utterly exhausted now, and we have given him an opiate, and hope +that he will soon drop off to sleep. My colleague will remain with +him for four hours, and then I will return and take his place. You +had best say nothing to the lad about it. He would naturally want +to see his father; we would much rather that he should not. Therefore +tell him, please, that his father is dropping off to sleep, and +must not on any account be disturbed; and that we are sitting up +with him by turns, and will let him know at once should there be +any occasion for his presence." + +Ned was glad to hear that his father was likely to get off to +sleep; and although he would gladly have sat up with him, he knew +that it was much better that he should have the surgeon beside him. +The burgomaster's wife, a kind and motherly woman, took him aside +into a little parlour, where a table was laid with a cold capon, +some manchets of bread, and a flask of the burgomaster's best wine. +As Ned had eaten nothing since the afternoon, and it was now past +midnight, he was by no means sorry to partake of some refreshment. +When he had finished he was conducted to a comfortable little chamber +that had been prepared for him, and in spite of his anxiety about +his father it was not long before he fell asleep. + +The sun was high before he awoke. He dressed himself quickly and +went downstairs, for he feared to go straight to his father's room +lest he might be sleeping. + +"You have slept well," the burgomaster's wife said with a smile; +"and no wonder, after your fatigues. The surgeon has just gone, +and I was about to send up to wake you, for he told me to tell you +that your father had passed a good night, and that you can now see +him." + +Ned ran upstairs, and turning the handle of the door very quietly +entered his father's room. Captain Martin was looking very pale, +but Ned thought that his face had not the drawn look that had marked +it the evening before. + +"How are you, my dear father?" + +"I am going on well, Ned; at least so the doctors say. I feel I +shall be but a battered old hulk when I get about again; but your +mother will not mind that, I know." + +"And do the doctors still think that they must take the leg off?" +Ned asked hesitatingly. + +"That was their opinion last night, Ned, and it was my opinion too; +and so the matter was done off hand, and there is an end of it." + +"Done offhand?" Ned repeated. "Do you mean" -- and he hesitated. + +"Do I mean that they have taken it off? Certainly I do, Ned. They +took it off last night while you were downstairs in the burgomaster's +parlour; but I thought it would be much better for you not to know +anything about it until this morning. Yes, my boy, thank God, it +is all over! I don't say that it wasn't pretty hard to bear; but +it had to be done, you know, and the sooner it was over the better. +There is nothing worse than lying thinking about a thing." + +Ned was too affected to speak; but with tears streaming down his +cheeks, leant over and kissed his father. The news had come as a +shock to him, but it seemed to have lifted a weight from his mind. +The worst was over now; and although it was terrible to think that +his father had lost his leg, still this seemed a minor evil after +the fear that perhaps his life might be sacrificed. Knowing that his +father should not be excited, or even talk more than was absolutely +necessary, Ned stayed but a few minutes with him, and then hurried +off to the ship, where, however, he found that the news that the +captain's leg had been amputated, and that the doctors hoped that +he would go on well, had been known some hours before; as Peters +had come on shore with the first dawn of daylight for news, and +heard from the burgomaster's servant that the amputation had taken +place the evening before, and an hour later had learned from the +lips of the doctor who had been watching by the captain's bedside, +that he had passed a fairly good night, and might so far be considered +to be doing well. + +"What do you think we had better do, Master Ned? Of course it will +be for the captain to decide; but in these matters it is always +best to take counsel beforehand. For although it is, of course, +what he thinks in the matter will be done, still it may be that +we might direct his thoughts; and the less thinking he does in his +present state the better." + +"What do you mean as to what is to be done, Peters?" + +"Well, your father is like to be here many weeks; indeed, if I said +many months I don't suppose it would be far from the truth. Things +never go on quite smooth. There are sure to be inflammations, +and fever keeps on coming and going; and if the doctor says three +months, like enough it is six." + +"Of course I shall stay here and nurse him, Peters." + +"Well, Master Ned, that will be one of the points for the captain +to settle. I do not suppose he will want the Good Venture to be +lying idle all the time he is laid up; and though I can sail the +ship, the trading business is altogether out of my line. You know +all the merchants he does business with, going ashore, as you most +always do with him; I doubt not that you could fill his place and +deal with them just the same as if he was here." + +"But I cannot leave him at present." + +"No, no, Master Ned; no one would think of it. Now, what I have +been turning over in my mind is, that the best thing for the captain +and for you and your good mother is that I should set sail in the +Venture without the loss of a day and fetch her over. If the wind +is reasonable, and we have good luck, we may be back in ten days +or so. By that time the captain may be well enough to think where +we had better go for a cargo, and what course had best be taken +about things in general." + +"I think that would certainly be the best plan, Peters; and I will +suggest it to my father at once. He is much more likely to go on +well if my mother is with him, and she would be worrying sadly at +home were she not by his side. Besides, it will be well for her +to have something to occupy her, for the news of what has befallen +her father and brothers will be a terrible blow to her. If I put +it in that way to him I doubt not that he will agree to the plan; +otherwise, he might fear to bring her out here in such troubled +times, for there is no saying when the Spaniards will gather their +army to recover the revolted cities, or against which they will +first make their attempts. I will go back at once, and if he be +awake I will tell him that you and I agree that it will be best +for you to sail without loss of an hour to fetch my mother over, +and that we can then put off talking about other matters until the +ship returns." + +Ned at once went back to his father's bedroom. He found the captain +had just awoke from a short sleep. + +"Father, I do not want to trouble you to think at present, but will +tell you what Master Peters and I, who have been laying our heads +together, concluded is best to be done. You are likely to be laid +up here for some time, and it will be far the best plan for the +Good Venture to sail over and fetch mother to nurse you." + +"I shall get on well enough, Ned. They are kindly people here; and +regarding our fight with the Spaniards as a sign of our friendship +and goodwill towards them, they will do all in their power for me." + +"Yes, father, I hope, indeed, that you will go on well; and I am +sure that the good people here will do their best in all ways for +you, and of course I will nurse you to the best of my power, though, +indeed, this is new work for me; but it was not so much you as +mother that we were thinking of. It will be terrible for her when +the news comes that her father and brothers are all killed, and that +you are lying here sorely wounded. It will be well nigh enough to +drive her distraught. But if she were to come over here at once +she would, while busying about you, have less time to brood over +her griefs; and, indeed, I see not why she should be told what has +happened at Vordwyk until she is here with you, and you can break +it to her. It will come better from your lips, and for your sake +she will restrain her grief." + +"There is a great deal in what you say, Ned, and, indeed, I long +greatly to have her with me; but Holland is no place at present +to bring a woman to, and I suppose also that she would bring the +girls, for she could not well leave them in a house alone. There +are plenty of friends there who would be glad to take them in; but +that she could decide upon herself. However, as she is a native +here she will probably consider she may well run the same risks as +the rest of her countrywomen. They remain with their fathers and +husbands and endure what perils there may be, and she will see no +reason why she should not do the same." + +"What we propose is that the Venture should set sail at once and +fetch my mother over, and the girls, if she sees fit to bring them. +I shall of course stay here with you until the brig returns, and +by that time you will, I hope, be strong enough to talk over what +had best be done regarding the ship and business generally." + +"Well, have your way, Ned. At present I cannot think over things +and see what is best; so I will leave the matter in your hands, and +truly I should be glad indeed to have your mother here with me." + +Well content to have obtained the permission Ned hurried from the +room. + +"Has the burgomaster returned?" he asked when he reached the lower +storey. + +"He has just come in, and I was coming up to tell you that dinner +is served." + +"Is it eleven o'clock already?" Ned exclaimed. "I had no idea it +was so late." He entered the room and bowed to the burgomaster and +his wife. + +"Worshipful sir," he said, "I have just obtained leave from my +father to send our ship off to London to fetch hither my mother to +come to nurse him. I trust that by the time she arrives he will be +able to be moved, and then they will take lodgings elsewhere, so +as not to trespass longer upon your great kindness and hospitality." + +"I think that it is well that your mother should come over," the +burgomaster said; "for a man who has had the greater part of his +leg taken off cannot be expected to get round quickly. Besides, +after what you told us last night about the misfortune that has +befallen her family, it were best that she should be busied about +her husband, and so have little time to brood over the matter. As +to hospitality, it would be strange indeed if we should not do all +that we could for a brave man who has been injured in fighting our +common enemy. Send word to your mother that she will be as welcome +as he is, and that we shall be ready in all respects to arrange +whatever she may think most convenient and comfortable. And now +you had best sit down and have your meal with us. As soon as it is +over I will go down with you to the wharf, and will do what I can +to hasten the sailing of your ship. I don't think," he went on, when +they had taken their seats at table, "that there is much chance +of her meeting another Spaniard on her way out to sea, for we have +news this morning that some ships of the beggars have been seen +cruising off the entrance, and the Spaniards will be getting under +shelter of their batteries at Amsterdam. I hear they are expecting +a fleet from Spain to arrive soon to aid in their operations against +our ports. However, I have little fear that they will do much by +sea against us. I would we could hold our own as well on the land +as we can on the water." + +Ned found the meal extremely long and tedious, for he was fretting +to be off to hasten the preparations on board the Good Venture, +and he was delighted when at last the burgomaster said: + +"Now, my young friend, we will go down to the wharf together." + +But although somewhat deliberate, the burgomaster proved a valuable +assistant. When he had told Ned that he would do what he could to +expedite the sailing of the ship, the lad had regarded it as a mere +form of words, for he did not see how he could in any way expedite +her sailing. As soon, however, as they had gone on board, and +Ned had told Peters that the captain had given his consent to his +sailing at once, the burgomaster said: "You can scarce set sail +before the tide turns, Master Peters, for the wind is so light that +you would make but little progress if you did. From what Master +Martin tells me you came off so hurriedly from Amsterdam that you +had no time to get ballast on board. It would be very venturesome +to start for a voyage to England unless with something in your +hold. I will give orders that you shall be furnished at once with +sandbags, otherwise you would have to wait your turn with the other +vessels lying here; for ballast is, as you know, a rare commodity +in Holland, and we do not like parting even with our sand hills. +In the meantime, as you have well nigh six hours before you get +under way, I will go round among my friends and see if I cannot +procure you a little cargo that may pay some of the expenses of +your voyage." + +Accordingly the burgomaster proceeded at once to visit several of +the principal merchants, and, representing that it was the clear +duty of the townsfolk to do what they could for the men who had +fought so bravely against the Spaniards, he succeeded in obtaining +from them a considerable quantity of freight upon good terms; and +so zealously did he push the business that in a very short time +drays began to arrive alongside the Good Venture, and a number of +men were speedily at work in transferring the contents to her hold, +and before evening she had taken on board a goodly amount of cargo. + +Ned wrote a letter to his mother telling her what had taken place, +and saying that his father would be glad for her to come over to +be with him, but that he left it to her to decide whether to bring +the girls over or not. He said no word of the events at Vordwyk; +but merely mentioned they had learned that a spy had denounced his +father to the Spaniards as having used expressions hostile to the +king and the religious persecutions, and that on this account he +would have been arrested had he not at once put to sea. Peters was +charged to say nothing as to what he had heard about the Plomaerts +unless she pressed him with questions. He was to report briefly +that they were so busy with the unloading of the ship at Amsterdam +that Captain Martin had only once been ashore, and leave it to be +inferred that he only landed to see the merchants to whom the cargo +was consigned. + +"Of course, Peters, if my mother presses you as to whether any +news has been received from Vordwyk, you must tell the truth; but +if it can be concealed from her it will be much the best. She will +have anxiety enough concerning my father." + +"I will see," Peters said, "what can be done. Doubtless at first +she will be so filled with the thought of your father's danger +that she will not think much of anything else; but on the voyage +she will have time to turn her thoughts in other directions, and she +is well nigh sure to ask about her father and brothers. I shall be +guided in my answers by her condition. Mistress Martin is a sensible +woman, and not a girl who will fly into hysterics and rave like a +madwoman. + +"It may be too, she will feel the one blow less for being so taken +up with the other; however, I will do the best I can in the matter, +Master Ned. Truly your friend the burgomaster is doing us right +good service. I had looked to lose this voyage to England, and that +the ten days I should be away would be fairly lost time; but now, +although we shall not have a full hold, the freight will be ample +to pay all expenses and to leave a good profit beside." + +As soon as the tide turned the hatches were put on, the vessel was +warped out from her berth, and a few minutes later was under sail. + +Ned had been busy helping to stow away the cargo as fast as it +came on board, twice running up to see how his father was getting +on. Each time he was told by the woman whom the burgomaster had +now engaged to act as nurse, that he was sleeping quietly. When he +returned after seeing the Good Venture fairly under way, he found +on peeping quietly into the room that Captain Martin had just woke. + +"I have had a nice sleep, Ned," he said, as the lad went up to his +bedside. "I see it is already getting dark. Has the brig sailed?" + +"She has just gone out of port, father. The wind is light and it +was no use starting until tide turned; although, indeed, the tides +are of no great account in these inland waters. Still, we had to +take some ballast on board as our hold was empty, and they might +meet with storms on their way home; so they had to wait for that. +But, indeed, after all, they took in but little ballast, for the +burgomaster bestirred himself so warmly in our favour that the +merchants sent down goods as fast as we could get them on board, +and short as the time was, the main hold was well nigh half full +before we put on the hatches; so that her voyage home will not be +without a good profit after all." + +"That is good news, Ned; for although as far as I am concerned the +money is of no great consequence one way or the other, I am but +part owner, and the others might well complain at my sending the +ship home empty to fetch my wife instead of attending to their +interests." + +"I am sure they would not have done that, father, seeing how well +you do for them, and what good money the Venture earns. Why, I +have heard you say she returns her value every two years. So that +they might well have gone without a fortnight's earnings without +murmuring." + +"I don't suppose they would have murmured, Ned, for they are all +good friends of mine, and always seem well pleased with what I do +for them. Still, in matters of business it is always well to be +strict and regular; and I should have deemed it my duty to have +calculated the usual earnings of the ship for the time she was +away, and to have paid my partners their share as if she had been +trading as usual. It is not because the ship is half mine and that +I and my partners make good profit out of her, that I have a right +to divert her from her trade for my own purposes. As you say, my +partners might be well content to let me do so; but that is not +the question, I should not be content myself. + +"We should always in business work with a good conscience, being +more particular about the interests of those who trust us than of +our own. Indeed, on the bare ground of expediency it is best to do +so; for then, if misfortune happens, trade goes bad, or your vessel +is cast away, they will make good allowance for you, knowing that +you are a loser as well as they, and that at all times you have +thought as much of them as of yourself. Lay this always to heart, +lad. It is unlikely that I shall go to sea much more, and ere long +you will be in command of the Good Venture. Always think more of +the interests of those who trust you than of your own. + +"They have put their money into the ship, relying upon their +partner's skill and honesty and courage. Even at a loss to yourself +you should show them always that this confidence is not misplaced. +Do your duty and a little more, lad. Most men do their duty. It is +the little more that makes the difference between one man and the +other. I have tried always to do a little more, and I have found +my benefit from it in the confidence and trust of my partners in +the ship, and of the merchants with whom I do business. However, I +am right glad that the ship is not going back empty. I shall reckon +how much we should have received for the freight that was promised +me at Amsterdam, then you will give me an account of what is to be +paid by the merchants here. The difference I shall make up, as is +only right, seeing that it is entirely from my own imprudence in +expressing my opinion upon affairs particular to myself, and in +no way connected with the ship, that I was forced to leave without +taking in that cargo." + +Ned listened in silence to his father's words, and resolved to +lay to heart the lessons they conveyed. He was proud of the high +standing and estimation in which his father was held by all who +knew him, and he now recognized fully for the first time how he +had won that estimation. It was not only that he was a good sailor, +but that in all things men were assured that his honour could +be implicitly relied upon, and that he placed the interest of his +employers beyond his own. + +After the first day or two Ned could see but little change in his +father's condition; he was very weak and low, and spoke but seldom. +Doubtless his bodily condition was aggravated now by the thought +that must be ever present to him -- that his active career was +terminated. He might, indeed, be able when once completely cured +to go to sea again, but he would no longer be the active sailor he +had been; able to set an example of energy to his men when the winds +blew high and the ship was in danger. And unless fully conscious +that he was equal to discharging all the duties of his position, +Captain Martin was not the man to continue to hold it. + +Ned longed anxiously for the return of the Good Venture. He knew +that his mother's presence would do much for his father, and that +whatever her own sorrows might be she would cheer him. Captain +Martin never expressed any impatience for her coming; but when +each morning he asked Ned, the first thing, which way the wind was +blowing, his son knew well enough what he was thinking of. In the +meantime Ned had been making inquiries, and he arranged for the +hire of a comfortable house, whose inhabitants being Catholics, +had, when Enkhuizen declared for the Prince of Orange, removed +to Amsterdam. For although the Prince insisted most earnestly and +vigorously that religious toleration should be extended to the +Catholics, and that no one should suffer for their religion, all were +not so tolerant; and when the news arrived of wholesale massacres +of Protestants by Alva's troops, the lower class were apt to rise +in riot, and to retaliate by the destruction of the property of +the Catholics in their towns. + +Ned had therefore no difficulty in obtaining the use of the house, +on extremely moderate terms, from the agent in whose hands its +owner had placed his affairs in Enkhuizen. The burgomaster's wife +had at his request engaged two female servants, and the nurse +would of course accompany her patient. The burgomaster and his wife +had both protested against any move being made; but Ned, although +thanking them earnestly for their hospitable offer, pointed out that +it might be a long time before his father could be about, that it +was good for his mother to have the occupation of seeing to the +affairs of the house to divert her thoughts from the sick bed, and, +as it was by no means improbable that she would bring his sisters +with her, it would be better in all respects that they should have +a house of their own. The doctors having been consulted, agreed +that it would be better for the wounded man to be among his own +people, and that no harm would come of removing him carefully to +another house. + +"A change, even a slight one, is often a benefit," they agreed; +"and more than counterbalances any slight risk that there may be +in a patient's removal from one place to another, providing that +it be gently and carefully managed." + +Therefore it was arranged that as soon as the Good Venture was seen +approaching, Captain Martin should be carried to his new abode, where +everything was kept prepared for him, and that his wife should go +direct to him there. + + + +CHAPTER V + +NED'S RESOLVE + + +On the ninth morning after the departure of the brig Ned was up +as soon as daylight appeared, and made his way to the walls. The +watchman there, with whom he had had several talks during the last +two days, said: + +"There is a brig, hull down, seaward, and I should say that she is +about the size of the one you are looking for. She looks, too, as +if she were heading for this port." + +"I think that is she," Ned said, gazing intently at the distant +vessel. "It seems to me that I can make out that her jib is lighter +in colour than the rest of her canvas. If that is so I have no +doubt about its being the Good Venture, for we blew our jib away +in a storm off Ostend, and had a new one about four months ago." + +"That is her then, young master," the watchman said, shading his +eyes and looking intently at the brig. "Her jib is surely of lighter +colour than the rest of her canvas." + +With this confirmation Ned at once ran round to the house he had +taken, and told the servants to have fires lighted, and everything +in readiness for the reception of the party. + +"My father," he said, "will be brought here in the course of an +hour or so. My mother will arrive a little later." + +Ned then went round to the doctor, who had promised that he would +personally superintend the removing of his patient, and would bring +four careful men and a litter for his conveyance. He said that +he would be round at the burgomaster's in half an hour. Ned then +went back to his father. Captain Martin looked round eagerly as he +entered. + +"Yes, father," Ned said, answering the look; "there is a brig in +sight, which is, I am pretty sure, the Good Venture. She will be +in port in the course of a couple of hours. I have just been round +to Doctor Harreng, and he will be here in half an hour with the +litter to take you over to the new house." + +Captain Martin gave an exclamation of deep thankfulness, and then +lay for some time with his eyes closed, and spoke but little until +the arrival of the doctor and the men with the litter. + +"You must first of all drink this broth that has just been sent up +for you," the surgeon said, "and then take a spoonful of cordial. +It will be a fatigue, you know, however well we manage it; and you +must be looking as bright and well as you can by the time your good +wife arrives, else she will have a very bad opinion of the doctors +of Enkhuizen." + +Captain Martin did as he was ordered. The men then carefully raised +the mattress with him upon it, and placed it upon the litter. + +"I think we will cover you up altogether," the doctor said, "as we +go along through the streets. The morning air is a good deal keener +than the atmosphere of this room, and you won't want to look about." + +The litter was therefore completely covered with a blanket, and +was then lifted and taken carefully down the broad staircase and +through the streets. The burgomaster's wife had herself gone on +before to see that everything was comfortably prepared, and when +the bed was laid down on the bedstead and the blanket turned back +Captain Martin saw a bright room with a fire burning on the hearth, +and the burgomaster's wife and nurse beside him, while Ned and the +doctor were at the foot of the bed. + +"You have not suffered, I hope, in the moving, Captain Martin?" +the burgomaster's wife asked. + +"Not at all," he said. "I felt somewhat faint at first, but the +movement has been so easy that it soon passed off. I was glad my +head was covered, for I do not think that I could have stood the +sight of the passing objects." + +"Now you must drink another spoonful of cordial," the doctor said, +"and then lie quiet. I shall not let you see your wife when she +arrives if your pulse is beating too rapidly. So far you have been +going on fairly, and we must not have you thrown back." + +"I shall not be excited," Captain Martin replied. "Now that I +know the vessel is in sight I am contented enough; but I have been +fearing lest the brig might fall in with a Spaniard as she came +through the islands, and there would be small mercy for any on board +had she been detected and captured. Now that I know she is coming +to port safely, I can wait quietly enough. Now, Ned, you can be +off down to the port." + +The doctor went out with Ned and charged him strictly to impress +upon his mother the necessity for self restraint and quiet when +she saw her husband. + +"I am not over satisfied with his state," he said, "and much will +depend on this meeting. If it passes off well and he is none the +worse for it tomorrow, I shall look to see him mend rapidly; but +if, on the other hand, he is agitated and excited, fever may set +in at once, and in that case, weak as he is, his state will be very +serious." + +"I understand, sir, and will impress it upon my mother; but I do +not think you need fear for her. Whatever she feels she will, I am +sure, carry out your instructions." + +Ned went down to the port. He found that the brig was but a quarter +of a mile away. He could make out female figures on board, and knew +that, as he had rather expected would be the case, his mother had +brought his sisters with her. Jumping into a boat he was rowed off +to the vessel, and climbing the side was at once in his mother's +arms. Already he had answered the question that Peters had shouted +before he was halfway from the shore, and had replied that his father +was going on as well as could be expected. Thus when Ned leapt on +board his mother and the girls were in tears at the relief to the +anxiety that had oppressed them during the voyage lest they should +at its end find they had arrived too late. + +"And he is really better?" were Mrs. Martin's first words as she +released Ned from her embrace. + +"I don't know that he is better, mother, but he is no worse. He +is terribly weak; but the doctor tells me that if no harm comes to +him from his agitation in meeting you, he expects to see him mend +rapidly. He has been rather fretting about your safety, and I think +that the knowledge that you are at hand has already done him good. +His voice was stronger when he spoke just before I started than +it has been for some days. Only, above all things, the doctor says +you must restrain your feelings and be calm and quiet when you first +meet him. And now, girls, how are you both?" he asked turning to +them. "Not very well, I suppose; for I know you have always shown +yourselves bad sailors when you have come over with mother." + +"The sea has not been very rough," Janet said; "and except when we +first got out to sea we have not been ill." + +"What are you going to do about the girls?" Mrs. Martin asked. "Of +course I must go where your father is, but I cannot presume upon +the kindness of strangers so far as to quarter the girls upon them." + +"That is all arranged, mother. Father agreed with me that it would +not be pleasant for any of you being with strangers, and I have +therefore taken a house; and he has just been moved there, so you +will have him all to yourself." + +"That is indeed good news," Mrs. Martin said. "However kind people +are, one is never so comfortable as at home. One is afraid of +giving trouble, and altogether it is different. I have heard all +the news, my boy. Master Peters tried his best to conceal it from +me, but I was sure by his manner that there was something wrong. +It was better that I should know at once," she went on, wiping her +eyes. "Terrible as it all is, I have scarce time to think about +it now when my mind is taken up with your father's danger. And it +hardly came upon me even as a surprise, for I have long felt that +some evil must have befallen them or they would have assuredly +managed to send me word of themselves before now." + +By this time the Good Venture had entered the port, and had drawn +up close beside one of the wharves. As soon as the sails were lowered +and the warps made fast, Peters directed three of the seamen to +bring up the boxes from the cabin, and to follow him. Ned then led +the way to the new house. + +"I will go up first, mother, and tell them that you have come." + +Mrs. Martin quietly removed her hat and cloak, followed Ned upstairs, +and entered her husband's room with a calm and composed face. + +"Well, my dear husband," she said almost cheerfully, "I have come +to nurse you. You see when you get into trouble it is us women that +you men fall back upon after all." + +The doctor, who had retired into the next room when he heard that +Mrs. Martin had arrived, nodded his head with a satisfied air. "She +will do," he said. "I have not much fear for my patient now." + +Ned, knowing that he would not be wanted upstairs for some time, +went out with Peters after the baggage had been set down in the +lower room. + +"So you had a fine voyage of it, Peters?" + +"We should have been better for a little more wind, both coming and +going," the mate said; "but there was nothing much to complain of." + +"You could not have been long in the river then, Peters?" + +"We were six and thirty hours in port. We got in at the top of tide +on Monday morning, and went down with the ebb on Tuesday evening. +First, as in duty bound, I went to see our good dame and give her +your letter, and answer her questions. It was a hard business that, +and I would as lief have gone before the queen herself to give +her an account of things as to have gone to your mother. Of course +I hoisted the flag as we passed up the river. I knew that some of +them were sure to be on watch at Rotherhithe, and that they would +run in and tell her that the Good Venture was in port again. I had +rather hoped that our coming back so soon might lead her to think +that something was wrong, for she would have known that we could +scarce have gone to Amsterdam and discharged, loaded up again, and +then back here, especially as the wind had been light ever since +she sailed. And sure enough the thought had struck her; for when +I caught sight of the garden gate one of your sisters was there on +the lookout, and directly she saw me she ran away in. I hurried on +as fast as I could go then, for I knew that Mistress Martin would +be sorely frightened when she heard that it was neither your father +nor you. As I got there your mother was standing at the door. She +was just as white as death. 'Cheer up, mistress,' I said as cheery +as I could speak. 'I have bad news for you, but it might have been +a deal worse. The captain's got a hurt, and Master Ned is stopping +to nurse him.' + +"She looked at me as if she would read me through. 'That's the +truth as I am a Christian man, mistress,' I said. 'It has been a +bad business, but it might have been a deal worse. The doctor said +that he was doing well.' Then your mother gave a deep sigh, and +I thought for a moment she was going to faint, and ran forward to +catch her; but she seemed to make an effort and straighten herself +up, just as I have seen the brig do when a heavy sea has flooded +her decks and swept all before it. + +"'Thanks be to the good God that he is not taken from me,' she +said. 'Now I can bear anything. Now, Peters, tell me all about it.' + +" 'I ain't good at telling a story, Mistress Martin,' I said; 'but +here is Master Ned's letter. When you have read that maybe I can +answer questions as to matters of which he may not have written. I +will stand off and on in the garden, ma'am, and then you can read +it comfortable like indoors, and hail me when you have got to the +bottom of it.' It was not many minutes before one of your sisters +called me in. They had all been crying, and I felt more uncomfortable +than I did when those Spanish rascals gave us a broadside as I went +in, for I was afraid she would so rake me with questions that she +would get out of me that other sad business; and it could hardly +be expected that even the stoutest ship should weather two such +storms, one after the other. + +"'I don't understand it all, Master Peters,' she said, 'for my son +gives no good reason why the Spaniards should thus have attacked an +English ship; but we can talk of that afterwards. All that matters +at present is, that my husband has been wounded and has lost his +leg, and lies in some danger; for although Ned clearly makes the +best of it, no man can suffer a hurt like that without great risk +of life. He wishes me to go over at once. As to the girls, he says +I can take them with me or leave them with a friend here. But they +wish, as is natural, greatly to go; and it were better for all +reasons that they did so. Were they left here they would be in +anxiety about their father's state, and as it may be long before he +can be moved I should not like to leave them in other charge than +my own. When will you be ready to sail again?" + +"'I shall be ready by tomorrow evening's tide, Mistress Martin,' I +said. 'I have cargo on board that I must discharge, and must have +carpenters and sailmakers on board to repair some of the damages +we suffered in this action. I do not think I can possibly be ready +to drop down the river before high water tomorrow, which will be +about six o'clock. I will send a boat to the stairs here at half +past five to take you and your trunks on board.' + +"'We shall be ready,' she said. 'As Ned says that my husband is well +cared for in the house of the burgomaster, and has every comfort +and attention, there is nothing I need take over for him.' I said +that I was sure he had all he could require, and that she need take +no trouble on that score; and then said that with her permission +I would go straight back on board again, seeing there was much to +do, and that it all came on my shoulders just at present. + +"I had left the bosun in charge, and told him to get the hatches +off and begin to get up the cargo as soon as he had stowed the +sails and made all tidy; for I had not waited for that, but had +rowed ashore as soon as the anchor was dropped. So without going +back to the brig I crossed the river and landed by the steps at +the bridge, and took the letters to the merchants for whom I had +goods, and prayed them to send off boats immediately, as it was +urgent for me to discharge as soon as possible; then I went to the +merchants whose names you had given me, and who ship goods with +us regularly, to tell them that the Venture was in port but would +sail again tomorrow evening, and would take what cargo they could +get on board for Enkhuizen or any of the seaward ports, but not +for Amsterdam or other places still in the hands of the Spaniards. + +"Then I went to the lord mayor and swore an information before +him to lay before the queen and the council that the Spaniards had +wantonly, and without offence given, attacked the Good Venture and +inflicted much damage upon her, and badly wounded her captain; and +would have sunk her had we not stoutly defended ourselves and beat +them off. I was glad when all that was over, Master Ned; for, as +you know, I know nought about writing. My business is to sail the +ship under your father's orders; but as to talking with merchants +who press you with questions, and seem to think that you have nought +to do but to stand and gossip, this is not in my way, and I wished +sorely that you had been with me, and could have taken all this +business into your hands. + +"Then I went down to the wharves, and soon got some carpenters at +work to mend the bulwarks and put some fresh planks on the deck +where the shot had ploughed it up. Luckily enough I heard of a man +who had some sails that he had bought from the owners of a ship +which was cast away down near the mouth of the river. They were a +little large for the Venture; but I made a bargain with him in your +father's name, and got them on board and set half a dozen sailmakers +to work upon them, and they were ready by the next afternoon. The +others will do again when they have got some new cloths in, and a +few patches; but if we had gone out with a dozen holes in them the +first Spaniard who saw us, and who had heard of our fight with the +Don Pedro, would have known us at once. + +"I was thankful, I can tell you, when I got on board again. Just +as I did so some lighters came out, and we were hard at work till +dusk getting out the cargo. The next morning at daylight fresh +cargo began to come out to us, and things went on well, and would +have gone better had not people come on board pestering me with +questions about our fight with the Spaniards. And just at noon two +of the queen's officers came down and must needs have the whole +story from beginning to end; and they had brought a clerk with +them to write it down from my lips. They said we had done right +gallantly, and that no doubt I should be wanted the next day at +the royal council to answer other questions touching the affair. +You may be sure I said no word about the fact that in six hours we +should be dropping down the river; for like enough if I had they +would have ordered me not to go, and as I should have gone whether +they had or not -- seeing that Captain Martin was looking for his +wife, and that the mistress was anxious to be off -- it might have +led to trouble when I got back again. + +"By the afternoon we had got some thirty tons of goods on board, +and although that is but a third of what she would carry, I was well +content that we had done so much. After the new sails had come on +board I had put a gang to work to bend them, and had all ready and +the anchor up just as the tide turned. We had not dropped down many +hundred yards when the boat with Mistress Martin and your sisters +came alongside; and thankful I was when it came on dark and we +were slipping down the river with a light southwesterly wind, for +I had been on thorns all the afternoon lest some messenger might +arrive from the council with orders for me to attend there. I did +not speak much to your mother that evening, for it needs all a +man's attention to work down the river at night. + +"The next morning I had my breakfast brought up on deck instead +of going down, for, as you may guess, I did not want to have your +mother questioning me; but presently your sister came up with a +message to me that Mistress Martin would be glad to have a quarter +of an hour's conversation with me as soon as duty would permit me +to leave deck. So after awhile I braced myself up and went below, +but I tell you that I would rather have gone into action again with +the Don Pedro. She began at once, without parley or courtesies, by +firing a broadside right into me. + +"'I don't think, Master Peters, that you have told me yet all there +is to be told.' + +"That took me between wind and water, you see. However, I made a +shift to bear up. + +"'Well, Mistress Martin,' says I, 'I don't say as I have given you +all particulars. I don't know as I mentioned to you as Joe Wiggins +was struck down by a splinter from the longboat and was dazed for +full two hours, but he came round again all right, and was fit for +duty next day.' + +"Mrs. Martin heard me quietly, and then she said: + +"'That will not do, John Peters; you know well what I mean. You +need not fear to tell me the news; I have long been fearing it. +My husband is not one to talk loosely in the streets and to bring +upon himself the anger of the Spaniards. He must have had good +cause before he said words that spoken there would place his life +in peril. What has happened at Vordwyk?" + +"Well, Master Ned, I stood there as one struck stupid. What was there +to say? I am a truthful man, but I would have told a lie if I had +thought it would have been any good. But there she was, looking +quietly at me, and I knew as she would see in a moment whether +I was speaking truth or not. She waited quiet ever so long and at +last I said: + +"'The matter is in this wise, Mistress Martin. My orders was I was +to hold my tongue about all business not touching the captain or +the affairs of this ship. When you sees the captain it's for you +to ask him questions, and for him to answer if he sees right and +good to do so.' + +"She put her hand over her face and sat quiet for some time, and +when she looked up again her eyes were full of tears and her cheeks +wet; then she said in a low tone: + +"'All, Peters, -- are they all gone?' + +"Well, Master Ned, I was swabbing my own eyes; for it ain't in a +man's nature to see a woman suffering like that, and so quiet and +brave, without feeling somehow as if all the manliness had gone out +of him. I could not say nothing. What could I say, knowing what the +truth was? Then she burst out a-crying and a-sobbing, and I steals +off without a word, and goes on deck and sets the men a-hauling at +the sheets and trimming the sails, till I know there was not one +of them but cussed me in his heart and wished that the captain was +back again. + +"Mistress Martin did not say no word about it afterwards. She came +up on deck a few times, and asked me more about the captain, and +how he looked, and what he was doing when he got his wound. And +of course I told her all about it, full and particular, and how he +had made every one else lie down, and stood there at the tiller as +we went under the stern of the Spaniard, and that none of us knew +he was hit until it was all over; and how we had peppered them with +our four carronades, and all about it. But mostly she stopped down +below till we hauled our wind and headed up the Zuider Zee towards +Enkhuizen." + +"Well, now it is all over, Peters," Ned said, "there is no doubt +that it is better she should have heard the news from you instead +of my father having to tell her." + +"I don't deny that that may be so, Master Ned, now that it is all +over and done; but never again will John Peters undertake a job +where he is got to keep his mouth shut when a woman wants to get +something out of him. Lor' bless you, lad, they just see right +through you; and you feel that, twist and turn as you will, they +will get it out of you sooner or later. There, I started with +my mind quite made up that orders was to be obeyed, and that your +mother was to be kept in the dark about it till she got here; and +I had considered with myself that in such a case as this it would +be no great weight upon my conscience if I had to make up some kind +of a yarn that would satisfy her; and yet in three minutes after +she got me into that cabin she was at the bottom of it all." + +"You see, she has been already very uneasy at not hearing for so +long from her father and brothers, Peters; and that and the fact +that my father had spoken openly against the Spanish authorities +set her upon the track, and enabled her to put the questions +straightforwardly to you." + +"I suppose that was it, sir. And now, has the captain said anything +about what is going to be done with the ship till he gets well?" + +"Nothing whatever, Peters. He has spoken very little upon any +subject. I know he has been extremely anxious for my mother to +arrive, though he has said but little about it. I fancy that for +the last few days he has not thought that he should recover. But the +doctor told me I must not be uneasy upon that ground, for that he +was now extremely weak, and men, even the bravest and most resolute +when in health, are apt to take a gloomy view when utterly weak and +prostrate. His opinion was that my mother's coming would probably +cheer him up and enable him to rally. + +"I think, too, that he has been dreading having to tell her the +terrible news about her father and brothers; and now he knows that +she is aware of that it will be a load off his mind. Besides, I +know that for his sake she will be cheerful and bright, and with +her and the girls with him, he will feel as if at home. The doctor +told me that the mind has a great influence over the body, and +that a man with cheerful surroundings had five chances to one as +against one amongst strangers, and with no one to brighten him up. +I have no doubt that as soon as he gets a little stronger he will +arrange what is to be done with the brig, but I am sure it will be +a long time before he can take the command again himself." + +"Ay, I fear it will be," Peters agreed. "It is a pity you are not +four or five years older, Master Ned. I do not say that I couldn't +bring the ship into any port in Holland; for, having been sailing +backwards and forwards here, man and boy, for over thirty years, I +could do so pretty nigh blindfold. But what is the good of bringing +a ship to a port if you have not got the head to see about getting +a cargo for her, and cannot read the bills of lading, or as much +as sign your name to a customs list. + +"No, Master Ned, I am not fit for a captain, that is quite certain. +But though I would not mind serving under another till your father +is fit to take charge again, I could not work on board the Venture +under another for good. I have got a little money saved up, and +would rather buy a share in a small coaster and be my own master +there. After serving under your father for nigh twenty years, I +know I should not get on with another skipper nohow." + +"Well, Peters, it is no use talking it over now, because I have +no idea what my father's decision will be. I hope above all things +that he will be able to take command again, but I have great doubts +in my own mind whether he will ever do so. If he had lost the leg +below the knee it would not so much have mattered; but as it is, +with the whole leg stiff, he would have great difficulty in getting +about, especially if the ship was rolling in a heavy sea." + +John Peters shook his head gravely, for this was the very thing +he had turned in his mind over and over again during the voyage to +and from England. + +"Your cargo is not all for this place, I suppose, Peters?" + +"No, sir. Only two or three tons which are down in the forehold +together are for Enkhuizen, the rest are for Leyden and the Hague. +I told the merchants that if they put their goods on board I must +sail past the ports and make straight on to Enkhuizen; for that +first of all I must bring Mistress Martin to the captain, but that +I would go round and discharge their goods as soon as I had brought +her here. It was only on these terms I agreed to take the cargo." + +"That will do very well, Peters. I will go on board with you at +once, and see to whom your goods are consigned here, and warn them +to receive them at once. You will get them on shore by tonight, +and then tomorrow I will sail with you to Leyden and the Hague, +and aid you in getting your cargo into the right hands there. Now +that my mother and the girls are here my father will be able to +spare me. We can be back here again in four or five days, and by +that time I hope he will be so far recovered as to be able to think +matters over, and come to some decision as to the future management +of the brig. Of course if he wishes me to stay on board her I shall +obey his orders, whether you or another are the captain." + +"Why, of course, you will remain on board, Master Ned. What else +should you do?" + +"Well, Peters, my own mind is set upon joining the Prince of +Orange, and fighting against the Spaniards. Before I sailed from +home I told my sisters that was what I was longing to do, for I +could scarce sleep for thinking of all the cruelties and massacres +that they carried out upon the people of the Netherlands, who are, +by my mother's side, my kinsfolk. Since then I have scarce thought +of aught else. They have murdered my grandfather and uncles and one +of my aunts; they have shot away my father's leg, and would have +taken his life had he not escaped out of their hands; so that what +was before a longing is now a fixed idea, and if my father will +but give me permission, assuredly I will carry it out. + +"There are many English volunteers who have already crossed the +sea to fight against these murderers, although unconnected by ties +of blood as I am, and who have been brought here to fight solely +from pity and horror, and because, as all know, Spain is the enemy +of England as well as of the Netherlands, and would put down our +freedom and abolish our religion as she has done here. I know that +my wishes, in this as in all other matters, must give way to those +of my father. Still I hope he may be moved to consent to them." + +Ned thought it better to allow his father and mother to remain +quietly together for some time, and did not therefore return to +the house until twelve o'clock, when he knew that dinner would be +prepared; for his mother was so methodical in her ways that everything +would go on just as at home directly she took charge of the affairs +of the house. He went up for a few minutes before dinner, and was +struck with the change in the expression of his father's face. +There was a peaceful and contented look in his eyes, and it almost +seemed to Ned that his face was less hollow and drawn than before. +Ned told him that it would be necessary for the brig to go round to +Leyden and the Hague, and that Peters had proposed that he should +go with him to see the merchants, and arrange the business parts +of the affair. + +"That will do very well," Captain Martin said. "You are young, +Ned, to begin having dealings with the Dutch merchants, but when +you tell them how it comes that I am not able to call upon them +myself, they will doubtless excuse your youth." + +"Do you wish us to take any cargo there, father, if we can get +any?" + +Captain Martin did not answer for some little time, then he said: + +"No, Ned, I think you had best return here in the ship. By that time +I shall, I hope, be capable of thinking matters over, and deciding +upon my arrangements for the future. When is Peters thinking of +sailing?" + +"By tomorrow morning's tide, sir. He said that he could be ready +perhaps by this evening; but that unless you wished it otherwise +he would not start till tomorrow's tide, as he will thereby avoid +going out between the islands at night." + +"That will be the best way, Ned. If the winds are fair he will be +at the Hague before nightfall." + +The day after his return Ned took an opportunity of speaking to his +mother as to his wish to take service with the Prince of Orange, +and to aid in the efforts that the people of the Netherlands were +making to free themselves from their persecutors. His mother, as +he feared would be the case, expressed a strong opposition to his +plan. + +"You are altogether too young, Ned, even if it were a matter that +concerned you." + +"It does concern me, mother. Are you not Dutch? And though I was +born in England and a subject of the queen, it is natural I should +feel warmly in the matter; besides we know that many English are +already coming over here to help. Have not the Spanish killed my +relations, and unless they are driven back they will altogether +exterminate the Protestants of the Netherlands? Have they not +already been doomed to death regardless of age and sex by Philip's +proclamation? and do not the Spaniards whenever they capture a town +slay well nigh all within it?" + +"That is all true enough," his mother agreed; "but proves in no +way that you are a fit age to meddle in the affair." + +"I am sixteen, mother; and a boy of sixteen who has been years at +sea is as strong as one of eighteen brought up on land. You have +told me yourself that I look two or three years older than I am, +and methinks I have strength to handle pike and axe." + +"That may be perfectly true," said Mrs. Martin, "but even supposing +all other things were fitting, how could we spare you now when +your father will be months before he can follow his trade on the +sea again, even if he is ever able to do so?" + +"That is the thing, mother, that weighs with me. I know not what my +father's wishes may be in that respect, and of course if he holds +that I can be of use to him I must give up my plan; but I want you +at any rate to mention it to him. And I pray you not to add your +objections, but to let him decide on the matter according to his +will." + +"There will be no occasion for me to add objections, Ned. I do not +think your father will listen to such a mad scheme for a moment." + +It was not until three or four days later that Mrs. Martin, seeing +that her husband was stronger and better, and was taking an interest +in what passed in the house, fulfilled her promise to Ned by telling +his father of his wishes. + +"You must not be angry with him," she said when she had finished; +"for he spoke beautifully, and expressed himself as perfectly willing +to yield his wishes to yours in the matter. I told him, of course, +that it was a mad brained scheme, and not to be thought of. Still, +as he was urgent I should lay it before you, I promised to do so." + +Captain Martin did not, as his wife expected, instantly declare +that such a plan was not to be thought of even for a moment, but +lay for some time apparently turning it over in his mind. + +"I know not quite what to say," he said at length. + +"Not know what to say?" his wife repeated in surprise. "Why, husband, +you surely cannot for a moment think of allowing Ned to embark in +so wild a business." + +"There are many English volunteers coming over; some of them not +much older, and not so fit in bodily strength for the work as Ned. +He has, too, the advantage of speaking the language, and can pass +anywhere as a native. You are surprised, Sophie, at my thinking of +this for a moment." + +"But what would you do without him?" she exclaimed in astonishment. + +"That is what I have been thinking as I lay here. I have been +troubled what to do with Ned. He is too young yet to entrust with +all the business of the ship, and the merchants here and at home +would hesitate in doing business with a lad. Moreover, he is too +young to be first mate on board the brig. Peters is a worthy man and +a good sailor, but he can neither read nor write and knows nought +of business; and, therefore, until I am able, if I ever shall be, +to return to the Good Venture, I must have a good seaman as first +mate, and a supercargo to manage the business affairs of the +ship. Were Ned four years older he could be at once first mate and +supercargo. There, you see your objection that I need him falls to +the ground. As to other reasons I will think them over, and speak +to you another time." + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE PRINCE OF ORANGE + + +Mistress Martin was much troubled in her mind by what seemed to +her the unaccountable favour with which her husband had received +Ned's proposal. She did not, however, allow any trace of this +feeling to escape her, nor did she mention to Ned that she had as +yet spoken as to his wishes to his father. The next day Captain +Martin himself renewed the subject. + +"I told you yesterday, Sophie, why in my opinion Ned would at +present be of little aid to me in the matter of the brig, and may +even go further in that respect and say that I think for a time it +will be just as well that he were not on board. Having no established +position there would be no special duties for him to perform. Now, +I have made a point of telling him all about the consignments and +the rates of freight, and have encouraged him always to express +his opinion freely on these matters in order that his intelligence +might thereby be quickened; but if he so expressed himself to the +supercargo the latter might well take offence and difficulties +arise, therefore before you spoke to me I had quite resolved that it +would be best he should sail no more in the Good Venture until old +enough to come in and take the place of second mate and supercargo, +but that I would place him with some captain of my acquaintance, +under whom he would continue to learn his duty for the next three +or four years." + +"That is a good reason, doubtless, husband, why Ned should not sail +in the Venture, but surely no reason at all why he should carry +out this mad fancy of his." + +"No reason, I grant you, wife; but it simply shows that it happens +at this moment we can well spare him. As to the main question, it +is a weighty one. Other young Englishmen have come out to fight for +the Netherlands with far less cause than he has to mix themselves +up in its affairs. Moreover, and this principally, it is borne +strongly upon my mind that it may be that this boy of ours is called +upon to do good service to Holland. It seems to me wife," he went +on, in answer to the look of astonishment upon his wife's face, +"that the hand of Providence is in this matter. + +"I have always felt with you a hatred of the Spaniards and a deep +horror at the cruelties they are perpetrating upon this unhappy +people, and have thought that did the queen give the order for war +against them I would gladly adventure my life and ship in such an +enterprise; further than that I have not gone. But upon that day +when I heard the news of your father and brothers' murder I took +a solemn oath to heaven of vengeance against their slayers, and +resolved that on my return to England I would buy out my partners +in the Good Venture, and with her join the beggars of the sea and +wage war to the death against the Spaniards. It has been willed +otherwise, wife. Within twenty-four hours of my taking that oath +I was struck down and my fighting powers were gone forever. + +"My oath was not accepted. I was not to be an instrument of +God's vengeance upon these murderers. Now, our son, without word +or consultation with me, feels called upon to take up the work I +cannot perform. It happens strangely that he can for the next two +or three years be well spared from his life at sea. That the boy +will do great feats I do not suppose; but he is cool and courageous, +for I marked his demeanour under fire the other day. And it may +be that though he may do no great things in fighting he may be +the means in saving some woman, some child, from the fury of the +Spaniards. If he saved but one, the next three years of his life +will not have been misspent." + +"But he may fall -- he may be killed by the Spaniards!" Mistress +Martin said in great agitation. + +"If it be the will of God, wife, not otherwise. He is exposed to +danger every time he goes to sea. More than once since he first +came on board, the Venture has been in dire peril; who can say that +her next voyage may not be her last. However, I decide nothing now; +tomorrow I will speak to the boy myself and gather from his words +whether this is a mere passing fancy, natural enough to his age and +to the times, or a deep longing to venture his life in the cause +of a persecuted people whose blood runs in his veins, and who have +a faith which is his own and ours." + +Mrs. Martin said no more; her husband's will had, since she married, +been in all matters of importance law to her, and was more so than +ever now that he lay weak and helpless. His words and manner too +had much impressed her. Her whole sympathies were passionately with +her countrymen, and the heavy losses she had so recently sustained +had added vastly to her hatred of the Spaniards. The suggestion, +too, of her husband that though Ned might do no great deeds as a +soldier he might be the means of saving some woman or child's life, +appealed to her womanly feelings. + +She had girls of her own, and the thought that one of like age +might possibly be saved from the horrors of the sack of a city by +Ned's assistance appealed to her with great force. She went about +the house for the rest of the day subdued and quiet. Ned was puzzled +at her demeanour, and had he not seen for himself that his father +was progressing satisfactorily he would have thought that some +relapse had taken place, some unfavourable symptom appeared. But +this was clearly not the reason, and he could only fancy that now +his mother's anxiety as to his father's state was in some degree +abating, she was beginning to feel the loss of her father and +brothers all the more. + +That the request she had promised to make in his name to his father +had anything to do with the matter did not enter his mind. Indeed, +he had begun to regret that he had made it. Not that his intense +longing to take service against the Spaniards was in any way abated, +but he felt it was selfish, now that he might for the first time +be of real use to his parents, for him thus to propose to embark +in adventures on his own account. He had asked his mother to put +the matter before his father, but he had scarce even a hope the +latter would for a moment listen to the proposal. The next morning +after breakfast, as he was about to start for a stroll to the wharf +to have a talk with Peters, his mother said to him quietly: "Put +aside your cap, Ned, your father wishes to speak to you." + +She spoke so gravely that Ned ascended the stairs in some perturbation +of spirit. Doubtless she had spoken to his father, and the latter +was about to rate him severely for his folly in proposing to +desert his duty, and to embark in so wild an adventure as that he +had proposed. He was in no way reassured by the grave tone in which +his father said: + +"Place that chair by my bedside, Ned, and sit down; my voice is +not strong and it fatigues me to speak loud. And now," he went on, +when Ned with a shamefaced expression had seated himself by the +bedside, "this desire that your mother tells me of to fight against +the Spaniards for a time in the service of the Prince of Orange, +how did it first come to you?" + +"Ever since I heard the terrible story of the persecutions here," +Ned replied. "I said to myself then that when I came to be a man I +would take revenge for these horrible murders. Since then the more +I have heard of the persecutions that the people here have suffered +in the cause of their religion, the more I have longed to be able +to give them such aid as I could. I have spoken of it over and over +again to my sisters; but I do not think that I should ever have +ventured to put my desire into words, had it not been for the +terrible news we learnt at Vordwyk. Now, however, that they have +killed my grandfather and uncles and have wounded you, I long more +than ever to join the patriots here; and of course the knowledge +that many young Englishmen were coming out to Brill and Flushing +as volunteers added to my desire. I said to myself if they who are +English are ready to give their lives in the cause of the Hollanders, +why should not I, who speak their language and am of their blood?" + +"You have no desire to do great deeds or to distinguish yourself?" +Captain Martin asked. + +"No, father; I have never so much as thought of that. I could not +imagine that I, as a boy, could be of any great service. I thought +I might, perhaps, being so young, be able to be of use in passing +among the Spaniards and carrying messages where a man could not +get through. I thought sometimes I might perhaps carry a warning +in time to enable women to escape with their children from a town +that was about to be beleaguered, and I hoped that if I did stand +in the ranks to face the Spaniards I should not disgrace my nation +and blood. I know, father, that it was presumptuous for me to think +that I could be of any real use; and if you are against it I will, +of course, as I told my mother, submit myself cheerfully to your +wishes." + +"I am glad to see, Ned, that in this matter you are actuated by +right motives, and not moved by any boyish idea of adventure or of +doing feats of valour. This is no ordinary war, my boy. There is +none of the chivalry of past times in the struggle here. It is one +of life and death -- grim, earnest, and determined. On one side +is Philip with the hosts of Spain, the greatest power in Europe, +determined to crush out the life of these poor provinces, to stamp +out the religion of the country, to leave not one man, woman, or +child alive who refuses to attend mass and to bow the knee before +the Papist images; on the other side you have a poor people tenanting +a land snatched from the sea, and held by constant and enduring +labour, equally determined that they will not abjure their religion, +that they will not permit the Inquisition to be established among +them, and ready to give lives and homes and all in the cause +of religious liberty. They have no thought of throwing off their +allegiance to Spain, if Spain will but be tolerant. The Prince +of Orange issues his orders and proclamations as the stadtholder +and lieutenant of the king, and declares that he is warring for +Philip, and designs only to repel those who, by their persecution +and cruelty, are dishonouring the royal cause. + +"This cannot go on forever, and in time the Netherlands will be +driven to entreat some other foreign monarch to take them under his +protection. In this war there is no talk of glory. Men are fighting +for their religion, their homes, their wives and families. They +know that the Spaniards show neither quarter nor mercy, and that +it is scarce more than a question between death by the sword and +death by torture and hanging. There is no mercy for prisoners. The +town that yields on good conditions is sacked and destroyed as is +one taken by storm, for in no case have the Spaniards observed the +conditions they have made, deeming oaths taken to heretics to be +in no way binding on their consciences. + +"Thus, Ned, those who embark upon this war engage in a struggle in +which there is no honour nor glory, nor fame nor reward to be won, +but one in which almost certain death stares them in the face, and +which, so far as I can see, can end only in the annihilation of +the people of this country, or in the expulsion of the Spaniards. +I do not say that there is no glory to be gained; but it is not +personal glory. In itself, no cause was ever more glorious than +that of men who struggle, not to conquer territory, not to gather +spoil, not to gratify ambition, but for freedom, for religion, for +hearth and home, and to revenge the countless atrocities inflicted +upon them by their oppressors. After what I have said, do you still +wish to embark upon this struggle?" + +"I do wish it, father," Ned said firmly. "I desire it above all +things, if you and my mother can spare me." + +Captain Martin then repeated to Ned the reasons that he had given +his wife for consenting to his carrying out his wishes: the fact +that there was no place for him at present on board the Good Venture, +the oath of vengeance upon the Spaniards that he had taken, and +his impression that although he himself could not carry out that +oath, its weight had been transferred to his son, whose desire to +take up the work he had intended to carry out, just at this moment, +seemed to him to be a special design of Providence. + +"Now Ned," he concluded, "you understand the reasons that sway +me in giving my consent to your desire to do what you can for the +cause of religion and liberty. I do not propose that you should +at present actually take up arms that I question if you are strong +enough to wield. I will pray the burgomaster to give you letters +of introduction to the Prince, saying you are a young Englishman +ready and desirous of doing all that lies in your power for the +cause; that you speak the language as a native, and will be ready +to carry his messages wheresoever he may require them to be sent; +that you can be relied upon to be absolutely faithful, and have +entered the cause in no light spirit or desire for personal credit +or honour, but as one who has suffered great wrong in the loss of +near relatives at the hands of the Spaniards, and is wishful only +of giving such services as he can to the cause. + +"It may be that coming with such recommendation the Prince will +see some way in which he can turn your services to account. And now +leave me, my boy. I am wearied with all this talking; and although +I deem that it is not my duty to withstand your wishes, it is no +slight trial to see my only son embark in so terrible and perilous +an adventure as this. But the cause I regard as a sacred one, and +it seems to me that I have no right to keep you from entering upon +it, as your mind lies that way." + +Ned left the room greatly impressed with his father's words. He was +glad indeed that the permission he had asked for had been granted, +and that he was free to devote himself to the cause so dear to +most Englishmen, and doubly so to him from his relations with the +country. Sailing backwards and forwards to the various ports in +the Netherlands, and able to hold intercourse with all he met, he +had for years been listening to tales of atrocity and horror, until +he had come to regard the Spaniards as human monsters, and to long +with all his heart and strength to be able to join the oppressed +people against their tyrants. + +Now he had got permission to do so. But he felt more than he had +done before the serious nature of the step which he was taking; and +although he did not for a moment regret the choice he had made, he +was conscious of its importance and of the solemn nature of the +duties he took upon himself in thus engaging in the struggle between +the Netherlands and Spain. He passed the room where his mother was +sitting, went over and kissed her, and then taking his cap passed +out into the street and mounted the ramparts, where he could think +undisturbed. His father's words had not shaken his determination, +although they had depressed his enthusiasm; but as he paced up and +down, with the fresh air from the sea blowing upon his cheek, the +feeling of youth and strength soon sent the blood dancing through +his veins again. His cheeks flushed, and his eyes brightened. + +"There is honour and glory in the struggle," he said. "Did not the +people, old and young, pour out to the Crusades to wrest Jerusalem +from the hands of the infidels? This is a more glorious task. It is +to save God's followers from destruction; to succour the oppressed; +to fight for women and children as well as for men. It is a holier +and nobler object than that for which the Crusaders fought. They +died in hundreds of thousands by heat, by famine, thirst, and the +swords of the enemy. Few of those who fought ever returned home +to reap glory for their deeds; but there was honour for those who +fell. And in the same spirit in which even women and children left +their homes, and went in crowds to die for the Holy Sepulchre, so +will I venture my life for religion and freedom here." + +An hour later he returned home; he could see that his mother had +been crying. + +"Mother," he said, "I trust you will not grieve over this. I have +been thinking how the women of the early days sent their husbands +and sons and lovers to fight for the Holy Sepulchre. I think that +this cause is an even greater and more noble one; and feel sure +that though you may be anxious, you will not grudge me to do my +best for our religion and country people." + +"Truly I think it is a holy cause, my boy; and after what your +father has said, I would not if I could say nay. I can only pray +that heaven will bless and keep you, and one day restore you to +me. But you will not be always fighting, Ned. There is no saying +how long the struggle may last; and if I let you go, it is with +the promise that at one-and-twenty at the latest you will return +to us, and take your place again as your father's right hand and +mine." + +"I promise you, mother, that then, or if at any time before that +you write and say to me come home, I will come." + +"I am content with that," his mother said. + +That afternoon Ned told Peters what had been decided, and the +following morning the latter had a long talk with Captain Martin, +who directed him to apply to the other owners of the ship to appoint +him an able first mate, and also to choose one of their clerks in +whom they had confidence to sail in the vessel as supercargo. + +"The doctors tell me, Peters, that in two or three months I may be +able to return home and to get about on crutches; but they advise +me that it will be at least another four months before I can strap +on a wooden leg and trust my weight to it. When I can do that, I +shall see how I can get about. You heard from Ned last night that +he is going to enter as a sort of volunteer under the Prince of +Orange?" + +"Yes, he told me, Captain Martin. He is a lad of spirit; and if I +were fifteen years younger I would go with him." + +"He is young for such work yet," Captain Martin said doubtfully. + +"He is a strong youth, Captain Martin, and can do a man's work. His +training at sea has made him steady and cool; and I warrant me, if +he gets into danger, he will get out again if there is a chance. +I only hope, Captain Martin, that the brush we have had with the +Spaniards will not be our last, and that we too may be in the way +of striking a blow at the Spaniards." + +"I hope that we may, Peters," Captain Martin said earnestly. "My +mind is as much bent upon it as is Ned's; and I will tell you what +must at present be known only to yourself, that I have made up my +mind that if I recover, and can take command of the Good Venture +again, I will buy up the other shares, so that I can do what I like +with her without accounting to any man. I need not do so much on +board as I used to do, but will get you a good second mate, and will +myself only direct. Then we will, as at present, trade between London +and the Netherlands; but if, as is likely enough, the Spaniards +and Hollanders come to blows at sea, or the prince needs ships to +carry troops to beleaguered towns, then for a time we will quit +trading and will join with the Good Venture, and strike a blow at +sea." + +"That is good hearing, Captain Martin," Peters said, rubbing his +hands. "I warrant me you will not find one of the crew backward +at that work, and for my part I should like nothing better than to +tackle a Spaniard who does not carry more than two or three times +our own strength. The last fellow was a good deal too big for us, +but I believe if we had stuck to him we should have beaten him in +the end, big as he was." + +"Perhaps we might, Peters; but the ship was not mine to risk then, +and we had cargo on board. If, in the future, we meet a Spaniard +when the ship is mine to venture, and our hold is clear, the Good +Venture shall not show him her stern I warrant you, unless he be +big enough to eat us." + +On the following day the Good Venture set sail for England, and the +burgomaster having received a message from Captain Martin, praying +him to call upon him, paid him a visit. Captain Martin unfolded his +son's plans to him, and prayed him to furnish him with a letter to +the prince recommending him as one who might be trusted, and who +was willing to risk his life upon any enterprise with which he +might intrust him. This the burgomaster at once consented to do. + +"Younger lads than he," he said, "have fought stoutly on the walls +of some of our towns against the Spaniards; and since such is his +wish, I doubt not he will be able to do good service. All Holland +has heard how your ship beat off the Don Pedro; and the fact that +the lad is your son, and took part in the fight, will at once +commend him to the prince. All Englishmen are gladly received; not +only because they come to fight as volunteers on our side, but as +a pledge that the heart of England is with us, and that sooner or +later she will join us in our struggle against Spain. And doubtless, +as you say, the fact that the lad is by his mother's side one of +us, and that he can converse in both our language and yours with +equal ease, is greatly in his favour. Tomorrow I will furnish him +with letters to the prince, and also to two or three gentlemen of +my acquaintances, who are in the prince's councils." + +When the burgomaster had left, Captain Martin called Ned in. + +"Now, you are going as a volunteer, Ned, and for a time, at any +rate, there must be no question of pay; you are giving your services +and not selling them. In the first place you must procure proper +attire, in which to present yourself to the prince; you must also +purchase a helmet, breast and back pieces, with sword and pistols. +As for money, I shall give you a purse with sufficient for your +present needs, and a letter which you can present to any of the +merchants in the seaports with whom we have trade, authorizing you +to draw upon me, and praying them to honour your drafts. Do not +stint yourself of money, and do not be extravagant. Your needs +will be small, and when serving in a garrison or in the field you +will, of course, draw rations like others. I need not give you a +list of the merchants in the various towns, since you already know +them, and have been with me at many of their places of business. + +"In regard to your actions, I say to you do not court danger, but +do not avoid it. The cause is a good one, and you are risking your +life for it; but remember also that you are an only son, and there +are none to fill your place if you fall. Therefore be not rash; +keep always cool in danger, and if there is a prospect of escape +seize it promptly. Remember that your death can in no way benefit +Holland, while your life may do so; therefore do not from any +mistaken sense of heroism throw away your life in vain defence, when +all hope of success is over, but rather seek some means of escape +by which, when all is lost, you can manage to avoid the vengeance +of the Spaniards. I fear that there will be many defeats before +success can be obtained, for there is no union among the various +states or cities. + +"Holland and Zeeland alone seem in earnest in the cause, though +Friesland and Guelderland will perhaps join heartily; but these +provinces alone are really Protestant, in the other the Catholics +predominate, and I fear they will never join heartily in resistance +to Spain. How this narrow strip of land by the sea is to resist +all the power of Spain I cannot see; but I believe in the people +and in their spirit, and am convinced that sooner than fall again +into the grasp of the Inquisition they will open the sluices and +let the sea in over the country they have so hardly won from it, +and will embark on board ship and seek in some other country that +liberty to worship God in their own way that is denied them here." + +It was not necessary to purchase many articles of clothing, for +the dress of the people of Holland differed little from that of the +English. Ned bought a thick buff jerkin to wear under his armour, +and had little difficulty in buying steel cap, breast and back piece, +sword and pistols; for the people of Holland had not as yet begun +to arm generally, and many of the walls were defended by burghers +in their citizen dress, against the mail clad pikemen of Spain. + +Three days later Ned took a tearful farewell of his family, and +set sail in a small vessel bound for Rotterdam, where the Prince +of Orange at present was. The voyage was made without adventure, +and upon landing Ned at once made his way to the house occupied by +the prince. There were no guards at the gate, or any sign of martial +pomp. The door stood open, and when Ned entered a page accosted +him and asked his business. + +"I have letters for the prince," he said, "which I pray you to hand +to him when he is at leisure." + +"In that case you would have to wait long," the page replied, +"for the prince is at work from early morning until late at night. +However, he is always open of access to those who desire to see +him, therefore if you will give me the name of the writer of the +letter you bear I will inform him, and you can then deliver it +yourself." A minute later Ned was shown into the presence of the +man who was undoubtedly the foremost of his age. + +Born of a distinguished family, William of Orange had been brought +up by a pious mother, and at the age of twelve had become a page in +the family of the Emperor Charles. So great was the boy's ability, +that at fifteen he had become the intimate and almost confidential +friend of the emperor, who was a keen judge of merit. + +Before he reached the age of twenty-one he was named commander in +chief of the army on the French frontier. When the Emperor Charles +resigned, the prince was appointed by Philip to negotiate a treaty +with France, and had conducted these negotiations with extreme ability. +The prince and the Duke of Alva remained in France as hostages for +the execution of the treaty. Alva was secretly engaged in arranging +an agreement between Philip and Henry for the extirpation of +Protestantism, and the general destruction of all those who held +that faith. The French king, believing that the Prince of Orange +was also in the secret, spoke to him one day when out hunting freely +on the subject, and gave him all the details of the understanding +that had been entered into for a general massacre of the Protestants +throughout the dominions of France and Spain. + +The Prince of Orange neither by word or look indicated that all +this was new to him, and the king remained in ignorance of how +completely he had betrayed the plans of himself and Philip. It +was his presence of mind and reticence, while listening to this +astounding relation, that gained for the Prince of Orange the title +of William the Silent. Horror struck at the plot he had discovered, +the prince from that moment threw himself into the cause of the +Protestants of the Netherlands, and speedily became the head of the +movement, devoting his whole property and his life to the object. +So far it had brought him only trials and troubles. + +His estate and that of his brothers had been spent in the service; +he had incurred enormous debts; the armies of German mercenaries +he had raised had met with defeat and ruin; the people of the +Netherlands, crushed down with the apathy of despair, had not lifted +a finger to assist the forces that had marched to their aid. It +was only when, almost by an accident, Brill had been captured by +the sea beggars, that the spark he had for so many years been trying +to fan, burst into flame in the provinces of Holland and Zeeland. + +The prince had been sustained through his long and hitherto fruitless +struggle by a deep sense of religion. He believed that God was with +him, and would eventually save the people of the Netherlands from +the fate to which Philip had doomed them. And yet though an ardent +Protestant, and in an age when Protestants were well nigh as bigoted +as Catholics, and when the idea of religious freedom had scarce +entered into the minds of men, the prince was perfectly tolerant, +and from the first insisted that in all the provinces over which +he exercised authority, the same perfect freedom of worship should +be granted to the Catholics that he claimed for the Protestants in +the Catholic states of the Netherlands. + +He had not always been a Protestant. When appointed by Philip +stadtholder of Holland, Friesland, and Utrecht he had been a moderate +Catholic. But his thoughts were but little turned to religious +subjects, and it was as a patriot and a man of humane nature that +he had been shocked at the discovery that he had made, of the +determination of the kings of France and Spain to extirpate the +Protestants. He used this knowledge first to secretly urge the +people of the Netherlands to agitate for the removal of the Spanish +troops from the country; and although he had secret instructions +from Philip to enforce the edicts against all heretics with vigour, +he avoided doing so as much as was in his power, and sent private +warnings to many whom he knew to be in danger of arrest. + +As Governor of the Netherlands at the age of twenty-six, he was +rich, powerful, and of sovereign rank. He exercised a splendid +hospitality, and was universally beloved by the whole community for +the charm of his manner and his courtesy to people of all ranks. +Even at this period the property which he had inherited from +his father, and that he had received with his first wife, Anne of +Egmont, the richest heiress of the Netherlands, had been seriously +affected by his open handed hospitality and lavish expenditure. +His intellect was acknowledged to be of the highest class. He had +extraordinary adroitness and capacity for conducting state affairs. +His knowledge of human nature was profound. He had studied deeply, +and spoke and wrote with facility Latin, French, German, Flemish, +and Spanish. + +The epithet Silent was in no way applicable to his general character. +He could be silent when speech was dangerous, but at other times +he was a most cheerful and charming companion, and in public the +most eloquent orator and the most brilliant controversialist of his +age. Thirteen years had passed since then, thirteen years spent +in incessant troubles and struggles. The brilliant governor of +Philip in the Netherlands had for years been an exile; the careless +Catholic had become an earnest and sincere Protestant; the wealthy +noble had been harassed with the pecuniary burdens he had undertaken +in order to raise troops for the rescue of his countrymen. + +He had seen his armies defeated, his plans overthrown, his countrymen +massacred by tens of thousands, his co-religionists burnt, hung, +and tortured, and it was only now that the spirit of resistance +was awakening among his countrymen. But misfortune and trial had +not soured his temper; his faith that sooner or later the cause +would triumph had never wavered. His patience was inexhaustible, +his temper beyond proof. The incapacity of many in whom he had +trusted, the jealousies and religious differences which prevented +anything like union between the various states, the narrowness +and jealousy even of those most faithful to the cause, would have +driven most men to despair. + +Upon his shoulders alone rested the whole weight of the struggle. +It was for him to plan and carry out, to negotiate with princes, +to organize troops, to raise money, to compose jealousies, to rouse +the lukewarm and appeal to the waverers. Every detail, great and +small, had to be elaborated by him. So far it was not the Netherlands, +it was William of Orange alone who opposed himself to the might of +the greatest power in Europe. + +Such was the prince to whom Ned Martin was now introduced, and it was +with a sense of the deepest reverence that he entered the chamber. +He saw before him a man looking ten years older than he really +was; whose hair was grizzled and thin from thought and care, whose +narrow face was deeply marked by the lines of anxiety and trouble, +but whose smile was as kindly, whose manner as kind and gracious +as that which had distinguished it when William was the brilliant +young stadtholder of the Emperor Philip. + + + +CHAPTER VII + +A DANGEROUS MISSION + + +"I hear you have a letter for me from my good friend the burgomaster +of Enkhuizen," the Prince of Orange said, as Ned with a deep +reverence approached the table at which he was sitting. "He sends +me no ill news, I hope?" + +"No, your excellency," Ned said. "It is on a matter personal to +myself that he has been good enough to write to you, and I crave +your pardon beforehand for occupying your time for a moment with +so unimportant a subject." + +The prince glanced at him keenly as he was speaking, and saw that +the young fellow before him was using no mere form of words, but +that he really felt embarrassed at the thought that he was intruding +upon his labours. He opened the letter and glanced down it. + +"Ah! you are English," he said in surprise. "I thought you a +countryman of mine." + +"My mother is from Holland, sir," Ned replied; "and has brought me +up to speak her language as well as my father's, and to feel that +Holland is my country as much as England." + +"And you are the son of the English captain who, lately, as I heard, +being stopped in his passage down the Zuider Zee by the Spanish ship +Don Pedro, defended himself so stoutly that he inflicted great loss +and damage upon the Spaniard, and brought his ship into Enkhuizen +without further damage than a grievous wound to himself. The +burgomaster tells me that you are anxious to enter my service as a +volunteer, and that you have the permission of your parents to do +so. + +"Many of your brave compatriots are already coming over; and I am +glad indeed of their aid, which I regard as an omen that England +will some day bestir herself on our behalf. But you look young for +such rough work, young sir. I should not take you for more than +eighteen." + +"I am not yet eighteen, sir," Ned said, although he did not think +it necessary to mention that he still wanted two years to that age. +"But even children and women have aided in the defence of their +towns." + +"It is somewhat strange," the prince said, "that your parents +should have countenanced your thus embarking in this matter at so +young an age." + +"The Spaniards have murdered my grandfather, three of my uncles, and +an aunt; and my father would, had it not been that he is disabled +by the wound he received, and which has cost him the loss of a leg, +have himself volunteered," Ned replied. "But, sir, if you think +me too young as yet to fight in the ranks, my father thought that +you might perhaps make use of me in other ways. I have sailed +up every river in the Netherlands, having been for the last five +years in my father's ship trading with these ports, and know their +navigation and the depth of water. If you have letters that you +want carried to your friends in Flanders, and would intrust them +to me, I would deliver them faithfully for you whatever the risk; +and being but a boy, could pass perhaps where a man would be +suspected. I only ask, sir, to be put to such use as you can make +of me, whatever it may be, deeming my life but of slight account +in so great and good a cause." + +"No man can offer more," the prince said kindly. "I like your face, +young sir, and can see at once that you can be trusted, and that +you have entered upon this matter in a serious spirit. Your father +has proved himself to be a brave fighter and a skilful sailor, and +I doubt not that you are worthy of him. Your youth is no drawback +in my eyes, seeing that I myself, long before I reached your age, +was mixed up in state affairs, and that the Emperor Charles, my +master, did not disdain to listen to my opinions. I accept your +offer of service in the name of the Netherlands; and deeming that, +as you say, you may be of more service in the way of which you +have spoken than were I to attach you to one of the regiments I am +raising, I will for the present appoint you as a volunteer attached +to my own household, and, trust me, I will not keep you long in +idleness." + +He touched a bell and the page entered. "Take this gentleman," he +said, "to Count Nieuwenar, and tell him that he is to have rank as +a gentleman volunteer, and will at present remain as a member of +my household, and be treated as such." + +With a kindly nod he dismissed Ned, who was so affected by the +kindness of manner of the prince that he could only murmur a word +or two of thanks and assurance of devotion. One of the burgomaster's +letters, of which Ned was the bearer, was to Count Nieuwenar, the +prince's chamberlain, and when the page introduced him to that +officer with the message the prince had given him, Ned handed to +him the burgomaster's letter. The count ran his eye down it. + +"My friend the burgomaster speaks highly in your praise, young +sir," he said; "and although it needed not that since the prince +himself has been pleased to appoint you to his household, yet I am +glad to receive so good a report of you. All Holland and Zeeland +have been talking of the gallant fight that your father's ship made +against the Spaniard; and though I hear that the Queen of England +has made remonstrances to the Spanish Ambassador as to this attack +upon an English ship, methinks that it is the Spaniards who suffered +most in the affair." + +"Would you kindly instruct me, sir, in the duties that I have to +perform." + +"There are no duties whatever," the count said with a smile. "There +is no state or ceremony here. The prince lives like a private +citizen, and all that you have to do is to behave discreetly, to +present yourself at the hours of meals, and to be in readiness to +perform any service with which the prince may intrust you; although +for what service he destines you, I own that I am in ignorance. +But," he said more gravely, "the prince is not a man to cumber +himself with persons who are useless to him, nor to keep about his +person any save those upon whose fidelity he is convinced that he +can rely. Therefore I doubt not that he will find work for you to +do, for indeed there is but little ease and quiet for those who +serve him. This afternoon I will find for you an apartment, and I +may tell you that although you will have at present no duties to +perform, and need not therefore keep in close attendance, it were +better that you should never be very long absent; for when the +prince wants a thing done he wants it done speedily, and values +most those upon whom he can rely at all times of the night and day. +Return here at noon, and I will then present you to the gentlemen +and officers with whom you will associate." + +On leaving the chamberlain Ned walked for some time through the +streets of Rotterdam. He scarcely noticed where he went, so full +were his thoughts of the reception that he had met with, and the +more than realization of his hopes. The charm of manner, as well +as the real kindness of the prince, had completely captivated him, +as indeed they did all who came in contact with him, and he felt +that no dangers he could run, no efforts he could make would be too +great if he could but win the approbation of so kind a master. He +presented himself to the chamberlain at the hour named, and the +latter took him to a large hall in which many officers and gentlemen +were about to sit down to dinner, and introduced Ned to them as +the son of the English captain who had so bravely beaten off the +Don Pedro, and whom the Prince of Orange had received into his +household in the quality of a gentleman volunteer. + +Ned was well received, both on his own account and from the goodwill +that was entertained towards England. Although personally the Prince +of Orange kept up no state and lived most simply and quietly, he +still maintained an extensive household, and extended a generous +hospitality more suited to his past wealth than to his present +necessities. He had the habits of a great noble; and although +pressed on all sides for money, and sometimes driven to make what +he considered great economies in his establishment, his house was +always open to his friends and adherents. + +Certainly in the meal to which he sat down Ned saw little signs of +economy. There was but little silver plate on the table, for the +prince's jewels and plate had been pledged years before for the +payment of the German mercenaries; but there was an abundance of +food of all kinds, generous wine in profusion, and the guests were +served by numerous pages and attendants. + +On the following day the prince rode to Haarlem accompanied by his +household and a hundred horsemen, for at Haarlem he had summoned +a meeting of the representatives of the states that still remained +faithful to him. As soon as they were settled in the quarters +assigned to them Ned sallied out to make inquiries concerning the +relatives with whom his aunt and cousins had taken refuge. As he +knew her maiden name he had no great difficulty in learning the +part of the town in which her father dwelt, and knowing that the +prince would at any rate for the rest of the day be wholly absorbed +in important business, made his way thither, introducing himself +to the burgher. + +"Ah!" the latter said, "I have often heard my daughter speak of +her sister-in-law who had married and settled in England. So you +are her son? Well, you will find her house in the street that runs +along by the city wall, near the Watergate. It was well that she +happened to be laid up with illness at the time Alva's ruffians +seized and murdered her husband and his family. She was well nigh +distraught for a time, and well she might be; though, indeed, her +lot is but that of tens of thousands of others in this unhappy +country. I would gladly have welcomed her here, but I have another +married daughter who lives with me and keeps my house for me, and +as she has half a dozen children the house is well nigh full. And +Elizabeth longed for quiet in her sorrow, so I established her in +the little house I tell you of. I have been going to write to your +father, but have put it off from time to time, for one has so much +to think of in these days that one has no time for private matters. +She tells me that her husband and his brothers had, foreseeing the +evil times coming, sent money to England to his care, and that it +has been invested in houses in London." + +"I believe that is so," Ned replied; "and my father, who is at +present lying sorely wounded at Enkhuizen, will, I am sure, now +that he knows where my aunt is, communicate with her by letter on +the subject. I will give you his address at Enkhuizen, and as it +is but a short journey from here you might perhaps find time to go +over and see him, when he will be able to talk freely with you on +the subject. Now, with your permission I will go and see my aunt." + +Ned had no difficulty in finding the house indicated. He knocked +at the door, and it was opened by his aunt herself. She looked up +for a moment inquiringly, and then exclaimed: + +"Why, it is my nephew, Edward Martin! It is nearly two years since +I saw you last, and so much has happened since;" and she burst into +tears. + +Ned followed her into the house, where he was warmly welcomed by +his two cousins -- girls of fourteen and fifteen years old. He had +first to explain how it was that he had come to Haarlem, and they +were grieved indeed to hear what had happened to Captain Martin, +who was a great favourite with them. + +"And so you have entered the service of the Prince of Orange?" +his aunt said when he had finished his story. "Truly I wonder that +your father and mother have allowed you to embark in so hopeless +an enterprise." + +"Not hopeless," Ned said. "Things look dark at present, but either +England or France may come to our help. At any rate, aunt, if the +Spanish army again sweeps over Holland and Zeeland surely you, +with two girls, will not await its approach. You have friends in +England. My father and mother will be only too glad to have you +with them till you can make yourself a home close by. And there +are the moneys sent over that will enable you to live in comfort. +It will not be like going among strangers. There is quite a colony +of emigrants from the Netherlands already in London. You will find +plenty who can speak your language." + +"All my family are here," she replied; "my father, and brothers, +and sisters. I could never be happy elsewhere." + +"Yes, aunt, I can understand that. But if the Spaniards come, how +many of your family may be alive here a week afterwards?" + +The woman threw up her hands in a gesture of despair. + +"Well, we must hope for the best, aunt; but I would urge you most +strongly if you hear that a Spanish army is approaching to fly to +England if there be an opportunity open to you, or if not to leave +the city and go to some town or village as far from here as possible." + +"Haarlem is strong, and can stand a stout siege," the woman said +confidently. + +"I have no doubt it can, aunt. But the Spaniards are good engineers, +and unless the Prince of Orange is strong enough to march to its +succour, sooner or later it must fall; and you know what happens +then." + +"Why should they come here more than elsewhere? There are many +other towns that lie nearer to them." + +"That is so, aunt. But from the walls you can see the towers and +spires of Amsterdam, and that city serves them as a gathering place +in the heart of the country whence they may strike blows all round; +and, therefore, as you lie so close, one of the first blows may +be struck here. Besides, if they take Haarlem, they cut the long +strip of land that almost alone remains faithful to the prince +asunder. Well, aunt, please think it over. If you doubt my words +write to my mother at Enkhuizen. I warrant she will tell you how +gladly she will receive you in England, and how well you may make +yourself a home there. I do not know how long I am to be staying +here, and I have to be in close attendance on the prince in case he +may suddenly have occasion for my services, but I will come down +every day for a talk with you; and I do hope that for the sake +of my cousins, if not for your own, you will decide to leave this +troubled land for a time, and to take refuge in England, where none +will interfere with your religion, and where you can live free from +the Spaniard's cruel bigotry." + +Ned remained for a fortnight without any particular duties. When +the prince was closeted with persons of importance, and he knew +that there was no chance of his being required, he spent much of +his time at his aunt's. He was beginning to feel weary of hanging +about the prince's antechamber doing nothing, when one day a page +came up to him and told him that the prince required his presence. +He followed the boy to the prince's cabinet, full of hope that he +was to have an opportunity of proving that he was in earnest in +his offers of service to the cause of Holland. + +"I daresay you began to think that I had forgotten you," the prince +began when the page had retired and the curtain had fallen behind +him, "but it is not so. Until today I have had no occasion for your +services, but have now a mission to intrust to you. I have letters +that I wish carried to Brussels and delivered to some of my friends +there. You had best start at once in the disguise of a peasant boy. +You must sew up your despatches in your jerkin, and remember that +if they are found upon you a cruel death will surely be your fate. +If you safely carry out your mission in Brussels return with the +answers you will receive by such route as may seem best to you; +for this must depend upon the movements of the Spaniards. The +chamberlain will furnish you with what money you may require." + +"Thanks, your excellency, I am provided with sufficient means for +such a journey." + +"I need not tell you, my lad, to be careful and prudent. Remember, +not only is your own life at stake, but that the interest of the +country will suffer, and the lives of many will be forfeited should +you fail in your mission. You will see that there are no names upon +these letters; only a small private mark, differing in each case, +by which you can distinguish them. Here is a paper which is a key +to those marks. You must, before you start, learn by heart the +names of those for whom the various letters are intended. In this +way, should the letters fall into the hands of the Spaniards, they +will have no clue as to the names of those to whom they are addressed. + +"This paper, on which is written 'To the Blue Cap in the South +Corner of the Market Square of Brussels,' is intended to inclose +all the other letters, and when you have learned the marks Count +Nieuwenar will fasten them up in it and seal it with my seal. +The object of doing this is, that should you be captured, you can +state that your instructions from me are to deliver the packet to +a man with a blue cap, who will meet you at the south corner of +the Market Square at Brussels, and, touching you on the shoulder, +ask 'How blows the wind in Holland?' These are the instructions I +now give you. If such a man comes to you you will deliver the packet +to him, if not you will open it and deliver the letters. But this +last does not form part of your instructions. + +"This device will not save your life if you are taken, but it +may save you from torture and others from death. For were these +unaddressed letters found upon you, you would be put to such cruel +tortures that flesh and blood could not withstand them, and the +names of those for whom these letters are intended would be wrung +from you; but inclosed as they are to Master Blue Cap, it may be +believed that you are merely a messenger whose instructions extend +no further than the handing over the parcel to a friend of mine +in Brussels. Now, you have no time to lose. You have your disguise +to get, and these signs and the names they represent to commit +to heart. A horse will be ready in two hours time to take you to +Rotterdam, whence you will proceed in a coasting vessel to Sluys +or Axel." + +At the time named Ned was in readiness. He was dressed now as a young +Flemish peasant. He had left the chest with his clothes, together +with his armour and weapons, in the care of his aunt's father, for +he hoped that before his return she would have left the town. He +could not, however, obtain any promise that she would do so. Her +argument was, if other women could stay in Haarlem why should she +not do the same. Her friends and family were there; and although, +if the Spaniards were to besiege the town, she might decide to quit +it, she could not bring herself to go into exile, unless indeed +all Holland was conquered and all hope gone. + +Ned carried a stout stick; which was a more formidable weapon than +it looked, for the knob was loaded with lead. He hesitated about +taking pistols; for if at any time he were searched and such weapons +found upon him the discovery might prove fatal, for a peasant boy +certainly would not be carrying weapons that were at that time +costly and comparatively rare. His despatches were sewn up in the +lining of his coat, and his money, beyond that required for the +present use, hidden in his big boots. A country horse with rough +trappings, such as a small farmer might ride, was in readiness, and +mounting this he rode to Rotterdam, some thirty-five miles distant, +and there put it up at a small inn, where he had been charged to +leave it. + +He then walked down to the river and inquired about boats sailing +for the ports of Sluys or Axel. He was not long in discovering +one that would start the next day for the latter place, and after +bargaining with the master for a passage returned to the inn. The +next morning he set sail soon after daybreak. There were but three +or four other passengers, and Ned was not long before he established +himself on friendly terms with the master and the four men that +constituted the crew. + +"I wonder," he said presently to the master, "that trade still goes +on between the towns of Holland and those in the provinces that +hold to Alva." + +"The citizens of those towns are greatly divided in their opinions," +the captain said. "Many would gladly rise if they had the chance, +but they lie too close to the Spanish power to venture to do so. +Still they are friendly enough to us; and as they have need of our +goods and we of theirs, no one hinders traffic or interferes with +those who come and go. Most of these towns have but small Spanish +garrisons, and these concern themselves not with anything that +goes on beyond maintaining the place for Spain. It is the Catholic +magistrates appointed by Alva who manage the affairs of the towns, +and as these are themselves mostly merchants and traders their +interests lie in keeping the ports open and encouraging trade, +so we come and go unquestioned. The Spaniards have enough on their +hands already without causing discontent by restricting trade. +Besides, the duke. affects to consider the rising in Holland +and Zeeland as a trifling rebellion which he can suppress without +difficulty, and it would be giving too much importance to the +movement were he to close all the ports and forbid communication." + +"Will you go outside or inside Walcheren?" + +"Outside," the captain replied. "It is the longest way, but the +safest. The Spaniards hold Middleburg and Tergoes, and have lately +defeated the force from Flushing that endeavoured to capture +Tergoes. There are many of our craft and some of the Spaniards in +the passages, and fighting often takes place. It is better to avoid +risks of trouble, although it may be a few leagues further round +by Walcheren. I am ready to take my share of the fighting when it +is needful, and aid in carrying the troops across from Flushing +and back, but when I have goods in my hold I like to keep as well +away from it as may be." + +They cast anchor off Flushing, for the wind was now foul, but when +tide turned they again got under way and beat up the channel to +Axel. No questions were asked as they drew up alongside the wharves. +Ned at once stepped ashore and made his way to a small inn, chiefly +frequented by sailors, near the jetty. The shades of night were +just falling as they arrived, and he thought it were better not +to attempt to proceed further until the following morning. He had +been several times at Axel in the Good Venture, and was familiar +with the town. The population was a mixed one, for although situated +in Brabant, Axel had so much communication with the opposite shores +of Holland that a considerable portion of the population had imbibed +something of the spirit that animated their neighbours, and would, +if opportunity offered, have gladly thrown off the authority of +the officials appointed by the Spaniards. + +Ned knew that as a stranger he should be viewed with great suspicion +by the frequenters of the little inn, for the spy system was carried +to such an extent that people were afraid to utter their sentiments +even in the bosom of their own families. He therefore walked about +until it was time to retire to rest, and in that way escaped alike +the suspicions and questionings he might otherwise have encountered. +He could easily have satisfied them as to the past -- he had just +arrived in the coasting smack the Hopeful from Rotterdam, and the +master of the craft could, if questioned, corroborate his statement +-- but it would not be so easy to satisfy questioners as to the +object of his coming. Why should a lad from Holland want to come +to Brabant? Every one knew that work was far more plentiful in +the place he had come from than in the states under the Spaniards, +where the cultivators scarce dare sow crops sufficient for their +own consumption, so extensive was the pillaging carried on by the +Spanish troops. + +These, always greatly in arrears of pay, did not hesitate to take +all they required from the unfortunate inhabitants; and the latter +knew that resistance or complaint was alike useless, for the +soldiers were always on the verge of mutiny. Their officers had +little control over them; and Alva himself was always short of +money, and being unable to pay his troops was obliged to allow them +to maintain themselves upon the country. + +As soon as the gates were open in the morning Ned made his way +to that through which the road to Brussels ran. The four or five +Spanish soldiers at the gate asked no questions, and Ned passed +on with a brisk step. He had gone about three miles when he heard +sounds of horses' hoofs behind him, and presently two men came +along. One was, by his appearance, a person of some importance, +the other he took to be his clerk. Ned doffed his hat as the horse +went past. + +"Where are you going lad?" the elder of the two men asked. + +"I am going, worshipful sir, to see some friends who live at the +village of Deligen, near Brussels." + +"These are evil times for travelling. Your tongue shows that you +come not from Brabant." + +"No, sir, my relations lived at Vordwyk, hard by Amsterdam." + +"Amsterdam is a faithful city; although there, as elsewhere, there +are men who are traitors to their king and false to their faith. +You are not one of them, I hope?" + +"I do not know," Ned said, "that I am bound to answer questions of +any that ride by the highway, unless I know that they have right +and authority to question me." + +"I have right and authority," the man said angrily. "My name is +Philip Von Aert, and I am one of the council charged by the viceroy +to investigate into these matters." + +Ned again doffed his hat. "I know your name, worshipful sir, as +that of one who is foremost in searching out heretics. There are +few in the land, even ignorant country boys like myself, who have +not heard it." + +The councillor looked gratified. "Ah! you have heard me well spoken +of?" he said. + +"I have heard you spoken of, sir, well or ill, according to the +sentiments of those who spoke." + +"And why have you left Amsterdam to journey so far from home? This +is a time when all men must be looked upon with suspicion until +they prove themselves to be good Catholics and faithful subjects of +the king, and even a boy like you may be engaged upon treasonable +business. I ask you again, why are you leaving your family at +Amsterdam?" + +"Misfortunes have fallen upon them," Ned replied, "and they can no +longer maintain me." + +"Misfortunes, ah! and of what kind?" + +"Their business no longer brings them in profit," Ned replied. +"They lived, as I told your worship, not in the town itself, but in +a village near it, and in these troubled times trade is well nigh +at a standstill, and there is want at many a man's door." + +"I shall stop for the night at Antwerp, where I have business to +do; see when you arrive there that you call upon me. I must have +further talk with you, for your answers do not satisfy me." + +Ned bowed low. + +"Very well, see that you fail not, or it will be the worse for you." +So saying Von Aert put spurs to his horse, which had been walking +alongside Ned as he conversed, and rode forward at a gallop. + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +IN THE HANDS OF THE BLOOD COUNCIL + + +"You are an evil looking pair of scoundrels," Ned said to himself +as he looked after the retreating figures of the two men. "The +master I truly know by name as one of the worst instruments of the +tyrant; as to the man, knave is written on his face. He is as thin +as a scarecrow -- he has a villainous squint and an evil smile +on his face. If I had been bent on any other errand I would have +given very different answers, and taken my chance of holding my own +with this good stick of mine. At any rate I told them no absolute +lies. The councillor will not have a chance of asking me any more +questions this evening, and I only hope that he will be too busy +to think any more about it. I will take the road through Ghent; it +matters little which way I go, for the two roads seem to me to be +of nearly equal distance." + +He therefore at once left the road he was following, and struck +across the fields northward until he came upon the road to Ghent, +at which town he arrived soon after noon, having walked two or +three and twenty miles. Fearing to be questioned he passed through +the town without stopping, crossed the Scheldt and continued his way +for another five miles, when he stopped at the village of Gontere. +He entered a small inn. + +"I wish to stop here for the night," he said, "if you have room?" + +"Room enough and to spare," the host replied. "There is no scarcity +of rooms, though there is of good fare; a party of soldiers from +Ghent paid a visit to us yesterday, and have scarce left a thing +to eat in the village. However, I suppose we ought to feel thankful +that they did not take our lives also." + +"Peter," a shrill voice cried from inside the house, "how often have +I told you not to be gossiping on public affairs with strangers? +Your tongue will cost you your head presently, as I have told you +a score of times." + +"Near a hundred I should say, wife," the innkeeper replied. "I am +speaking no treason, but am only explaining why our larder is empty, +save some black bread, and some pig's flesh we bought an hour ago; +besides, this youth is scarce likely to be one of the duke's spies." + +"There you are again," the woman cried angrily. "You want to leave +me a widow, and your children fatherless, Peter Grantz. Was a woman +ever tormented with such a man?" + +"I am not so sure that it is not the other way," the man grumbled +in an undertone. "Why, wife," he went on, raising his voice, "who +is there to say anything against us. Don't I go regularly to mass, +and send our good priest a fine fish or the best cut off the joint +two or three times a week? What can I do more? Anyone would think +to hear you talk that I was a heretic." + +"I think you are more fool than heretic," his wife said angrily; +"and that is the best hope for us. But come in, boy, and sit down; +my husband will keep you gossiping at the door for the next hour +if you would listen to him." + +"I shall not be sorry to sit down, mistress," Ned said entering +the low roofed room. "I have walked from Axel since morning." + +"That is a good long walk truly;" the woman said. "Are you going +on to Brussels? If so, your nearest way would have been by Antwerp." + +"I took the wrong road," Ned said; "and as they told me that there +was but a mile or two difference between them, I thought I might +as well keep on the one I had first taken." + +"You are from Holland, are you not, by your speech?" the woman +asked. + +"Yes; I have come from Holland," Ned replied. + +"And is it true what they say, that the people there have thrown +off the authority of the duke, and are going to venture themselves +against all the strength of Spain?" + +"Some have risen and some have not," Ned replied. "None can say +what will come of it." + +"You had best not say much about your coming from Holland," the +woman said; "for they say that well nigh all from that province are +heretics, and to be even suspected of being a heretic in Brabant +is enough to cost anyone his life." + +"I am not one to talk," Ned replied; "but I thank you for your +caution, mistress. I have been questioned already by Philip Von +Aert, and he said he would see me again; but in truth I have no +intention of further intruding on him." + +"He is one of the Council of Blood," the woman said, dropping her +voice and looking round anxiously; "and one of the most cruel of +them. Beware, my lad, how you fall into his hands, for be assured +he will show you no mercy, if he has reason to suspect, but in +the slightest, that you are not a good Catholic and loyal to the +Spaniards. Rich or poor, gentle or simple, woman or child, it is +nought to him. There is no mercy for heretics, whomsoever they may +be; and unless you can satisfy him thoroughly your best plan is to +go back at once to Axel, and to cross to Holland. You do not know +what they are. There are spies in every town and village, and were +it known what I have said to you now, little though that be, it +would go hard with me. Women have been burned or strangled for far +less." + +"I will be careful," Ned said. "I have business which takes me to +Brussels, but when that is discharged I shall betake me back to +Holland as soon as I can." + +By this time the woman, who had been standing over the fire while +she was talking, had roasted two or three slices of pork, and these, +with a piece of black bread and a jug of ale, she placed before +Ned. + +Her husband, who had been standing at the door, now came in. + +"You are no wiser than I am, wife, with all your scolding. I have +been listening to your talk; you have scolded me whenever I open +my lips, and there you yourself say things ten times as dangerous." + +"I say them inside the house, Peter Grantz," she retorted, "and +don't stand talking at the door so that all the village may hear +me. The lad is honest, as I can see by his face, and if I could do +aught for him I would do so." + +"I should be glad if you could tell me of some little place where +I could put up in Brussels; some place where I could stay while +looking out for work, without anyone troubling themselves as +to whence I came or where I am going, or what are my views as to +religion or politics." + +"That were a difficult matter," the woman replied. "It is not that +the landlords care what party those who visit their house belong +to, but that for aught they know there may be spies in their own +household; and in these days it is dangerous even to give shelter +to one of the new religion. Therefore, although landlords may care +nothing who frequent their houses, they are in a way forced to +do so lest they themselves should be denounced as harbourers of +heretics. Brussels has a strong party opposed to the duke; for you +know that it is not those of the new religion only who would gladly +see the last of the Spaniards. There are but few heretics in Brabant +now, the Inquisition and the Council of Blood have made an end of +most, others have fled either to France, or England, or Holland, +some have outwardly conformed to the rites of the Church, and +there are few indeed who remain openly separated from her, though +in their hearts they may remain heretics as before. + +"Still there are great numbers who long to see the old Constitution +restored -- to see persecution abolished, the German and Spanish +troops sent packing, and to be ruled by our own laws under the +viceroy of the King of Spain. Therefore in Brussels you are not +likely to be very closely questioned. There are great numbers of +officials, a small garrison, and a good many spies; all of these +are for the duke, the rest of the population would rise tomorrow +did they see a chance of success. I should say that you are more +likely, being a stranger, of being suspected of being a spy than +of being a heretic -- that is if you are one, which I do not ask +and do not want to know. The people of Brussels are not given to +tumults as are those of Antwerp and Ghent, but are a quiet people +going their own way. Being the capital there are more strangers +resort there than to other places, and therefore people come and go +without inquiry; still were I you I would, if you have any good +reason for avoiding notice, prefer to lodge outside the city, +entering the gates of a morning, doing what business you may have +during the day, and leaving again before sunset. That way you would +altogether avoid questionings, and will attract no more attention +than other country people going in to sell their goods." + +"Thank you, I will follow your advice," Ned said. "I have no wish +to get into trouble, and being a stranger there I should have +difficulty in proving that my story is a true one were I questioned." + +The next morning Ned set out at daybreak, and arrived at Brussels +early in the afternoon. He had determined to adopt the advice given +him the evening before; and also that he would not endeavour to +get a lodging in any of the villages. + +"It will not take me more than a day, or at most two days, to +deliver my letters," he thought to himself, "and there will be no +hardship in sleeping in the fields or under a tree for a couple of +nights. In that way I shall escape all notice, for people talk in +villages even more than they do in towns." He had decided that he +would not that day endeavour to deliver any of the letters, but +would content himself with walking about the town and learning +the names of the streets, so that he could set about delivering +the letters without the necessity for asking many questions. When +within half a mile of the town he left the road, and cutting open +the lining of his jerkin took out the letters. Then he cut up a +square piece of turf with his knife, scooped out a little earth, +inserted the packet of letters, and then stamped down the sod +above it. In another hole close to it he buried the money hidden in +his boot, and then returning to the road walked on into Brussels, +feeling much more comfortable now that he had for a time got rid of +documents that would cost him his life, were they found upon him. + +Passing through the gates, he wandered about for some hours through +the streets, interested in the stir and bustle that prevailed. +Mingled with the grave citizens were Spanish and German soldiers, +nobles with their trains of pages and followers, deputies from other +towns of Brabant and Artois, monks and priests, country people who +had brought in their produce, councillors and statesmen, Spanish +nobles and whining mendicants. He learnt the names of many of the +streets, and marked the houses of those for whom he had letters. +Some of these were nobles, others citizens of Brussels. He bought +some bread and cheese in the marketplace, and ate them sitting +on a doorstep; and having tied some food in a bundle to serve for +supper, he left the town well satisfied with his discoveries. + +He slept under the shelter of a haystack, and in the morning dug up +the packet, sewed it up in its hiding place again, and re-entered +the city as soon as the gates were opened, going in with a number +of market people who had congregated there awaiting the opening of +the gates. In a very short time the shops were all opened; for if +the people went to bed early, they were also astir early in those +days. He went first towards the house of one of the burghers, and +watched until he saw the man himself appear at the doorway of his +shop; then he walked across the street. + +"The weather is clear," he said, "but the sun is nigh hidden with +clouds." + +The burgher gave a slight start; then Ned went on: + +"I have brought you tidings from the farm." + +"Come in," the burgher said in loud tones, so that he could be +heard by his two assistants in the shop. "My wife will be glad to +hear tidings of her old nurse, who was ill when she last heard from +her. You can reassure her in that respect, I hope?" + +"Yes, she is mending fast," Ned replied, as he followed the burgher +through the shop. + +The man led the way upstairs, and then into a small sitting room. +He closed the door behind him. + +"Now," he asked, "what message do you bring from Holland?" + +"I bring a letter," Ned replied; and taking out his knife again +he cut the threads of the lining and produced the packet. The silk +that bound it, and which was fastened by the prince's seal, was +so arranged that it could be slipped off, and so enable the packet +to be opened without breaking the seal. Ned took out the letters; +and after examining the marks on the corners, handed one to the +burgher. The latter opened and read the contents. + +"I am told," he said when he had finished, "not to give you an +answer in writing, but to deliver it by word of mouth. Tell the +prince that I have sounded many of my guild, and that certainly +the greater part of the weavers will rise and join in expelling +the Spaniards whenever a general rising has been determined upon; +and it is certain that all the other chief towns will join in the +movement. Unless it is general, I fear that nothing can be done. +So great is the consternation that has been caused by the sack of +Mechlin, the slaughter of thousands of the citizens, and the horrible +atrocities upon the women, that no city alone will dare to provoke +the vengeance of Alva. All must rise or none will do so. I am convinced +that Brussels will do her part, if others do theirs; although, as +the capital, it is upon her the first brunt of the Spanish attack +will fall. In regard to money, tell him that at present none can +be collected. In the first place, we are all well nigh ruined by +the exactions of the Spanish; and in the next, however well disposed +we may be, there are few who would commit themselves by subscribing +for the cause until the revolt is general and successful. Then, I +doubt not, that the councillors would vote as large a subsidy as +the city could afford to pay. Four at least of the members of the +council of our guild can be thoroughly relied upon, and the prince +can safely communicate with them. These are Gunther, Barneveldt, +Hasselaer, and Buys." + +"Please, repeat them again," Ned said, "in order that I may be sure +to remember them rightly." + +"As to general toleration," the burgher went on, after repeating the +names, "in matters of religion, although there are many differences +of opinion, I think that the prince's commands on this head will +be complied with, and that it would be agreed that Lutherans, +Calvinists, and other sects will be allowed to assemble for worship +without hindrance; but the Catholic feeling is very strong, especially +among the nobles, and the numbers of those secretly inclined to the +new religion has decreased greatly in the past few years, just as +they have increased in Holland and Zeeland, where, as I hear, the +people are now well nigh all Protestants. Please assure the prince +of my devotion to him personally, and that I shall do my best to +further his plans, and can promise him that the Guild of Weavers +will be among the first to rise against the tyranny of the Spaniards." + +Ned, as he left the house, decided that the man he had visited was +not one of those who would be of any great use in an emergency. He +was evidently well enough disposed to the cause, but was not one +to take any great risks, or to join openly in the movement unless +convinced that success was assured for it. He was walking along, +thinking the matter over, when he was suddenly and roughly accosted. +Looking up he saw the Councillor Von Aert and his clerk; the former +with an angry look on his face, the latter, who was close beside +his master, and who had evidently drawn his attention to him, with +a malicious grin of satisfaction. + +"Hullo, sirrah," the councillor said angrily, "did I not tell you +to call upon me at Antwerp?" + +Ned took off his hat, and said humbly, "I should of course have +obeyed your worship's order had I passed through Antwerp; but I +afterwards remembered that I had cause to pass through Ghent, and +therefore took that road, knowing well that one so insignificant as +myself could have nothing to tell your worship that should occupy +your valuable time." + +"That we will see about," the councillor said grimly. "Genet, lay +your hand upon this young fellow's collar. We will lodge him in +safe keeping, and inquire into the matter when we have leisure. I +doubt not that you were right when you told me that you suspected +he was other than he seemed." + +Ned glanced round; a group of Spanish soldiers were standing close +by, and he saw that an attempt at escape would be hopeless. He +therefore walked quietly along by the side of the clerk's horse, +determining to wrest himself from the man's hold and run for it +the instant he saw an opportunity. Unfortunately, however, he was +unaware that they were at the moment within fifty yards of the +prison. Several bystanders who had heard the conversation followed +to see the result; and other passersby, seeing Ned led by the collar +behind the dreaded councillor, speedily gathered around with looks +expressing no goodwill to Von Aert. + +The Spanish soldiers, however, accustomed to frays with the +townspeople, at once drew their weapons and closed round the clerk +and his captive, and two minutes later they arrived at the door of +the prison, and Ned, completely taken by surprise, found himself +thrust in and the door closed behind him before he had time to +decide upon his best course. + +"You will place this prisoner in a secure place," the councillor +said. "It is a case of grave suspicion; and I will myself question +him later on. Keep an eye upon him until I come again." + +Ned was handed over to two warders, who conducted him to a chamber +in the third storey. Here, to his dismay, one of his jailers took +up his post, while the other retired, locking the door behind him. +Thus the intention Ned had formed as he ascended the stairs of +destroying the documents as soon as he was alone, was frustrated. +The warder took his place at the window, which looked into an +inner court of the prison, and putting his head out entered into +conversation with some of his comrades in the yard below. + +Ned regretted now that he had, before leaving the burgher, again +sewn up the letters in his doublet. Had he carried them loosely +about him, he could have chewed them up one by one and swallowed +them; but he dared not attempt to get at them now, as his warder +might at any moment look round. The latter was relieved twice during +the course of the day. None of the men paid any attention to the +prisoner. The succession of victims who entered the walls of the +prison only to quit them for the gallows was so rapid that they +had no time to concern themselves with their affairs. + +Probably the boy was a heretic; but whether or not, if he had +incurred the enmity of Councillor Von Aert, his doom was sealed. + +It was late in the evening before a warder appeared at the door, +and said that the councillor was below, and that the prisoner was +to be brought before him. Ned was led by the two men to a chamber +on the ground floor. Here Von Aert, with two of his colleagues, +was seated at a table, the former's clerk standing behind him. + +"This is a prisoner I myself made this morning," Von Aert said to +his companions. "I overtook him two miles this side of Axel, and +questioned him. He admitted that he came from Holland; and his +answers were so unsatisfactory that I ordered him strictly to call +upon me at Antwerp, not having time at that moment to question him +further. Instead of obeying, he struck off from the road and took +that through Ghent; and I should have heard no more of him, had I +not by chance encountered him this morning in the street here. Has +he been searched?" he asked the warder. + +"No, your excellency. You gave no orders that he should be examined." + +"Fools!" the councillor said angrily; "this is the way you do your +duty. Had he been the bearer of important correspondence he might +have destroyed it by now." + +"We have not left him, your excellency. He has never been alone for +a moment, and had no opportunity whatever for destroying anything." + +"Well, search that bundle first," the councillor said. + +The bundle was found to contain nothing suspicious. + +"Now, take off his doublet and boots and examine them carefully. +Let not a seam or corner escape you." + +Accustomed to the work, one of the warders had scarcely taken the +doublet in his hand when he proclaimed that there was a parcel sewn +up in the lining. + +"I thought so!" Von Aert exclaimed, beaming with satisfaction at +his own perspicacity. "I thought there was something suspicious +about the fellow. I believe I can almost smell out a heretic or a +traitor." + +The councillor's colleagues murmured their admiration at his +acuteness. + +"What have we here?" Von Aert went on, as he examined the packet. +"A sealed parcel addressed 'To the Blue Cap in the South Corner of +the Market Square of Brussels.' What think you of that, my friends, +for mystery and treason? Now, let us see the contents. Ah, ten +letters without addresses! But I see there are marks different from +each other on the corners. Ah!" he went on with growing excitement, +as he tore one open and glanced at the contents, "from the arch +traitor himself to conspirators here in Brussels. This is an important +capture indeed. Now, sirrah, what have you to say to this? For whom +are these letters intended?" + +"I know nothing of the contents of the letters, worshipful sir," +Ned said, falling on his knees and assuming an appearance of abject +terror. "They were delivered to me at Haarlem, and I was told that +I should have five nobles if I carried them to Brussels and delivered +them safely to a man who would meet me in the south corner of the +Market Square of Brussels. I was to hold the packet in my hand and +sling my bundle upon my stick, so that he might know me. He was to +have a blue cap on, and was to touch me on the shoulder and ask me +'How blows the wind in Holland?' and that, worshipful sir, is all +I know about it. I could not tell that there was any treason in the +business, else not for fifty nobles would I have undertaken it." + +"You lie, you young villain!" the councillor shouted. "Do you +try to persuade me that the Prince of Orange would have intrusted +documents of such importance to the first boy he met in the street? +In the first place you must be a heretic." + +"I don't know about heretics," Ned said, rising to his feet and +speaking stubbornly. "I am of the religion my father taught me, +and I would not pretend that I was a Catholic, not to save my life." + +"There you are, you see," the councillor said triumphantly to his +colleagues. "Look at the obstinacy and insolence of these Hollanders. +Even this brat of a boy dares to tell us that he is not a Catholic. +Take him away," he said to the warder, "and see that he is securely +kept. We may want to question him again; but in any case he will +go to the gallows tomorrow or next day." + +Ned was at once led away. + +"What think you?" Von Aert asked his colleagues as the door closed +behind the prisoner. "Is it worth while to apply the torture to him +at once to obtain from him the names of those for whom these letters +were intended? It is most important for us to know. Look at this +letter; it is from the prince himself, and refers to preparations +making for a general rising." + +"I should hardly think the boy would have been intrusted with so +important a secret," one of the other councillors said; "for it +would be well known he would be forced by torture to reveal it if +these letters were to be found upon him. I think that the story he +tells us is a true one, and that it is more likely they would be +given him to deliver to some person who would possess the key to +these marks on the letters." + +"Well, at any rate no harm can be done by applying the screws," the +councillor said. "If he knows they will make him speak, I warrant +you." + +The other two agreed. + +"If you will allow me to suggest, your excellency," Genet said +humbly, "that it might be the better way to try first if any such +as this Blue Cap exists. The boy might be promised his life if he +could prove that the story was true. Doubtless there is some fixed +hour at which he was to meet this Blue Cap. We might let him go to +meet him, keeping of course a strict watch over him. Then if any +such man appears and speaks to him we could pounce upon him at once +and wring from him the key to these marks. If no such man appears +we should then know that the story was but a device to deceive, +and could then obtain by some means the truth from him." + +The suggestion met with approval. + +"That is a very good plan, and shall be carried out. Send for the +prisoner again." + +Ned was brought down again. + +"We see that you are young," Von Aert said, "and you have doubtless +been misled in this matter, and knew not that you were carrying +treasonable correspondence. We therefore are disposed to treat +you leniently. At what time were you to meet this Blue Cap in the +market?" + +"Within an hour of sunset," Ned replied. "I am to be there at sunset +and to wait for an hour; and was told that he would not fail to +come in that time, but that if he did I was to come again the next +day." + +"It is to be hoped that he will not fail you," Von Aert said grimly, +"for we shall not be disposed to wait his pleasure. Tomorrow evening +you will go with a packet and deliver it to the man when he comes +to you. Beware that you do not try to trick us, for you will be +closely watched, and it will be the worse for you if you attempt +treachery. If the man comes those who are there will know how to +deal with him." + +"And shall I be at liberty to depart?" Ned asked doubtfully. + +"Of course you will," Von Aert replied; "we should then have no +further occasion for you, and you would have proved to us that your +story was a true one, and that you were really in ignorance that +there was any harm in carrying the packet hither." + +Ned was perfectly well aware that the councillor was lying, and that +even had he met the man in the blue cap he would be dragged back +to prison and put to death, and that the promise meant absolutely +nothing -- the Spaniards having no hesitation in breaking the +most solemn oaths made to heretics. He had, indeed, only asked the +question because he thought that to assent too willingly to the +proposal might arouse suspicion. It was the very thing he had been +hoping for, and which offered the sole prospect of escape from a +death by torture, for it would at least give him the chance of a +dash for freedom. + +He had named an hour after sunset partly because it was the hour +which would have been probably chosen by those who wished that the +meeting should take place unobserved, but still more because his +chances of escape would be vastly greater were the attempt made +after dark. The three councillors sat for some time talking over +the matter after Ned had been removed. The letters had all been +read. They had been carefully written, so as to give no information +if they should fall into the wrong hands, and none of them contained +any allusion whatever to past letters or previous negotiations. + +"It is clear," Von Aert said, "that this is a conspiracy, and that +those to whom these letters are sent are deeply concerned in it, +and yet these letters do not prove it. Suppose that we either seize +this Blue Cap or get from the boy the names of those for whom the +letters are intended, they could swear on the other hand that they +knew nothing whatever about them, and had been falsely accused. No +doubt many of these people are nobles and citizens of good position, +and if it is merely their word against the word of a boy, and that +wrung from him by torture, our case would not be a strong one." + +"Our case is not always strong," one of the other councillors said; +"but that does not often make much difference." + +"It makes none with the lower class of the people," Von Aert agreed; +"but when we have to deal with people who have influential friends +it is always best to be able to prove a case completely. I think +that if we get the names of those for whom the letters are meant we +can utilize the boy again. We will send him to deliver the letters +in person, as I believe he was intended to do. He may receive +answers to take back to Holland; but even if he does not the fact +that these people should have received such letters without at once +denouncing the bearer and communicating the contents to us, will +be quite sufficient proof of their guilt." + +"In that case," one of the others remarked, "the boy must not be +crippled with the torture." + +"There will be no occasion for that," Von Aert said contemptuously. +"A couple of turns with the thumbscrew will suffice to get out of +a boy of that age everything he knows. Well, my friends, we will +meet here tomorrow evening. I shall go round to the Market Square +with Genet to see the result of this affair, in which I own I +am deeply interested; not only because it is most important, but +because it is due to the fact that I myself entertained a suspicion +of the boy that the discovery of the plot has been made. I will +take charge of these letters, which are for the time useless to +us, but which are likely to bring ten men's heads to the block." + +As Ned sat alone in his cell during the long hours of the following +day he longed for the time to come when his fate was to be settled. +He was determined that if it lay with him he would not be captured +alive. He would mount to the top story of a house and throw himself +out of a window, or snatch a dagger from one of his guards and +stab himself, if he saw no mode of escape. A thousand times better +to die so than to expire on a gibbet after suffering atrocious +tortures, which would, he knew, wring from him the names of those +for whom the letters were intended. + +He could bear pain as well as another; but flesh and blood could not +resist the terrible agonies inflicted by the torture, and sooner +or later the truth would be wrung from the most reluctant lips. +Still he thought that he had a fair chance of escape. It was clear +that he could not be closely surrounded by a guard, for in that +case Blue Cap would not venture near him. He must, therefore, be +allowed a considerable amount of liberty; and, however many men +might be on watch a short distance off, he ought to be able by a +sudden rush to make his way through them. There would at that hour +be numbers of people in the street, and this would add to his chance +of evading his pursuers. + +He ate heartily of a meal that was brought him at midday, and when +just at sunset the warder entered the cell and told him to follow +him, he felt equal to any exertion. When he came down into the +courtyard, a dozen men were gathered there, together with Von Aert +and his clerk. + +"Now," the councillor said sternly, "you see these men. They will +be round you on all sides, and I warn you that if you attempt to +escape or to give any warning sign to this Blue Cap, or to try any +tricks with us of any sort, you shall be put to death with such +tortures as you never dreamt of. Upon the other hand, if you carry +out my orders faithfully, and hand over this packet to the man +who meets you, you will be at liberty to go straight away, and to +return home without molestation." + +"I understand," Ned replied; "and as I cannot help myself, will do +your bidding. Where are my stick and bundle? He will not know me +unless I have them. I am to carry them on my shoulder." + +"Ah! I forgot," the councillor said, and giving the order to one +of the warders Ned's bundle and stick were brought him. + +"You will stroll leisurely along," Von Aert said, "and appear natural +and unconcerned. We shall be close to you, and you will be seized +in an instant if we observe anything suspicious in your movements." +Von Aert then took a packet from his doublet and handed it to +Ned, who placed it in his belt. The prison door was opened; three +or four of the men went out, and Ned followed. It was a curious +feeling to him as he walked down the street. Round him were numbers +of people laughing and chatting as they went, while he, though +apparently as free as they, was a prisoner with a dozen pair of +eyes watching him, and his life in deadly peril. + + + +CHAPTER IX + +IN HIDING + + +After five minutes' walking Ned arrived at the market square and +passed steadily down towards the south corner. The market was long +since over, and the market folk had returned to their farms and +villages, but there were a large number of people walking about. It +was already growing dusk, and in another half hour would be dark. +Ned turned when he got near the corner, strolled a short distance +back and then turned again. He carefully abstained from seeming +to stare about. The councillor and his clerk kept within a short +distance of him, the former wrapped up in a cloak with a high collar +that almost concealed his face. + +As to the others watching him, Ned could only guess at them. Four +men he noticed, who turned whenever he did; the others he guessed +were keeping somewhat further off, or were perhaps stationed at +the streets leading out of the square so as to cut him off should +he escape from those close to him. A few oil lamps were suspended +from posts at various points in the square, and at the ends of the +streets leading from it. These were lighted soon after he arrived +in the square. He decided that it would not do to make for the +street leading out of the south corner, as this was the one that he +would be suspected of aiming for; and, moreover, men would surely +be placed there to cut off Blue Cap on his entry. He, therefore, +determined to make for a somewhat narrow street, about halfway +between the south and west corners. + +He had followed this on the day he entered Brussels, as one of the +persons to whom the letters were addressed lived in it. He knew +that there were many lanes running into it, and that at the lower +end several streets, branching off in various directions, met in +the small square in which it terminated. Half an hour passed. It +was now quite dark, and he felt that he had better delay no longer. +He walked half along his beat towards the south corner, then with +a sudden spring darted off. The two men walking on that side of him +were some ten paces distant, and he ran straight at them. Taken by +surprise, before they had time to throw back their cloaks and draw +their rapiers, he was upon them. + +With a blow from his leaded stick, delivered with all his strength, +he struck one man to the ground, and then turning to the other +struck him on the wrist as he was in the act of drawing his sword. +The man uttered a loud cry of pain and rage, and Ned ran at the +top of his speed towards the street. He knew that he need fear +no pursuit from the two men he had encountered, that those on the +other side of him were some distance behind, and that as so many +people intervened his pursuers would probably soon lose sight of +him. Threading his way between the groups of people, who had arrested +their walk at the sound of loud and sudden shouting, he approached +the end of the street. + +By the light of the lamp there he saw two men standing with drawn +swords. Breaking suddenly into a walk he made for the house next to +the street, and then turned so that he came upon the men sideways +instead of from the front, at which they were expecting him. There +was a sudden exclamation from the man nearest to him; but Ned was +within two yards of him before he perceived him, and before he was +on guard the loaded stick fell with the full sweep of Ned's arm +upon his ankle, and in an instant he was prostrate, and Ned darted +at full speed down the street with the other man in pursuit a few +paces behind him. + +Before he had run far Ned found that he could gain but little upon +his pursuer, and that he must rid himself of him if he were to have +a chance of escaping. He slackened his speed a little, and allowed +the man to gain slightly upon him. Thinking that the fugitive was +within his grasp the warder exerted himself to his utmost. Suddenly +Ned sprang into a doorway; the man, unable to check himself, rushed +past. In a moment Ned was out again, and before the fellow could +arrest his steps and turn, gave him a violent shove behind, which +hurled him on his face with a tremendous crash, and Ned continued +his way. There was a great shouting, but it was full fifty yards +away, and he felt his hopes rise. His pursuers were now all behind +him, and he felt sure that in the darkness and the narrow streets +he should be able to evade them. + +He took the first turning he came to, turned again and again, and +presently slackened his pace to a walk, convinced that for a time +his pursuers must be at fault. He was now among narrow streets +inhabited by the poorer classes. There were no lamps burning here, +and he began to wonder which way he had better take, and where he +should pass the night. It was absolutely necessary to obtain some +other disguise, for he was sure that the gates would be so carefully +watched in the morning there would be no chance whatever of his +getting safely out in his present attire. Presently, through a +casement on the ground floor, he heard the sound of low singing in +a woman's voice. He stopped at once and listened. It was the air +of a Lutheran hymn he had frequently heard in Holland. Without +hesitation he knocked at the door, and lifting the latch entered. +A woman and girl were sitting at work inside; they looked up in +surprise at seeing a stranger. + +"Pardon me," he said, "but I am a Protestant, and am hunted by Alva's +bloodhounds. I have evaded them and I am safe for the present; but +I know not where to go, or where to obtain a disguise. As I passed +the window I heard the air of a Lutheran hymn, and knew that there +were within those who would, if they could, aid me." + +The woman looked reprovingly at the girl. + +"How imprudent of you, Gertrude!" she said. "Not that it is your +fault more than mine. I ought to have stopped you, but I did not +think your voice would be heard through that thick curtain. Who are +you, sir, and where do you come from?" she asked, turning to Ned. + +"I come from Holland," he said, "and was the bearer of important +letters from the Prince of Orange." + +The woman hesitated. "I would not doubt you," she said; "but in +these days one has to be suspicious of one's shadow. However, as +after what you have heard our lives are in your hands, I would fain +trust you; though it seems to me strange that an important mission +should be intrusted to one of your age and station." + +"My age was all in my favour," Ned replied. "As to my station, it +is not quite what it seems; for I am a gentleman volunteer in the +household of the prince, and he accepted my services thinking that +I might succeed when a man would be suspected." + +"I will give you shelter," the woman said quietly; "though I know +that I risk my life and my daughter's in doing so. But the Lord holds +us in His hands, and unless it be His will we shall not perish." +So saying, she got up and barred the door. + +"Now, tell me more as to how you came to fall into this peril," +she said. + +Ned related his adventure, and the manner in which he had effected +his escape from the hands of his captors. + +"You have, indeed, had an escape," the woman said. "There are few +upon whom Councillor Von Aert lays his hand who ever escape from +it. You have indeed shown both skill and courage in thus freeing +yourself." + +"There is no great courage in running away when you know that if +you stay torture and death are before you," Ned replied. + +"And now, what are your plans?" the woman asked. + +"My only plan is to obtain a disguise in which to escape from the +city. My mission is unfortunately ended by the loss of my papers, +and I shall have but a sorry story to tell to the prince if I +succeed in making my way back to Holland, of the utter failure I +have made of the mission with which he was good enough to intrust +me." + +He took from his belt the packet that Von Aert had given him, and +was about to throw it in the fire when his eye fell upon it. He +opened it hastily, and exclaimed with delight, "Why, here are the +letters! That scoundrel must have had them in his doublet, as well +as the packet made up for me to carry, and he has inadvertently given +me the wrong parcel. See, madam, these are the letters I told you +of, and these are the marks in the corners whose meaning Von Aert +was so anxious to discover. Now, if I can but obtain a good disguise +I will deliver these letters before I start on my way back." + +The girl, who was about fourteen years of age, spoke a few words +in a low voice to her mother. The latter glanced at Ned. + +"My daughter suggests that you should disguise yourself as a woman," +she said. "And indeed in point of height you might pass well, seeing +that you are but little taller than myself. But I fear that you +are far too widely built across the shoulders to wear my clothes." + +"Yes, indeed," Ned agreed, smiling; "but you are tall and slight. +I could pass well enough for one of these Flemish peasant girls, +for they are sometimes near as broad as they are long. Yes, indeed, +if I could get a dress such as these girls wear I could pass easily +enough. I am well provided with money, but unfortunately it is +hidden in the ground a mile outside the gates. I only carry with +me a small sum for daily use, and that of course was taken from me +by my jailers." + +"Be not uneasy about money," the woman said. "Like yourself, we +are not exactly what we look. I am the Countess Von Harp." + +Ned made a movement of surprise. The name was perfectly known to +him, being that of a noble in Friesland who had been executed at +Brussels a few months before by the orders of the Council of Blood. + +"When my husband was murdered," the Countess Von Harp went on, +"I received a warning from a friend that I and my daughter, being +known to be members of the Reformed Church, would be seized. For +myself I cared little; but for my daughter's sake I resolved to +endeavour to escape. I knew that I should be nowhere safe in the +Netherlands, and that there was little chance of a woman and girl +being able to escape from the country, when upon every road we +should meet with disorderly soldiery, and every town we should pass +through swarmed with Alva's agents. I resolved, therefore, to stay +here. An old servant took this house for me, and here I have lived +ever since in the disguise you see. My servant still lives with +us, and goes abroad and makes our purchases. Our neighbours are all +artisans and attend to their own business. It is supposed among +them that I am one who has been ruined in the troubles, and now +support myself by embroidery; but in fact I am well supplied with +money. When I came here I brought all my jewels with me; besides, +I have several good friends who know my secret, and through whom, +from time to time, money has been transmitted to me from my steward +in Friesland. Our estates in Brabant have of course been confiscated, +and for a time those in Friesland were also seized. But when the +people rose four months ago they turned out the man who had seized +them, and as he was a member of the Council of Blood he was lucky +in escaping with his life. So that, you see, the cost of a peasant +woman's dress is a matter that need give you no concern." + +There was now a knock at the door. It was repeated. + +"It is my servant," the countess said. Ned at once unbarred and +opened the door. The old woman gave an exclamation of astonishment +at seeing a stranger. + +"Come in, Magdalene," the countess said; "it is a friend. You are +later than I expected." + +"It is not my fault, madam," the old servant said. "I have been +stopped four or five times, and questioned and made game of, by +German soldiers posted at the ends of the streets; the quarter is +full of them. I was going through the market place when a sudden +tumult arose, and they say a prisoner of great importance has made +his escape. Councillor Von Aert was there, shouting like a madman. +But he had better have held his tongue; for as soon as he was +recognized the crowd hustled and beat him, and went nigh killing +him, when some men with drawn swords rescued him from their hands, +and with great difficulty escorted him to the town hall. He is hated +in Brussels, and it was rash of him to venture out after dark." + +"This is the escaped prisoner, Magdalene." The old woman looked +with surprise at Ned. + +"You are pleased to joke with me, madam. This is but a boy." + +"That is true, Magdalene; but he is, nevertheless, the prisoner +whose escaped angered the councillor so terribly, and for whom the +guard you speak of are now in search." + +The old servant shook her head. "Ah, madam, are you not running risks +enough of detection here without adding to them that of concealing +a fugitive?" + +"You are right," Ned said; "and it was selfish and wrong of me to +intrude myself here." + +"God willed it so," the countess said. "My daughter's voice was +the instrument that directed your steps here. It is strange that +she should have sung that hymn just as you were passing, and that +I should have heard her without checking her. The hand of God +is in all these things; therefore, do not make yourself uneasy on +our account. Magdalene, we have settled that he shall assume the +disguise of a young peasant girl, and tomorrow you shall purchase +the necessary garments." + +"Yes, he might pass as a girl," the old servant agreed. "But, I pray +you, let him not stay an instant in this garb. I do not think they +will search the houses, for the artisans of Brussels are tenacious +of their rights, and an attempt would bring them out like a swarm +of bees. Still it is better that he should not remain as he is for +an hour. Come with me, young sir; I will furnish you with clothes +at once. I am not so tall as I was, but there were few taller women +in Friesland than I was when I was the countess' nurse. + +Ned could well imagine that; for Magdalene, although now some sixty +years old, was a tall, large framed woman. He followed her to a +chamber upstairs, and was furnished by her with all the necessary +articles of dress; and in these, as soon as, having placed an oil +lamp on the table, she retired, he proceeded to array himself, and +presently descended the stairs, feeling very strange and awkward +in this new attire. Gertrude Von Harp burst into a fit of merry +laughter, and even the countess smiled. + +"That will do very well, indeed," she said, "when you have got on +the Flemish headdress, which conceals the hair." + +"I have it here, madam," Magdalene said; "but it was useless to +leave it up there for him, for he would have no idea how to fold +it rightly. Now sit down on that stool, sir, and I will put it on +for you." + +When this was done the metamorphosis was complete, and Ned could +have passed anywhere without exciting suspicion that he was other +than he seemed. + +"That will do all very well for the present," Magdalene said; "but +the first thing tomorrow I will go out and get him a gown at the +clothes mart. His face is far too young for that dress. Moreover +the headgear is not suited to the attire; he needs, too, a long +plait of hair to hang down behind. That I can also buy for him, +and a necklace or two of bright coloured beads. However, he could +pass now as my niece should any one chance to come in. Now I will +go upstairs and fetch down his clothes and burn them. If a search +should be made they will assuredly excite suspicion if found in a +house occupied only by women." + +"You had best not do that, Magdalene. Hide them in a bed or up +one of the chimneys. When he leaves this and gets into the country +he will want them again. In these times a young woman unprotected +could not walk the road by herself, and dressed as a woman it would +be strange for him to be purchasing male attire." + +"That is true enough, madam; as you say, it will be better to hide +them until he can leave, which I hope will be very shortly." + +"I wish we could leave too," the countess sighed. "I am weary of +this long confinement here, and it is bad for Gertrude never going +out except for a short walk with you after dark." + +"It would not do to attempt it," the old woman said. "The Spanish +soldiers are plundering all round Ghent; the Germans are no better +at Antwerp. You know what stories are reported of their doings." + +"No, we could not go in that direction," the countess agreed; "but +I have thought often, Magdalene, that we may possibly make our way +down to Ostend. Things are much quieter on that line." + +"I should be glad to give you what escort I could, madam," Ned said. +"But, indeed, the times are bad for travelling and as you are safe +here as it seems for the present, I would not say a word to induce +you to leave and to encounter such dangers as you might meet by the +way. In a short time, I believe, the greater part of the Spaniards +and Germans will march against Holland, and Brabant will then be +free from the knaves for awhile, and the journey might be undertaken +with greater safety." + +"You are right," the countess said. "It was but a passing thought, +and now we have waited here so long we may well wait a little longer. +Now, tell us more about yourself. You speak Dutch perfectly, and +yet it seems to me at times that there is some slight accent in +your tones." + +"I am only half Dutch," Ned replied; "my father is English." He +then related the whole history of his parentage, and of the events +which led him to take service with the Prince of Orange. When he +had concluded the countess said: + +"Your story accounts for matters which surprised me somewhat in +what you first told me. The men of our Low Countries are patient +and somewhat slow of action, as is shown by the way in which they +so long submitted to the cruel tyranny of the Spaniards. Now they +have once taken up their arms, they will, I doubt not, defend +themselves, and will fight to the death, however hopeless the +chances may seem against them; but they are not prompt and quick +to action. Therefore the manner of your escape from the hands of +those who were watching you appeared to me wonderful; but now I know +that you are English, and a sailor too, I can the better understand +it, for I have heard that your countrymen are quick in their +decisions and prompt in action. + +"They say that many of them are coming over to fight in Holland; +being content to serve without pay, and venturing their lives in +our cause, solely because our religion is the same and they have +hatred of oppression, having long been free from exactions on the +part of their sovereigns. Many of our people have taken refuge there, +and I have more than once thought that if the Spaniards continued +to lord it in the Netherlands I would pass across the seas with +Gertrude. My jewels would sell for enough to enable us to live +quietly there." + +"If you should go to England, madam," Ned said earnestly, "I pray +you in the first place to inquire for Mistress Martin at Rotherhithe, +which is close by the city. I can warrant you she will do all in +her power to assist you, and that her house will be at your disposal +until you can find a more suitable lodgment. She will know from +me, if I should escape from these dangers, from how great a peril +you have saved me, and if it should be that I do not return home, +she will welcome you equally when she learns from your lips that +you took me in here when I was pursued by the minions of the Council +of Blood, and that you furnished me with a disguise to enable me +to escape from them." + +"Should I go to England," the countess replied, "I will assuredly +visit your mother, were it only to learn whether you escaped from +all the dangers of your journey; but, indeed, I would gladly do +so on my own account, for it is no slight comfort on arriving as +strangers in an unknown country to meet with one of one's own nation +to give us advice and assistance." + +For another two hours they sat and talked of England, the countess +being glad, for once, to think of another subject than the sad +condition of her country. Then when the clock sounded nine they +retired, Magdalene insisting upon Ned occupying her chamber, while +she lay down upon a settle in the room in which they were sitting. +Ned slept long and heavily; he had had but little rest during the +two previous nights, and the sun was high when he awoke. As soon +as he began to move about there was a knock at his door, and the +old servant entered. + +"I need not ask if you have slept well," she remarked "for the clocks +have sounded nine, and I have been back an hour from market. Here +are all your things, and I warrant me that when you are dressed in +them you will pass anywhere as a buxom peasant girl." + +Indeed, when Ned came downstairs in the short petticoats, trimmed +bodice, and bright kerchief pinned across the bosom, and two rows +of large blue beads round his neck, his disguise was perfect, save +as to his head. This Magdalene again arranged for him. "Yes, you +will do very well now," she said, surveying him critically. "I have +bought a basket, too, full of eggs; and with that on your arm you +can go boldly out and fear no detection, and can walk straight +through the city gates." + +"I hope I don't look as awkward as I feel?" Ned asked, smiling. + +"No, you do not look awkward at all. You had best join a party as +you go out, and separate from them when once you are well beyond +the walls." + +"He must return here this evening, Magdalene," the countess said. +"He has a mission to perform, and cannot leave until he does." + +"I will set about it at once, countess, and shall get it finished +before the gates are closed. I will not on any account bring upon +you the risk of another night's stay here." + +"I think there will be no risk in it," the countess said firmly; +"and for today at least there is sure to be a vigilant watch kept +at the gates. It were best, too, that you left before noon, for by +that time most of the people from the villages round are returning. +If you are not recognized in the streets there is no risk whatever +while you are in here; besides, we shall be anxious to know how +you have got through the day. And another reason why you had better +stay the night is that by starting in the morning you will have +the day before you to get well away, whereas if you go at night +you may well miss your road, especially if there is no moon, and +you do not know the country. Therefore I pray you urgently to come +back here for tonight. It is a pleasure to us to have a visitor +here, and does us good to have a fresh subject for our thoughts. +Gertrude has been doing nothing but talk about England ever since +she woke." + +Although Ned saw that the old servant was very reluctant that he +should, as she considered, imperil her charges' safety by a longer +stay, he could not refuse the invitation so warmly given. Breakfast +was now placed on the table. As soon as the meal was over he prepared +to start, receiving many directions from Magdalene to be sure and +not take long strides, or to swing his arms too much, or to stare +about, but to carry himself discreetly, as was becoming a young +woman in a town full of rough foreign men. + +"How do you mean to see the people to whom you have letters?" the +countess asked. "Some of them, you tell me, are nobles, and it will +not be easy for a peasant girl to come into their presence." + +"I am told to send up the message that a person from the village of +Beerholt is desirous of speaking to them, countess," Ned replied. +"I believe there is no such village, but it is a sort of password; +and I have another with which to address them when they see me." + +"I will start with you," the servant said, "and walk with you +until you are past the guards. There are many soldiers about in +the quarter this morning, and I hear they are questioning every +one whether they have seen aught of a country lad." + +"I thank you," Ned replied, "but I would rather go alone. If I am +detected harm would only come to myself, but if you were with me +you would assuredly all be involved in my misfortune. I would far +rather go alone. I do not feel that there is any danger of my being +suspected; and if I am alone I can bandy jokes with the soldiers if +they speak to me. There is no fear that either Spanish or Germans +will notice that I speak Dutch rather than Flemish. What is the +price at which I ought to offer my eggs?" + +Magdalene told him the price she generally paid to the market women. +"Of course you must ask a little more than that, and let people +beat you down to that figure." + +"Now I am off, then," he said, taking up the basket. + +"May God keep you in His hands!" the countess said solemnly. "It +is not only your own life that is at stake, but the interests of +our country." + +"Turn round and let me take a last look at you," Magdalene said, +"and be sure that everything is right. Yes, you will pass; but +remember what I told you about your walk." + +Ned walked briskly along until he came within sight of two soldiers +standing at a point where the street branched. He now walked more +slowly, stopping here and there and offering his eggs to women +standing at their doors or going in and out. As he thought it better +to effect a sale he asked rather lower prices than those Magdalene +had given him, and disposed of three or four dozen before he +reached the soldiers. They made no remark as he passed. He felt +more confident now, and began to enter into the spirit of his part; +and when one of a group of soldiers in front of a wine shop made +some laughing remark to him he answered him pertly, and turned the +laugh of the man's comrades against him. + +On nearing the centre of the town he began his task of delivering +the letters, choosing first those who resided in comparatively quiet +streets, so as to get rid of as many of them as possible before he +entered the more crowded thoroughfares, where his risk of detection +would be greater. The only persons he was really afraid of meeting +were Von Aert and his clerk. The first might not detect him, but +he felt sure that if the eyes of the latter fell upon him he would +recognize him. With the various burghers he had little trouble. +If they were in their shops he walked boldly in, and said to them, +"I am the young woman from the village of Beerholt, whom you were +expecting to see;" and in each case the burgher said at once, +"It is my wife who has business with you," and led the way into +the interior of the house. Ned's next question: "How is the wind +blowing in Holland?" was answered by his being taken into a quiet +room. The letter was then produced, and in each case an answer more +or less satisfactory was given. + +Ned found that there were a large number of men in Brussels ripe for +a revolt, but that there was no great chance of the rising taking +place until the Prince of Orange had gained some marked success, +such as would encourage hopes that the struggle might in the end +be successful. In three or four cases there were favourable answers +to the appeals for funds, one burgher saying that he and his friends +had subscribed between them a hundred thousand gulden, which they +would forward by the first opportunity to a banker at Leyden. One +said that he found that the prince's proclamations of absolute +toleration of all religions produced a bad effect upon many of his +friends, for that in Brabant they were as attached as ever to the +Catholic religion, and would be loath to see Lutheran and Calvinist +churches opened. + +"I know that the prince is desirous of wounding no one's conscience," +Ned said. "But how can it be expected the Protestants of Holland +and Zeeland will allow the Catholics to have churches, with priests +and processions, in their midst, if their fellow religionists are +not suffered to worship in their way in Brabant? The prince has +already proclaimed that every province may, as at present, make +its own rules. And doubtless in the provinces where the Catholic +religion is dominant it will still remain so. Only he claims that +no man shall be persecuted for his religion." + +"It is a pity that we cannot all be of one mind," the man said +doubtfully. "Were there no religious questions between the provinces +they would be as one." + +"That may be," Ned replied. "But in religion as in all other things, +men will differ just as they do about the meats they eat and the +wines they drink." + +"Well, I shall do my best," the burgher said. "But I fear these +religious differences will forever stand in the way of any united +action on the part of the provinces." + +"I fear that it will," Ned agreed, "so long as people think it more +important to enforce their neighbours' consciences than to obtain +freedom for themselves." + +The two last letters that Ned had to deliver were to nobles, whose +mansions were situated in the Grand Square. It was not easy to +obtain access here. The lackeys would probably laugh in his face +did he ask them to take his message to their master. And indeed +the disguise he now wore, although excellent as protection from +danger, was the worst possible as regarded his chance of obtaining +an interview. By this time he had sold the greater part of his eggs, +and he sat down, as if fatigued, on a doorstep at a short distance +from one of the mansions, and waited in the hope that he might +presently see the noble with whom he had to do issue out. + +In half an hour two mounted lackeys rode up to the door, one of +them leading a horse. A short time afterwards a gentleman came out +and mounted. He heard a bystander say to another, "There is the +Count of Sluys." Ned got up, took his basket, and as the count +came along crossed the road hurriedly just in front of his horse. +As he did so he stumbled and fell, and a number of his eggs rolled +out on the ground. There was a laugh among the bystanders, and the +count reigned in his horse. + +"What possessed you to run like that under my horse's feet, my poor +girl?" he asked, as Ned rose and began to cry loudly. Ned looked +up in his face and rapidly said: "I am the person you expect from +Beerholt." + +The count gave a low exclamation of surprise, and Ned went on, "How +does the wind blow in Holland?" The count deliberately felt in his +pouch and drew out a coin, which he handed to Ned. + +"Be at my back door in an hour's time. Say to the servant who opens +it, 'I am the person expected.' He will lead you to me." + +Then he rode forward, Ned pouring out voluble thanks for the coin +bestowed upon him. + +"You are a clever wench," a soldier standing by said to Ned laughing. +"That was very artfully done, and I warrant me it is not the first +time you have tried it." + +"I wasn't going to carry my eggs all the way back," Ned replied in +an undertone. "I suppose there are tricks in your trade as in mine." + +The soldier laughed again, and Ned passing quickly on mingled in +the crowd, and soon moved away a considerable distance from the +house. An hour later he went up a side street, in which was the +door used by the servants and tradespeople of the count. A lackey +was standing there. "I am the person expected," Ned said quietly +to him. He at once led the way into the house up some back stairs +and passages, along a large corridor, then opening a door, he +motioned to Ned to enter. + + + +CHAPTER X + +A DANGEROUS ENCOUNTER + + +The Count of Sluys was sitting at a table covered with papers. + +"You have chosen a strange disguise," he said with a smile. + +"It is none of my choosing," Ned replied. "I came into the city +in the dress of a peasant boy, but was arrested by Councillor Von +Aert, and had I not made my escape should probably have by this +time been hung." + +"Are you the lad for whom such a search has been made?" the count +asked in surprise. "Von Aert is so furious he can talk about nothing +else, and all the world is laughing at his having been tricked by +a boy. Had I known that it was the prince's messenger I should not +have felt inclined to laugh; thinking that papers, that would have +boded me evil if discovered, might have been found upon him." + +"They were found upon me," Ned replied; "but happily I recovered +them. As they were not addressed, no one was any the wiser. This +is the one intended for you, sir." + +The count opened and read the document, and then gave Ned a long +message to deliver to the prince. It contained particulars of his +interviews with several other nobles, with details as to the number +of men they could put in the field, and the funds they could dispose +of in aid of the rising. Ned took notes of all the figures on a +slip of paper, as he had done in several other instances. The count +then asked him as to his arrest and manner of escape, and laughed +heartily when he found that Von Aert had himself by mistake returned +the letters found upon Ned. + +"I have delivered all but one," Ned said. "And that I know not how +to dispose of, for it would be dangerous to play the same trick +again. And, indeed, I want if possible to be out of town tomorrow; +not so much for my own sake, but because were I detected it might +bring destruction upon those who are sheltering me." + +"Who is this letter for?" the count asked. Ned hesitated; the +noble to whom the letter was addressed was, like many others of the +prince's secret adherents, openly a strong supporter of the Duke +of Alva. And, indeed, many were at that time playing a double game, +so as to make profit whichever side was successful in the long run. + +"Perhaps it is better not to tell me," the count said, seeing Ned's +hesitation, "and I am glad to see that you are so discreet. But it +can be managed in this way: Take a pen and go to that other table +and write the address on the letter. I will call in my servant and +tell him to take it from you and to deliver it at once, and ask +for a reply to the person from Beerholt. That is, if that is the +password to him also. He shall deliver the reply to you, and I will +give you my promise that I will never ask him afterwards to whom +he took the letter." + +Ned felt that this would be the best course he could adopt, and +addressed the letter at once. The count touched a bell and the +lackey again entered. + +"Take that letter at once," the count said, motioning to the letter +Ned held in his hand. "You will deliver it yourself, and ask that +an answer may be given to you for the person from Beerholt. Wait +for that answer and bring it back here." + +After the servant had gone the count chatted with Ned as to the +state of affairs in Holland, and asked him many questions about +himself. It was an hour and a half before the servant returned. He +was advancing with the letter to the count, when the latter motioned +to him to hand it to Ned. + +"Is there nothing else that I can do for you?" he asked. "How do +you intend to travel back through the country? Surely not in that +dress?" + +"No, sir; I was thinking of procuring another." + +"It might be difficult for you to get one," the count said. "I will +manage that for you;" and he again touched the bell. "Philip," he +said to the lackey, "I need a suit of your clothes; a quiet plain +suit, such as you would use if you rode on an errand for me. Bring +them here at once, and order a new suit for yourself. + +"He is but little taller than you are," he went on when the man +had retired, "and his clothes will, I doubt not, fit you. You have +not got a horse, I suppose?" + +"No, sir." + +"Which way are you going back?" + +"I shall take the Antwerp road." + +"There is a clump of trees about three miles along that road," the +count said. "Philip shall be there with a horse for you at any hour +that you like to name." + +"I thank you greatly, count. I will be there at nine in the morning. +I shall sally out in my present dress, leave the road a mile or +so from the town, and find some quiet place where I can put on the +suit you have furnished me with, and then walk on to the wood." + +"Very well; you shall find the horse there at that hour without +fail. You are a brave lad, and have carried out your task with +great discretion. I hope some day to see you again by the side of +the Prince of Orange." + +A minute later the lackey returned with a bundle containing the +suit of clothes. Ned placed it in his basket. + +"Goodbye, and a good journey," the count said. Ned followed the +lackey, whom the count had told him had been born on his estate, +and could be implicitly trusted, down the stairs, and then made +his way without interruption to his lodging. + +"Welcome back," the countess exclaimed, as he entered. "We have +prayed for you much today, but I began to fear that harm had befallen +you; for it is already growing dark, and I thought you would have +been here two or three hours since. How have you sped?" + +"Excellently well, madam. I have delivered all the letters, and +have obtained answers, in all cases but one, by word of mouth. That +one is in writing; but I shall commit it to heart, and destroy it +at once. Then, if I am again searched, I shall not be in so perilous +a position as before." + +He opened the letter and read it. As he had expected, it was +written with extreme caution, and in evidently a feigned hand; no +names either of places or persons were mentioned. The writer simply +assured "his good cousin" of his goodwill, and said that owing to +the losses he had had in business from the troubled times, he could +not say at present how much he could venture to aid him in the new +business on which he had embarked. + +After reading it through, Ned threw the paper into the fire. + +"He did not feel sure as to whom he was writing," he said, "and +feared treachery. However, as I have obtained nine answers, I need +not mind if this be but a poor one. Now, madam, I am ready to start +at half past seven in the morning. I have been furnished with another +disguise, to put on when I get beyond the walls; and a horse is to +be in waiting for me at a point three miles away; so that I hope +I shall be able to make my way back without much difficulty." + +Accordingly in the morning, after many thanks to the Countess Von +Harp for her kindness, and the expression of his sincerest hope that +they might meet again, either in England or Holland, Ned started +on his way. On reaching one of the streets leading to the gate he +fell in behind a group of country people, who, having early disposed +of the produce they had brought to market, were making their way +home. Among them was a lad of about his own age; and on reaching the +gate two soldiers at once stepped forward and seized him, to the +surprise and consternation of himself and his friends. The soldiers +paid no heed to the outcry, but shouted to someone in the guard +house, and immediately a man whom Ned recognized as one of the +warders who had attended him in prison came out. + +"That is not the fellow," he said, after a brief look at the captive. +"He is about the same age, but he is much fairer than our fellow, +and in no way like him in face." + +Ned did not wait to hear the result of the examination, but at once +passed on out of the gate with the country people unconnected with +the captive. A minute or two later the latter with his friends +issued forth. Ned kept about halfway between the two parties until +he reached a lane branching off from the road in the direction in +which he wished to go. Following this for a mile he came into the +Ghent road, and had no difficulty in finding the place where he had +hidden his money. Going behind a stack of corn, a short distance +away, he changed his clothes; and pushing the female garments well +into the stack, went on his way again, well pleased to be once more +in male attire. + +The clothes fitted him well, and were of a sober colour, such as +a trusty retainer of a noble house would wear upon a journey. He +retraced his steps until again on the road to Antwerp, and followed +this until he came to the clump of trees. Here the count's servant +was awaiting him with two horses. He smiled as Ned came up. + +"If it had not been my own clothes you are wearing, I should not +have known you again," he said. "The count bade me ask you if you +had need of money? If so, I was to hand you this purse." + +"Give my thanks to the count," Ned replied, "and say that I am well +furnished." + +"Not in all respects, I think," the man said. + +Ned thought for a minute. + +"No," he said. "I have no arms." + +The man took a brace of pistols from the holsters of his own horse +and placed them in those on Ned's saddle, and then unbuckled his +sword belt and handed it to Ned. + +"It is ill travelling unarmed in the Netherlands at present," he +said. "What with the Spaniards and the Germans, and the peasants who +have been driven to take to a robber's life, no man should travel +without weapons. The count bade me give you these, and say he was +sure you would use them well if there should be need." + +Ned leaped into the saddle, and with sincere thanks to the man +galloped off towards Antwerp. Unless ill fortune should again throw +him in the way of Von Aert he now felt safe; and he had no fear +that this would be the case, for they would be devoting their whole +energy to the search for him in Brussels. He burst into a fit of +hearty laughter as he rode along, at the thought of the fury the +councillor must have been thrown into when, upon his return home, +he discovered that he had given away the wrong packet of letters. +He would have been angry enough before at the escape of the captive +he was himself watching, and the loss thereby of the means upon +which he had reckoned to discover the ownership of the letters, +and so to swell the list of victims. Still he doubtless consoled +himself at the thought that he was sure before many hours to have +his prisoner again in his power, and that, after all, annoying as +it was, the delay would be a short one indeed. But when he took +the packet from his pocket, and discovered that he had given up the +all important documents, and had retained a packet of blank paper, +he must have seen at once that he was foiled. He might recapture +the prisoner, torture him, and put him to death; but his first +step would of course have been to destroy the precious letters, +and there would be no evidence forthcoming against those for whom +they were intended, and who were doubtless men of considerable +standing and position, and not to be assailed upon the mere avowal +extracted by torture from a boy and unsupported by any written +proofs. + +"That evil looking clerk of his will come in for a share of his +displeasure," Ned thought to himself. "I believe that he is worse +than his master, and will take it sorely to heart at having been +tricked by a boy. I should have scant mercy to expect should I ever +fall into their hands again." + +Ned rode through the city of Mechlin without drawing rein. It was +but a month since that it had been the scene of the most horrible +butchery, simply because it had opened its gates to the Prince of +Orange on his forward march to attempt the relief of Mons. A few of +the prince's German mercenaries had been left there as a garrison. +These fired a few shots when the Spanish army approached, and +then fled in the night, leaving the town to the vengeance of the +Spaniards. In the morning a procession of priests and citizens went +out to beg for pardon, but the Spaniards rushed into the town and +began a sack and a slaughter that continued for three days. + +The churches, monasteries, and religious houses of every kind, +as well as those of the private citizens, were sacked; and the +desecration of the churches by the fanatics of Antwerp, for which +hundreds of heretics had been burnt to death, was now repeated a +thousand fold by the Roman Catholic soldiers of Philip. The ornaments +of the altars, the chalices, curtains, carpets, gold embroidered +robes of the priests, the repositories of the Host, the precious +vessels used in extreme unction, the rich clothing and jewelry +of the effigies of the Virgin and saints were all plundered. The +property of the Catholic citizens was taken as freely as that of +the Protestants; of whom, indeed, there were few in the city. Men, +women, and children were murdered wholesale in the streets. + +Even the ultra Catholic Jean Richardot, member of the Grand Council, +in reporting upon the events, ended his narration by saying "He +could say no more, for his hair stood on end, not only at recounting, +but even at remembering the scene." The survivors of the sack were +moving listlessly about the streets of the ruined city as Ned rode +through. Great numbers had died of hunger after the conclusion of +the pillage; for no food was to be obtained, and none dare leave +their houses until the Spanish and German troops had departed. Zutphen +had suffered a vengeance even more terrible than that of Mechlin. +Alva had ordered his son Frederick, who commanded the army that +marched against it, to leave not a single man alive in the city, +and to burn every house to the ground; and the orders were literally +obeyed. The garrison were first put to the sword, and then the +citizens were attacked and slaughtered wholesale. Some were stripped +naked and turned out to freeze to death in the fields. Five hundred +were tied back to back and drowned in the river. Some were hung +up by their feet, and suffered for many hours until death came to +their relief. + +Ned put up at Antwerp for the night. The news of the destruction +of Zutphen, and of the horrors perpetrated there, had arrived +but a few hours before, and a feeling of the most intense horror +and indignation filled the inhabitants; but none dared to express +what every one felt. The fate of Mechlin and Zutphen was as Alva +had meant it to be, a lesson so terrible, that throughout the +Netherlands, save in Holland and Zeeland alone, the inhabitants +were palsied by terror. Had one great city set the example and risen +against the Spaniards, the rest would have followed; but none dared +be the first to provoke so terrible a vengeance. Men who would have +risked their own lives shrank from exposing their wives and children +to atrocities and death. It seemed that conflict was useless. Van +der Berg, a brother-in-law of the Prince of Orange, who had been +placed by the prince as Governor of Guelderland and Overyssel, +fled by night, and all the cities which had raised the standard of +Orange deserted the cause at once. Friesland, too, again submitted +to the Spanish yoke. + +Ned, after putting up his horse at a hotel at Antwerp, sauntered +out into the streets. Antwerp at that time was one of the finest and +wealthiest towns in Europe. Its public buildings were magnificent, +the town hall a marvel of architectural beauty. He stood in the +great square admiring its beauties and those of the cathedral when +he was conscious of some one staring fixedly at him, and he could +scarce repress a start when he saw the malicious face of Genet, +the clerk of Councillor Von Aert. His first impulse was to fly, +but the square was full of burghers, with many groups of Spanish +soldiers sauntering about; he could not hope to escape. + +He saw by the expression on Genet's face that as yet he was not +sure of his identity. He had before seen him only as a country boy, +and in his present attire his appearance was naturally a good deal +changed. Still the fixed stare of the man showed that his suspicions +were strongly aroused, and Ned felt sure that it would not be +long before he completely recognized him. Nothing could be more +unfortunate than that this man whom he had believed to be diligently +searching for him in Brussels should thus meet him in the streets +of Antwerp. Turning the matter over rapidly in his mind he saw but +one hope of escape. He sauntered quietly up to a group of soldiers. + +"My friends," he said, "do you want to earn a few crowns?" + +"That would we right gladly," one of them replied, "seeing that +His Gracious Majesty has forgotten to pay us for well nigh a year." + +"There is a hang dog villain with a squint, in a russet cloak and +doublet, just behind me." Ned said. "I have had dealings with him, +and know him and his master to be villains. He claims that I am +in debt to his master, and it may be that it is true; but I have +particular reasons for objecting to be laid by the heels for it +just now." + +"That is natural enough," the soldier said. "I have experienced +the same unpleasantness, and can feel for you." + +"See here, then," Ned said. "Here are ten crowns, which is two +apiece for you. Now, I want you to hustle against that fellow, pick +a quarrel with him and charge him with assaulting you, and drag him +away to the guard house. Give him a slap on the mouth if he cries +out, and throw him into a cell, and let him cool his heels there +till morning. That will give me time to finish my business and be +off again into the country." + +"That can be managed easily enough," the soldier said with a laugh. +"He is an ill favoured looking varlet; and is, I doubt not, a +pestilent heretic. It would be a pleasure to cuff him even without +your honor's crowns." + +"Here is the money, then," Ned said; "but, above all, as I have +said, do not let him talk or cry out or make a tumult. Nip him +tightly by the neck." + +"We know our business," the soldier said. "You can rely on us to +manage your affair." + +Ned sauntered quietly on. In a minute or two he heard a loud and +sudden altercation, then there was the sound of blows, and looking +round he saw two of the soldiers shaking Genet violently. The man +endeavoured to shout to the crowd; but one of the soldiers smote +him heavily on the mouth, and then surrounding him they dragged +him away. "That is very satisfactorily done," Ned said to himself, +"and it is by no means likely that Master Genet will get a hearing +before tomorrow morning. He will be pushed into a cell in the +guard room on the charge of brawling and insolence, and it is not +probable that anyone will go near him till the morning. I certainly +should like to peep in and have a look at him. His rage would be +good to see; and he has been instrumental in sending such hundreds +of men to prison that one would like to see how he feels now that +it is his turn. Still I must not count too surely upon having time. +He may possibly find some officers who will listen to his tale, +although I do not think he is likely to do that; but still it would +be foolish to risk it, and I will mount my horse and ride on at +once." + +The ostler was somewhat surprised when Ned told him that he had +changed his mind, and that, instead of remaining for the night at +Antwerp, he should ride forward at once. As Ned paid him handsomely +for the feed the horse had had he made no remark, and Ned mounted +and rode out through the town by the gate through which he had +entered. Then he made a wide detour round the town, and rode on along +the bank of the river until he came to a ferry. Here he crossed, +and then rode on until he reached a village, where he resolved to +stop the night, being now off the main roads, and therefore fairly +safe from pursuit, even should Genet be able to satisfy his captors +that a mistake had been made, and that those who captured him had +in fact been aiding a fugitive to escape from justice. + +The host of the little inn apologized for the poor fare that was +set before him, on the ground of the exactions of the soldiers. +"One can scarcely call one's life one's own," he grumbled. "A body +of them rode into the village yesterday and stripped it clear of +everything, maltreating all who ventured even to remonstrate. They +came from Antwerp, I believe; but there is no saying, and even if +we knew them it would be useless to make complaints." + +Ned assured his host that he was very indifferent in the matter of +food. + +"In these days," he said, "if one can get a piece of bread one may +think one's self lucky. But you have, I hope, sufficient forage +for my horse." + +"Yes," the landlord replied; "their horses ate as much as they +could, but they could not carry off my supply of corn. Indeed the +horses were pretty well laden as it was with ducks and geese. I +let them have as much wine as they could drink, and of the best, so +they did not trouble to go down into the cellar. If they had they +would likely enough have broached all the casks and let the wine +run. There is nothing that these fellows are not capable of; they +seem to do mischief out of pure devilment." + +Ned had scarcely finished his meal when a tramping of horses was +heard outside. + +"The saints protect us!" the landlord exclaimed. "Here are either +these fellows coming back again, or another set doubtless just as +bad." + +A minute later the door opened and a party of a dozen soldiers +entered. + +"Wine, landlord! and your best!" a sergeant said. "Some comrades +who called here yesterday told us that your tap was good, so we +have ridden over to give you a turn." + +The landlord groaned. + +"Gracious, sirs," he said, "I am but a poor man, and your comrades +on parting forgot to settle for their wine. Another two or three +visits, and I am ruined." + +A volley of impatient oaths at once broke out, and without further +hesitation the terrified landlord hurried away, and returned loaded +with flasks of wine, upon which the soldiers were speedily engaged. + +"And who may you be, young sir?" one of them asked Ned, who was +sitting at a small table apart from the rest. + +"I am simply a traveller," Ned replied, "engaged upon my master's +business." + +"You are a likely looking young fellow too," the soldier said, "and +would have made a good soldier if you had had the chance, instead +of jogging about doing your lord's bidding; but I warrant me you +are no better than the rest of your countrymen, and do not know +one end of a sword from the other." + +"I am not skilled in arms," Ned replied, "though my experience +goes a little further than you say; but as you gentlemen protect +the Netherlands, and we have no army of our own, I have not had +the opportunity, even had I wished it, to become a soldier." + +"Move over here," the soldier said, "and join us in a cup to the +honour of Philip and confusion to the Prince of Orange and all +traitors." + +"I will join you in drinking to Philip, for in truth he is a great +monarch and a powerful, and I will also drink to the confusion of +all traitors whomsoever they may be." + +"You are all traitors at heart," one of the Spaniards who had not +before spoken, put in. "There is not a native of the Netherlands +but would rise against us tomorrow." + +"I think that is true speaking," said Ned quietly. "There are many +traitors in the Netherlands I grant you, but there are others to +whom your words can hardly apply." + +"They are all the same," the soldier said angrily. "Knaves every +one of them. However, before we have done with them we will reduce +their number." + +Ned did not reply; but having drank the glass of wine, returned +to his seat, and shortly afterwards, when the soldiers began to +quarrel among themselves, slipped from the room. The landlord was +outside, pacing anxiously up and down. + +"Are there any more of them in the village?" Ned asked. + +"Not that I know of," he answered; "and to me it makes no difference. +They will stay here swilling my wine all night, and in the morning +like enough will set fire to my house before they ride away. I +have just sent off my wife and daughters to be out of their reach. +As for myself, I am half minded to mix poison with their wine and +finish with them." + +"That would only bring down vengeance upon yourself," Ned said. +"Some would probably escape and tell the tale. At any rate, as there +are so large a number there would be sure to be inquiry when they +were found to be missing, and no doubt they mentioned to some of +their friends before they started where they were coming to, and +inquiry would be made. You could never get rid of all their bodies. +Besides, doubtless others in the village heard them ride up, and +know that they have been here; so you could not escape detection. +It is better to put up with them." + +"Yes, if there were only these fellows; but you will see that +another party will come, and another, until I am entirely ruined." + +"If you think that, I would in the morning shut up my house and +depart, and not return until these troubles are over." + +"And then come back and find my house burned down," the innkeeper +groaned. + +"Better that than to see yourself gradually ruined, and perhaps +lose your life," Ned said. + +"There is nowhere to go to," the innkeeper said with a shake of +his head. + +"You might do as many others have done," Ned replied, "and go to +Holland, where at least you would be safe." + +"But not for long," the man said. "The army will soon be on the +march in that direction, and my fate there would be worse than +here. Here I am only an innkeeper to be fleeced; there I should be +regarded as a heretic to be burnt. Listen to them. They are fighting +now. Do you hear my mugs crashing?. I only hope that they will kill +each other to the last man. I should advise you, sir, to be off at +once. They may take it into their heads that you are some one it +behooves them to slay, it matters not whom; and you would certainly +get no sleep here tonight if you stay." + +"That is true enough," Ned agreed; "and perhaps it would be the +best way for me to get on horseback again, but I know not the road, +and might likely enough miss it altogether, and drown myself in +one of your ditches." + +"I will send my boy with you to put you on to the road," the landlord +said. "I sent him out to sleep in the stables, so as to be out of +the way of these desperadoes. He will walk beside your horse until +you get into the main road." + +Ned willingly accepted the proposal, for indeed he felt that +there might be danger in remaining in the house with these drunken +soldiers. He accordingly paid his reckoning, and was soon on +horseback again, with the landlord's son, a boy of some ten years +old, walking beside him. In half an hour they came upon a broad +road. + +"This," the lad said, "will take you to St. Nicholas." + +Ned gave the boy a crown for his trouble, and rode slowly along. +He had no idea of entering St. Nicholas, for it was now nigh eleven +o'clock at night, and the arrival of a traveller at such an hour +would be sure to attract attention. The night, too, was dark, and +he could scarce see the road he was following. After thinking it +over for some time he dismounted, led his horse a distance from +the road, fastened the reins to a bush, and threw himself down on +the ground to wait for daylight. The night was cold, and a fine +rain was falling. Ned got up from time to time and walked about +to keep himself warm, and was heartily glad when he saw the first +rays of daylight in the east. + +After waiting for half an hour he mounted, and after riding a few +miles entered a large village. Thinking that it would be safer +than at St. Nicholas, he halted here. It was still raining, and the +drenched state of his clothes therefore excited no comment beyond +the host's remark, "You must have started early to have got so +wet?" + +"Yes," he said, "I was up before daylight. I have a change of clothes +in my saddlebag, and shall be glad to put them on. Will you order +your man to give my horse a good rub down, and let him have a hot +mash. How far am I from Ghent now?" + +"If you have come from Antwerp, sir, you have come just halfway." + +Ned changed his clothes and had some breakfast, and then as he sat +by the fire the feeling of warmth and comfort after his long and +cold night overpowered him, and he went fast to sleep. + + + +CHAPTER XI + +SAVING A VICTIM + + +Ned slept for some hours. When he woke he heard the landlord talking +in loud tones in the passage outside. "I tell you, wife it is a +burning shame. Mynheer Von Bost has never done a soul harm in his +life. He has always been ready to open his purse strings in case +of distress; he is a man that does not meddle in any way with +politics. It is true that he does not go to mass, but that hurts +no one; and there is many a ne'er-do-well in the village who never +darkens the church door. If he prefers to pray in his own house +and in his own way, what matter is it to any one? His cloth mill +gives employment to half the village. What we shall do if it is shut +up I am sure I don't know. But what do they care for the village? +Mynheer Von Bost is a Protestant and a rich man -- that is quite +enough for the Blood Council; so he and his pretty young wife are +to be dragged off and executed." + +"What is that?" Ned asked, opening the door. "Can't the Blood +Council even leave your quiet village alone?" + +"They can leave nothing alone," the landlord said bitterly. "An +hour ago four of their officials rode up, under one of the agents +of the Council -- a squint eyed villain. They stopped at the door +and asked for the house of Mynheer Von Bost, and then rode off, +and half an hour afterwards one of the servants ran down into the +village with the news that her master and mistress had been arrested, +and that they were to be taken to Antwerp to be executed; for that, +as it seems, they had already been tried without their knowing +anything about it." + +Ned started when he heard the landlord describe the leader of the +party. This, then, accounted for Genet's presence at Antwerp; he had +been sent from Brussels to arrest this cloth manufacturer. He had +evidently succeeded in establishing his identity late in the evening +or at early morning, and guessing that Ned would have ridden on +without loss of time after setting the soldiers on to assault him, +had proceeded to carry out the mission with which he was charged. + +"The villagers would tear the villain limb from limb if they dared," +the landlord went on. + +"Why don't they dare?" Ned asked. + +"Why? Why, because we should be having a troop of soldiers down +here in twenty-four hours, and the village would be burnt, and every +man in it, and woman too, put to death. No, no, sir; the people +here would do a good deal for Mynheer Von Bost and his wife, but +they won't risk everything." + +"Would they risk anything, do you think?" Ned asked. "Are there +half a dozen men in the village, do you think, who would strike a +blow for their master, if they could do it without running the risk +you speak of?" + +The landlord looked at him sharply. "This is not the time, young +sir, for men to speak before strangers about matters which may put +their neck in danger." + +"You are right," Ned said; "and I do not blame you for being +discreet. I know this cross eyed man you speak of, and know that +he is the secretary of one of the most cruel and bloody of the +Council; and it was but yesterday that I escaped from his hands +almost by a miracle. And I would now, if I could, baffle the villain +again. I suppose they are still at his house?" + +"They are. They have ordered breakfast to be prepared for them, +and it may be another hour before they set out." + +"My plan is this, then," Ned said. "If I could get half a dozen +determined men to join me, we would go back along the road towards +Antwerp three miles or so, and lie in wait until they came along, +and then rescue their prisoners from them. If we could get a horse +for the man to ride with his wife behind him, all the better. We +could pretend to be robbers; there are plenty of starving peasants +that have been driven to that, and if we attack them three miles +away they would have no suspicion that the people of the village +had any hand in it." + +"I will see about it," the landlord said warmly. "When my son-in-law's +little house was burnt down last winter, Mynheer Von Bost advanced +him money to rebuild it, and charged no interest. He lives but a +quarter of a mile out of the village, and I think he will be your +man, and would be able to lay his hands on the others. I will run +over to him and be back in a quarter of an hour." + +In the meantime Ned ordered his horse to be saddled, and when the +landlord returned he was ready to start. + +"My son-in-law will join you," he said. "He has two brothers whom +he will bring with him. They both work in Von Bost's factory. +He bids me tell you to go on for two miles, and to stop where the +first road comes in on the right hand side. They will join you +there, and will then go on with you as far as you may think fit. +They have got guns, so you can lie in ambush. He will bring a horse +with him with a pillion. He could have got more men, but he thinks +the fewer to know the secret the better, as there may be inquiries +here; and in these days none can trust his own neighbour. And now +farewell, young sir. I know not who you are, but you must have +a good heart to venture your life in a quarrel for people of whom +you know nothing." + +"I am a Protestant myself, landlord, and I have had uncles and +other relations murdered by the Blood Council. Moreover I have a +special feud with the chief of these villains." + +So saying Ned shook the landlord's hand and rode off. He halted +when he came to the point indicated. In less than half an hour he +saw three men coming from the other direction. As one of them was +leading a horse he at once rode on to meet them. + +"We have made a detour through the fields," the young man leading +the horse said. "It would not have done for anyone in the village +to have seen us journeying this way." + +"Quite right," Ned agreed. "There are babblers everywhere, and the +fewer who know aught of a matter like this the better. Now, where +had we best ambuscade?" + +"There is a little wood by the roadside half a mile on, and we had +best move there at once, for they may be along at any time now." + +Two of the men were armed with muskets, and all three carried +flails. They moved briskly forward until they got to the woods. + +"You had best fasten up the horse among the trees," Ned said, "and +then take your station close to the road. I will ride out from the +trees as I come up and engage them in talk, so that you and your +brother can take a steady aim. Don't fire until you are sure of +each bringing down a man, then rush out and engage them with your +flails. I will answer for their leader myself." + +"We won't miss them, never fear, young sir. We have too much practice +at the ducks in the winter to miss such a mark as that." + +After seeing the horse tied up, and the men take their stations +behind trees, Ned went a few yards further and then waited the +coming of the party with the prisoners. He had not a shadow of +compunction at the fate that was about to befall these officials. +They had hauled away hundreds to the gallows, and the animosity +that prevailed between the two parties was so intense that neither +thought of sparing the other if they fell into their hands. As +for Genet, Ned felt that his own life would not be safe as long as +this man lived. He might for aught he knew have other missions of +the same nature as that he had just fulfilled, and he felt sure +that whatever disguise he might adopt this man would detect him +did they meet, and in that case not only his own life but that of +many others might be sacrificed. + +In about ten minutes the sound of horses' hoofs was heard. Ned +waited till they came within a few paces, and then suddenly rode +out from the wood. Genet, who was riding ahead of the others, reined +in his horse suddenly. + +"What are you doing, fellow?" he began angrily, "riding out thus +suddenly upon us?" Then his voice changed as he recognized Ned. +"What, is it you again?" he exclaimed. "This time at least you +shall not escape me." + +He drew a pistol and fired. Ned was equally quick, and the two +shots rang out together. Ned's cap flew from his head, the bullet +just grazing his skin, while Genet fell forward on his saddle +and rolled to the ground, shot through the heart. Almost at the +same instant two guns were discharged from the wood, and two of +the officials fell. The other two, behind whom the prisoners were +strapped, set spurs to their horses; but Ned rode in front of them, +and the men dashing from the trees seized the reins. + +"Surrender!" Ned shouted, "or you are dead men." + +The two officers shouted lustily that they surrendered, but Ned +had the greatest difficulty from preventing their assailants from +knocking out their brains with their flails. + +"There is no plunder to be obtained from them, comrades," he said +loudly. "They are only poor knaves riding behind the master. Get +them off their horses, and strap their hands with their own belts, +and toss them in among the trees; but you can search their pockets +before you do so. I will see what their leader has got upon him." + +As soon as the two prisoners were dragged away Ned addressed Mynheer +Von Bost, who with his wife was standing almost bewildered by the +sudden event that had freed them. + +"This is no robbery, Mynheer, but a rescue. We have a horse and +pillion here in the wood in readiness for you, and I should advise +you to ride at once with your wife for Sluys or some other seaport, +and thence take ship either into Holland or to England. Your lives +will assuredly be forfeited if you remain here." + +"But who are you, sir, who has done us this great service?" + +"I am serving under the Prince of Orange," Ned replied; "and have +been doing business for him at Brussels. I have twice narrowly +escaped with my life from the hands of the leader of that party, +and was in the village when they arrived and seized you. Finding +how deep was the regret that so kind a master should be thus led +away to execution, I determined if possible to save you, and with +the aid of these three men, two of whom are workmen of yours, and +the other a farmer you befriended last year when his house was +burnt down, we have succeeded in doing so." + +The three men now came out of the wood. + +"My brave fellows," the manufacturer said, "I and my wife owe our +lives to you and to this gentleman." + +"You are heartily welcome, sir," the young farmer said. "You have +saved me from ruin, and one good turn deserves another. I and my +brothers were only too glad to join when we heard that this gentleman +was determined to try to release you. If it had not been for him +it would never have entered our heads till it was too late." + +"May I ask your name, sir?" Von Bost said to Ned. "My wife and +I would like to know to whom we owe a lifelong debt of gratitude. +I will take your advice and ride at once for Sluys. I have many +friends there who will conceal us and get us on board a ship. +My arrangements have long been made for departure, and my capital +transferred to England; but I thought I should have had sufficient +notice of danger to take flight. Where can I hear of you, sir?" + +"My name is Edward Martin. My father is an English captain, +who lives at Rotherhithe, close by London. At present, as I said, +I am in the service of the Prince of Orange; but my home is still +in England. And now, sir, I think you had best be riding at once. +I presume that there are byroads by which you can avoid passing +through any towns on your way to Sluys. It is better not to delay +a minute, for at any moment some party or other of soldiers may +come along." + +The men had by this time brought out the horse. Von Bost mounted, +and his wife was assisted on to the pillion behind him. + +"Goodbye, good friends," he said. "God grant that no harm come to +you for this kind deed." + +The moment he had ridden off Ned and his companions lifted the +bodies of the three men who had fallen and carried them into the +wood. + +"We had best turn their pockets inside out," Ned said, "and take +away everything of value upon them." + +"This fellow has a well lined purse," the young farmer said as he +examined the pocket of Genet; "and here are a bundle of papers in +his doublet." + +"Give me the papers," Ned said, "they may be useful to me, and +doubtless they contain lists of other victims whom I may be able +to send warning to in time for them to escape." + +"What shall we do about the horses?" + +"I would take off the saddles, bridles, and accouterments, throw +them into a ditch together with the men's arms and pile a few bushes +over them, then drive the horses across the fields till they reach +some grazing ground near the river; the farmers there will doubtless +appropriate them in time. Now, as to these two prisoners, they are +the only trouble." + +"You need not trouble about them," the farmer said, "we have made +them safe. We are not going to risk our lives and those of our wives +and families, as we should have done if we had left those fellows +alive to identify us. There is sure to be a search sooner or later, +and those two men would have led the party to every house within +miles round, and would have been sure to recognize one or other of +us. We are ready to risk our lives to save Mynheer Von Bost, but +we are not willing to throw them away needlessly." + +Ned could hardly blame the men, who had indeed stabbed their captives +the instant they dragged them among the trees, for doubtless the +risk they would have run of detection would have been great had they +permitted them to live. They had now only to regain their village +without observation and to keep their own secret, to be free from +all risk whatever. Putting Genet's papers in his doublet Ned again +mounted his horse and rode off. + +Two hours later he reached St. Nicholas. He could now have ridden +straight on to Bergen op Zoom, the port at which he hoped to be able +to find a boat, but he thought that Genet's papers might contain +matters upon which it might be necessary for him to act at once. +He had now no fear of detection, for with the death of Genet all +search for himself would be at an end. Putting up his horse at an +inn he ordered a meal to be prepared at once, and calling for a +flask of wine in the meantime, sat down at a table in the corner +of the great parlour and examined the papers. + +First there was a list of twelve names, among whom was that of Von +Bost. One of these, as well as that of the manufacturer, had been +crossed out. With them were official documents ordering the arrest +of the persons named, together in most cases with that of their +wives and one or more members of their family. Besides these was +a document with the seal of the Council, ordering all magistrates +and others to render every assistance required by the bearer in +carrying out the duties with which he was charged. + +Then there was a long list of persons resident in St. Nicholas, +Sluys, and Axel, against whom denunciations of heresy or of suspected +disloyalty to Philip had been laid. There was a note at the bottom +of this list: "Inquire into the condition of life and probable +means of each of these suspected persons." + +"It is somewhat lucky for all these people," Ned said to himself, +"that I happened to fall in with Mynheer Genet. The question now +is how to warn them. I see there are three orders of arrest against +people here, and ten names on the suspected list. At any rate I +can warn them myself." + +As soon as he had finished his meal Ned inquired the addresses of +the three persons ordered to be arrested. They were all, as he had +expected, leading men in the place; for it was the confiscation of +the goods of the victims, quite as much as any question of religion +or loyalty, that was at the bottom of a large proportion of the +arrests and executions. The first Ned called upon was, like Von +Bost, a cloth manufacturer. He was rather a pompous man, and when +Ned was shown in said: + +"Now, young man, my time is valuable, so let us have no useless +talking. What is it you want?" + +"Your time perhaps is more valuable than you think," Ned said +quietly, "seeing that you have not got much of it left." + +"What do you mean, sir?" the manufacturer said angrily. + +"I mean simply this," Ned replied. "That I am the bearer of an +order of the Council for your arrest, and that of your wife, your +son Ernest, and your daughter Mary, upon the charge of having been +present and taken part in a meeting of the people of this town at +which words of treasonable character were uttered. Moreover, there +is a note at the bottom of this order saying that these charges +have been proved to the satisfaction of the Council, and that you +are accordingly to be executed upon your arrival at Antwerp, the +necessary orders having been transmitted to the governor of the +prison there." + +The manufacturer sank down in a chair the picture of terror. + +"I have done no harm," he stammered. "I knew not when I went to +the meeting what was going to be said there." + +"What matters that?" Ned asked. "You have been tried and condemned, +and one or other of the Council has doubtless obtained the grant +of your property. Well, sir, I will not frighten you longer. This +is the document in question, but fortunately I am not the person +charged with this execution. I met him on the way and there was +a disagreement between us, and the result is that he will execute +no more orders, and his papers fell into my hands. It may be some +days before he is missed, and then doubtless someone else will be +charged to carry out the orders of which he was the bearer. This +will give you time to make preparations for flight, and I should +advise you before eight-and-forty hours are over to be on your way +towards the frontier of Germany, or on board a ship at one of the +ports. I will hand you this document in order that you may convince +your wife and family of the danger that you are all running, and +of the urgent need of haste." + +Ned left at once, before the man, who was almost stupefied by the +misfortune that had befallen him, had time to utter his thanks. +He then called on the other two men against whom he bore orders of +arrest. As both received him with greater courtesy than that shown +by the first he had visited, he broke the news more gently to them, +and discussed with them the manner in which they had best make +their escape. One he found had friends and business connections +in Sluys, and doubted not that he could obtain a passage there +to Holland or England, while the other had similar connections in +Axel. + +Ned handed over to them the orders for the arrest of burghers of +those towns, and these they gave him their promise to deliver, and +also either to see or to send letters warning all the persons who +were mentioned in the list of suspected. As he was anxious to get +on as soon as possible he also gave them the list of the suspected +at St. Nicholas, and these they promised also to warn; both were +profuse in their gratitude to him for having saved them from certain +death. Having thus concluded his business, Ned again mounted his +horse and rode for Bergen op Zoom, the port at which he intended, +if possible, to embark for Zeeland. + +Bergen op Zoom, an important town, lay half a mile distant from the +Scheldt, and was connected with the river by a channel guarded by +two forts. There had been a strong Spanish garrison here, but it +had lately been weakened by the withdrawal of a large detachment to +take part in the successful enterprise undertaken for the relief of +Tergoes in the Island of Beveland, which was besieged by a force +from Flushing. Ned had frequently been at Bergen op Zoom in the +Good Venture, and knew that while the magistrates and wealthier +citizens were devoted to the Spanish cause the greater portion of +the inhabitants, especially the seafaring class, were patriots to +a man. + +He therefore went to a small inn by the waterside, where he had +several times taken meals with his father when the ship was lying +off from the river. Seeing his horse put up in the stable he entered +the tap room. The sailors drinking there looked somewhat surprised +at the entrance of one differing much in appearance from the ordinary +customers of the place. The landlord, who was leaning against his +counter, did not advance to meet him; for strangers were by no +means popular, and a suspicion that the newcomer was a spy would +speedily empty his house. As Ned approached him he suddenly started, +and was about to speak when the lad quickly placed his finger on +his lip. He feared that the landlord was about to utter his name, +and there might, for aught he knew, be someone there who would +report it. + +"How are you, landlord?" he said. "It is some time since I was here +last, and I think you had almost forgotten me." The landlord took +the hint. + +"Yes, indeed," he said. "And how is your father? I have not seen +him lately, and heard that he was not well." + +"No; he has been laid up for some time, but he is mending. You see +I have taken service." + +"Ah, I see," the landlord said. "Well, my good wife will be glad +to see you and hear about your family." So saying he led the way +into a private room. + +"Why, what means this, Master Martin?" he asked. "We heard here of +the brave fight your father's ship made some two months since with +a Spaniard in the Zuider Zee, and that he was sorely wounded. But +what means this masquerading? Surely you have not given up the +sea?" + +"Only for the present," Ned replied. "You know I am Dutch on my +mother's side. All her family have been murdered by the Spaniards, +and what with that and my father being attacked and wounded, I made +up my mind to give up the sea for a time, and to help the good cause +as much as I could. I have been carrying a message to Brussels and +want now to get back to Rotterdam or some other sea port town. How +had I best do it?" + +"It is not easy," the landlord replied. "Our trade is stopped here +now. The rivers swarm with craft, manned, some by the beggars of +the sea, and others by fishermen; and the Spanish ships cannot come +up save in great force. We have two or three of their warships here +which go out and skirmish with our men, and do not always get the +best of it. + +"Our people did badly the other night when they let the Spaniards +wade across to Tergoes. That was a bad business. But about your +getting away. Let me see how it can be managed." + +"I have got a horse here." + +"That is bad," the landlord said. "You could put on sailor's clothes, +and in the morning when I send in my guest list to the magistrate, +I could put down that you had gone, but the horse would betray me. +Is it a good beast?" + +"Yes, it is a very good horse. It was a present to me, and I don't +like parting with it. But of course I cannot take it away." + +"I will send round word to a man I know who deals in horses. He is +one who will hold his tongue, especially when he sees an advantage +in it. I will tell him it belonged to a man who has been here and +gone away suddenly, and ask him what he will give for it, and take +it quietly away after it gets dark to his own stables, and ask no +questions about it. He will guess it belonged to somebody who has +left secretly. Of course he won't give more than half the value of +the animal; but I suppose you will not be particular about terms. +Anyhow, I will do the best I can for you. When he is once out of +the stables they may come and question as much as they like, but +they will get nothing out of me beyond the fact that a young man +came here, put up his horse, stayed the night, and left in the +morning. I suppose they have no special interest in you so as to +lead them to make a close inquiry?" + +"None at all," Ned replied. + +"That is settled then," the landlord said. "Now, as to yourself. +Two of my sons are at sea, you know, and I can rig you up with some +of their clothes so that you can stroll about on the wharves, and +no one will suspect you of being anything but a fisherman. Then I +will try and arrange with some of the sailors to take you down in +a boat at night, and either put you on board the first of our craft +they come upon, or land you at Flushing. Now I will take you in to +my wife, and she will see about getting you a meal and making you +comfortable." + +Later on the landlord came in and said that he had made a bargain +for the horse. + +"The beast is worth thirty crowns," he said, "but he will not give +more than fifteen, and it required a good deal of bargaining to +raise him to that. Of course he suspected that there was something +out of the way about the affair, and took advantage of it." + +"That will do very well indeed," Ned said. "I did not expect to +get anything for it." + +"I have been having a talk too with some sailors belonging to a +small craft lying at the wharf. They are most anxious to be off, +for they are idle. The order that no boats were to leave was issued +just after they came in. They have been six days doing nothing, +and may, for aught they see, be kept here for another six months. +They have been afraid to try to get away; for there are sentries +all along the wall to see that none try to put out, and some guard +boats from the Spanish ships rowing backwards and forwards outside +the port, both to see that no ships leave, and that none come up to +harm the shipping. Still they say they have been making up their +minds that they may as well stand the risk of being shot by the +Spaniards as the certainty of being starved here; besides they are +patriots, and know that their boats may be wanted at any time for +the conveyance of troops. So when I told them that I doubted not +that you would pay them well for landing you at Flushing, they +agreed to make the attempt, and will try tonight. As soon as you +have had your breakfast you had better join them in the tap room, +go out with them through the watergate, and get on board their +craft and lie snug there till night." + +"How many men are there?" Ned asked. + +"There are six altogether, but only two will be up here presently. +Here are the fifteen crowns for your horse. That will do well to +pay your passage to Flushing." + +As soon as he had eaten his breakfast, Ned, now dressed as a young +fisherman, went into the taproom with the landlord. Two sailors +were sitting there. + +"This is the young fellow that I was speaking to you about," the +landlord said. "He is one of us, and heart and soul in the cause, +and young though he looks has done good service. He is ready to +pay you fifteen crowns when you land him at Flushing." + +"That is a bargain," one of the men said, "and will pay us for the +week we have lost here. I should take you for a sailor, young sir." + +"I am a sailor," Ned said, "and can lend a hand on board if need +be." + +"Can you swim? Because if we are overhauled by the Spaniards we +shall all take to the water rather than fall into their hands." + +"Yes, I can swim," Ned said; "and agree with you that I would rather +swim than be captured. But if it is only a boatload that overhauls +us I would try to beat them off before giving up a craft in which +I had a share." + +The sailors looked rather doubtfully at the lad, and their expression +showed that they thought he was talking boastfully. + +"He means what he says," the landlord put in. "He is the son of +the English captain who beat off the great Spanish ship Don Pedro +in the Zuider Zee a few weeks ago." + +The men's faces changed, and both got up and shook hands cordially +with Ned. "That was a brave affair, young sir; and there is not a +town in Holland where your father's name is not spoken of in honour. +We know the ship well, and have helped load her before now; and +now we know who you are, recognize your face. No wonder you want +to get out of Bergen op Zoom. Why, if I had known it had been you +we would have been glad enough to take you to Flushing without +charging you a penny, and will do so now -- will we not, comrades +-- if it presses you in any way to pay us?" + +"Not at all," Ned said. "I am well supplied with money; and since +you are risking your boat, as well as your lives, it is only fair +that I should pay my share. I can afford the fifteen crowns well +enough, and indeed it is but the price of a horse that was given +me." + +"Well, if it will not hurt you we will not say any more about +it," the sailor replied; "seeing that we have had a bad time of it +lately, and have scarce money enough left between us to victual us +until we get home. But had it been otherwise, we would have starved +for a week rather than had it said that we made hard terms with the +son of the brave Captain Martin when he was trying to escape from +the hands of the Spaniards." + +"Now, lads, you had better be off at once," the landlord interrupted. +"It is time I sent in my report to the town hall; and like enough +men will be down here asking questions soon after, so it were best +that Master Martin were on board your craft at once. Goodbye, young +sir. Tell your worthy father that I am glad indeed to have been +able to be of some slight service to his son, and I trust that it +will not be very long before we see the last of the Spaniards, and +that we shall then have his ship alongside the wharves again." + +Ned shook hands heartily with the landlord, who had refused to +accept any payment whatever from him, and then started with the +two sailors. They made their way down to the inner haven, and then +went on board the boat, a craft of about ten tons burden which was +lying alongside. The wharves had a strange and deserted appearance. +When Ned had last been there some fifty or sixty vessels of +different sizes had been lying alongside discharging or taking in +cargo, while many others lay more out in the stream. Now there were +only a dozen boats of about the same size as that on which they +embarked, all, like it, arrested by the sudden order that no vessels +should leave the port. + +There were no large merchantmen among them, for trade had altogether +ceased, save when a strong convoy of French, Spanish, or German +ships arrived. For with Flushing in the hands of the patriots, and +the sea swarming with the craft of the beggars, foreign vessels +bound for ports in the hands of the Spaniards did not dare singly +to approach the mouth of the Scheldt. Ned received a hearty welcome +from the other sailors when they learned from their skipper and his +companion who he was, and before he had been ten minutes on board +they asked him to give them the full details of the fight off +Enkhuizen, and how it was that the Spaniards thus interfered with +an English ship. + +Ned told them the story, and the sailors when he had finished +had each some tale to tell of oppression and cruelty to friends +or relatives on the part of the Spaniards. When they had finished +their midday meal, which was the heartiest the sailors had enjoyed +for some days, for the landlord when making the bargain had paid them +five crowns in advance, and the empty larder had been accordingly +replenished, the skipper said to Ned, "I think that it will be just +as well you did something, in case the magistrates should take it +into their heads to send down to search the craft along the wharves. +The landlord said that they might make inquiries as to what had +become of the man who stayed last night at his inn. You may be sure +he did not put down in his guest list a description which would +help them much in their search for you, should they make one, still +they keep a pretty sharp lookout over us, and if they search at +all are likely to come to try here to begin with." + +"I am quite ready to do anything you may set me to," Ned said. + +"Then we will get the boat out, and row off and bait our hooks and +try for fish; we have caught a few every day since we have been +here. And, indeed, if it were not for the fish the men in most of +the boats here would be starving." + +"That will do capitally," Ned said. "Anyhow it will be an amusement +to me." + +The boat was pulled up alongside, Ned and four of the men got into +it and rowed down the port into the Old Haven, and out between the +two forts guarding the entrance into the Scheldt, then dropping +their grapnel, baited some lines and began to fish. As boats from +all the other craft lying by the shore were engaged in the same +work, either with line or net, this was natural enough, and they +did not return until evening was falling, by which time they had +captured a considerable number of fish. + +"We have had more luck than we have had all the week," one of the +men said as they rowed back. "Sometimes we have only got just enough +for ourselves, today when we don't want them we have caught enough +to sell for two or three guilders; for fish are scarce now in the +town and fetch good prices. However, they will come in handy for +our voyage." + +When they came alongside the skipper told them that three hours +before two of the city constables had come along, and had inquired +of him whether he had seen aught of a tall man of some thirty years +of age, dressed in sober clothes, and with the appearance of a +retainer in some good family. He had assured them he had seen none +at all answering that description, and, indeed, that no one beside +himself and his crew had been on the wharf that day. They had +nevertheless come on board and searched the cabin, but finding +nothing suspicious, and hearing that the rest of the crew, four +men and a boy, were engaged in fishing, they had gone off without +further question. + +"Where do the guard boats ply?" Ned asked presently. + +"A mile or two above the forts, and as much below; for, you see, +vessels can come up either passage from the sea. It is the longest +round by Walcheren, but far easier and freer from sandbanks. Vessels +from the west generally take the Walcheren passage; but those from +the east, and coasters who know every foot of the river, come by +the eastern Scheldt." + +"Which way do you think of going?" + +"That by Flushing, if we have the choice. We pass several towns in +the possession of the Spaniards, and were the beggars to come up +they would probably take the other channel. And I have noticed that +there are always two rowboats in the river to the east, and only +one to the west. Our greatest difficulty will be in passing the +two warships anchored at the mouth of the port, under the guns of +the forts. Once fairly out into the Scheldt we may think ourselves +safe, for the river is so wide that unless by grievous ill chance +we are not likely to be seen on a dark night, such as this will +be, by the rowboats. Our real danger is in getting through the two +forts, and the ships at the mouth of this port. + +"There is a vigilant watch kept at the forts; but there are not +likely to be any sentries placed on the walls at the entrance of +this inner haven, or on that running along by Old Haven down to +the forts. We will start as soon as the tide turns, and drift down +with it. We will get out a pole or two to keep our course down the +centre till we get near the forts, and must then let her drift as +she will, for a splash in the water or the slightest sound would +call the attention of the sentries there, and if the alarm were given +the boats of the two ships outside would have us to a certainty. +I think the night is going to be most favourable. The clouds are +low, and I have felt a speck or two of mist; it will come on faster +presently, and it will want keen eyes to see five yards away when +the night falls. Luckily there is not a breath of wind at present; +and I hope there will not be until we are fairly out, otherwise we +should be sure to drift ashore on one side or the other as we go +down the channel." + + + +CHAPTER XII + +BACK WITH THE PRINCE + + +Before throwing off the warps from the shore the captain gave each +man his orders. Two were to stand with fenders, in case the boat +drifted either against another craft or against the wall. Two were +to take the long poles used for punting. An old sail had been torn +up into strips and wrapped round these, with a pad of old rope at +the end, so that they could push off from the wall without noise. +Not a word was to be spoken in case of their being hailed, nor was +there to be the slightest movement on board unless the use of the +fenders or poles were required. Lastly, all took off their boots. + +It was half an hour after the turn of the tide when the warps were +thrown off. The tide in the inner port was so sluggish that it was +absolutely necessary to pole the boat along until she got out into +what was known as the Old Haven, which was the cut leading down +from the town to the river. + +The work was noiselessly done; and Ned, standing at the bow beside +the skipper, scarce heard the slightest sound. The night was +fortunately very dark, and looking intently he could hardly make +out the outline of the shore on either side. In a quarter of an +hour they emerged from the inner port. On their left hand the wall +of the fortifications connecting the town with the north fort at +the mouth of the haven rose high above them, but its outline could +be seen against the sky. The captain had told the men poling to +take her sharp round the corner, and keep her along as close as +possible to the foot of the wall, as she was far less likely to +be observed by any sentry who might be there than she would be if +kept out in the centre of the cut. + +Very slowly the boat drifted along her course, assisted occasionally +by the men pushing with their poles against the foot of the wall +that rose a few feet from them, while those with the fender stood +in readiness to place them in position should the ship approach so +close to the wall as to render contact probable. The captain was +now at the tiller, the way given her by the poles being sufficient +to enable him to keep her on her course close to the wall. Another +quarter of an hour and they were at the end of the wall, for the +forts at the entrance were detached. They were now approaching the +most dangerous portion of the passage; they were no longer sheltered +in the shadow, but must go along openly. It was, however, improbable +that there would be sentries on the face of the fort looking towards +the town, and Ned, accustomed as he was to keep watch on deck at +night, could scarce make out the low shore a few yards away, and +felt pretty confident that the eyes of the sleepy sentries would +not be able to pierce the gloom. + +The men had ceased poling now, only giving an occasional push to +keep her head straight and prevent her from swinging round. Presently +a sailor standing next to Ned touched his arm and pointed to the +right, and straining his eyes he could dimly make out a dark mass +looming in that direction. + +Unlike the wall they had left, the forts stood at a little distance +back from the water, and Ned was sure that as he could scarce make +out the outline of the one nearest to them, no one upon its wall +could distinguish the tracery of the masts and rigging of the +boat. The mist had thickened since they had started, and coming on +heavier just at this point the fort was presently entirely obscured. + +Another twenty minutes passed. They must be now, Ned knew, in the +course of the river; and he began to think that the danger was +over, when a dark object suddenly appeared from the mist, close at +hand. In another moment there was a shock, and then a long grinding +motion as the boat swept along by the side of a large ship. Following +the shock came a sharp challenge from the darkness above, followed +by other shouts. Obedient to orders they had received, no sound +was heard from the smack. Each man stooped low under the bulwarks. +Two or three shots rang out from the ship, and there was a hail in +Dutch -- "Stop, or we will sink you." + +Ned knew that this was an idle threat. The vessel was lying head to +the tide, and only a small gun or two in the stern could be brought +to bear, and already the ship was lost to sight in the mist. There +was much shouting and noise heard astern, and then the creaking of +blocks. Ned made his way aft. + +"The game is up," the skipper said. "They will be alongside in a +few minutes. Dark as it is they cannot miss us. They will know that +we must have drifted straight down. We must take to the boats and +row for it." + +"I should say, captain," Ned said, "we had best take to the boat +and row off for a short distance, and then wait. As likely as not +they may think when they board her that she has simply drifted out +from the town, having been carelessly moored. In that case they +may let drop her anchor and return to their ship." + +"That is a happy thought," the captain said; and running forward +he told the crew to take the boat at once. + +"I have another idea, captain," Ned said, just as they were about +to push off. "As we saw when we were passing the ship we are drifting +stern foremost. If we can fasten a long line to her stern we can +hang on to it. They will not be able to see us if we are twenty +fathoms astern. Then, if they anchor, and, as is likely enough, +leave two or three men on board, we can haul ourselves noiselessly +up with the rope and board her." + +"Capital!" the captain replied. "I was wondering how we should find +her again in the dark. That would be the very thing." + +He sprang on board again, fastened a light line to the rudder, and +dropped down into the boat again. + +"Now, back her astern, lads, very gently. I can hear their oars." + +In a minute the captain gave orders to cease rowing, for the line +had tightened. The Spanish ship was showing a bright light in her +stern. This acted as a guide to the boats, and in two or three +minutes after the crew had left the smack two large boats full of +soldiers came alongside. Those in the little boat, lying but fifty +or sixty yards away, could hear every word that was spoken. First +came a volley of angry exclamations of disappointment as the +Spaniards found that they had been called from their beds only to +capture an empty little coaster. As Ned had expected, they speedily +came to the conclusion that having been carelessly fastened up +alongside the wharves, without any one being left in charge, she +had drifted out with the tide. + +"It would serve them right if we were to set her alight," one of +the officers said. + +"We had best not to do that," another replied. "It might cause an +alarm in the town; and, besides, boats are wanted. We had better +drop her anchor, and leave four men on board to take care of her. +In the morning the knaves to whom she belongs will come out to +claim her; and I warrant you the captain will punish them sharply +for the trouble they have given us." + +This opinion prevailed. A minute latter a splash was heard in the +water, and in a very short time the line connecting the boat with the +smack tightened, and those on board knew that she had been brought +up by her anchor. There was a good deal of noise and trampling +of feet as the Spaniards took their place in the boats again, and +then the heavy splashing of many oars as they started to row back +against the tide to their own vessel. + +The captain wrung Ned's hand. + +"You have saved the boat for us, young sir, for we should never +have found her again; and if we had, those on board would have heard +us rowing up to them, and would have given the alarm. Now we have +only to wait for a bit, and then haul ourselves up and overpower +the Spaniards." + +"I doubt if we could do that without noise," Ned replied. "At any +rate it would be very dangerous while their ship is lying so close. +I should say the best plan will be to wait, as you say, till the +Spaniards have settled themselves comfortably, then to haul up to +her and push the boat along by her side, fending her off carefully +so as to make no noise until we reach the bow, then we can cut +the cable and let her drift. The tide is running strong now, and +in half an hour she will be over a mile down the river, and there +will be no fear of a shout being heard on board the ship, and we +can then board her and tackle the Spaniards." + +"That will certainly be the best way," the captain agreed. "Nothing +could be better. Well, we will give them half an hour to settle +themselves in the cabin. They will not stay on deck many minutes +in the wet." + +The sound of voices on board the smack soon ceased. After waiting +half an hour to give the Spaniards time if not to go to sleep to +become drowsy, the captain and one of his men began to pull upon +the line. Presently the dark mass could be seen ahead, and they +were soon up to her. + +Very carefully they passed the boat alongside, taking pains to +prevent her touching. When they reached the bow the captain grasped +the cable, and with two or three cuts with the knife severed it. +Then the boat was pushed off from the ship and gently paddled away +to the full length of the line. Another half hour and they again +drew alongside, and noiselessly climbed on to the deck. The men +armed themselves with belaying pins, and Ned took his pistols from +the belt beneath his jacket. Then they quietly approached the door. +There was a light burning within. + +The cabin was astern, and built upon the deck, and was used by the +skipper himself and by any passengers he might be carrying, the +crew living in the forecastle. The doors, which opened outwards, +were noiselessly closed, for two of the Spaniards were sitting up +playing cards, and there was no chance of taking the party so much +by surprise as to capture them without noise. The instant the doors +were closed a heavy coil of rope was thrown against them. There +was a loud exclamation in the cabin, and a moment later a rush to +the door. This, however, did not yield. Then a window in the side +was thrown open and a head was thrust out, and there was a loud +shout of "Treachery! Help!" + +A moment later a heavy belaying pin fell on the head, and it +disappeared. Then there was a loud explosion as an arquebus was +fired, the bullet crashing through the door. + +"It is a good thing we are well on our way," the skipper said. +"We must be two miles from the Spanish ship now; and even if they +hear the report they will not think it has anything to do with us. +Besides, if they did, they could never find us." + +Some more ropes had now been piled against the door, and there was +no fear of its being burst open. Two men were posted at the windows +on each side of the cabin with swords, for weapons had now been +fetched from the forecastle. + +"Now," the captain said, "let us get up the sails. There is but +little wind, but I think there is enough to give us steerage way +and prevent us from drifting on to the sandbanks." + +"I suppose we are well beyond the guard boats now, captain?" Ned +asked. + +"Oh, yes; they are not more than half a mile below the forts. +Besides, I should think they have not been out; for they would know +that when the tide once turned no craft could come up from below. +Yes, we are quite safe as far as they are concerned." + +Sail was soon made; and though there was scarce wind enough to +belly out the canvas, the boat began to move slowly through the +water, as was shown by her answering her helm. The discharge of +the arquebus in the cabin was continued from time to time. + +"You may as well cease that noise," the captain shouted to them. +"Your ship is miles away; and unless you want your throats cut you +had better keep yourselves quiet. You know the beggars are not to +be trifled with." + +The soldiers ceased firing. They had, indeed, already concluded, +from the fact that the boats did not come to their rescue, that +the vessel must somehow have got far from their ship. The name of +the terrible beggars filled them with alarm, for they knew that +they showed no mercy. They had not the least idea as to the number +of their captors, and gave themselves up for lost. An hour later +the captain dropped the second anchor, and brought up in the stream. + +"We must wait till morning," he said. "It is no use getting away +from the Spaniards to be cast ashore; and there is no saying in what +part of the river we may be at present, though we must certainly +be six or seven miles below Bergen." + +Towards morning the mist cleared off, and the wind began to freshen. + +"I think it will blow hard before long," the captain said; "and as +it is from the southwest it will soon carry us out of the river. +Now, what had we better do with those fellows in the cabin?" + +"I should say the best plan, captain, would be to bring the boat +alongside, and tell them that if they will leave their arms behind +them, and come out one by one, they may take to it and row ashore. +That if they refuse, we shall open the door and give them no +quarter." + +"That would be the best plan," the captain agreed, and going to +one of the windows offered these terms to the Spaniards. The men +had prepared for the worst, and had determined to sell their lives +as dearly as possible. So convinced were they that the beggars +would show no quarter that they were at first incredulous. + +"It is a trick to get us to give up our arms," one said. + +"It is not," the captain replied. "I swear to you on the word of +a sailor that we will respect the terms and allow you to depart +unarmed. We don't want to throw away three or four lives merely +for the pleasure of cutting your throats." + +After a consultation between themselves the soldiers accepted the +terms. Ned placed himself at one of the windows to see that the +arms were laid aside before the men issued out. Then the coils of +rope were removed, and the door opened, the sailors taking their +place there in case the Spaniards at the last moment should catch +up their arms. This, however, they had no idea of doing, and were +indeed far more afraid of treachery than were their captors. One +by one they issued out, passed between the line of the sailors to +the bulwark, and got into the boat. It was still dark, and they +could not tell that the group of men at the cabin door were all +those on board. As soon as the last was in, the rope was thrown +off and the boat dropped astern. + +"It will be light enough to see the shore in half an hour," the +captain said as they drifted away, "and then you can land where +you like." + +"It would be awkward if they happen to light upon some town," Ned +said, "and so bring out boats to cut us off." + +"There is no fear of that," the captain replied. "Tergoes is the +only place down here in which they have a garrison, and that lies +some miles away yet. Besides, we shall get under way as soon as we +can make out the shore. They have only two oars on board, and are +not likely to know very much about rowing; besides, we shall make +out the shore from deck before they will from the boat." + +"Of course you will not go round by Flushing now? It will be shorter +for you to go straight out to sea through the islands." + +"Yes, and less dangerous. There may be ships at Tergoes and on the +east side of Walcheren, as they still hold Middleburg." + +"The sooner we are out to sea the better, and it will of course suit +you also," Ned replied. "I only wanted to put ashore at Flushing +in order to take another boat there for Rotterdam, so that I shall +save one day, if not two, if you sail direct." + +In another half hour it was light enough to make out the shore. +The anchor was again weighed in and the boat got under way. They +were now off the end of the Island of St. Anna, and leaving South +Beveland behind them turned up the channel called the Kype, between +the Islands of North Beveland and Duveland. Here they passed many +fishing smacks and coasting vessels, for they were now in the +heart of Zeeland, and far beyond reach of the Spaniards. They were +frequently hailed, and were greeted with shouts of applause when +they told how they had given the Spaniards the slip and made their +escape from Bergen. Two hours later they were out at sea, and before +sunset entered the port of Rotterdam. Finding, when he landed, that +the Prince of Orange had that day returned from a trip to Haarlem +and some other towns, where he had been engaged in raising the +spirits of the citizens, inciting them to resistance, and urging +them that it was necessary to make a common effort against the enemy, +and not to allow the town to be taken piecemeal, Ned at once made +his way to the house he occupied. As he entered one of the pages +hurried up to him. + +"What do you want?" he asked. "The prince is ready to give audience +to all who have important business, but it is too much that he +should be intruded upon by sailor lads." + +"You do not remember me!" Ned laughed. "Your memory is a short one, +Master Hans." + +"I did not, indeed!" the page exclaimed. "Who would have thought of +seeing you dressed as a sailor boy? The prince will be glad to see +you; for the first question he asked when he crossed the threshold +this afternoon was whether you had returned." + +He hurried away, and returned a minute later with word that the +prince would see Ned at once. + +"Well, my brave lad, so you have returned," the prince said as Ned +entered. "I have blamed myself many times for letting you go upon +so dangerous a mission, and I am glad indeed to see that you have +safely returned, even if you have failed altogether touching the +matter on which you went." + +"I thought more of the honour than of the danger of the mission +you intrusted to me, your excellency," Ned replied, "and am happy +to say that I have fulfilled it successfully, and have brought you +back messages by word of mouth from all, save one, of those to whom +your letters were addressed." + +"Say you so!" the prince exclaimed in tones of satisfaction. "Then +you have indeed done well. And how fared it with you on your journey? +Did you deliver the letters and return here without suspicion +falling upon you?" + +"No, sir. I have run some slight risk and danger owing to an +unfortunate meeting with Councillor Von Aert, who was of a more +suspicious nature than his countrymen in general; but I will not +occupy your excellency's time by talking about myself, but will +deliver the various messages with which I am charged." + +He then went through the particulars of his interviews with each +of the nine persons he had visited, and gave the contents of the +letter, word for word, he had received from the tenth, excusing +himself for not having brought the message by word of mouth, owing +to the difficulty of obtaining a private audience with him. He also +produced the paper upon which he had jotted down all the particulars +of the men and money that had been confided to him. + +"Your news might be better, and worse," the prince said when he had +concluded. "Some of these men doubtless are, as they say, zealous +in the cause, others are not to be largely trusted in extremities. +The money they promise is less than I had hoped. Promises are +cheaper than gold, and even here in Holland, where all is at stake, +the burghers are loath to put their hands in their pockets, and +haggle over their contributions as if they were to be spent for my +pleasure instead of their own safety. It is pitiful to see men so +fond of their moneybags. The numbers of men who can be relied upon +to rise are satisfactory, and more even than I had hoped for; for +in matters like this a man must proceed cautiously, and only sound +those upon whom he feels sure beforehand he can rely. The worst of +it is, they are all waiting for each other. One will move if another +will move, but none will be first. They will move if I get a victory. +But how can I win a victory when I have no army nor money to raise +one, and when each city will fight only in its own defence, and +will not put a man under arms for the common cause?" + +As the prince was evidently speaking to himself rather than to him, +Ned remained silent. "Please to write all the particulars down that +you have given me," the prince went on, "that I may think it over +at my leisure. And so you could not see the Count of Coeverden? +Was he more difficult of access than he of Sluys?" + +"I do not know that he was, sir," Ned replied; "but my attire was +not such as to gain me an entrance into antechambers." + +"No, I did not think of that," the prince said. "You should have +taken with you a suit of higher quality. I forgot when I agreed +that you should, for safety, travel as a country lad, that in such +dress you could hardly gain an entrance into the palaces of nobles; +and of course it would have excited surprise for one so attired to +try to purchase such clothes as would have enabled you to boldly +enter." + +"I might possibly have managed as a peasant lad," Ned replied +with a smile; "but having been detected in that attire, and being +eagerly sought for by Von Aert's agents, I was at the time dressed +as a peasant woman, and could think of no possible excuse upon +which I might obtain an audience with the count." + +"No, indeed," the prince said smiling. "I must hear your story with +all its details; but as it is doubtless somewhat long, I must put +it off until later. After the evening meal you shall tell us your +adventures before I betake myself to my work." + +Ned retired to his own room and resumed the attire he usually wore. +After supper he was sent for by the prince, with whom he found the +chamberlain and three or four of his principal officers. + +"Now, young sir, tell us your story," the prince said. "Do not +fear of its being long. It is a rest to have one's mind taken off +the affairs of state. I have already told these gentlemen what +valuable services you have rendered to the cause we all have at +heart, and they, like myself, wish to know how you fared, and how +you escaped the danger you referred to at the hands of Von Aert." + +Thus requested, Ned gave a full account of his journey, and of the +adventures he had met with in Brussels and on his way back. + +"What think you, sirs," the prince asked when Ned had concluded his +story. "It seems to me that this lad has shown a courage, a presence +of mind, and a quickness of decision that would be an honour to +older men. The manner in which he escaped from the hands of Von +Aert, one of the craftiest as well as of the most cruel of the +Council of Blood, was excellent; and had he then, after obtaining +his disguise, escaped at once from the city, I for one should +assuredly not have blamed him, and I consider he showed a rare +devotion in continuing to risk his life to deliver my letters. +Then, again, the quickness with which he contrives to carry out +his scheme for saying a word to the Count of Sluys was excellent; +and though he takes no credit to himself, I doubt not that the +escape of the boat, after falling foul of the Spanish ship, was +greatly due to him. I think, sirs, you will agree with me that he +has the makings of a very able man in him, and that henceforth we +can safely intrust him with the most delicate as well as the most +perilous missions." + +There was a general cordial agreement. + +"I am free to aver that you are right and that I am wrong, prince," +the chamberlain said. "I know that you seldom fail in your judgment +of character, and yet it seemed to me, if you will not mind my +saying so, that it was not only rash but wrong to risk the lives +of our friends in Brussels upon the chances of the discretion of +the lad. I now see you were right, for there are few indeed who, +placed as he was, would have carried out his mission as skilfully +and well as he has done." + +"By the way," the prince said, "I would beg you to seek out the +captain of the boat in which you came here, and bid him come to +me this time tomorrow evening. I would fain hear from him somewhat +further details as to how you escaped from the Spaniards, for I +observed that in this matter you were a little reticent as to your +share in it. He may be able to tell me, too, more about the strength +of the Spanish garrisons in Bergen and its neighbourhood than you +can do." + +For the next fortnight Ned was employed carrying messages from the +prince to various towns and ports. Alva was at Amsterdam, and the +army under his son, Don Frederick, was marching in that direction +on their way from Zutphen. They came down upon the little town of +Naarden on the coast of the Zuider Zee. A troop of a hundred men +was sent forward to demand its surrender. The burghers answered +that they held the town for the king and the Prince of Orange, and +a shot was fired at the troopers. Having thus committed themselves, +the burghers sent for reinforcements and aid to the Dutch towns, +but none were sent them, and when the Spaniards approached on the +1st of December they sent out envoys to make terms. The army marched +forward and encamped a mile and a half from the town. + +A large deputation was sent out and was met by General Romero, who +informed them that he was commissioned on the part of Don Frederick +to treat with them. He demanded the keys, and gave them a solemn +pledge that the lives and properties of all the inhabitants should +be respected. The gates were thrown open, and Romero with five +hundred soldiers entered. A sumptuous feast was prepared for them +by the inhabitants. After this was over the citizens were summoned by +the great bell to assemble in the church that was used as a town +hall. As soon as they assembled the soldiers attacked them and +killed them all. The town was then set on fire, and almost every +man, woman, and child killed. Don Frederick forbade that the dead +should be buried, and issued orders forbidding anyone, on pain of +death, to give shelter to the few fugitives who had got away. The +few houses which had escaped the flames were levelled to the ground, +and Naarden ceased to exist. + +Great as the horrors perpetrated at Zutphen had been, they were +surpassed by the atrocities committed at Naarden. The news of the +horrible massacre, so far from frightening the Hollanders into +submission, nerved them to even more strenuous resistance. Better +death in whatsoever form it came than to live under the rule of +these foul murderers. With the fall of Naarden there remained only +the long strip of land facing the sea, and connected at but a few +points with the mainland, that remained faithful to the cause of +freedom. The rest of the Netherlands lay cowed beneath the heel of +the Spaniards. Holland alone and a few of the islands of Zeeland +remained to be conquered. + +The inhabitants of Holland felt the terrible danger; and Bossu, +Alva's stadtholder, formally announced that the system pursued +at Mechlin, Zutphen, and Naarden was the deliberate policy of the +government, and that man, woman, and child would be exterminated +in every city which opposed the Spanish authority. The day after +the news arrived of the fall of Naarden Ned received a letter from +his father, saying that the Good Venture was again at Enkhuizen, +and that she would in two days start for Haarlem with a fleet of +Dutch vessels; that he himself had made great progress in the last +six weeks, and should return to England in her; and that if Ned +found that he could get away for a day or two he should be glad to +see him. + +The prince at once gave Ned permission to leave, and as he had +an excellent horse at his service he started the next morning at +daybreak and arrived at Enkhuizen before nightfall. He was received +with great joy by his family, and was delighted to find his father +looking quite himself again. + +"Yes, thanks to good nursing and good food, my boy, I feel almost +strong and well enough to take my post at the helm of the Good +Venture again. The doctor tells me that in another couple of months +I shall be able to have a wooden leg strapped on, and to stump +about again. That was a rare adventure you had at Brussels, Ned; +and you must give us a full account of it presently. In the morning +you must come on board the vessel, Peters and the crew will be all +glad to see you again." + +Ned stayed two days with his family. On the evening of the second +day he said to his father: "I should like to make the trip to +Haarlem and back, father, in the Good Venture. It may be that the +Spaniards will sally out from Amsterdam and attack it. Last time +we had to run away, you know; but if there is a sea fight I should +like to take my part in it." + +"Very well, Ned, I have no objection; but I hardly think that there +will be a fight. The Spaniards are too strong, and the fleet will +start so as to pass through the strait by night." + +"Well, at any rate I should like to be on board the Good Venture +again if only for the sail down and back again," Ned said. "They +are to sail at three o'clock tomorrow, so that if the wind is fair +they will pass the strait at night and anchor under the walls of +Haarlem in the morning. I suppose they will be two days discharging +their cargo of food and grain, and one reason why I want to go is +that I may if possible persuade my aunt and the two girls to return +with me and to sail for England with you. All think that Haarlem +will be the next place besieged, and after what has taken place in +the other towns it would be madness for my aunt to stop there." + +"I quite agree with you, Ned. The duke is sure to attack Haarlem +next. If he captures it he will cut Holland in two and strike a +terrible blow at the cause. Your mother shall write a letter tonight +to her sister-in-law urging her to come with us, and take up her +abode in England till these troubles are over. She can either dwell +with us, or, if she would rather, we can find her a cottage hard +by. She will be well provided with money, for I have at home a copy +of your grandfather's will signed by him leaving all his property +to such of his relatives as may survive him. + +"His three sons are dead; your mother and Elizabeth are therefore +his heirs, and the money he transmitted to England is in itself +sufficient to keep two families in comfort. What proportion of it +was his and what belonged to his sons now matters not, seeing that +your mother and aunt are the sole survivors of the family. As you +say, it is madness for her to remain in Holland with her two girls. +Were I a burgher of that town I would send my family away to Leyden +or Dort and stay myself to defend the walls to the last, but I do +not believe that many will do so. Your countrymen are obstinate +people, Sophie, and I fear that few will send their families away." + +Upon the following afternoon Ned started with the little fleet. The +wind was fair and light, and they reached the mouth of the strait +leading from the Zuider Zee to Haarlem. Then suddenly the wind +dropped and the vessels cast anchor. For the two or three days +previous the weather had been exceedingly cold, and with the fall +of the wind the frost seemed to increase in severity, and Ned, who +had been pacing the deck with Peters chatting over what had happened +since they last met, was glad to go into the cabin, where the new +first mate and supercargo had retired as soon as the anchor was +let go. They sat talking for a couple of hours until a sailor came +in, and said that they were hailed by the nearest ship. They all +went on deck. Ned shouted to know what was the matter. + +"Do you not see the water is freezing? By morning we shall be all +frozen up hard and fast." + +This was startling news indeed, for they were now in full sight of +Amsterdam, and would, if detained thus, be open to an attack across +the ice. + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +THE SIEGE OF HAARLEM + + +There was much shouting in the little fleet as the news spread that +the sea was freezing. Boats were lowered and rowed from the ship +to ship, for the ice was as yet no thicker than window glass. Ned +went from the Good Venture to the craft round which most of the +boats were assembling to hear what was decided. He returned in a +few minutes. + +"They are all of opinion that it is hopeless for us to get out of +this. We could tow the vessels a short distance, but every hour +the ice will thicken. They concluded that anchors shall be got up, +and that the ships all lie together as close as they can pack." + +"What will be the use of that?" Peters asked. "If we are to be frozen +up it makes no difference that I can see, whether we are together +or scattered as at present." + +"The idea is," Ned said, "if we are packed together we can defend +ourselves better than if scattered about, and what is more important +still, we can cut through the ice and keep a channel of open water +round us." + +"So we could," Peters agreed. "Let us to work then. Which ship are +we to gather round?" + +"The one I have just left, Peters; she is lying nearly in the +center." + +For the next two hours there was much bustle and hard work. Thin +as the ice was it yet greatly hindered the operation of moving +the ships. At last they were all packed closely together; much +more closely indeed than would be possible in these days, for the +bowsprits, instead of running out nearly parallel with the waterline +stood up at a sharp angle, and the vessels could therefore be laid +with the bow of one touching the stern of that in advance. As there +was now no motive for concealment, lamps were shown and torches +burned. There were thirty craft in all, and they were arranged in +five lines closely touching each other. When all was done the crews +retired to rest. There was no occasion to keep watch, for the ice +had thickened so fast that boats could not now force their way +through it, while it would not before morning be strong enough to +bear the weight of armed men walking across it. + +"This is a curious position," Ned said, as he went on deck next +morning. "How long do you think we are likely to be kept here, +Peters?" + +"Maybe twenty-four hours, maybe three weeks, lad. These frosts when +they set in like this seldom last less than a fortnight or three +weeks. What do you think of our chances of being attacked?" + +"I should say they are sure to attack us. The whole Spanish army +is lying over there in Amsterdam, and as soon as the ice is strong +enough to bear them you will see them coming out. How strong a +force can we muster?" + +"There are thirty craft," Peters replied; "and I should think they +average fully fifteen men each -- perhaps twenty. They carry strong +crews at all times, and stronger than usual now." + +"That would give from five to six hundred men. I suppose all carry +arms?" + +"Oh, yes. I do not suppose that there is a man here who has not +weapons of some kind, and most of them have arquebuses. It will +take a strong force to carry this wooden fort." + +It was still freezing intensely, and the ice was strong enough +to bear men scattered here and there, although it would not have +sustained them gathered together. Towards the afternoon the captain +judged that it had thickened sufficiently to begin work, and fifty +or sixty men provided with hatchets got upon the ice and proceeded +to break it away round the vessels. After a couple of hours a fresh +party took their places, and by nightfall the ships were surrounded +by a belt of open water, some fifteen yards wide. + +A meeting of the captains had been held during the day, and the +most experienced had been chosen as leader, with five lieutenants +under him. Each lieutenant was to command the crews of six ships. +When it became dark five boats were lowered. These were to row +round and round the ships all night so as to keep the water from +freezing again. The crews were to be relieved once an hour, so that +each ship would furnish a set of rowers once in six hours. Numerous +anchors had been lowered when the ships were first packed together, +so as to prevent the mass from drifting when the tide flowed or +ebbed, as this would have brought them in contact with one side +or the other of the ice around them. The next morning the ice was +found to be five inches thick, and the captains were of opinion +that the Spaniards might now attempt an attack upon them. + +"Their first attack will certainly fail," Ned said, as they sat +at breakfast. "They will be baffled by this water belt round us. +However, they will come next time with rafts ready to push across +it, and then we shall have fighting in earnest." + +The lieutenant under whom the crew of the Good Venture were placed, +came down while they were at breakfast to inquire how many arquebuses +there were on board. + +"We have ten," the captain said. + +"As I suppose you have no men who skate on board, I should be glad +if you will hand them over to me." + +"What does he say?" the first mate asked in surprise upon this +being translated to him. "What does he mean by asking if we have +any men who skate, and why should we give up our guns if we can +use them ourselves?" Ned put the question to the lieutenant. + +"We are going to attack them on the ice as they come out," he +replied. "Of course all our vessels have skates on board; in winter +we always carry them, as we may be frozen up at any time. And we +shall send out as many men as can be armed with arquebuses; those +who remain on board will fight the guns." + +"That is a capital plan," Ned said; "and the Spanish, who are +unaccustomed to ice, will be completely puzzled. It is lucky there +was not a breath of wind when it froze, and the surface is as smooth +as glass. Well, there will be nine arquebuses for you, sir; for I +have been out here two winters and have learnt to skate, so I will +accompany the party, the other nine arquebuses with ammunition we +will hand over to you." + +A lookout at one of the mastheads now shouted that he could make out +a black mass on the ice near Amsterdam, and believed that it was +a large body of troops. Every preparation had already been made on +board the ships for the fight. The Good Venture lay on the outside +tier facing Amsterdam, having been placed there because she carried +more guns than any of the other vessels, which were for the most +part small, and few carried more than four guns, while the armament +of the Good Venture had, after her fight with the Don Pedro, been +increased to ten guns. The guns from the vessels in the inner tiers +had all been shifted on to those lying outside, and the wooden fort +literally bristled with cannon. + +A quarter of an hour after the news that the Spaniards were on +their way had been given, three hundred men with arquebuses were +ferried across the channel, and were disembarked on to the ice. +They were divided into five companies of sixty men each, under the +lieutenants; the captain remained to superintend the defence of +the ships. The Dutch sailors were as much at home on their skates +as upon dry land, and in high spirits started to meet the enemy. +It was a singular sight to see the five bodies of men gliding +away across the ice. There was no attempt at formation or order; +all understood their business, for in winter it was one of their +favourite sports to fire at a mark while skating at a rapid pace. + +It was two miles from the spot where the ships lay frozen up to +Amsterdam. The Spaniards, a thousand strong, had traversed about +a third of the distance when the skaters approached them. Keeping +their feet with the utmost difficulty upon the slippery ice, they +were astonished at the rapid approach of the Dutchmen. Breaking +up as they approached, their assailants came dashing along at a +rapid pace, discharged their arquebuses into the close mass of the +Spaniards, and then wheeled away at the top of their speed, reloaded +and again swept down to fire. + +Against these tactics the Spaniards could do little. Unsteady as they +were on their feet the recoil of their heavy arquebuses frequently +threw them over, and it was impossible to take anything like an +accurate aim at the flying figures that passed them at the speed +of a galloping horse. Nevertheless they doggedly kept on their way, +leaving the ice behind them dotted with killed and wounded. Not a +gun was discharged from on board the ships until the head of the +Spanish column reached the edge of the water, and discovered the +impassable obstacle that lay between them and the vessels. Then the +order was give to fire, and the head of the column was literally +swept away by the discharge. + +The commander of the Spaniards now gave the order for a retreat. +As they fell back the guns of the ships swept their ranks, the +musketeers harassed them on each flank, the ice, cracked and broken +by the artillery fire, gave way under their feet, and many fell +through and were drowned, and of the thousand men who left Amsterdam +less than half regained that city. The Spaniards were astonished at +this novel mode of fighting, and the despatches of their officers gave +elaborate descriptions of the strange appendages that had enabled +the Hollanders to glide so rapidly over the ice. The Spaniards +were, however, always ready to learn from a foe. Alva immediately +ordered eight thousand pairs of skates, and the soldiers were kept +hard at work practicing until they were able to make their way with +fair rapidity over the ice. The evening after the fight a strong +wind suddenly sprang up from the southwest, and the rain descended +in torrents. By morning the ice was already broken up, the guns +were hastily shifted to the vessels to which they belonged, the +ships on the outside tiers cast off from the others, and before +noon the whole were on their way back towards Enkhuizen, which +they reached without pursuit by the Spanish vessels; for at nine +in the morning the wind changed suddenly again, the frost set in +as severely as before, and the Spaniards in the port of Amsterdam +were unable to get out. This event caused great rejoicing in Holland, +and was regarded as a happy omen for the coming contest. + +After remaining another day with his family, Ned mounted his horse +and rode to Haarlem. The city lay at the narrowest point of the +narrow strip of land facing the German Ocean, and upon the shore of +the shallow lake of the same name. Upon the opposite side of this +lake, ten miles distant, stood the town of Amsterdam. The Lake of +Haarlem was separated from the long inlet of the Zuider Zee called +the Y by a narrow strip of land, along which ran the causeway +connecting the two cities. Halfway along this neck of land there +was a cut, with sluice works, by which the surrounding country could +be inundated. The port of Haarlem on the Y was at the village of +Sparendam, where there was a fort for the protection of the shipping. + +Haarlem was one of the largest cities of the Netherlands; but +it was also one of the weakest. The walls were old, and had never +been formidable. The extent of the defences made a large garrison +necessary; but the force available for the defence was small indeed. +Upon his way towards Haarlem Ned learnt that on the night before, +the 10th of December, Sparendam had been captured by the Spaniards. +A secret passage across the flooded and frozen meadows had been +shown to them by a peasant, and they had stormed the fort, killed +three hundred men, and taken possession of the works and village. +Thus Haarlem was at once cut off from all aid coming from the Zuider +Zee. + +Much disquieted by the news, Ned rode on rapidly and entered the +town by the gate upon the southern side; for, as he approached, +he learned that the Spaniards had already appeared in great force +before the city. He rode at once to his aunt's house, hoping to +find that she had already left the town with the girls. Leaping +from his horse he entered the door hurriedly, and was dismayed to +find his aunt seated before the fire knitting. + +"My dear aunt!" he exclaimed, "do you know that the Spaniards are +in front of the town? Surely to remain here with the two girls is +madness!" + +"Every one else is remaining, why should not I, Ned?" his aunt +asked calmly. + +"Other people have their houses and their businesses, aunt, but +you have nothing to keep you here. You know what has happened at +Zutphen and Naarden. How can you expose the girls, even if you are +so obstinate yourself, to such horrors?" + +"The burghers are determined to hold out until relief comes, nephew." + +"Ay, if they can," Ned replied. "But who knows whether they can. +This is madness, aunt. I beseech you come with me to your father, +and let us talk over the matter with him; and in the morning, if +you will not go, I will get two horses and mount the girls on them, +and ride with them to Leyden --- that is, if by the morning it is +not already too late. It would be best to proceed at once." + +Dame Plomaert reluctantly yielded to the energy of her nephew, +and accompanied him to the house of her father; but the weaver was +absent on the walls, and did not return until late in the evening. +Upon Ned's putting the case to him, he at once agreed that it would +be best both for her and the girls to leave. + +"I have told her so twenty times already," he said; "but Elizabeth +was always as obstinate as a mule. Over and over again she has +said she would go; and having said that, has done nothing. She can +do no good by stopping here; and there are only three more mouths +to feed. By all means, lad, get them away the first thing in the +morning. If it be possible I would say start tonight, dark as it +is; but the Spanish horse may be all round the city, and you might +ride into their arms without seeing them." + +Ned at once sallied out, and without much difficulty succeeded in +bargaining for three horses; for few of the inhabitants had left, and +horses would not only be of no use during the siege, but it would +be impossible to feed them. Therefore their owners were glad to +part with them for far less than their real value. When he reached +the house he found that his aunt had made up three bundles with +clothes and what jewelry she had, and that she was ready to start +with the girls in the morning. + +Before daybreak Ned went out to the walls on the south side, but +as the light broadened out discovered that it was too late. During +the night heavy reinforcements had arrived to Don Frederick from +Amsterdam, and a large force was already facing the west side of +the city. + +With a heavy heart he returned to his aunt's with the news that it +was too late, for that all means of exit was closed. Dame Plomaert +took the news philosophically. She was a woman of phlegmatic +disposition, and objected to sudden movement and changes, and to +her it seemed far less terrible to await quietly the fortunes of +the siege than to undergo the fatigues of a journey on horseback +and the uncertainty of an unknown future. + +"Well, nephew," she said placidly, "if we cannot get away, we cannot; +and it really saves a world of trouble. But what are you going to +do yourself? for I suppose if we cannot get away, you cannot." + +"The way is open across the lake," Ned replied, "and I shall travel +along the ice to the upper end and then over to Leyden, and obtain +permission from the prince to return here by the same way; or +if not, to accompany the force he is raising there, for this will +doubtless march at once to the relief of the town. Even now, aunt, +you might make your escape across the ice." + +"I have not skated since I was fifteen years old," the good woman +said placidly; "and at my age and weight I am certainly not going +to try now, Ned. Just imagine me upon skates!" + +Ned could not help smiling, vexed as he was. His aunt was stout +and portly, and he certainly could not imagine her exerting herself +sufficiently to undertake a journey on skates. + +"But the girls can skate," he urged. + +"The girls are girls," she said decidedly; "and I am not going to +let them run about the world by themselves. You say yourself that +reinforcements will soon start. You do not know our people, nephew. +They will beat off the Spaniards. Whatever they do, the city will +never be taken. My father says so, and every one says so. Surely +they must know better than a lad like you!" + +Ned shrugged his shoulders in despair, and went out to see what were +the preparations for defence. The garrison consisted only of some +fifteen hundred German mercenaries and the burgher force. Ripperda, +the commandant of the garrison, was an able and energetic officer. +The townspeople were animated by a determination to resist to the +end. A portion of the magistracy had, in the first place, been +anxious to treat, and had entered into secret negotiations with Alva, +sending three of their number to treat with the duke at Amsterdam. +One had remained there; the other two on their return were seized, +tried, and executed, and Sainte Aldegonde, one of the prince's +ministers, had been dispatched by him to make a complete change in +the magistracy. + +The total force available for the defence of the town was not, +at the commencement of the siege, more than 3000 men, while over +30,000 Spaniards were gathering round its walls, a number equal to +the entire population of the city. + +The Germans, under Count Overstein, finally took up their encampment +in the extensive grove of trees that spread between the southern +walls and the shore of the lake. + +The Spaniards, under Don Frederick, faced the north walls, while +the Walloons and other regiments closed it in on the east and west. +But these arrangements occupied some days; and the mists which +favoured their movements were not without advantage to the besieged. +Under cover of the fog supplies of provisions and ammunition were +brought by men and women and even children, on their heads or in +sledges down the frozen lake, and in spite of the efforts of the +besiegers introduced into the city. Ned was away only two days. +The prince approved of his desire to take part in the siege, and +furnished him with letters to the magistrates promising reinforcements, +and to Ripperda recommending Ned as a young gentleman volunteer +of great courage and quickness, who had already performed valuable +service for the cause. His cousins were delighted to see him back. +Naturally they did not share in their mother's confidence as to +the result of the siege, and felt in Ned's presence a certain sense +of security and comfort. The garrison, increased by arrivals from +without and by the enrollment of every man capable of bearing arms, +now numbered a thousand pioneers, three thousand fighting men, and +three hundred fighting women. + +The last were not the least efficient portion of the garrison. All +were armed with sword, musket, and dagger, and were led by Kanau +Hasselaer, a widow of distinguished family, who at the head of her +female band took part in many of the fiercest fights of the siege, +both upon and without the walls. + +The siege commenced badly. In the middle of December the force of +some 3500 men assembled at Leyden set out under the command of De +la Marck, the former admiral of the sea beggars. The troops were +attacked on their march by the Spaniards, and a thousand were +killed, a number taken prisoners, and the rest routed. + +Among the captains was a brave officer named Van Trier, for whom De +la Marck offered two thousand crowns and nineteen Spanish prisoners. +The offer was refused. Van Trier was hanged by one leg until he +was dead, upon one of the numerous gibbets erected in sight of the +town; in return for which De la Marck at once executed the nineteen +Spaniards. On the 18th of December Don Frederick's batteries opened +fire upon the northern side, and the fire was kept up without +intermission for three days. As soon as the first shot was fired, +a crier going round the town summoned all to assist in repairing +the damages as fast as they were made. + +The whole population responded to the summons. Men, women, and +children brought baskets of stones and earth, bags of sand and +beams of wood, and these they threw into the gaps as fast as they +were made. The churches were stripped of all their stone statues, +and these too were piled in the breaches. The besiegers were greatly +horrified at what they declared to be profanation; a complaint that +came well from men who had been occupied in the wholesale murder +of men, women, and children, and in the sacking of the churches +of their own religion. Don Frederick anticipated a quick and easy +success. He deemed that this weakly fortified town might well be +captured in a week by an army of 30,000 men, and that after spending +a few days slaughtering its inhabitants, and pillaging and burning +the houses, the army would march on against the next town, until +ere long the rebellion would be stamped out, and Holland transformed +into a desert. + +At the end of three days' cannonade the breach, in spite of the +efforts of the besieged, was practicable, and a strong storming +party led by General Romero advanced against it. As the column was +seen approaching the church bells rang out the alarm, the citizens +caught up their arms, and men and women hurried to the threatened +point. As they approached the Spaniards were received with a heavy +fire of musketry; but with their usual gallantry the veterans of +Spain pressed forward and began to mount the breach. Now they were +exposed not only to the fire of the garrison, but to the missiles +thrown by the burghers and women. Heavy stones, boiling oil, and +live coals were hurled down upon them; small hoops smeared with +pitch and set on fire were dexterously thrown over their heads, +and after a vain struggle, in which many officers were killed and +wounded, Romero, who had himself lost an eye in the fight, called +off his troops and fell back from the breach, leaving from three +to four hundred dead behind him, while but a half dozen of the +townsmen lost their lives. + +Upon the retreat of the Spaniards the delight in the city was +immense; they had met the pikemen of Spain and hurled them back +discomfited, and they felt that they could now trust themselves to +meet further assaults without flinching. + +To Ned's surprise his aunt, when the alarm bells rung, had sallied +out from her house accompanied by the two girls. She carried with +her half a dozen balls of flax, each the size of her head. These +had been soaked in oil and turpentine, and to each a stout cord +about two feet long was attached. The girls had taken part in the +work of the preceding day, but when she reached the breach she +told them to remain in shelter while she herself joined the crowd +on the walls flanking the breach, while Ned took part in the front +row of its defenders. Frau Plomaert was slow, but she was strong +when she chose to exert herself, and when the conflict was at its +thickest she lighted the balls at the fires over which caldrons of +oil were seething, and whirling them round her head sent them one +by one into the midst of the Spanish column. + +"Three of them hit men fairly in the face," she said to one of her +neighbours, "so I think I have done: my share of today's work." + +She then calmly descended the wall, joined her daughters and returned +home, paying no attention to the din of the conflict at the breach, +and contended that she had done all that could be expected of her. +On reaching home she bade the girls take to their knitting as usual, +while she set herself to work to prepare the midday meal. + +A few days later the Prince of Orange sent from Sassenheim, a place +on the southern extremity of the lake, where he had now taken up +his headquarters, a force of 2000 men, with seven guns and a convoy +of wagons with ammunition and food towards the town, under General +Batenburgh. This officer had replaced De la Marck, whose brutal and +ferocious conduct had long disgraced the Dutch cause, and whom the +prince, finding that he was deaf alike to his orders and to the +dictates of humanity, had now deprived of his commission. Batenburgh's +expedition was no more fortunate than that of De la Marck had been. + +On his approach to the city by night a thick mist set in, and the +column completely lost its way. The citizens had received news of +its coming, and the church bells were rung and cannon fired to guide +it as to its direction; but the column was so helplessly lost, that +it at last wandered in among the Spaniards, who fell upon them, +slew many and scattered the rest -- a very few only succeeding in +entering the town. Batenburgh brought off, under cover of the mist, +a remnant of his troops, but all the provisions and ammunition were +lost. + +The second in command, De Koning, was among those captured. The +Spaniards cut off his head and threw it over the wall into the +city, with a paper fastened on it bearing the words: "This is the +head of Captain De Koning, who is on his way with reinforcements +for the good city of Haarlem." But the people of Haarlem were +now strung up, both by their own peril and the knowledge of the +atrocities committed by the Spaniards in other cities, to a point +of hatred and fury equal to that of the foes, and they retorted by +chopping off the heads of eleven prisoners and throwing them into +the Spanish camp. There was a label on the barrel with these words, +"Deliver these heads to Duke Alva in payment of his ten penny tax, +with one additional head for interest." + +The besieged were not content to remain shut up in the walls, but +frequently sallied out and engaged in skirmishes with the enemy. +Prisoners were therefore often captured by one side or the other, and +the gibbets on the walls and in the camp were constantly occupied. + +Ned as a volunteer was not attached to any special body of troops, +Ripperda telling him to act for himself and join in whatever was +going on as he chose. Consequently he took part in many of the +skirmishes outside the walls, and was surprised to find how fearlessly +the burghers met the tried soldiers of Spain, and especially at +the valour with which the corps of women battled with the enemy. + +In strength and stature most of the women were fully a match for +the Walloon troops, and indeed for the majority of the Spaniards; +and they never feared to engage any body of troops of equal numerical +strength. + +"Look here, aunt," Ned said to Frau Plomaert upon the day after +the failure of Batenburg's force to relieve the town, "you must see +for yourself now that the chances are that sooner or later the town +will be captured. We may beat off all the assaults of the Spaniards, +but we shall ere long have to fight with an even more formidable +foe within the town. You know that our stock of provisions is small, +and that in the end unless help comes we must yield to famine. The +prince may possibly throw five thousand armed men into the town, +but it is absolutely impossible that he can throw in any great +store of provision, unless he entirely defeats the Spaniards; and +nowhere in Holland can he raise an army sufficient for that. + +"I think, aunt, that while there is time we ought to set to work to +construct a hiding place, where you and the girls can remain while +the sack and atrocities that will assuredly follow the surrender +of the town are taking place." + +"I shall certainly not hide myself from the Spaniards," Frau Plomaert +said stoutly. + +"Very well, aunt, if you choose to be killed on your own hearthstone +of course I cannot prevent it; but I do say that you ought to save +the girls from these horrors if you can." + +"That I am ready to do," she said. "But how is it to be managed?" + +"Well, aunt, there is your wood cellar below. We can surely +construct some place of concealment there. Of course I will do the +work, though the girls might help by bringing up baskets of earth +and scattering them in the streets." Having received a tacit permission +from his aunt, Ned went down into the wood cellar, which was some +five feet wide by eight feet long. Like every place about a Dutch +house it was whitewashed, and was half full of wood. Ned climbed +over the wood to the further end. + +"This is where it must be," he said to the girls, who had followed +him. "Now, the first thing to do is to pile the wood so as to +leave a passage by which we can pass along. I will get a pick and +get out the bricks at this corner." + +"We need only make a hole a foot wide, and it need not be more than +a foot high," Lucette, the elder, said. "That will be sufficient +for us to squeeze through." + +"It would, Lucette; but we shall want more space for working, so +to begin with we will take away the bricks up to the top. We can +close it up as much as we like afterwards. There is plenty of time, +for it will be weeks before the city is starved out. If we work +for an hour a day we can get it done in a week." + +Accordingly the work began, the bricks were removed, and with +a pick and shovel Ned dug into the ground beyond, while the girls +carried away the earth and scattered it in the road. In a fortnight +a chamber five feet high, three feet wide, and six feet long had +been excavated. Slats of wood, supported by props along the sides, +held up the roof. A quantity of straw was thrown in for the girls +to lie on. Frau Plomaert came down from time to time to inspect +the progress of the work, and expressed herself well pleased with +it. + +"How are you going to close the entrance, Ned?" she asked. + +"I propose to brick it up again three feet high, aunt. Then when +the girls and you have gone in -- for I hope that you will change +your mind at the last -- I will brick up the rest of it, but using +mud instead of mortar, so that the bricks can be easily removed +when the time comes, or one or two can be taken out to pass in food, +and then replaced as before. After you are in I will whitewash the +whole cellar, and no one would then guess the wall had ever been +disturbed. I shall leave two bricks out in the bottom row of all +to give air. They will be covered over by the wood. However hard +up we get for fuel we can leave enough to cover the floor at that +end a few inches deep. If I can I will pierce a hole up under the +board in the room above this, so as to give a free passage of air." + +"If the Spaniards take away the wood, as they may well do, they +will notice that the two bricks are gone," Mrs. Plomaert objected. + +"We can provide for that, aunt, by leaving two bricks inside, +whitewashed like the rest, to push into the holes if you hear +anyone removing the wood. There is only the light that comes in at +the door, and it would never be noticed that the two bricks were +loose." + +"That will do very well," Mrs. Plomaert said. "I thought at first +that your idea was foolish, but I see that it will save the girls +if the place is taken. I suppose there will be plenty of time to +brick them up after they have taken refuge in it." + +"Plenty of time, aunt. We shall know days before if the city surrenders +to hunger. I shall certainly fight much more comfortably now that +I know that whatever comes Lucette and Annie are safe from the +horrors of the sack." + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +THE FALL OF HAARLEM + + +After the terrible repulse inflicted upon the storming party, +Don Frederick perceived that the task before him was not to be +accomplished with the ease and rapidity he had anticipated, and that +these hitherto despised Dutch heretics had at last been driven by +despair to fight with desperate determination that was altogether +new to the Spaniards. He therefore abandoned the idea of carrying +the place by assault, and determined to take it by the slower and +surer process of a regular siege. In a week his pioneers would be +able to drive mines beneath the walls; an explosion would then open +a way for his troops. Accordingly the work began, but the besieged +no sooner perceived what was being done than the thousand men who +had devoted themselves to this work at once began to drive counter +mines. + +Both parties worked with energy, and it was not long before the +galleries met, and a desperate struggle commenced under ground. +Here the drill and discipline of the Spaniards availed them but +little. It was a conflict of man to man in narrow passages, with +such light only as a few torches could give. Here the strength and +fearlessness of death of the sturdy Dutch burghers and fishermen +more than compensated for any superiority of the Spaniards in the +management of their weapons. The air was so heavy and thick with +powder that the torches gave but a feeble light, and the combatants +were well nigh stifled by the fumes of sulphur, yet in the galleries +which met men fought night and day without intermission. The places +of those who retired exhausted, or fell dead, were filled by others +impatiently waiting their turn to take part in the struggle. While +the fighting continued the work went on also. Fresh galleries were +continually being driven on both sides, and occasionally tremendous +explosions took place as one party or the other sprung their mines; +the shock sometimes bringing down the earth in passages far removed +from the explosions, and burying the combatants beneath them; +while yawning pits were formed where the explosions took place, +and fragments of bodies cast high in the air. Many of the galleries +were so narrow and low that no arms save daggers could be used, and +men fought like wild beasts, grappling and rolling on the ground, +while comrades with lanterns or torches stood behind waiting to +spring upon each other as soon as the struggle terminated one way +or the other. + +For a fortnight this underground struggle continued, and then Don +Frederick -- finding that no ground was gained, and that the loss +was so great that even his bravest soldiers were beginning to +dread their turn to enter upon a conflict in which their military +training went for nothing, and where so many hundreds of their +comrades had perished -- abandoned all hopes of springing a mine +under the walls, and drew off his troops. A month had already +elapsed since the repulse of the attack on the breach; and while +the fight had been going on underground a steady fire had been +kept up against a work called a ravelin, protecting the gate of the +Cross. During this time letters had from time to time been brought +into the town by carrier pigeons, the prince urging the citizens +to persevere, and holding out hope of relief. + +These promises were to some extent fulfilled on the 28th of January, +when 400 veteran soldiers, bringing with them 170 sledges laden with +powder and bread, crossed the frozen lake and succeeded in making +their way into the city. The time was now at hand when the besieged +foresaw that the ravelin of the Cross gate could not much longer be +defended. But they had been making preparations for this contingency. +All through the long nights of January the noncombatants, old men, +women, and children, aided by such of the fighting men as were not +worn out by their work on the walls or underground, laboured to +construct a wall in the form of a half moon on the inside of the +threatened point. None who were able to work were exempt, and none +wished to be exempted, for the heroic spirit burned brightly in +every heart in Haarlem. + +Nightly Ned went down with his aunt and cousins and worked side by +side with them. The houses near the new work were all levelled in +order that the materials should be utilized for the construction of +the wall, which was built of solid masonry. The small stones were +carried by the children and younger girls in baskets, the heavier +ones dragged on hand sledges by the men and women. Although +constitutionally adverse to exertion, Frau Plomaert worked sturdily, +and Ned was often surprised at her strength; for she dragged along +without difficulty loaded sledges, which he was unable to move, +throwing her weight on to the ropes that passed over her shoulders, +and toiling backwards and forwards to and from the wall for hours, +slowly but unflinchingly. + +It seemed to Ned that under these exertions she visibly decreased +in weight from day to day, and indeed the scanty supply of food +upon which the work had to be done was ill calculated to support the +strength of those engaged upon such fatiguing labour. For from the +commencement of the siege the whole population had been rationed, all +the provisions in the town had been handed over to the authorities +for equal division, and every house, rich and poor, had been +rigorously searched to see that none were holding back supplies for +their private consumption. Many of the cattle and horses had been +killed and salted down, and a daily distribution of food was made +to each household according to the number of mouths it contained. + +Furious at the successful manner in which the party had entered the +town on the 28th of January, Don Frederick kept up for the next +few days a terrible cannonade against the gates of the Cross and +of St. John, and the wall connecting them. At the end of that time +the wall was greatly shattered, part of St. John's gate was in +ruins, and an assault was ordered to take place at midnight. So +certain was he of success that Don Frederick ordered the whole of +his forces to be under arms opposite all the gates of the city, to +prevent the population making their escape. A chosen body of troops +were to lead the assault, and at midnight these advanced silently +against the breach. The besieged had no suspicion that an attack +was intended, and there were but some forty men, posted rather as +sentries than guards, at the breach. + +These, however, when the Spaniards advanced, gave the alarm, the +watchers in the churches sounded the tocsins, and the sleeping +citizens sprang from their beds, seized their arms, and ran towards +the threatened point. Unawed by the overwhelming force advancing +against them the sentries took their places at the top of the +breach, and defended it with such desperation that they kept their +assailants at bay until assistance arrived, when the struggle +assumed a more equal character. The citizens defended themselves +by the same means that had before proved successful, boiling oil +and pitch, stones, flaming hoops, torches, and missiles of all kinds +were hurled down by them upon the Spaniards, while the garrison +defended the breach with sword and pike. + +Until daylight the struggle continued, and Philip then ordered the +whole of his force to advance to the assistance of the storming +party. A tremendous attack was made upon the ravelin in front of +the gate of the Cross. It was successful, and the Spaniards rushed +exulting into the work, believing that the city was now at their +mercy. Then, to their astonishment, they saw that they were confronted +by the new wall, whose existence they had not even suspected. +While they were hesitating a tremendous explosion took place. The +citizens had undermined the ravelin and placed a store of powder +there; and this was now fired, and the work flew into the air, with +all the soldiers who had entered. + +The retreat was sounded at once, and the Spaniards fell back to +their camp, and thus a second time the burghers of Haarlem repulsed +an assault by an overwhelming force under the best generals of +Spain. The effect of these failures was so great that Don Frederick +resolved not to risk another defeat, but to abandon his efforts to +capture the city by sap or assault, and to resort to the slow but +sure process of famine. He was well aware that the stock of food in +the city was but small and the inhabitants were already suffering +severely, and he thought that they could not hold out much longer. + +But greatly as the inhabitants suffered, the misery of the army +besieging them more than equalled their own. The intense cold +rendered it next to impossible to supply so large a force with +food; and small as were the rations of the inhabitants, they were +at least as large and more regularly delivered than those of the +troops. Moreover, the citizens who were not on duty could retire +to their comfortable houses; while the besiegers had but tents to +shelter them from the severity of the frosts. Cold and insufficient +food brought with them a train of diseases, and great numbers of +the soldiers died. + +The cessation of the assaults tried the besieged even more than their +daily conflicts had done, for it is much harder to await death in +a slow and tedious form than to face it fighting. They could not +fully realize the almost hopeless prospect. Ere long the frost +would break up, and with it the chance of obtaining supplies or +reinforcements across the frozen lake would be at an end. + +It was here alone that they could expect succour, for they knew +well enough that the prince could raise no army capable of cutting +its way through the great beleaguering force. In vain did they +attempt to provoke or anger the Spaniards into renewing their attacks. +Sorties were constantly made. The citizens gathered on the walls, +and with shouts and taunts of cowardice challenged the Spaniards +to come on; they even went to the length of dressing themselves +in the vestments of the churches, and contemptuously carrying the +sacred vessels in procession, in hopes of infuriating the Spaniards +into an attack. But Don Frederick and his generals were not to be +moved from their purpose. + +The soldiers, suffering as much as the besiegers, would gladly have +brought matters to an issue one way or the other by again assaulting +the walls; but their officers restrained them, assuring them that +the city could not hold out long, and that they would have an ample +revenge when the time came. Life in the city was most monotonous +now. There was no stir of life or business; no one bought or sold; +and except the men who went to take their turn as sentries on the +wall, or the women who fetched the daily ration for the family +from the magazines, there was no occasion to go abroad. Fuel was +getting very scarce, and families clubbed together and gathered at +each others houses by turns, so that one fire did for all. + +But at the end of February their sufferings from cold came to +an end, for the frost suddenly broke up; in a few days the ice on +the lake disappeared, and spring set in. The remaining cattle were +now driven out into the fields under the walls to gather food for +themselves. Strong guards went with them, and whenever the Spaniards +endeavoured to come down and drive them off, the citizens flocked +out and fought so desperately that the Spaniards ceased to molest +them; for as one of those present wrote, each captured bullock cost +the lives of at least a dozen soldiers. + +Don Frederick himself had long since become heartily weary of the +siege, in which there was no honour to be gained, and which had +already cost the lives of so large a number of his best soldiers. +It did not seem to him that the capture of a weak city was worth +the price that had to be paid for it, and he wrote to his father +urging his views, and asking permission to raise the siege. But +the duke thought differently, and despatched an officer to his son +with this message: "Tell Don Frederick that if he be not decided +to continue the siege until the town be taken, I shall no longer +consider him my son. Should he fall in the siege I will myself +take the field to maintain it, and when we have both perished, the +duchess, my wife, shall come from Spain to do the same." + +Inflamed by this reply Don Frederick recommenced active operations, +to the great satisfaction of the besieged. The batteries were +reopened, and daily contests took place. One night under cover of +a fog, a party of the besieged marched up to the principal Spanish +battery, and attempted to spike the guns. Every one of them was +killed round the battery, not one turning to fly. "The citizens," +wrote Don Frederick, "do as much as the best soldiers in the world +could do." + +As soon as the frost broke up Count Bossu, who had been building a +fleet of small vessels in Amsterdam, cut a breach through the dyke +and entered the lake, thus entirely cutting off communications. The +Prince of Orange on his part was building ships at the other end +of the lake, and was doing all in his power for the relief of the +city. He was anxiously waiting the arrival of troops from Germany +or France, and doing his best with such volunteers as he could +raise. These, however, were not numerous; for the Dutch, although +ready to fight to the death for the defence of their own cities +and families, had not yet acquired a national spirit, and all the +efforts of the prince failed to induce them to combine for any +general object. + +His principal aim now was to cut the road along the dyke which +connected Amsterdam with the country round it. Could he succeed in +doing this, Amsterdam would be as completely cut off as was Haarlem, +and that city, as well as the Spanish army, would speedily be +starved out. Alva himself was fully aware of this danger, and wrote +to the king: "Since I came into this world I have never been in +such anxiety. If they should succeed in cutting off communication +along the dykes we should have to raise the siege of Haarlem, to +surrender, hands crossed, or to starve." + +The prince, unable to gather sufficient men for this attempt, +sent orders to Sonoy, who commanded the small army in the north of +Holland, to attack the dyke between the Diemar Lake and the Y, to +open the sluices, and break through the dyke, by which means much +of the country round Haarlem would be flooded. Sonoy crossed the Y +in boats, seized the dyke, opened the sluices, and began the work +of cutting it through. Leaving his men so engaged, Sonoy went to +Edam to fetch up reinforcements. While he was away a large force +from Amsterdam came up, some marching along the causeway and some +in boats. + +A fierce contest took place, the contending parties fighting partly +in boats, partly on the slippery causeway, that was wide enough but +for two men to stand abreast, partly in the water. But the number +of the assailants was too great, and the Dutch, after fighting +gallantly, lost heart and retired just as Sonoy, whose volunteers +from Edam had refused to follow him, arrived alone in a little boat. +He tried in vain to rally them, but was swept away by the rush of +fugitives, many of whom were, however, able to gain their boats and +make their retreat, thanks to the valour of John Haring of Horn, +who took his station on the dyke, and, armed with sword and shield, +actually kept in check a thousand of the enemy for a time long +enough to have enabled the Dutch to rally had they been disposed +to do so. But it was too late; and they had enough of fighting. +However, he held his post until many had made good their retreat, +and then, plunging into the sea, swam off to the boats and effected +his escape. A braver feat of arms was never accomplished. + +Some hundreds of the Dutch were killed or captured. All the prisoners +were taken to the gibbets in the front of Haarlem, and hung, some +by the neck and some by the heels, in view of their countrymen, +while the head of one of their officers was thrown into the city. +As usual this act of ferocity excited the citizens to similar acts. +Two of the old board of magistrates belonging to the Spanish party, +with several other persons, were hung, and the wife and daughter +of one of them hunted into the water and drowned. + +In the words of an historian, "Every man within and without Haarlem +seemed inspired by a spirit of special and personal vengeance." +Many, however, of the more gentle spirits were filled with horror +at these barbarities and the perpetual carnage going on. Captain +Curey, for example, one of the bravest officers of the garrison, who +had been driven to take up arms by the sufferings of his countrymen, +although he had naturally a horror of bloodshed, was subject to fits +of melancholy at the contemplation of these horrors. Brave in the +extreme, he led his men in every sortie, in every desperate struggle. +Fighting without defensive armour he was always in the thick of +the battle, and many of the Spaniards fell before his sword. On +his return he invariably took to his bed, and lay ill from remorse +and compunction till a fresh summons for action arrived, when, seized +by a sort of frenzy, he rose and led his men to fresh conflicts. + +On the 25th of March a sally was made by a thousand of the besieged. +They drove in all the Spanish outposts, killed eight hundred of +the enemy, burnt three hundred tents, and captured seven cannons, +nine standards, and many wagon loads of provisions, all of which +they succeeded in bringing into the city. + +The Duke of Alva, who had gone through nearly sixty years of warfare, +wrote to the king that "never was a place defended with such skill +and bravery as Haarlem," and that "it was a war such as never before +was seen or heard of in any land on earth." Three veteran Spanish +regiments now reinforced the besiegers, having been sent from +Italy to aid in overcoming the obstinate resistance of the city. +But the interest of the inhabitants was now centred rather on the +lake than upon the Spanish camp. It was from this alone that they +could expect succour, and it now swarmed with the Dutch and Spanish +vessels, between whom there were daily contests. + +On the 28th of May the two fleets met in desperate fight. Admiral +Bossu had a hundred ships, most of considerable size. Martin Brand, +who commanded the Dutch, had a hundred and fifty, but of much +smaller size. The ships grappled with each other, and for hours a +furious contest raged. Several thousands of men were killed on both +sides, but at length weight prevailed and the victory was decided +in favour of the Spaniards. Twenty-two of the Dutch vessels were +captured and the rest routed. The Spanish fleet now sailed towards +Haarlem, landed their crews, and joined by a force from the army, +captured the forts the Dutch had erected and had hitherto held on +the shore of the lake, and through which their scanty supplies had +hitherto been received. + +From the walls of the city the inhabitants watched the conflict, +and a wail of despair rose from them as they saw its issue. They +were now entirely cut off from all hope of succour, and their fate +appeared to be sealed. Nevertheless they managed to send a message +to the prince that they would hold out for three weeks longer in +hopes that he might devise some plan for their relief, and carrier +pigeons brought back word that another effort should be made +to save them. But by this time the magazines were empty. Hitherto +one pound of bread had been served out daily to each man and half +a pound to each woman, and on this alone they had for many weeks +subsisted; but the flour was now exhausted, and henceforth it was +a battle with starvation. + +Every living creature that could be used as food was slain and eaten. +Grass and herbage of all kinds were gathered and cooked for food, +and under cover of darkness parties sallied out from the gates to +gather grass in the fields. The sufferings of the besieged were +terrible. So much were they reduced by weakness that they could +scarce drag themselves along the streets, and numbers died from +famine. + +During the time that the supply of bread was served out Ned had +persuaded his aunt and the girls to put by a morsel of their food +each day. + +"It will be the only resource when the city surrenders," he said. +"For four or five days at least the girls must remain concealed, +and during that time they must be fed. If they take in with them a +jar of water and a supply of those crusts which they can eat soaked +in the water, they can maintain life." + +And so each day, as long as the bread lasted, a small piece was +put aside until a sufficient store was accumulated to last the two +girls for a week. Soon after the daily issue ceased. Frau Plomaert +placed the bag of crusts into Ned's hands. + +"Take it away and hide it somewhere," she said; "and do not let +me know where you have put it, or we shall assuredly break into it +and use it before the time comes. I do not think now that, however +great the pressure, we would touch those crusts; but there is no +saying what we may do when we are gnawed by hunger. It is better, +anyhow, to put ourselves out of the way of temptation." + +During the long weeks of June Ned found it hard to keep the precious +store untouched. His aunt's figure had shrunk to a shadow of her +former self, and she was scarce able to cross the room. The girls' +cheeks were hollow and bloodless with famine, and although none of +them ever asked him to break in upon the store, their faces pleaded +more powerfully than any words could have done; and yet they were +better off than many, for every night Ned either went out from the +gates or let himself down by a rope from the wall and returned with +a supply of grass and herbage. + +It was fortunate for the girls that there was no necessity to go +out of doors, for the sights there would have shaken the strongest. +Men, women, and children fell dead by scores in the streets, and +the survivors had neither strength nor heart to carry them away +and bury them. On the 1st of July the burghers hung out a flag +of truce, and deputies went out to confer with Don Frederick. The +latter, however, would grant no terms whatever, and they returned +to the city. Two days later a tremendous cannonade was opened upon +the town, and the walls broken down in several places, but the +Spaniards did not advance to the assault, knowing that the town +could not hold out many days longer. + +Two more parleys were held, but without result, and the black flag +was hoisted upon the cathedral tower as a signal of despair; but +soon afterwards a pigeon flew into the town with a letter from the +prince, begging them to hold out for two days longer, as succour +was approaching. The prince had indeed done all that was possible. +He assembled the citizens of Delft in the marketplace, and said +that if any troops could be gathered he would march in person at +their head to the relief of the city. There were no soldiers to be +obtained; but 4000 armed volunteers from the various Dutch cities +assembled, and 600 mounted troops. The prince placed himself at +their head, but the magistrates and burghers of the towns would +not allow him to hazard a life so indispensable to the existence +of Holland, and the troops themselves refused to march unless +he abandoned his intention. He at last reluctantly consented, and +handed over the command of the expedition to Baron Batenburg. + +On the 8th of July at dusk the expedition set out from Sassenheim, +taking with them four hundred wagon loads of provisions and seven +cannon. They halted in the woods, and remained till midnight. +Then they again marched forward, hoping to be able to surprise the +Spaniards and make their way through before these could assemble +in force. The agreement had been made that signal fires should +be lighted, and that the citizens should sally out to assist the +relieving force as it approached. Unfortunately two pigeons with +letters giving the details of the intended expedition had been +shot while passing over the Spanish camp, and the besiegers were +perfectly aware of what was going to be done. Opposite the point +at which the besieged were to sally out the Spaniards collected +a great mass of green branches, pitch, and straw. Five thousand +troops were stationed behind it, while an overwhelming force was +stationed to attack the relieving army. + +When night fell the pile of combustibles was lighted, and gave out +so dense a smoke that the signal fires lighted by Batenburg were +hidden from the townspeople. As soon as the column advanced from +the wood they were attacked by an overwhelming force of the enemy. +Batenburg was killed and his troops utterly routed, with the loss, +according to the Dutch accounts, of from five to six hundred, but +of many more according to Spanish statements. The besieged, ranged +under arms, heard the sound of the distant conflict, but as they +had seen no signal fires believed that it was only a device of the +Spaniards to tempt them into making a sally, and it was not until +morning, when Don Frederick sent in a prisoner with his nose and +ears cut off to announce the news, that they knew that the last +effort to save them had failed. + +The blow was a terrible one, and there was great commotion in the +town. After consultation the garrison and the able bodied citizens +resolved to issue out in a solid column, and to cut their way +through the enemy or perish. It was thought that if the women, the +helpless, and infirm alone remained in the city they would be treated +with greater mercy after all the fighting men had been slain. But +as soon as this resolution became known the women and children +issued from the houses with loud cries and tears. The burghers were +unable to withstand their entreaties that all should die together, +and it was then resolved that the fighting men should be formed +into a hollow square, in which the women, children, sick, and +aged should be gathered, and so to sally out, and either win a way +through the camp or die together. + +But the news of this resolve reached the ears of Don Frederick. He +knew now what the burghers of Haarlem were capable of, and thought +that they would probably fire the city before they left, and thus +leaving nothing but a heap of ashes as a trophy of his victory. He +therefore sent a letter to the magistrates, in the name of Count +Overstein, commander of the German forces in the besieging army, +giving a solemn assurance that if they surrendered at discretion +no punishment should be inflicted except upon those who, in the +judgment of the citizens themselves, had deserved it. + +At the moment of sending the letter Don Frederick was in possession +of strict orders from his father not to leave a man alive of the +garrison, with the exception of the Germans, and to execute a large +number of the burghers. On the receipt of this letter the city +formally surrendered on the 10th of July. The great bell was tolled, +and orders were issued that all arms should be brought to the town +hall, that the women should assemble in the cathedral and the men +in the cloister of Zyl. Then Don Frederick with his staff rode +into the city. The scene which met their eyes was a terrible one. +Everywhere were ruins of houses which had been set on fire by the +Spanish artillery, the pavement had been torn up to repair the +gaps in the walls, unburied bodies of men and women were scattered +about the streets, while those still alive were mere shadows scarcely +able to maintain their feet. + +No time was lost in commencing the massacre. All the officers were +at once put to death. The garrison had been reduced during the siege +from 4000 to 1800. Of these the Germans -- 600 in number -- were +allowed to depart. The remaining 1200 were immediately butchered, +with at least as many of the citizens. Almost every citizen +distinguished by service, station, or wealth was slaughtered, and +from day to day five executioners were kept constantly at work. +The city was not sacked, the inhabitants agreeing to raise a great +sum of money as a ransom. + +As soon as the surrender was determined upon, Ned helped his cousins +into the refuge prepared for them, passed in the bread and water, +walled up the hole and whitewashed it, his aunt being too weak to +render any assistance. Before they entered he opened the bag and +took out a few crusts. + +"You must eat something now, aunt," he said. "It may be a day or +two before any food is distributed, and it is no use holding on so +long to die of hunger when food is almost in sight. There is plenty +in the bag to last the girls for a week. You must eat sparingly, +girls, -- not because there is not enough food, but because after +fasting so long it is necessary for you at first to take food in +very small quantities." + +The bread taken out was soaked, and it swelled so much in the water +that it made much more than he had expected. He therefore divided +it in half, and a portion made an excellent meal for Ned and his +aunt, the remaining being carefully put by for the following day. + +An hour or two after eating the meal Frau Plomaert felt so +much stronger that she was able to obey the order to go up to the +cathedral. Ned went with the able bodied men to the cloisters. The +Spaniards soon came among them, and dragged off numbers of those +whom they thought most likely to have taken a prominent part in +the fighting, to execution. As they did not wish others from whom +money could be wrung to escape from their hands, they presently +issued some food to the remainder. The women, after remaining for +some hours in the cathedral, were suffered to depart to their homes, +for their starving condition excited the compassion even of the +Spaniards; and the atrocities which had taken place at the sacks +of Mechlin, Zutphen and Naarden, were not repeated in Haarlem. + +The next day the men were also released; not from any ideas of +mercy, but in order that when they returned to their homes the work +of picking out the better class for execution could be the more +easily carried on. For three days longer the girls remained in +their hiding, and were then allowed to come out, as Ned felt now +that the danger of general massacre was averted. + +"Now, Ned," his aunt said, "you must stay here no longer. Every +day we hear proclamations read in the streets that all sheltering +refugees and others not belonging to the town will be punished with +death; and, as you know, every stranger caught has been murdered." + +This they had heard from some of the neighbours. Ned himself had +not stirred out since he returned from the cloisters; for his aunt +had implored him not to do so, as it would only be running useless +risk. + +"I hear," she went on, "that they have searched many houses for +fugitives, and it is probable the hunt may become even more strict; +therefore I think, Ned, that for our sake as well as your own you +had better try to escape." + +"I quite agree with you, aunt. Now that the worst is over, and +I know that you and the girls are safe, no good purpose could be +served by my staying; and being both a stranger and one who has +fought here, I should certainly be killed if they laid hands on me. +As to escaping, I do not think there can be any difficulty about +that. I have often let myself down from the walls, and can do +so again; and although there is a strict watch kept at the gates +to prevent any leaving until the Spaniards' thirst for blood is +satisfied, there can be no longer any vigilant watch kept up by +the troops encamped outside, and I ought certainly to be able to +get through them at night. It will be dark in a couple of hours, +and as soon as it is so I will be off." + +The girls burst into tears at the thought of Ned's departure. +During the seven long months the siege had lasted he had been as +a brother to them -- keeping up their spirits by his cheerfulness, +looking after their safety, and as far as possible after their +comfort, and acting as the adviser and almost as the head of the +house. His aunt was almost equally affected, for she had come to +lean entirely upon him and to regard him as a son. + +"It is best that it should be so, Ned; but we shall all miss you +sorely. It may be that I shall follow your advice and come over to +England on a long visit. Now that I know you so well it will not +seem like going among strangers, as it did before; for although +I met your father and mother whenever they came over to Vordwyk, +I had not got to know them as I know you. I shall talk the matter +over with my father. Of course everything depends upon what is +going to happen in Holland." + +Ned did not tell his aunt that her father had been one of the first +dragged out from the cloisters for execution, and that her sister, +who kept house for him, had died three days previous to the surrender. +His going away was grief enough for her for one day, and he turned +the conversation to other matters until night fell, when, after a +sad parting, he made his way to the walls, having wound round his +waist the rope by which he had been accustomed to lower himself. + +The executions in Haarlem continued for two days after he had left, +and then the five executioners were so weary of slaying that the +three hundred prisoners who still remained for execution were tied +back to back and thrown into the lake. + + + +CHAPTER XV + +NED RECEIVES PROMOTION + + +It was fortunate for Ned that the watch round the city had relaxed +greatly when he started from it. The soldiers were discontented at +the arrangement that had been made for the city to pay an immense +sum of money to escape a general sack. They were all many months in +arrear of their pay. They had suffered during the siege, and they +now considered themselves to be cheated of their fair reward. +The sum paid by the city would go into the hands of the duke; and +although the soldiers were promised a share of the prize money, +the duke's necessities were so great that it was probable little +of the money would find its way into the hands of the troops. + +A sack upon the other hand was looked upon as a glorious lottery. +Every one was sure to gain something. Many would obtain most +valuable prizes of money or jewelry. No sooner, therefore, had +Haarlem surrendered than a mutinous spirit began to show itself +among the troops; they became slack in obeying the orders of their +officers, refused to perform their duties, and either gathered +in bodies to discuss their wrongs or sulked in their tents. Thus +the work of keeping a vigilant watch round the walls by night, to +prevent the escape of the victims selected to satiate the vengeance +of Don Frederick, was greatly relaxed. + +After lowering himself from the walls Ned proceeded with great +caution. On reaching the spot where he expected to meet with +a cordon of sentries, he was surprised at finding everything still +and quiet. Unaware of the state of things in the camp, and suspecting +that some device had perhaps been hit upon with the view of inducing +men to try to escape from the city, he redoubled his precautions, +stopping every few paces to listen for the calls of the sentries, +or a heavy tread, or the clash of arms. All was silent, and he +continued his course until close to the camps of some of the German +regiments. Incredible as it seemed to him, it was now evident that +no sentries had been posted. He saw great fires blazing in the +camps, and a large number of men standing near one of them; they +were being addressed by a soldier standing upon a barrel. + +Keeping in the shadow of the tents, Ned made his way close up to +the group, and the similarity of the German language to the Dutch +enabled him to gather without difficulty the meaning of the speaker's +words. He was recounting to the soldiers the numberless toils and +hardships through which they had passed in the service of Spain, +and the ingratitude with which they were treated. + +"They pretend they have no money!" he exclaimed, "it is not true. +Spain has the wealth of the Indies at her back, and yet she grudges +us our pay for the services we have faithfully rendered her. Why +should we throw away our lives for Spain? What do we care whether +she is mistress of this wretched country or not? Let us resolve, +brethren, to be moved neither by entreaties or threats, but to +remain fast to the oath we and our Spanish comrades have sworn, +that we will neither march a foot nor lift an arm until we have +received our pay; and not only our pay, but our share of the booty +they have stolen from us." + +The shouts of approval that greeted the speech showed that the +speaker's audience was thoroughly in accord with him. Ned waited +to hear no further orations, he understood now the withdrawal of +the sentries. It was another of the mutinies that had so frequently +broken out among the Spanish forces in the Netherlands. Making +his way out through the other side of the camp he proceeded on his +journey. The news was important, for if the mutiny continued it +would give the Prince of Orange time to prepare for the forward +march of the enemy. He passed several other camps, but observed +everywhere the same slackness of discipline and the absence of +military precaution. + +All night he pushed forward without stopping, and as soon as the +gates of Leyden were opened he entered. Upon inquiring he found +that the prince was at Delft, and hiring a horse he at once rode +there. The prince received him with real pleasure. + +"And so you have escaped safe and sound from the siege, Master +Martin? Truly your good fortune is wonderful. I am glad indeed to +see you. Tell me how goes it in Haarlem. Rumours reached me that +there, as at other towns, they have broken their oaths, and are +massacring the whole population." + +"It is not so bad as that, sir," Ned replied. "They have put to +death numbers of the principal citizens and all refugees they could +discover in the city, but there has been no regular sack. The women +have not been ill treated, and although five executioners were kept +busily at work there has been nothing like a general massacre." + +"Thank God for that," the prince said piously. "That has eased my +mind. I feared that the horrors of Zutphen and Naarden had been +re-enacted." + +"I have another piece of good news to give you, sir. As I passed +through their camps, I learned that all the troops, German as +well as Spanish, are in open mutiny, and have sworn that they will +neither march nor fight until they receive all arrears of pay." + +"That is good news indeed!" the prince exclaimed. "It will give us +breathing time, of which we are sadly in need. Were the Spaniards +to march forward now, they could sweep over Holland, for I could +not put a thousand men in the field to withstand them. And now, +Master Martin, what shall I do for you? You have received as yet +no reward whatever for the great service you rendered us by the +successful carrying out of your mission to Brussels, to say nothing +of the part you have borne in the defence of Haarlem. I know that +you joined us from pure love of our cause and hatred of Spanish +tyranny, still that is no reason why I should not recognize your +services. If you would like it, I would gladly appoint you to the +command of a company of volunteers." + +"I thank you greatly, your highness," replied Ned; "but I am far +too young to command men, and pray that you will allow me to remain +near your person, and to perform such service as you may think me +capable of." + +"If that be your wish, it shall be so for the present," the prince +replied; "and it is pleasant to me in these days, when almost +every noble in the Netherlands puts a price on his services, and +when even the cities bargain for every crown piece they advance, to +find one who wants nothing. But now you need rest. When I am more +at leisure you shall furnish me with further details of what took +place inside Haarlem during the siege." + +The long defence of Haarlem, the enormous expenditure which it had +cost, both in money and life, for no less than 10,000 soldiers had +fallen in the assault or by disease, induced Alva to make another +attempt to win back the people of Holland, and three days after +Ned's return a proclamation was sent to every town. + +He adopted an affectionate tone: "Ye are well aware," began the +address, "that the king has over and over again manifested his +willingness to receive his children, in however forlorn a condition +the prodigals might return. His majesty assures you once more that +your sins, however black they may have been, shall be forgiven and +forgotten in the plentitude of royal kindness, if you will repent +and return in season to his majesty's embrace. Notwithstanding +your manifold crimes, his majesty still seeks, like a hen calling +her chickens, to gather you all under the parental wing." + +This portion of the document, which was by the order of the +magistrates affixed to the doors of the town halls, was received +with shouts of laughter by the citizens, and many were the jokes +as to the royal hen and the return of the prodigals. The conclusion +of the document afforded a little further insight into the affectionate +disposition of the royal bird. "If," continued the proclamation, +"ye disregard these offers of mercy, and receive them with closed +ears as heretofore, then we warn you that there is no rigour +or cruelty, however great, which you are not to expect, by laying +waste, starvation, and the sword. In such manner that nowhere shall +remain a relic of that which at present exists, but his majesty +will strip bare and utterly depopulate the land, and cause it to be +inhabited again by strangers, since otherwise his majesty would not +believe that the will of God and of his majesty had been accomplished." + +This proclamation produced no effect whatever; for the people of +Holland were well aware that Philip of Spain would never grant that +religious toleration for which they were fighting, and they knew +also that no reliance whatever could be placed in Spanish promises +or oaths. For a month Alva was occupied in persuading the troops +to return to their duty, and at last managed to raise a sufficient +sum of money to pay each man a portion of the arrears due to him, +and a few crowns on account of his share of the ransom paid by Haarlem. +During this breathing time the Prince of Orange was indefatigable +in his endeavours to raise a force capable of undertaking the relief +of such towns as the Spanish might invest. + +This, however, he found well nigh impossible. The cities were +all ready to defend themselves, but in spite of the danger that +threatened they were chary in the extreme in contributing money for +the common cause, nor would the people enlist for service in the +field. Nothing had occurred to shake the belief in the invincibility +of the Spanish soldiery in fair fight in the open, and the disasters +which had befallen the bodies of volunteers who had endeavoured to +relieve Haarlem, effectually deterred others from following their +example. The prince's only hope, therefore, of being able to put +a force into the field, rested upon his brother Louis, who was +raising an army of mercenaries in Germany. + +He had little assurance, however, that relief would come from this +quarter, as the two armies he had himself raised in Germany had +effected absolutely nothing. His efforts to raise a fleet were +more successful. The hardy mariners of Zeeland were ready to fight +on their own element, and asked nothing better than to meet the +Spaniards at sea. Nevertheless the money had to be raised for the +purchase of vessels, stores, artillery, and ammunition. Ned was +frequently despatched by the prince with letters to magistrates +of the chief towns, to nobles and men of influence, and always +performed his duties greatly to the prince's satisfaction. + +As soon as the Duke of Alva had satisfied the troops, preparations +began for a renewal of hostilities, and the prince soon learnt that +it was intended that Don Frederick should invade Northern Holland +with 16,000 men, and that the rest of the army, which had lately +received further reinforcements, should lay siege to Leyden. The +prince felt confident that Leyden could resist for a time, but he +was very anxious as to the position of things in North Holland. In +the courage and ability of Sonoy, the Lieutenant Governor of North +Holland, the prince had entire confidence; but it was evident by +the tone of his letters that he had lost all hope of being able +to defend the province, and altogether despaired of the success +of their cause. He had written in desponding tones at the utterly +insufficient means at his disposal for meeting the storm that was +about to burst upon the province, and had urged that unless the +prince had a good prospect of help, either from France or England, +it was better to give up the struggle, than to bring utter destruction +upon the whole people. + +The letter in which the prince answered him has been preserved, and +well illustrates the lofty tones of his communications in this +crisis of the fate of Holland. He reprimanded with gentle but earnest +eloquence the despondency and want of faith of his lieutenant and +other adherents. He had not expected, he said, that they would have +so soon forgotten their manly courage. They seemed to consider the +whole fate of the country attached to the city of Haarlem. He took +God to witness that he had spared no pains, and would willingly +have spared no drop of his blood to save that devoted city. + +"But as, notwithstanding our efforts," he continued, "it has pleased +God Almighty to dispose of Haarlem according to His divine will, +shall we, therefore, deny and deride His holy word? Has His church, +therefore, come to nought? You ask if I have entered into a firm +treaty with any great king or potentate, to which I answer that +before I ever took up the cause of the oppressed Christians in +these provinces I had entered into a close alliance with the King +of kings; and I am firmly convinced that all who put their trust +in Him shall be saved by His Almighty hand. The God of armies will +raise up armies for us to do battle with our enemies and His own." + +In conclusion he detailed his preparations for attacking the +enemy by sea as well as by land, and encouraged his lieutenant and +the population of the northern province to maintain a bold front +before the advancing foe. That Sonoy would do his best the prince +was sure; but he knew how difficult it is for one who himself +regards resistance as hopeless to inspire enthusiasm in others, +and he determined to send a message to cheer the people of North +Holland, and urge them to resist to the last, and to intrust it to +one who could speak personally as to the efforts that were being +made for their assistance, and who was animated by a real enthusiasm +in the cause. + +It was an important mission; but after considering the various +persons of his household, he decided to intrust it to the lad who +had showed such courage and discretion in his dangerous mission +to Brussels. A keen observer of character, the prince felt that he +could trust the young fellow absolutely to do his best at whatever +risk to himself. He had believed when he first joined him that Ned +was some eighteen years of age, and the year that had since elapsed +with its dangers and responsibilities had added two or three years +to his appearance. + +It was the fashion in Holland to entirely shave the face, and Ned's +smooth cheeks were therefore no sign of youth. Standing over the +average height of the natives of Holland, with broad shoulders and +well set figure, he might readily pass as a man of three or four +and twenty. The prince accordingly sent for the lad. + +"I have another mission for you, Master Martin; and again a dangerous +one. The Spaniards are on the point of marching to lay siege to +Alkmaar, and I wish a message carried to the citizens, assuring them +that they may rely absolutely upon my relieving them by breaking +down the dykes. I wish you on this occasion to be more than a +messenger. In these despatches I have spoken of you as one, Captain +Martin, who possesses my fullest confidence. You would as you say +be young to be a captain of a company of fighting men, but as an +officer attached to my household you can bear that rank as well as +another. + +"It will be useful, and will add to your influence and authority, +and I have therefore appointed you to the grade of captain, of +which by your conduct you have proved yourself to be worthy. Your +mission is to encourage the inhabitants to resist to the last, to +rouse them to enthusiasm if you can, to give them my solemn promise +that they shall not be deserted, and to assure them that if I cannot +raise a force sufficient to relieve them I will myself come round +and superintend the operation of cutting the dykes and laying the +whole country under water. I do not know whether you will find the +lieutenant governor in the city, but at any rate he will not remain +there during the siege, as he has work outside. But I shall give +you a letter recommending you to him, and ask him to give you his +warmest support." + +The prince then took off the gold chain he wore round his neck, and +placed it upon Ned. "I give you this in the first place, Captain +Martin, in token of my esteem and of my gratitude for the perilous +service you have already rendered; and secondly, as a visible mark +of my confidence in you, and as a sign that I have intrusted you +with authority to speak for me. Going as you now do, it will be +best for you to assume somewhat more courtly garments in order to +do credit to your mission. I have given orders that these shall +be prepared for you, and that you shall be provided with a suit +of armour, such as a young noble would wear. All will be prepared +for you this afternoon. At six o'clock a ship will be in readiness +to sail, and this will land you on the coast at the nearest point +to Alkmaar. Should any further point occur to you before evening, +speak to me freely about it." + +Ned retired depressed rather than elated at the confidence the +prince reposed in him, and at the rank and dignity he had bestowed +upon him. He questioned, too, whether he had not done wrong in not +stating at once when the prince had, on his first joining him, set +down his age at over eighteen, that he was two years under that +age, and he hesitated whether he ought not even now to go to him +and state the truth. He would have done so had he not known how +great were the labours of the prince, and how incessantly he was +occupied, and so feared to upset his plans and cause him fresh +trouble. + +"Anyhow," he said to himself at last, "I will do my best; and I could +do no more if I were nineteen instead of seventeen. The prince has +chosen me for this business, not because of my age, but because he +thought I could carry it out; and carry it out I will, if it be in +my power." + +In the afternoon a clothier arrived with several suits of handsome +material and make, out of sober colours, such as a young man of +good family would wear, and an armourer brought him a morion and +breast and back pieces of steel, handsomely inlaid with gold. When +he was alone he attired himself in the quietest of his new suits, +and looking at himself in the mirror burst into a fit of hearty +laughter. + +"What in the world would my father and mother and the girls say +were they to see me pranked out in such attire as this? They would +scarce know me, and I shall scarce know myself for some time. +However, I think I shall be able to play my part as the prince's +representative better in these than I should have done in the dress +I started in last time, or in that I wore on board the Good Venture." + +At five o'clock Ned paid another visit to the prince, and thanked +him heartily for his kindness towards him, and then received a few +last instructions. On his return to his room he found a corporal +and four soldiers at the door. The former saluted. + +"We have orders, Captain Martin, to place ourselves under your +command for detached duty. Our kits are already on board the ship; +the men will carry down your mails if they are packed." + +"I only take that trunk with me," Ned said, pointing to the one +that contained his new clothes; "and there is besides my armour, +and that brace of pistols." + +Followed by the corporal and men, Ned now made his way down to +the port, where the captain of the little vessel received him with +profound respect. As soon as they were on board the sails were +hoisted, and the vessel ran down the channel from Delft through the +Hague to the sea. On the following morning they anchored soon after +daybreak. A boat was lowered, and Ned and the soldiers landed on the +sandy shore. Followed by them he made his way over the high range +of sand hills facing the sea, and then across the low cultivated +country extending to Alkmaar. He saw parties of men and women +hurrying northward along the causeways laden with goods, and leading +in most instances horses or donkeys, staggering under the weights +placed upon them. + +"I think we are but just in time, corporal. The population of the +villages are evidently fleeing before the advance of the Spaniards. +Another day and we should have been too late to get into the town." + +Alkmaar had been in sight from the time they had crossed the dunes, +and after walking five miles they arrived at its gates. + +"Is the lieutenant governor in the town?" Ned asked one of the +citizens. + +"Yes, he is still here," the man said. "You will find him at the +town hall." + +There was much excitement in the streets. Armed burghers were standing +in groups, women were looking anxiously from doors and casements; +but Ned was surprised to see no soldiers about, although he knew +that the eight hundred whom the prince had despatched as a garrison +must have arrived there some days before. On arriving at the town +hall he found the general seated at table. In front of him were a +group of elderly men whom he supposed to be the leading citizens, +and it was evident by the raised voices and angry looks, both of +the old officer and of the citizens, that there was some serious +difference of opinion between them. + +"Whom have we here?" Sonoy asked as Ned approached the table. + +"I am a messenger, sir, from the prince. I bear these despatches +to yourself, and have also letters and messages from him to the +citizens of Alkmaar." + +"You come at a good season," the governor said shortly, taking the +despatches, "and if anything you can say will soften the obstinacy +of these good people here, you will do them and me a service." + +There was silence for a few minutes as the governor read the letter +Ned had brought him. + +"My good friends," he said at last to the citizens, "this is Captain +Martin, an officer whom the prince tells me stands high in his +confidence. He bore part in the siege of Haarlem, and has otherwise +done great service to the state; the prince commends him most +highly to me and to you. He has sent him here in the first place +to assure you fully of the prince's intentions on your behalf. He +will especially represent the prince during the siege, and from his +knowledge of the methods of defence at Haarlem, of the arrangements +for portioning out the food and other matters, he will be able +to give you valuable advice and assistance. As you are aware, I +ride in an hour to Enkhuizen in order to superintend the general +arrangement for the defence of the province, and especially for +affording you aid, and I am glad to leave behind me an officer who +is so completely in the confidence of the prince. He will first +deliver the messages with which he is charged to you, and then we +will hear what he says as to this matter which is in dispute between +us." + +The passage of Ned with his escort through the street had attracted +much attention, and the citizens had followed him into the hall in +considerable numbers to hear the message of which he was no doubt +the bearer. Ned took his place by the side of the old officer, +and facing the crowd began to speak. At other times he would have +been diffident in addressing a crowded audience, but he felt that +he must justify the confidence imposed on him, and knowing the +preparations that were being made by the prince, and his intense +anxiety that Alkmaar should resist to the end, he began without +hesitation, and speedily forgot himself in the importance of the +subject. + +"Citizens of Alkmaar," he began, "the prince has sent me specially +to tell you what there is in his mind concerning you, and how his +thoughts, night and day, have been turned towards your city. Not +only the prince, but all Holland are turning their eyes towards +you, and none doubt that you will show yourselves as worthy, as +faithful, and as steadfast as have the citizens of Haarlem. You +fight not for glory, but for your liberty, for your religion, for +the honour and the lives of those dear to you; and yet your glory +and your honour will be great indeed if this little city of yours +should prove the bulwark of Holland, and should beat back from its +walls the power of Spain. The prince bids me tell you that he is +doing all he can to collect an army and a fleet. + +"In the latter respect he is succeeding well. The hardy seamen of +Holland and Zeeland are gathering round him, have sworn that they +will clear the Zuider Zee of the Spaniards or die in the attempt. +As to the army, it is, as you know, next to impossible to gather +one capable of coping with the host of Spain in the field; but +happily you need not rely solely upon an army to save you in your +need. Here you have an advantage over your brethren of Haarlem. +There it was impossible to flood the land round the city; and the +dykes by which the food supply of the Spaniards could have been +cut off were too strongly guarded to be won, even when your noble +governor himself led his forces against them. + +"But it is not so here. The dykes are far away, and the Spaniards +cannot protect them. Grievous as it is to the prince to contemplate +the destruction of the rich country your fathers have won from the +sea, he bids me tell you that he will not hesitate; but that, as +a last resource, he pledges himself that he will lay the country +under water and drown out the Spaniards to save you. They have +sworn, as you know, to turn Holland into a desert -- to leave none +alive in her cities and villages. Well, then; better a thousand +times that we should return it to the ocean from which we won it, +and that then, having cast out the Spaniards, we should renew the +labours of our fathers, and again recover it from the sea." + +A shout of applause rang through the hall. + +"But this," Ned went on, "is the last resource, and will not be +taken until nought else can be done to save you. It is for you, +first, to show the Spaniards how the men of Holland can fight for +their freedom, their religion, their families, and their homes. +Then, when you have done all that men can do, the prince will prove +to the Spaniards that the men of Holland will lay their country +under water rather than surrender." + +"Does this prince solemnly bind himself to do this?" one of the +elder burghers asked. + +"He does; and here is his promise in black and white, with his seal +attached." + +"We will retire, and let you have our answer in half an hour." + +Ned glanced at the governor, who shook his head slightly. + +"What! is there need of deliberation?" Ned asked in a voice that +was heard all over the hall. "To you, citizens at large, I appeal. +Of what use is it now to deliberate? Have you not already sent a +defiant answer to Alva? Are not his troops within a day's march of +you? Think you that, even if you turn traitors to your country and +to your prince, and throw open the gates, it would save you now? +Did submission save Naarden? How many of you, think you, would +survive the sack? and for those who did so, what would life be worth? +They would live an object of reproach and scoffing among all true +Hollanders, as the men of the city who threatened what they dared +not perform, who were bold while Alva was four days' march away, +but who cowered like children when they saw the standards of Spain +approaching their walls. I appeal to you, is this a time to hesitate +or discuss? I ask you now, in the name of the prince, are you true +men or false? Are you for Orange or Alva? What is your answer?" + +A tremendous shout shook the hall. + +"We will fight to the death! No surrender! Down with the council!" +and there were loud and threatening shouts against some of the +magistrates. The governor now rose: + +"My friends," he said, "I rejoice to hear your decision; and now +there is no time for idle talk. Throw open the gates, and call +in the troops whom the prince has sent to your aid, and whom your +magistrates have hitherto refused to admit. Choose from among +yourselves six men upon whom you can rely to confer with me and +with the officer commanding the troops. Choose good and worshipful +men, zealous in the cause. I will see before I leave today that your +magistracy is strengthened. You need now men of heart and action +at your head. Captain Martin, who has been through the siege of +Haarlem, will deliberate with twelve citizens whom I will select +as to the steps to be taken for gathering the food into magazines +for the public use, for issuing daily rations, for organizing the +women as well as the men for such work as they are fit. There is +much to be done, and but little time to do it, for tomorrow the +Spaniard will be in front of your walls." + +In an hour's time the 800 troops marched in from Egmont Castle and +Egmont Abbey, where they had been quartered while the citizens were +wavering between resistance and submission. Four of the citizens, +who had already been told off for the purpose, met them at the +gate and allotted them quarters in the various houses. Governor +Sonoy was already in deliberation with the six men chosen by the +townspeople to represent them. He had at once removed from the +magistracy an equal number of those who had been the chief opponents +of resistance; for here, as in other towns, the magistrates had +been appointed by the Spaniards. + +Ned was busy conferring with the committee, and explaining to them +the organization adopted at Haarlem. He pointed out that it was a +first necessity that all the men capable of bearing arms should be +divided into companies of fifty, each of which should select its +own captain and lieutenant; that the names of the women should be +inscribed, with their ages, that the active and able bodied should +be divided into companies for carrying materials to the walls, +and aiding in the defence when a breach was attacked; and that the +old and feeble should be made useful in the hospitals and for such +other work as their powers admitted. All children were to join the +companies to which their mothers belonged, and to help as far as +they could in their work. Having set these matters in train, Ned +rejoined the governor. + +"I congratulate you, Captain Martin, upon the service you have +rendered today. Your youth and enthusiasm have succeeded where my +experience failed. You believe in the possibility of success, and +thus your words had a ring and fervour which were wanting in mine, +fearing as I do, that the cause is a lost one. I wondered much when +you first presented yourself that the prince should have given his +confidence to one so young. I wonder no longer. The prince never +makes a mistake in his instruments, and he has chosen well this +time. + +"I leave the city tonight, and shall write to the prince from +Enkhuizen telling him how you have brought the citizens round +to a sense of their duty; and that whereas, at the moment of your +arrival I believed the magistrates would throw open the gates +tomorrow, I am now convinced the city will resist till the last. +In military matters the officer in command of the troops will of +course take the direction of things; but in all other matters you, +as the prince's special representative, will act as adviser of the +burghers. I wish I could stay here and share in the perils of the +siege. It would be far more suitable to my disposition than arguing +with pig headed burghers, and trying to excite their enthusiasm +when my own hopes have all but vanished." + +The officer commanding the garrison now entered, and the governor +introduced Ned to him. + +"You will find in Captain Martin, one who is in the prince's +confidence, and has been sent here as his special representative, +an able coadjutor. He will organize the citizens as they were +organized at Haarlem; and while you are defending the walls he will +see that all goes on in good order in the town, that there is no +undue waste in provisions, that the breaches are repaired as fast +as made, that the sick and wounded are well cared for, and that +the spirits of the townspeople are maintained." + +"That will indeed be an assistance," the officer said courteously. +"These details are as necessary as the work of fighting; and it is +impossible for one man to attend to them and to see to his military +work." + +"I shall look to you, sir, for your aid and assistance," Ned said +modestly. "The prince is pleased to have a good opinion of me; but +I am young, and shall find the responsibility a very heavy one, and +can only hope to maintain my authority by the aid of your assistance." + +"I think not that you will require much aid, Captain Martin," the +governor said. "I marked you when you were speaking, and doubt not +that your spirit will carry you through all difficulties." That +night was a busy one in Alkmaar. Few thought of sleeping, and +before morning the lists were all prepared, the companies mustered, +officers chosen, posts on the walls assigned to them, and every +man, woman, and child in Alkmaar knew the nature of the duties they +would be called upon to perform. Just before midnight the governor +left. + +"Farewell, young man," he said to Ned; "I trust that we may meet +again. Now that I have got rid of the black sheep among the magistracy +I feel more hopeful as to the success of the defence." + +"But may I ask, sir, why you did not dismiss them before?" + +"Ah! you hardly know the burghers of these towns," Sonoy said, +shaking his head. "They stand upon their rights and privileges, and +if you touch their civic officers they are like a swarm of angry +bees. Governor of North Holland as I am, I could not have interfered +with the magistracy even of this little town. It was only because +at the moment the people were roused to enthusiasm, and because they +regarded you as the special representative of the prince, that I +was able to do so. Now that the act is done they are well content +with the change, especially as I have appointed the men they themselves +chose to the vacant places. It was the same thing at Enkhuizen -- +I could do nothing; and it was only when Sainte Aldegonde came with +authority from the prince himself that we were able to get rid of +Alva's creatures. Well, I must ride away. The Spaniards are encamped +about six miles away, and you may expect to see them soon after +daybreak." + +It was indeed early in the morning that masses of smoke were seen +rising from the village of Egmont, telling the citizens of Alkmaar +that the troopers of Don Frederick had arrived. Alkmaar was but a +small town, and when every man capable of bearing arms was mustered +they numbered only about 1300, besides the 800 soldiers. It was on +the 21st of August that Don Frederick with 16,000 veteran troops +appeared before the walls of the town, and at once proceeded to +invest it, and accomplished this so thoroughly that Alva wrote, +"It is impossible for a sparrow to enter or go out of the city." +There was no doubt what the fate of the inhabitants would be if +the city were captured. The duke was furious that what he considered +his extraordinary clemency in having executed only some 2400 +persons at the surrender of Haarlem should not have been met with +the gratitude it deserved. + +"If I take Alkmaar," he wrote to the king, "I am resolved not to +leave a single person alive; the knife shall be put to every throat. +Since the example of Haarlem has proved to be of no use, perhaps +an example of cruelty will bring the other cities to their senses." + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +FRIENDS IN TROUBLE + + +Within the little town of Alkmaar all went on quietly. While the +Spaniards constructed their lines of investment and mounted their +batteries, the men laboured continually at strengthening their +walls, the women and children carried materials, all the food was +collected in magazines, and rations served out regularly. A carpenter +named Peter Van der Mey managed to make his way out of the city +a fortnight after the investment began with letters to the Prince +and Sonoy, giving the formal consent of all within the walls for +the cutting of the dykes when it should be necessary; for, according +to the laws of Holland, a step that would lead to so enormous a +destruction of property could not be undertaken, even in the most +urgent circumstances, without the consent of the population. + +At daybreak on the 18th of September a heavy cannonade was opened +against the walls, and after twelve hours' fire two breaches were +made. Upon the following morning two of the best Spanish regiments +which had just arrived from Italy led the way to the assault, shouting +and cheering as they went, and confident of an easy victory. They +were followed by heavy masses of troops. + +Now Ned was again to see what the slow and somewhat apathetic Dutch +burghers could do when fairly roused to action. Every man capable +of bearing a weapon was upon the walls, and not even in Haarlem was +an attack received with more coolness and confidence. As the storming +parties approached they were swept by artillery and musketry, and +as they attempted to climb the breaches, boiling water, pitch and +oil, molten lead and unslaked lime were poured upon them. Hundreds of +tarred and blazing hoops were skilfully thrown on to their necks, +and those who in spite of these terrible missiles mounted the +breach, found themselves confronted by the soldiers and burghers, +armed with axe and pike, and were slain or cast back again. + +Three times was the assault renewed, fresh troops being ever +brought up and pressing forward, wild with rage at their repulses +by so small a number of defenders. But each was in turn hurled +back. For four hours the desperate fight continued. The women and +children showed a calmness equal to that of the men, moving backwards +and forwards between the magazines and the ramparts with supplies +of missiles and ammunition to the combatants. At nightfall the +Spaniards desisted from the attack and fell back to their camp, +leaving a thousand dead behind them; while only twenty-four of the +garrison and thirteen of the burghers lost their lives. + +A Spanish officer who had mounted the breach for an instant, and, +after being hurled back, almost miraculously escaped with his life, +reported that he had seen neither helmet nor harness as he looked +down into the city -- only some plain looking people, generally +dressed like fishermen. The cannonade was renewed on the following +morning, and after 700 shots had been fired and the breaches enlarged, +a fresh assault was ordered. But the troops absolutely refused to +advance. It seemed to them that the devil, whom they believed the +Protestants worshipped, had protected the city, otherwise how could +a handful of townsmen and fishermen have defeated the invincible +soldiers of Spain, outnumbering them eight fold. + +In vain Don Frederick and his generals entreated and stormed. +Several of the soldiers were run through the body, but even this +did not intimidate the rest into submission, and the assault was +in consequence postponed. Already, indeed, there was considerable +uneasiness in the Spanish camp. Governor Sonoy had opened many +of the dykes, and the ground in the neighbourhood of the camp was +already feeling soft and boggy. It needed but that two great dykes +should be pierced to spread inundation over the whole country. The +carpenter who had soon after the commencement of the siege carried +out the despatches had again made his way back. He was the bearer +of the copy of a letter sent from the prince to Sonoy, ordering +him to protect the dykes and sluices with strong guards, lest the +peasants, in order to save their crops, should repair the breaches. +He was directed to flood the whole country at all risks rather +than to allow Alkmaar to fall. The prince directed the citizens to +kindle four great beacon fires as soon as it should prove necessary +to resort to extreme measures, and solemnly promised that as soon +as the signal was given an inundation should be created which would +sweep the whole Spanish army into the sea. + +The carpenter was informed of the exact contents of his despatches, +so that in case of losing them in his passage through the Spanish +camp he could repeat them by word of mouth to the citizens. This +was exactly what happened. The despatches were concealed in a hollow +stick, and this stick the carpenter, in carrying out his perilous +undertaking, lost. As it turned out it was fortunate that he did +so. The stick was picked up in the camp and discovered to be hollow. +It was carried to Don Frederick, who read the despatches, and at +once called his officers together. + +Alarmed at the prospect before them, and already heartily sick of +the siege in which the honour all fell to their opponents, they +agreed that the safety of any army of the picked troops of Spain +must not be sacrificed merely with the hope of obtaining possession +of an insignificant town. Orders were therefore given for an +immediate retreat, and on the 8th of October the siege was raised +and the troops marched back to Amsterdam. + +Thus for the first time the Spaniards had to recoil before their +puny adversaries. The terrible loss of life entailed by the capture +of Haarlem had struck a profound blow at the haughty confidence +of the Spaniards, and had vastly encouraged the people of Holland. +The successful defence of Alkmaar did even more. It showed the +people that resistance did not necessarily lead to calamity, that +the risk was greater in surrender than in defiance, and, above +all, that in their dykes they possessed means of defence that, if +properly used, would fight for them even more effectually than they +could do for themselves. + +Ned had taken his full share in the labours and dangers of the +siege. He had been indefatigable in seeing that all the arrangements +worked well and smoothly, had slept on the walls with the men, +encouraged the women, talked and laughed with the children, and +done all in his power to keep up the spirits of the inhabitants. +At the assault on the breaches he had donned his armour and fought +in the front line as a volunteer under the officer in command of +the garrison. + +On the day when the Spaniards were seen to be breaking up their +camps and retiring, a meeting held in the town hall, after a solemn +thanksgiving had been offered in the church, and by acclamation +Ned was made a citizen of the town, and was presented with a gold +chain as a token of the gratitude of the people of Alkmaar. There +was nothing more for him to do here, and as soon as the Spaniards +had broken up their camp he mounted a horse and rode to Enkhuizen, +bidding his escort follow him at once on foot. + +He had learned from the carpenter who had made his way in, that the +fleet was collected, and that a portion of them from the northern +ports under Admiral Dirkzoon had already set sail, and the whole +were expected to arrive in a few days in the Zuider Zee. As he rode +through the street on his way to the burgomaster's his eye fell +upon a familiar face, and he at once reined in his horse. + +"Ah! Peters," he exclaimed, "is it you? Is the Good Venture in +port?" + +Peters looked up in astonishment. The voice was that of Ned Martin, +but he scarce recognized in the handsomely dressed young officer +the lad he had last seen a year before. + +"Why, it is Master Ned, sure enough!" he exclaimed, shaking the +lad's hand warmly. "Though if you had not spoken I should have +assuredly passed you. Why, lad, you are transformed. I took you +for a young noble with your brave attire and your gold chain; and +you look years older than when I last saw you. You have grown into +a man; but though you have added to your height and your breadth +your cheeks have fallen in greatly, and your colour has well nigh +faded away." + +"I have had two long bouts of fasting, Peters, and have but just +finished the second. I am Captain Martin now, by the favour of the +Prince of Orange. How are they at home? and how goes it with my +father?" + +"He is on board, Master Ned. This is his first voyage, and right +glad we are, as you may guess, to have him back again; and joyful +will he be to see you. He had your letter safely that you wrote +after the fall of Haarlem, and it would have done you good if you +had heard the cheers in the summer house when he read it out to +the captains there. We had scarce thought we should ever hear of +you again." + +"I will put up my horse at the burgomaster's, Peters, and come on +board with you at once. I must speak to him first for a few minutes. +A messenger was sent off on horseback last night the moment the +road was opened to say that the Spaniards had raised the siege of +Alkmaar; but I must give him a few details." + +"So you have been there too? The guns have been firing and the +bells ringing all the day, and the people have been well nigh out +of their minds with joy. They had looked to the Spaniards coming +here after they had finished with Alkmaar, and you may guess how +joyful they were when the news came that the villains were going +off beaten." + +A quarter of an hour later Ned leapt from the quay on to the deck +of the Good Venture. His father's delight was great as he entered +the cabin, and he was no less astonished than Peters had been at +the change that a year had made in his appearance. + +"Why, Ned," he said, after they had talked for half an hour, "I fear +you are getting much too great a man ever to settle down again to +work here." + +"Not at all, father," Ned laughed. "I have not the least idea +of remaining permanently here. I love the sea, and I love England +and my home, and nothing would tempt me to give them up. I cannot +leave my present work now. The prince has been so kind to me that +even if I wished it I could not withdraw from his service now. But +I do not wish. In another year, if all the Dutch cities prove as +staunch as Haarlem and Alkmaar have done, the Spaniards will surely +begin to see that their task of subduing such a people is a hopeless +one. At any rate I think that I can then very well withdraw myself +from the work and follow my profession again. I shall be old enough +then to be your second mate, and to relieve you of much of your +work." + +"I shall be glad to have you with me," Captain Martin said. "Of +course I still have the supercargo, but that is not like going +ashore and seeing people one's self. However, we can go on as we +are for a bit. You have been striking a blow for freedom, lad, I +mean to do my best to strike one tomorrow or next day." + +"How is that, father?" + +"Bossu's fleet of thirty vessels are cruising off the town, and +they have already had some skirmishes with Dirkzoon's vessels; +but nothing much has come of it yet. The Spaniards, although their +ships are much larger and heavily armed, and more numerous too than +ours, do not seem to have any fancy for coming to close quarters; +but there is sure to be a fight in a few days. There is a vessel +in port which will go out crowded with the fishermen here to take +part in the fight; and I am going to fly the Dutch flag for once +instead of the English, and am going to strike a blow to pay them +off for the murder of your mother's relations, to say nothing of +this," and he touched his wooden leg. "There are plenty of men here +ready and willing to go, and I have taken down the names of eighty +who will sail with us; so we shall have a strong crew, and shall +be able to give good account of ourselves." + +"Can I go with you, father?" Ned asked eagerly. + +"If you like, lad. It will be tough work, you know; for the Spaniards +fight well, that cannot be denied. But as you stood against them +when they have been five to one in the breaches of Haarlem and +Alkmaar, to say nothing of our skirmish with them, you will find +it a novelty to meet them when the odds are not altogether against +us." + +The next day, the 11th of October, the patriot fleet were seen +bearing down with a strong easterly breeze upon the Spaniards, who +were cruising between Enkuizen and Horn. All was ready on board +the Good Venture and her consort. The bells rang, and a swarm of +hardy fishermen came pouring on board. In five minutes the sails +were hoisted, and the two vessels, flying the Dutch flag, started +amidst the cheers of the burghers on the walls to take their share +in the engagement. They came up with the enemy just as Dirkzoon's +vessels engaged them, and at once joined in the fray. + +The patriot fleet now numbered twenty-five vessels against the thirty +Spaniards, most of which were greatly superior in size to their +opponents. The Dutch at once maneuvered to come to close quarters, +and the Spaniards, who had far less confidence in themselves by +sea than on land, very speedily began to draw out of the fight. +The Good Venture and a Dutch craft had laid themselves alongside +a large Spanish ship, and boarded her from both sides. Ned and +Peters, followed by the English sailors, clambered on board near +the stern, while the Dutch fishermen, most of whom were armed with +heavy axes, boarded at the waist. + +The Spaniards fought but feebly, and no sooner did the men from +the craft on the other side pour in and board her than they threw +down their arms. Four other ships were taken, and the rest of the +Spanish vessels spread their sails and made for Amsterdam, hotly +pursued by the Dutch fleet. One huge Spanish vessel alone, the +Inquisition, a name that was in itself an insult to the Dutch, +and which was by far the largest and best manned vessel in the two +fleets, disdained to fly. She was the admiral's vessel, and Bossu, +who was himself a native of the Netherlands, although deserted by +his fleet, refused to fly before his puny opponents. + +The Spaniards in the ships captured had all been killed or fastened +below, and under charge of small parties of the Dutch sailors the +prizes sailed for Enkhuizen. The ship captured by the Good Venture +had been the last to strike her flag, and when she started under +her prize crew there were three smaller Dutch ships besides the Good +Venture on the scene of the late conflict. With a cheer, answered +from boat to boat, the four vessels sailed towards the Inquisition. +A well directed broadside from the Spaniards cut away the masts +out of one of them, and left her in a sinking condition. The other +three got alongside and grappled with her. + +So high did she tower above them that her cannon were of no avail +to her now, and locked closely together the sailors and soldiers +fought as if on land. + +It was a life and death contest. Bossu and his men, clad in coats +of mail, stood with sword and shield on the deck of the Inquisition +to repel all attempts to board. The Dutch attacked with their +favourite missiles -- pitched hoops, boiling oil, and molten lead. +Again and again they clambered up the lofty sides of the Inquisition +and gained a momentary footing on her deck, only to be hurled down +again into their ships below. The fight began at three o'clock +in the afternoon and lasted till darkness. But even this did not +terminate it; and all night Spaniards and Dutchmen grappled in +deadly conflict. All this time the vessels were drifting as the +winds and tide took them, and at last grounded on a shoal called +The Neck, near Wydeness. Just as morning was breaking John Haring +of Horn -- the man who had kept a thousand at bay on the Diemar +Dyke, and who now commanded one of the vessels -- gained a footing +on the deck of the Inquisition unnoticed by the Spaniards, and +hauled down her colours; but a moment later he fell dead, shot +through the body. As soon as it was light the country people came +off in boats and joined in the fight, relieving their compatriots +by carrying their killed and wounded on shore. They brought fresh +ammunition as well as men, and at eleven o'clock Admiral Bossu, +seeing that further resistance was useless, and that his ship was +aground on a hostile shore, his fleet dispersed and three-quarters +of his soldiers and crew dead or disabled, struck his flag and +surrendered with 300 prisoners. + +He was landed at Horn, and his captors had great difficulty in +preventing him from being torn to pieces by the populace in return +for the treacherous massacre at Rotterdam, of which he had been +the author. + +During the long fight Ned Martin behaved with great bravery. Again +and again he and Peters had led the boarders, and it was only his +morion and breast piece that had saved him many times from death. +He had been wounded several times, and was so breathless and hurt +by his falls from the deck that at the end he could no longer even +attempt to climb the sides of the Spanish vessel. Captain Martin +was able to take no part in the melee. He had at the beginning of +the fight taken up his post on the taffrail, and, seated there, had +kept up a steady fire with a musket against the Spaniards as they +showed themselves above. + +As soon as the fight was over the Good Venture sailed back to +Enkhuizen. Five of her own crew and thirty-eight of the volunteers +on board her had been killed, and there was scarcely a man who was +not more or less severely wounded. The English were received with +tremendous acclamation by the citizens on their arrival in port, +and a vote of thanks was passed to them at a meeting of the burghers +in the town hall. + +Ned sailed round in the Good Venture to Delft and again joined the +Prince of Orange there, and was greatly commended for his conduct +at Alkmaar, which had been reported upon in the most favourable +terms by Sonoy. On learning the share that the Good Venture had +taken in the sea fight, the prince went on board and warmly thanked +Captain Martin and the crew, and distributed a handsome present +among the latter. Half an hour after the prince returned to the +palace he sent for Ned. + +"Did you not say," he asked, "that the lady who concealed you at +Brussels was the Countess Von Harp?" + +"Yes, your highness. You have no bad news of her, I hope?" + +"I am sorry to say that I have," the prince replied. "I have +just received a letter brought me by a messenger from a friend at +Maastricht. He tells me among other matters that the countess and +her daughter were arrested there two days since. They were passing +through in disguise, and were, it was supposed, making for Germany, +when it chanced that the countess was recognized by a man in the +service of one of the magistrates. It seems he had been born on +Von Harp's estate, and knew the countess well by sight. He at once +denounced her, and she and her daughter and a woman they had with +them were thrown into prison. I am truly sorry, for the count was +a great friend of mine, and I met his young wife many times in the +happy days before these troubles began." + +Ned was greatly grieved when he heard of the danger to which the +lady who had behaved so kindly to him was exposed, and an hour +later he again went into the prince's study. + +"I have come in to ask, sir, if you will allow me to be absent for +a time?" + +"Certainly, Captain Martin," the prince replied. "Are you thinking +of paying a visit to England?" + +"No, sir. I am going to try if I can do anything to get the Countess +Von Harp out of the hands of those who have captured her." + +"But how are you going to do that?" the prince asked in surprise. +"It is one thing to slip out of the hands of Alva's minions as you +did at Brussels, but another thing altogether to get two women out +of prison." + +"That is so," Ned said; "but I rely much, sir, upon the document +which I took a year since from the body of Von Aert's clerk, and +which I have carefully preserved ever since. It bears the seal of +the Blood Council, and is an order to all magistrates to assist +the bearer in all ways that he may require. With the aid of that +document I may succeed in unlocking the door of the prison." + +"It is a bold enterprise," the prince said, "and may cost you your +life. Still I do not say it is impossible." + +"I have also," Ned said, "some orders for the arrest of prisoners. +These are not sealed, but bear the signature of the president of +the council. I shall go to a scrivener and shall get him to copy +one of them exactly, making only the alteration that the persons of +the Countess Von Harp, her daughter, and servant are to be handed +over to my charge for conveyance to Brussels. Alone, this document +might be suspected; but, fortified as I am by the other with the +seal of the council, it may pass without much notice." + +"Yes, but you would be liable to detection by any one who has known +this man Genet." + +"There is a certain risk of that," Ned replied; "and if anyone who +knew him well met me I should of course be detected. But that is +unlikely. The man was about my height, although somewhat thinner. +His principal mark was a most evil squint that he had, and that +anyone who had once met him would be sure to remember. I must practice +crossing my eyes in the same manner when I present my papers." + +The prince smiled. "Sometimes you seem to me a man, Martin, and then +again you enter upon an undertaking with the light heartedness of +a boy. However, far be it from me to hinder your making the attempt. +It is pleasant, though rare, to see people mindful of benefits +bestowed upon them, and one is glad to see that gratitude is not +altogether a lost virtue. Go, my lad; and may God aid you in your +scheme. I will myself send for a scrivener at once and give him +instructions; it may well be that he would refuse to draw up such +a document as that you require merely on your order. + +"Leave the order for arrest with me, and I will bid him get +a facsimile made in all respects. You will require two or three +trusty men with you to act as officials under your charge. I will +give you a letter to my correspondent in Maastricht begging him +to provide some men on whom he can rely for this work. It would be +difficult for you, a stranger in the town, to put your hand upon +them." + +The next morning Ned, provided with the forged order of release, +started on his journey. He was disguised as a peasant, and carried a +suit of clothes similar in cut and fashion to those worn by Genet. +He went first to Rotterdam, and bearing west crossed the river +Lek, and then struck the Waal at Gorichen, and there hired a boat +and proceeded up the river to Nymegen. He then walked across to +Grave, and again taking boat proceeded up the Maas, past Venlo and +Roermond to Maastricht. He landed a few miles above the town, and +changed his peasant clothes for the suit he carried with him. + +At a farmhouse he succeeded in buying a horse, saddle, and bridle. +The animal was but a poor one, but it was sufficiently good for his +purpose, as he wanted it not for speed, but only to enable him to +enter the city on horseback. Maastricht was a strongly fortified +city, and on entering its gates Ned was requested to show his papers. +He at once produced the document bearing the seal of the Council. +This was amply sufficient, and he soon took up his quarters at an +inn. His first step was to find the person for whom he bore the +letter from the prince. The gentleman, who was a wealthy merchant, +after reading the missive and learning from Ned the manner in which +he could assist him, at once promised to do so. + +"You require three men, you say, dressed as officials in the +employment of the Council. The dress is easy enough, for they bear +no special badge or cognizance, although generally they are attired +in dark green doublets and trunks and red hose. There will be no +difficulty as to the men themselves. The majority of the townsmen +are warmly affected to the patriotic cause, and there are many who +are at heart Protestants; though, like myself, obliged to abstain +from making open confession of their faith. At any rate, I have +three men at least upon whom I can absolutely rely. Their duty, +you say, will be simply to accompany you to the prison and to ride +with you with these ladies until beyond the gates. They must, of +course, be mounted, and must each have pillions for the carriage of +the prisoners behind them. Once well away from the town they will +scatter, leave their horses at places I shall appoint, change their +clothes, and return into the city. What do you mean to do with the +ladies when you have got them free?" + +"I do not know what their plans will be, or where they will wish +to go," Ned said. "I should propose to have a vehicle with a pair +of horses awaiting them two miles outside the town. I should say +that a country cart would be least likely to excite suspicion. +I would have three peasant's dresses there with it. I do not know +that I can make further provision for their flight, as I cannot +say whether they will make for the coast, or try to continue their +journey across the frontier." + +"You can leave these matters to me," the merchant said; "the cart +and disguises shall be at the appointed spot whenever you let me +know the hour at which you will be there. You must give me until +noon tomorrow to make all the arrangements." + +"Very well, sir," Ned said. "I am greatly obliged to you, and the +prince, who is a personal friend of the countess, will, I am sure, +be greatly pleased when he hears how warmly you have entered into +the plans for aiding her escape. I will present myself to the +magistrates tomorrow at noon, and obtain from them the order upon +the governor of the prison to hand the ladies over to me. If I +should succeed I will go straight back to my inn. If you will place +someone near the door there to see if I enter, which if I succeed +will be about one o'clock, he can bring you the news. I will have +my horse brought round at two, and at that hour your men can ride +up and join me, and I will proceed with them straight to the prison." + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +A RESCUE + + +At twelve o'clock on the following day Ned went to the town hall, +and on stating that he was the bearer of an order from the Council, +was at once shown into the chamber in which three of the magistrates +were sitting. + +"I am the bearer of an order from the Council for the delivery to +me of the persons of the Countess Von Harp, her daughter, and the +woman arrested in company with them for conveyance to Brussels, +there to answer the charges against them. This is the order of +the Council with their seal, ordering all magistrates to render +assistance to me as one of their servants. This is the special +order for the handing over to me of the prisoners named." + +The magistrates took the first order, glanced at it and at the seal, +and perfectly satisfied with this gave a casual glance at that for +the transferring of the prisoners. + +"I think you were about a year since with Councillor Von Aert?" one +of the magistrates said. Ned bowed. "By the way, did I not hear +that you were missing, or that some misfortune had befallen you +some months since? I have a vague recollection of doing so." + +"Yes. I was sorely maltreated by a band of robber peasants who left +me for dead, but as you see I am now completely recovered." + +"I suppose you have some men with you to escort the prisoners?" +one of the magistrates asked. + +"Assuredly," Ned replied. "I have with me three men, behind whom +the women will ride." + +The magistrates countersigned the order upon the governor of the +prison to hand over the three prisoners, and gave it with the letter +of the Council to Ned. He bowed and retired. + +"I should not have remembered him again," the magistrate who had +been the chief speaker said after he had left the room, "had it not +been for that villainous cast in his eyes. I remember noticing it +when he was here last time, and wondered that Von Aert should like +to have a man whose eyes were so crossways about him; otherwise I +do not recall the face at all, which is not surprising seeing that +I only saw him for a minute or two, and noticed nothing but that +abominable squint of his." + +Ned walked back to his inn, ordered his horse to be saddled at two +o'clock, and partook of a hearty meal. Then paying his reckoning +he went out and mounted his horse. As he did so three men in green +doublets and red hose rode up and took their places behind him. +On arriving at the prison he dismounted, and handing his horse to +one of his followers entered. + +"I have an order from the Council, countersigned by the magistrates +here, for the delivery to me of three prisoners." + +The warder showed him into a room. + +"The governor is ill," he said, "and confined to his bed; but I +will take the order to him." + +Ned was pleased with the news, for he thought it likely that Genet +might have been there before on similar errands, and his person be +known to the governor. In ten minutes the warder returned. + +"The prisoners are without," he said, "and ready to depart." + +Pulling his bonnet well down over his eyes, Ned went out into the +courtyard. + +"You are to accompany me to Brussels, countess," he said gruffly. +"Horses are waiting for you without." + +The countess did not even glance at the official who had thus come +to convey her to what was in all probability death, but followed +through the gate into the street. The men backed their horses up +to the block of stone used for mounting. Ned assisted the females +to the pillions, and when they were seated mounted his own horse +and led the way down the street. Many of the people as they passed +along groaned or hooted, for the feeling in Maastricht was strongly +in favour of the patriot side, a feeling for which they were some +years later to be punished by almost total destruction of the city, +and the slaughter of the greater portion of its inhabitants. + +Ned paid no attention to these demonstrations, but quickening his +horse into a trot rode along the street and out of the gate of the +city. As the road was a frequented one, he maintained his place +at the head of the party until they had left the city nearly two +miles behind them. On arriving at a small crossroad one of the +men said: "This is the way, sir; it is up this road that the cart +is waiting." Ned now reined back his horse to the side of that on +which the countess was riding. + +"Countess," he said, "have you forgotten the English lad you aided +a year ago in Brussels?" + +The countess started. + +"I recognize you now, sir," she said coldly; "and little did I +think at that time that I should next see you as an officer of the +Council of Blood." + +Ned smiled. + +"Your mistake is a natural one, countess; but in point of fact +I am still in the service of the Prince of Orange, and have only +assumed this garb as a means of getting you and your daughter out +of the hands of those murderers. I am happy to say that you are free +to go where you will; these good fellows are like myself disguised, +and are at your service. In a few minutes we shall come to a cart +which will take you wheresoever you like to go, and there are +disguises similar to those with which you once fitted me out in +readiness for you there." + +The surprise of the countess for a moment kept her silent; but +Gertrude, who had overheard what was said, burst into exclamations +of delight. + +"Pardon me for having doubted you," the countess exclaimed, much +affected. + +"No pardon is required, countess. Seeing that the prison authorities +handed you over to me, you could not but have supposed that I was +as I seemed, in the service of the Council." + +Just at this moment they came upon a cart drawn up by the roadside. +Ned assisted the countess and her daughter to alight, and while +he was rendering similar assistance to the old servant, mother and +daughter threw themselves into each other's arms, and wept with +delight at this unexpected delivery that had befallen them. It was +some time before they were sufficiently recovered to speak. + +"But how do you come here?" the countess asked Ned, "and how have +you effected this miracle?" + +Ned briefly related how he had heard of their captivity, and the +manner in which he had been enabled to effect their escape. + +"And now, countess," he said, "the day is wearing on, and it is +necessary that you should at once decide upon your plans. Will you +again try to make to the German frontier or to the sea coast, or +remain in hiding here?" + +"We cannot make for Germany without again crossing the Maas," the +countess said, "and it is a long way to the sea coast. What say +you, Magdalene?" + +"I think," the old woman said, "that you had best carry out the +advice I gave before. It is a little more than twelve miles from +here to the village where, as I told you, I have relations living. +We can hire a house there, and there is no chance of your being +recognized. I can send a boy thence to Brussels to fetch the jewels +and money you left in charge of your friend the Count Von Dort +there." + +"That will certainly be the best way, Magdalene. We can wait there +until either there is some change in the state of affairs, or until +we can find some safe way of escape. It is fortunate, indeed, that +I left my jewels in Brussels, instead of taking them with me as I +had at first intended. + +"It will hardly be necessary, will it," she asked Ned, "to put on +the disguises, for nothing in the world can be simpler than our +dresses at present?" + +"You had certainly best put the peasant cloaks and caps on. +Inquiries are sure to be made all through the country when they +find at Maastricht how they have been tricked. Three peasant women +in a cart will attract no attention whatever, even in passing through +villages; but, dressed as you are now, some one might notice you +and recall it if inquiries were made." + +The three men who had aided in the scheme had ridden off as soon as +the cart was reached, and Ned, being anxious that the party should +be upon their way, and desirous, too, of avoiding the expressions +of gratitude of the three women, hurried them into the cart. It was +not necessary for them to change their garments, as the peasant's +cloaks completely enveloped them, and the high headdresses quite +changed their appearance. + +"Do not forget, countess, I hope some day to see you in England," +Ned said as they took their seats. + +"I will not forget," the countess said; "and only wish that at +present I was on my way thither." + +After a warm farewell, and seeing the cart fairly on its way, +Ned mounted his horse and rode northwest. He slept that night at +Heerenthals, and on the following night at Bois le Duc. Here he +sold his horse for a few crowns, and taking boat proceeded down +the Dommel into the Maas, and then on to Rotterdam. On his arrival +at Delft he was heartily welcomed by the prince; who was greatly +pleased to hear that he had, without any accident or hitch, carried +out successfully the plan he had proposed to himself. Three weeks +later the prince heard from his correspondent at Maastricht. The +letter was cautiously worded, as were all those interchanged, lest +it should fall into the hands of the Spanish. + +"There has been some excitement here. A week since a messenger +arrived from Brussels with orders that three female prisoners +confined here should be sent at once to Brussels; but curiously +enough it was found that the three prisoners in question had been +handed over upon the receipt of a previous order. This is now +pronounced to be a forgery, and it is evident that the authorities +have been tricked. There has been much search and inquiry, but no +clue whatever has been obtained as to the direction taken by the +fugitives, or concerning those engaged in this impudent adventure." + +Alva's reign of terror and cruelty was now drawing to an end. His +successor was on his way out, and the last days of his administration +were embittered by his failure of his plans, the retreat of his +army from before Alkmaar, and the naval defeat from the Zuider Zee. +But he continued his cruelties to the end. Massacres on a grand +scale were soon carried on, and a nobleman named Uitenhoove, who +had been taken prisoner, was condemned to be roasted to death before +a slow fire, and was accordingly fastened by a chain to a stake, +around which a huge fire was kindled; he suffered in slow torture +a long time until despatched by the executioner with a spear, a +piece of humanity that greatly angered the duke. + +Alva had contracted an enormous amount of debt, both public and +private, in Amsterdam, and now caused a proclamation to be issued +that all persons having demands upon him were to present their +claims on a certain day. On the previous night he and his train +noiselessly took their departure. The heavy debts remained unpaid, +and many opulent families were reduced to beggary. Such was the +result of the confidence of the people of Amsterdam in the honour +of their tyrant. + +On the 17th of November Don Louis de Requesens, Grand Commander of +St. Jago, Alva's successor, arrived in Brussels; and on the 18th +of December the Duke of Alva left. He is said to have boasted, on +his way home, that he had caused 18,000 inhabitants of the provinces +to be executed during the period of his government. This was, +however, a mere nothing to the number who had perished in battle, +siege, starvation, and massacre. After the departure of their tyrant +the people of the Netherlands breathed more freely, for they hoped +that under their new governor, there would be a remission in the +terrible agony they had suffered; and for a time his proclamations +were of a conciliatory nature. But it was soon seen that there was +no change in policy. Peace was to be given only on the condition +of all Protestants recanting or leaving their country. + +The first military effort of the new governor was to endeavour +to relieve the city of Middleburg, the capital of the Island of +Walcheren, which had long been besieged by the Protestants. Mondragon +the governor was sorely pressed by famine, and could hold out but +little longer, unless rescue came. The importance of the city was +felt by both parties. Requesens himself went to Bergen op Zoom, where +seventy-five ships were collected under the command, nominally, of +Admiral de Glines, but really under that of Julian Romero, while +another fleet of thirty ships was assembled at Antwerp, under D'Avila, +and moved down towards Flushing, there to await the arrival of +that of Romero. Upon the other hand, the Prince of Orange collected +a powerful fleet under the command of Admiral Boisot, and himself +paid a visit to the ships, and assembling the officers roused them +to enthusiasm by a stirring address. + +On the 20th of January the Good Venture again entered the port of +Delft; and hearing that a battle was expected in a few days, Captain +Martin determined to take part in it. As soon as he had unloaded +his cargo he called the crew together and informed them of his +determination, but said that as this was no quarrel of theirs, any +who chose could remain on shore until his return. + +But Englishmen felt that the cause of Holland was their own, and +not a single man on board availed himself of this permission. Ned +informed the Prince of Orange of his father's intention, and asked +leave to accompany him. + +"Assuredly you may go if you please," the prince said; "but I fear +that, sooner or later, the fortune of war will deprive me of you, +and I should miss you much. Moreover, almost every sailor in port +is already in one or other of Boisot's ships; and I fear that, +with your weak crew, you would have little chance if engaged with +one of these Spanish ships full of men." + +"We have enough to work our cannon, sir," Ned said; "besides, +I think we may be able to beat up some volunteers. There are many +English ships in port waiting for cargoes, which come in but slowly, +and I doubt not that some of them will gladly strike a blow against +the Spaniards." + +Ned and Peters accordingly went round among the English vessels, +and in the course of two hours had collected a hundred volunteers. +In those days every Englishman regarded a Spaniard as a natural +enemy. Drake and Hawkins, and other valiant captains, were warring +fiercely against them in the Indian seas, and officers and men +in the ships in Delft were alike eager to join in the forthcoming +struggle against them. + +The Good Venture had, flying the Dutch flag, joined Boisot's fleet +at Romerswael, a few miles below Bergen, on the 27th of January; and +when the Hollanders became aware of the nationality of the vessel +which had just joined them, they welcomed them with tremendous +cheers. Two days later the fleet of Romero were seen coming down +the river in three divisions. When the first of the Spanish ships +came near they delivered a broadside, which did considerable execution +among the Dutch fleet. There was no time for further cannonading. +A few minutes later the fleets met in the narrow channel, and the +ships grappling with each other, a hand to hand struggle began. + +The fighting was of the most desperate character; no quarter was +asked or given on either side, and men fought with fury hand to +hand upon decks slippery with blood. But the combat did not last +long. The Spaniards had little confidence in themselves on board +ship. Their discipline was now of little advantage to them, and the +savage fury with which the Zeelanders fought shook their courage. +Fifteen ships were speedily captured and 1200 Spaniards slain, and +the remainder of the fleet, which, on account of the narrowness +of the passage had not been able to come into action, retreated to +Bergen. + +Romero himself, whose ship had grounded, sprang out of a porthole +and swam ashore, and landed at the very feet of the Grand Commander, who +had been standing all day upon the dyke in the midst of a pouring +rain, only to be a witness of the total defeat of his fleet. Mondragon +now capitulated, receiving honourable conditions. The troops were +allowed to leave the place with their arms, ammunition, and personal +property, and Mondragon engaged himself to procure the release of +Sainte Aldegonde and four other prisoners of rank, or to return +and give himself up as a prisoner of war. + +Requesens, however, neither granted the release of the prisoners, +nor permitted Mondragon to return. It was well for these prisoners, +that Bossu was in the hands of the prince. Had it not been for this +they would have all been put to death. + +With the fall of Middleburg the Dutch and Zeelanders remained +masters of the entire line of sea coast, but on land the situation +was still perilous. Leyden was closely invested, and all communications +by land between the various cities suspended. The sole hope that +remained was in the army raised by Count Louis. + +He had raised 3000 cavalry and 6000 infantry, and, accompanied by +the prince's other two brothers, crossed the Rhine in a snowstorm +and marched towards Maastricht. The Prince of Orange had on his +part with the greatest difficulty raised 6000 infantry, and wrote +to Count Louis to move to join him in the Isle of Bommel after he +had reduced Maastricht. But the expedition, like those before it, +was destined to failure. A thousand men deserted, seven hundred +more were killed in a night surprise, and the rest were mutinous +for their pay. Finally, Count Louis found himself confronted by a +force somewhat inferior in numbers to his own. + +But the Spanish infantry were well disciplined and obedient, those +of Louis were mercenaries and discontented; and although at first +his cavalry gained an advantage, it was a short one, and after a +fierce action his army was entirely defeated. Count Louis, finding +that the day was lost, gathered a little band of troopers, and +with his brother, Count Henry, and Christopher, son of the Elector +Palatine, charged into the midst of the enemy. They were never +heard of more. The battle terminated in a horrible butchery. At +least 4000 men were either killed in the field, suffocated in the +marshes, drowned in the river, or burned in the farmhouses in which +they had taken refuge. Count Louis, and his brother and friend, +probably fell on the field, but stripped of their clothing, +disfigured by wounds and the trampling of horses, their bodies were +never recognized. + +The defeat of the army and the death of his two brave brothers was +a terrible blow to the Prince of Orange. He was indeed paying dear +for his devotion to his country. His splendid fortune had been +entirely spent, his life had been one of incessant toil and anxiety, +his life had been several times threatened with assassination, he +had seen his every plan thwarted. Save on the sandy slip of coast +by the ocean, the whole of the Netherlands was still prostrate +beneath the foot of the Spaniard; and now he had lost two of his +brothers. England and France had alternately encouraged and stood +aloof from him, and after all these efforts and sacrifices the +prospects of ultimate success were gloomy in the extreme. + +Fortunately the Spaniards were not able to take full advantage of +their victory over the army of Count Louis. They differed from the +German mercenaries inasmuch that while the latter mutinied before +they fought, the Spaniards fought first and mutinied afterwards. +Having won a great battle, they now proceeded to defy their generals. +Three years' pay were due to them, and they took the steps that +they always adopted upon these occasions. A commander called the +"Eletto" was chosen by acclamation, a board of councillors was +appointed to assist and control him, while the councillors were +narrowly watched by the soldiers. They crossed the Maas and marched +to Antwerp. + +The Grand Commander hastened there to meet them, and when +they arrived in perfect military order he appeared before them on +horseback and made them an oration, promising that their demands +should be satisfied. The soldiers simply replied, "We want money, +not words." Requesens consulted the City Council and demanded 400,000 +crowns to satisfy the troops. The citizens hesitated at providing +so enormous an amount, knowing by past experience that it would +never be repaid. The soldiers, however, employed their usual +methods. They quartered themselves upon the houses of the citizens, +and insisted upon being supplied with rich food, wine, and luxuries +of all kinds; and in a week or two the burghers saw that they must +either pay or be ruined. + +An offer was accordingly made of ten months' arrears in cash, five +months in silks and woolen cloths, and the rest in promises to be +fulfilled within a few days. The Eletto declared that he considered +the terms satisfactory, whereupon the troops at once deposed him +and elected another. Carousing and merry making went on at the +expense of the citizens, and after suffering for some weeks from +the extortions and annoyance of the soldiers, the 400,000 crowns +demanded by Requesens were paid over, and the soldiers received all +their pay due either in money or goods. A great banquet was held +by the whole mass of soldiery, and there was a scene of furious +revelry. The soldiers arrayed themselves in costumes cut from the +materials they had just received. Broadcloths, silks, satins, and +gold embroidered brocades were hung in fantastic drapery over their +ragged garments, and when the banquet was finished gambling began. + +But when they were in the midst of their revelry the sound of cannon +was heard. Boisot had sailed up the Scheldt to attack the fleet +of D'Avila, which had hastened up to Antwerp for refuge after the +defeat of Romero. There was a short and sharp action, and fourteen +of the Spanish ships were burnt or sunk. The soldiers swarmed down +to the dyke and opened a fire of musketry upon the Dutch. They +were, however, too far off to effect any damage, and Boisot, with +a few parting broadsides, sailed triumphantly down the river, having +again struck a heavy blow at the naval power of Spain. + +The siege of Leyden had been raised when Count Louis crossed the +Rhine, the troops being called in from all parts to oppose his +progress. The Prince of Orange urged upon the citizens to lose +no time in preparing themselves for a second siege, to strengthen +their walls, and, above all, to lay in stores of provisions. But, +as ever, the Dutch burghers, although ready to fight and to suffer +when the pinch came, were slow and apathetic unless in the face of +necessity; and in spite of the orders and entreaties of the prince, +nothing whatever was done, and the Spaniards when they returned +before the city on the 26th of May, after two months' absence, +found the town as unprepared for resistance as it had been at their +first coming, and that the citizens had not even taken the trouble +to destroy the forts that they had raised round it. + +Leyden stood in the midst of broad and fruitful pastures reclaimed +from the sea; around were numerous villages, with blooming gardens +and rich orchards. Innumerable canals cut up the country, and entering +the city formed its streets. These canals were shaded with trees, +crossed by a hundred and forty-five bridges. Upon an artificial +elevation in the centre of the city rose a ruined tower of great +antiquity, assigned either to the Saxons before they crossed to +England or with greater probability to the Romans. + +The force which now appeared before the town consisted of +8000 Walloons and Germans, commanded by Valdez. They lost no time +in taking possession of the Hague, and all the villages and forts +round Leyden. Five hundred English volunteers under command of +Colonel Chester abandoned the fort of Valkenberg which had been +intrusted to them and fled towards Leyden. Not as yet had the +English soldiers learnt to stand before the Spaniards, but the time +was ere long to come when, having acquired confidence in themselves, +they were to prove themselves more than a match for the veterans +of Spain. The people of Leyden refused to open their gates to +the fugitives, and they surrendered to Valdez. As at that moment +a mission was on the point of starting from Requesens to Queen +Elizabeth, the lives of the prisoners were spared, and they were +sent back to England. + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +THE SIEGE OF LEYDEN + + +The Spaniards had no sooner appeared before Leyden than they set +to work to surround it with a cordon of redoubts. No less than +sixty-two, including those left standing since the last siege, were +erected and garrisoned, and the town was therefore cut off from +all communication from without. Its defenders were few in number, +there being no troops in the town save a small corps composed +of exiles from other cities, and five companies of burgher guard. +The walls, however, were strong, and it was famine rather than the +foe that the citizens feared. They trusted to the courage of the +burghers to hold the walls, and to the energy of the Prince of +Orange to relieve them. + +The prince, although justly irritated by their folly in neglecting +to carry out his orders, sent a message by a pigeon to them, +encouraging them to hold out, and reminding them that the fate of +their country depended upon the issue of this siege. He implored +them to hold out for at least three months, assuring them that +he would within that time devise means for their deliverance. The +citizens replied, assuring the prince of their firm confidence in +their own fortitude and his exertions. On the 6th of June the Grand +Commander issued what was called a pardon, signed and sealed by +the king. In it he invited all his erring and repentant subjects +to return to his arms, and accept a full forgiveness for their past +offense upon the sole condition that they should once more enter +the Catholic Church. A few individuals mentioned by name were alone +excluded from this amnesty. But all Holland was now Protestant, and +its inhabitants were resolved that they must not only be conquered +but annihilated before the Roman Church should be re-established on +their soil. In the whole province but two men came forward to take +advantage of the amnesty. Many Netherlanders belonging to the king's +party sent letters from the camp to their acquaintances in the +city exhorting them to submission, and imploring them "to take pity +upon their poor old fathers, their daughters, and their wives;" +but the citizens of Leyden thought the best they could do for these +relatives was to keep them out of the clutches of the Spaniards. + +At the commencement of the siege the citizens gathered all their +food into the magazines, and at the end of June the daily allowance +to each full grown man was half a pound of meat and half a pound +of bread, women and children receiving less. + +The prince had his headquarters at Delft and Rotterdam, and an +important fortress called the Polderwaert between these two cities +secured him the control of the district watered by the rivers Yssel +and Maas. On the 29th of June the Spaniards attacked this fort, but +were beaten off with a loss of 700 men. The prince was now occupied +in endeavouring to persuade the Dutch authorities to permit the +great sluices at Rotterdam, Schiedam, and Delft Haven to be opened. +The damage to the country would be enormous; but there was no other +course to rescue Leyden, and with it the whole of Holland, from +destruction. + +It was not until the middle of July that his eloquent appeals +and arguments prevailed, and the estates consented to his plan. +Subscriptions were opened in all the Dutch towns for maintaining +the inhabitants of the district that was to be submerged until +it could be again restored, and a large sum was raised, the women +contributing their plate and jewellery to the furtherance of the +scheme. On the 3rd of August all was ready, and the prince himself +superintended the breaking down of the dykes in sixteen places, +while at the same time the sluices at Schiedam and Rotterdam were +opened and the water began to pour over the land. + +While waiting for the water to rise, stores of provisions were +collected in all the principal towns, and 200 vessels of small +draught of water gathered in readiness. Unfortunately no sooner +had the work been done than the prince was attacked by a violent +fever, brought on by anxiety and exertion. + +On the 21st of August a letter was received from the town saying +that they had now fulfilled their original promise, for they had +held out two months with food and another month without food. Their +bread had long been gone, and their last food, some malt cake, would +last but four days. After that was gone there was nothing left but +starvation. + +Upon the same day they received a letter from the prince, assuring +them that the dykes were all pierced and the water rising upon the +great dyke that separated the city from the sea. The letter was +read publicly in the marketplace, and excited the liveliest joy +among the inhabitants. Bands of music played in the streets, and +salvos of cannon were fired. The Spaniards became uneasy at seeing +the country beyond them gradually becoming covered with water, +and consulted the country people and the royalists in their camp, +all of whom assured them that the enterprise of the prince was an +impossibility, and that the water would never reach the walls. + +The hopes of the besieged fell again, however, as day after day +passed without change; and it was not until the 1st of September, +when the prince began to recover from his fever, and was personally +able to superintend the operations, that these began in earnest. +The distance from Leyden to the outer dyke was fifteen miles; ten +of these were already flooded, and the flotilla, which consisted of +more than 200 vessels, manned in all with 2500 veterans, including +800 of the wild sea beggars of Zeeland, renowned as much for their +ferocity as for nautical skill, started on their way, and reached +without difficulty the great dyke called the Land Scheiding. Between +this town and Leyden were several other dykes, all of which would +have to be taken. All these, besides the 62 forts, were defended +by the Spanish troops, four times the number of the relieving force. + +Ned had been in close attendance upon the prince during his +illness, and when the fleet was ready to start requested that he +might be allowed to accompany it. This the prince at once granted, +and introduced him to Admiral Boisot. + +"I shall be glad if you will take Captain Martin in your own ship," +he said. "Young as he is he has seen much service, and is full of +resource and invention. You will, I am sure, find him of use; and +he can act as messenger to convey your orders from ship to ship." + +The prince had given orders that the Land Scheiding, whose top was +still a foot and a half above water, should be taken possession of +at all hazard, and this was accomplished by surprise on the night +of the 10th. The Spaniards stationed there were either killed or +driven off, and the Dutch fortified themselves upon it. At daybreak +the Spaniards stationed in two large villages close by advanced to +recover the important position, but the Dutch, fighting desperately, +drove them back with the loss of some hundreds of men. The dyke +was at once cut through and the fleet sailed through the gap. + +The admiral had believed that the Land Scheiding once cut, the +water would flood the country as far as Leyden, but another dyke, +the Greenway, rose a foot above water three- quarters of a mile +inside the Land Scheiding. As soon as the water had risen over the +land sufficiently to float the ships, the fleet advanced, seized the +Greenway, and cut it. But as the water extended in all directions, +it grew also shallower, and the admiral found that the only way by +which he could advance was by a deep canal leading to a large mere +called the Fresh Water Lake. + +This canal was crossed by a bridge, and its sides were occupied +by 3000 Spanish soldiers. Boisot endeavoured to force the way but +found it impossible to do so, and was obliged to withdraw. He was +now almost despairing. He had accomplished but two miles, the water +was sinking rather than rising owing to a long continued east wind, +and many of his ships were already aground. On the 18th, however, +the wind shifted to the northwest, and for three days blew a gale. +The water rose rapidly, and at the end of the second day the ships +were all afloat again. + +Hearing from a peasant of a comparatively low dyke between two +villages Boisot at once sailed in that direction. There was a strong +Spanish force stationed here; but these were seized with a panic +and fled, their courage unhinged by the constantly rising waters, +the appearance of the numerous fleet, and their knowledge of the +reckless daring of the wild sailors. The dyke was cut, the two +villages with their fortifications burned, and the fleet moved on +to North Aa. The enemy abandoned this position also, and fled to +Zoetermeer, a strongly fortified village a mile and a quarter from +the city walls. Gradually the Spanish army had been concentrated +round the city as the water drove them back, and they were principally +stationed at this village and the two strong forts of Lammen and +Leyderdorp, each within a few hundred yards of the town. + +At the last named post Valdez had his headquarters, and Colonel +Borgia commanded at Lammen. The fleet was delayed at North Aa by +another dyke, called the Kirkway. The waters, too, spreading again +over a wider space, and diminished from the east wind again setting +in, sank rapidly, and very soon the whole fleet was aground; for +there were but nine inches of water, and they required twenty to +float them. Day after day they lay motionless. The Prince of Orange, +who had again been laid up with the fever, rose from his sickbed +and visited the fleet. He encouraged the dispirited sailors, rebuked +their impatience, and after reconnoitering the ground issued orders +for immediate destruction of the Kirkway, and then returned to +Delft. + +All this time Leyden was suffering horribly. The burghers were +aware that the fleet had set forth to their relief, but they knew +better than those on board the obstacles that opposed its progress. +The flames of the burning villages and the sound of artillery told +them of its progress until it reached North Aa, then there was a +long silence, and hope almost deserted them. They knew well that +so long as the east wind continued to blow there could be no rise +in the level of the water, and anxiously they looked from the +walls and the old tower for signs of a change. They were literally +starving, and their misery far exceeded even that of the citizens +of Haarlem. + +A small number of cows only remained, and of these few were killed +every day, and tiny morsels of meat distributed, the hides and +bones being chopped up and boiled. The green leaves were stripped +from the trees, and every herb gathered and eaten. The mortality +was frightful, and whole families died together in their houses +from famine and plague; for pestilence had now broken out, and from +six to eight thousand people died from this alone. Leyden abandoned +all hope, and yet they spurned the repeated summonses of Valdez +to surrender. They were fully resolved to die rather than to yield +to the Spaniards. From time to time, however, murmurs arose among +the suffering people, and the heroic burgomaster, Adrian Van der +Werf, was once surrounded by a crowd and assailed by reproaches. + +He took off his hat and calmly replied to them: "I tell you I have +made an oath to hold the city, and may God give me strength to +keep it. I can die but once -- either by your hands, the enemy's, +or by the hand of God. My own fate is indifferent to me; not so that +of the city intrusted to my care. I know that we shall all starve +if not soon relieved; but starvation is preferable to the dishonoured +death which is the only alternative. Your menaces move me not. +My life is at your disposal. Here is my sword; plunge it into by +breast and divide my flesh among you. Take my body to appease your +hunger; but expect no surrender so long as I remain alive." + +Still the east wind continued, until stout admiral Boisot himself +almost despaired. But on the night of the 1st of October a violent +gale burst from the northwest, and then shifting, blew more strongly +from the southwest. The water was piled up high upon the southern +coast of Holland, and sweeping furiously inland poured through the +ruined dykes, and in twenty-four hours the fleet was afloat again. +At midnight they advanced in the midst of the storm and darkness. +Some Spanish vessels that had been brought up to aid the defenders +were swept aside and sunk. + +The fleet, sweeping on past half submerged stacks and farm houses, +made its way to the fresh water mere. Some shallows checked it for +a time, but the crews sprang overboard into the water, and by main +strength hoisted their vessels across them. Two obstacles alone +stood between them and the city -- the forts of Zoeterwoude and +Lammen, the one five hundred, and the other but two hundred and +fifty yards from the city. Both were strong and well supplied with +troops and artillery, but the panic which had seized the Spaniards +extended to Zoeterwoude. Hardly was the fleet in sight in the +gray light of the morning when the Spaniards poured out from the +fortress, and spread along a road on the dyke leading in a westerly +direction towards the Hague. + +The waves, driven by the wind, were beating on the dyke, and it +was crumbling rapidly away, and hundreds sank beneath the flood. +The Zeelanders drove their vessels up alongside, and pierced them +with their harpoons, or, plunging into the waves, attacked them +with sword and dagger. The numbers killed amounted to not less than +a thousand; the rest effected their escape to the Hague. Zoeterwoude +was captured and set on fire, but Lammen still barred their path. +Bristling with guns, it seemed to defy them either to capture or +pass it on their way to the city. + +Leyderdorp, where Valdez with his main force lay, was a mile and a +half distant on the right, and within a mile of the city, and the +guns of the two forts seemed to render it next to impossible for +the fleet to pass on. Boisot, after reconnoitering the position, +wrote despondently to the prince that he intended if possible on +the following morning to carry the fort, but if unable to do so, +he said, there would be nothing for it but to wait for another gale +of wind to still further raise the water, and enable him to make +a wide circuit and enter Leyden on the opposite side. A pigeon had +been despatched by Boisot in the morning informing the citizens of +his exact position, and at nightfall the burgomaster and a number +of citizens gathered at the watchtower. + +"Yonder," cried the magistrate, pointing to Lammen, "behind that +fort, are bread and meat and brethren in thousands. Shall all this +be destroyed by Spanish guns, or shall we rush to the aid of our +friends?" + +"We will tear the fortress first to fragments with our teeth and +nails," was the reply; and it was resolved that a sortie should +be made against Lammen at daybreak, when Boisot attacked it on the +other side. A pitch dark night set in, a night full of anxiety to +the Spaniards, to the fleet, and to Leyden. The sentries on the walls +saw lights flitting across the waters, and in the dead of night the +whole of the city wall between two of the gates fell with a loud +crash. The citizens armed themselves and rushed to the breach, +believing that the Spaniards were on them at last; but no foe made +his appearance. + +In the morning the fleet prepared for the assault. All was still +and quiet in the fortress, and the dreadful suspicion that the city +had been carried at night, and that all their labour was in vain, +seized those on board. Suddenly a man was seen wading out from the +fort, while at the same time a boy waved his cap wildly from its +summit. The mystery was solved. The Spaniards had fled panic stricken +in the darkness. Had they remained they could have frustrated the +enterprise, and Leyden must have fallen; but the events of the +two preceding days had shaken their courage. Valdez retired from +Leyderdorp and ordered Colonel Borgia to evacuate Lammen. + +Thus they had retreated at the very moment that the fall of the wall +sapped by the flood laid bare a whole side of the city for their +entrance. They heard the crash in the darkness, and it but added +to their fears, for they thought that the citizens were sallying +out to take some measures which would further add to the height +of the flood. Their retreat was discovered by the boy, who, having +noticed the procession of lights in the darkness, became convinced +that the Spaniards had retired, and persuaded the magistrates to +allow him to make his way out to the fort to reconnoitre. As soon +as the truth was known the fleet advanced, passed the fort, and +drew up alongside the quays. + +These were lined by the famishing people, every man, woman, +and child having strength to stand having come out to greet their +deliverers. Bread was thrown from all the vessels among the crowd +as they came up, and many died from too eagerly devouring the food +after their long fast. Then the admiral stepped ashore, followed +by the whole of those on board the ships. Magistrates and citizens, +sailors and soldiers, women and children, all repaired to the great +church and returned thanks to God for the deliverance of the city. +The work of distributing food and relieving the sick was then +undertaken. The next day the prince, in defiance of the urgent +entreaties of his friends, who were afraid of the effects of the +pestilential air of the city upon his constitution enfeebled by +sickness, repaired to the town. + +Shortly afterwards, with the advice of the States, he granted the +city as a reward for its suffering a ten days' annual fair, without +tolls or taxes, and it was further resolved that a university should, +as a manifestation of the gratitude of the people of Holland, be +established within its walls. The fiction of the authority of Philip +was still maintained, and the charter granted to the university +was, under the circumstances, a wonderful production. It was drawn +up in the name of the king, and he was gravely made to establish +the university as a reward to Leyden for rebellion against himself. + +"Considering," it said, "that during these present wearisome wars +within our provinces of Holland and Zeeland, all good instruction +of youth in the sciences and literary arts is likely to come into +entire oblivion; considering the difference of religion; considering +that we are inclined to gratify our city of Leyden, with its +burghers, on account of the heavy burden sustained by them during +this war with such faithfulness, we have resolved -- after ripely +deliberating with our dear cousin William Prince of Orange, stadtholder +-- to erect a free public school, and university," &c. So ran the +document establishing this famous university, all needful regulations +for its government being intrusted by Philip to his above mentioned +dear cousin of Orange. + +Ned Martin was not one of those who entered Leyden with Boisot's +relieving fleet. His long watching and anxiety by the bedside of +the prince had told upon him, and he felt strangely unlike himself +when he started with the fleet. So long as it was fighting its way +forward the excitement kept him up; but the long delay near the +village of Aa, and the deep despondency caused by the probable +failure of their hopes of rescuing the starving city, again brought +on an attack of the fever that had already seized him before starting, +and when the Prince of Orange paid his visit to the fleet Boisot +told him the young officer he had recommended to him was down with +fever, which was, he believed, similar to that from which the prince +himself was but just recovering. + +The prince at once ordered him to be carried on board his own +galley, and took him with him back to Delft. Here he lay for a +month completely prostrated. The prince several times visited him +personally, and, as soon as he became in some degree convalescent, +said to him: + +"I think we have taxed you too severely, and have worked you in +proportion to your zeal rather than to your strength. The surgeon +says that you must have rest for awhile, and that it will be well +for you to get away from our marshes for a time. For two years you +have done good and faithful service, and even had it not been for +this fever you would have a right to rest, and I think that your +native air is best for you at present. With the letters that came +to me from Flushing this morning is one from your good father, +asking for news of you. His ship arrived there yesterday, and he has +heard from one of those who were with Boisot that you have fallen +ill; therefore, if it be to your liking, I will send you in one of +my galleys to Flushing." + +"I thank your excellency much," Ned said. "Indeed for the last +few days I have been thinking much of home and longing to be back. +I fear that I shall be a long time before I shall be fit for hard +work again here." "You will feel a different man when you have +been a few hours at sea," the prince said kindly. "I hope to see +you with me again some day. There are many of your countrymen, who, +like yourself, have volunteered in our ranks and served us well +without pay or reward, but none of them have rendered better service +than you have done. And now farewell. I will order a galley to be +got in readiness at once. I leave myself for Leyden in half an hour. +Take this, my young friend, in remembrance of the Prince of Orange; +and I trust that you may live to hand it down to your descendants +as a proof that I appreciated your good services on behalf of a +people struggling to be free. + +So saying he took off his watch and laid it on the table by Ned's +bedside, pressed the lad's hand, and retired. He felt it really a +sacrifice to allow this young Englishman to depart. He had for years +been a lonely man, with few confidants and no domestic pleasures. +He lived in an atmosphere of trouble, doubt, and suspicion. He +had struggled alone against the might of Philip, the apathy of the +western provinces, the coldness and often treachery of the nobles, +the jealousies and niggardliness of the Estates, representing cities +each of which thought rather of itself and its privileges than of +the general good; and the company of this young Englishman, with +his frank utterances, his readiness to work at all times, and his +freedom from all ambitions or self interested designs, had been +a pleasure and relief to him, and he frequently talked to him far +more freely than even to his most trusted counsellors. + +Ever since the relief of Alkmaar Ned had been constantly with him, +save when despatched on missions to various towns, or to see that +the naval preparations were being pushed on with all speed; and his +illness had made a real blank in his little circle. However, the +doctors had spoken strongly as to the necessity for Ned's getting +away from the damp atmosphere of the half submerged land, and he at +once decided to send him back to England, and seized the opportunity +directly the receipt of Captain Martin's letter informed him that +the ship was at Flushing. + +An hour later four men entered with a litter; the servants had +already packed Ned's mails, and he was carried down and placed on +board one of the prince's vessels. They rowed down into the Maas, +and then hoisting sail proceeded down the river, kept outside +the island to Walcheren, and then up the estuary of the Scheldt +to Flushing. It was early morning when they arrived in port. Ned +was carried upon deck, and soon made out the Good Venture lying a +quarter of a mile away. He was at once placed in the boat and rowed +alongside. An exclamation from Peters, as he looked over the side +and saw Ned lying in the stern of the boat, called Captain Martin +out from his cabin. + +"Why, Ned, my dear boy!" he exclaimed, as he looked over the side; +"you seem in grievous state indeed." + +"There is not much the matter with me, father. I have had fever, +but am getting over it, and it will need but a day or two at sea +to put me on my feet again. I have done with the war at present, +and the prince has been good enough to send me in one of his own +galleys to you." + +"We will soon get you round again, never fear, Master Ned," Peters +said as he jumped down into the boat to aid in hoisting him on +board. "No wonder the damp airs of this country have got into your +bones at last. I never can keep myself warm when we are once in +these canals. If it wasn't for their schiedam I don't believe the +Dutchmen could stand it themselves." + +Ned was soon lifted on board, and carried into the cabin aft. The +Good Venture had already discharged her cargo, and, as there was +no chance of filling up again at Flushing, sail was made an hour +after he was on board, and the vessel put out to sea. It was now +early in November, but although the air was cold the day was fine +and bright, and as soon as the vessel was under weigh Ned was +wrapped up in cloaks and laid on a mattress on deck, with his head +well propped up with pillows. + +"One seems to breathe in fresh life here, father," he said. "It is +pleasant to feel the motion and the shock of the waves after being +so long on land. I feel stronger already, while so long as I was +at Delft I did not seem to gain from one day to the other. I hope +we sha'n't make too rapid a voyage; I don't want to come home as +an invalid." + +"We shall not make a fast run of it unless the wind changes, Ned. +It blows steadily from the west at present, and we shall be lucky +if we cast anchor under a week in the Pool." + +"All the better, father. In a week I shall be on my legs again +unless I am greatly mistaken." + +Ned's convalescence was indeed, rapid, and by the time they entered +the mouth of the Thames he was able to walk from side to side of +the vessel, and as the wind still held from the west it was another +four days before they dropped anchor near London Bridge. Ned would +have gone ashore in his old attire; but upon putting it on the +first day he was able to get about, he found he had so completely +outgrown it that he was obliged to return to the garments he had +worn in Holland. + +He was now more than eighteen years of age, and nearly six feet in +height. He had broadened out greatly, and the position he had for +the last year held as an officer charged with authority by the +prince had given him a manner of decision and authority altogether +beyond his years. As he could not wear his sailor dress he chose +one of the handsomest of those he possessed. It consisted of maroon +doublet and trunks, slashed with white, with a short mantle of dark +green, and hose of the same colour; his cap was maroon in colour, +with small white and orange plumes, and he wore a ruff round his +neck. Captain Martin saluted him with a bow of reverence as he came +on deck. + +"Why, Ned, they will think that I am bringing a court gallant with +me. Your mother and the girls will be quite abashed at all this +finery." + +"I felt strange in it myself at first," Ned laughed; "but of +course I am accustomed to it now. The prince is not one who cares +for state himself, but as one of his officers I was obliged to be +well dressed; and, indeed, this dress and the others I wear were +made by his orders and presented to me. Indeed I think I am very +moderate in not decking myself out with the two gold chains I have +-- the one a present from his highness, the other from the city +of Alkmaar -- to say nothing of the watch set with jewels that the +prince gave me on leaving." + +Ned's mother and the girls were on the lookout, for the Good Venture +had been noticed as she passed. Ned had at his father's suggestion +kept below in order that he might give them a surprise on his +arrival. + +"I verily believe they won't know you," he said as they approached +the gate. "You have grown four inches since they saw you last, and +your cheeks are thin and pale instead of being round and sunburnt. +This, with your attire, has made such a difference that I am sure +anyone would pass you in the street without knowing you." + +Ned hung a little behind while his mother and the girls met his +father at the gate. As soon as the embraces were over Captain Martin +turned to Ned and said to his wife: + +"My dear, I have to introduce an officer of the prince who has come +over for his health to stay awhile with us. This is Captain Martin." + +Dame Martin gave a start of astonishment, looked incredulously for +a moment at Ned, and then with a cry of delight threw herself into +his arms. + +"It really seems impossible that this can be Ned," she said, as, +after kissing his sisters, he turned to her. "Why, husband, it is +a man!" + +"And a very fine one too, wife. He tops me by two inches; and as to +his attire, I feel that we must all smarten up to be fit companions +to such a splendid bird. Why, the girls look quite awed by him!" + +"But you look terribly pale, Ned, and thin," his mother said; "and +you were so healthy and strong." + +"I shall soon be healthy and strong again, mother. When I have got +out of these fine clothes, which I only put on because I could not +get into my old ones, and you have fed me up for a week on good +English beef, you will see that there is no such great change in +me after all." + +"And now let us go inside," Captain Martin said; "there is a +surprise for you there." Ned entered, and was indeed surprised at +seeing his Aunt Elizabeth sitting by the fire, while his cousins +were engaged upon their needlework at the window. They, too, looked +for a moment doubtful as he entered; for the fifteen months since +they had last seen him, when he left them at the surrender of +Haarlem, had changed him much, and his dress at that time had been +very different to that he now wore. It was not until he exclaimed +"Well, aunt, this is indeed a surprise!" that they were sure of his +identity, and they welcomed him with a warmth scarcely less than +his mother and sisters had shown. + +Elizabeth Plomaert was not of a demonstrative nature; but although +she had said little at the time, she had felt deeply the care and +devotion which Ned had exhibited to her and her daughters during +the siege, and knew that had it not been for the supplies of food, +scanty as they were, that he nightly brought in, she herself, and +probably the girls, would have succumbed to hunger. + +"When did you arrive, aunt?" Ned asked, when the greetings were +over. + +"Four months ago, Ned. Life was intolerable in Haarlem owing to the +brutal conduct of the Spanish soldiers. I was a long time bringing +myself to move. Had it not been for the girls I should never have +done so. But things became intolerable; and when most of the troops +were removed at the time Count Louis advanced, we managed to leave +the town and make our way north. It was a terrible journey to +Enkhuizen; but we accomplished it, and after being there a fortnight +took passage in a ship for England, and, as you see, here we are." + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +THE QUEEN'S SERVICE + + +A few days after Ned's return home his aunt and cousins moved into +a house close by, which they had taken a short time before; Dame +Plomaert's half of the property, purchased with the money that +had been transmitted by her father-in-law and his sons to England, +being ample to keep them in considerable comfort. Just as Ned was +leaving Delft some despatches had been placed in his hands for +delivery upon his arrival in London to Lord Walsingham. The great +minister was in attendance upon the queen at Greenwich, and thither +Ned proceeded by boat on the morning after his arrival. On stating +that he was the bearer of despatches from the Prince of Orange +Ned at once obtained an audience, and bowing deeply presented his +letters to the queen's counsellor. The latter opened the letter +addressed to himself, and after reading a few words said: + +"Be seated, Captain Martin. The prince tells me that he sends it +by your hand, but that as you are prostrate by fever you will be +unable to deliver it personally. I am glad to see that you are so +far recovered." + +Ned seated himself, while Lord Walsingham continued the perusal of +his despatches. + +"The prince is pleased to speak in very high terms of you, Captain +Martin," he said, "and tells me that as you are entirely in his +confidence you will be able to give me much information besides +that that he is able to write." He then proceeded to question Ned +at length as to the state of feeling in Holland, its resources and +means of resistance, upon all of which points Ned replied fully. +The interview lasted near two hours, at the end of which time Lord +Walsingham said: + +"When I hand the letter inclosed within my own to the queen I shall +report to her majesty very favourably as to your intelligence, and +it may possibly be that she may desire to speak to you herself, for +she is deeply interested in this matter; and although circumstances +have prevented her showing that warmth for the welfare of Holland +that she feels, she has no less the interest of that country at +heart, and will be well pleased to find that one of her subjects +has been rendering such assistance as the prince is pleased to +acknowledge in his letter to me. Please, therefore, to leave your +address with my secretary in the next room, in order that I may +communicate with you if necessary." + +Two days later one of the royal servants brought a message that +Captain Martin was to present himself on the following day at +Greenwich, as her majesty would be pleased to grant him an audience. +Knowing that the queen loved that those around her should be +bravely attired, Ned dressed himself in the suit that he had only +worn once or twice when he had attended the prince to meetings of +the Estates. + +It was of a puce coloured satin, slashed with green, with a short +mantle of the same material, with the cape embroidered in silver. +The bonnet was to match, with a small white feather. He placed the +chain the prince had given him round his neck, and with an ample +ruff and manchets of Flemish lace, and his rapier by his side, he +took his place in the boat, and was rowed to Greenwich. He felt +some trepidation as he was ushered in. A page conducted him to the +end of the chamber, where the queen was standing with Lord Walsingham +at her side. Ned bowed profoundly, the queen held out her hand, +and bending on one knee Ned reverently placed it to his lips. + +"I am gratified, Captain Martin," she said, "at the manner in which +my good cousin, the Prince of Orange, has been pleased to speak +of your services to him. You are young indeed, sir, to have passed +through such perilous adventures; and I would fain hear from your +lips the account of the deliverance of Leyden, and of such other +matters as you have taken part in." + +The queen then seated herself, and Ned related modestly the events +at Leyden, Haarlem, Alkmaar, and the two sea fights in which he +had taken part. The queen several times questioned him closely as +to the various details. + +"We are much interested," she said, "in these fights, in which the +burghers of Holland have supported themselves against the soldiers +of Spain, seeing that we may ourselves some day have to maintain +ourselves against that power. How comes it, young sir, that you +came to mix yourself up in these matters? We know that many of our +subjects have crossed the water to fight against the Spaniards; +but these are for the most part restless spirits, who are attracted +as much, perhaps, by a love of adventure as by their sympathy with +the people of the Netherlands." + +Ned then related the massacre of his Dutch relations by the Spaniards, +and how his father had lost a leg while sailing out of Antwerp. + +"I remember me now," the queen said. "The matter was laid before +our council, and we remonstrated with the Spanish ambassador, and +he in turn accused our seamen of having first sunk a Spanish galley +without cause or reason. And when not employed in these dangerous +enterprises of which you have been speaking, do you say that you +have been in attendance upon the prince himself? He speaks in his +letter to my Lord Walsingham of his great confidence in you. How +came you first, a stranger and a foreigner, to gain the confidence +of so wise and prudent a prince?" + +"He intrusted a mission to me of some slight peril, your majesty, +and I was fortunate enough to carry it out to his satisfaction." + +"Tell me more of it," the queen said. "It may be that we ourselves +shall find some employment for you, and I wish to know upon what +grounds we should place confidence in you. Tell me fully the affair. +I am not pressed for time, and love to listen to tales of adventure." + +Ned thus commanded related in full the story of his mission to +Brussels. + +"Truly the prince's confidence was well reposed in you," she said, +when Ned had finished. "You shall hear from us anon, Captain Martin. +Since you know Holland so well, and are high in the confidence of +the prince, we shall doubtless be able to find means of utilizing +your services for the benefit of the realm." + +So saying she again extended her hand to Ned, who, after kissing +it, retired from the audience chamber delighted with the kindness +and condescension of Elizabeth. When he had left, the queen said +to Lord Walsingham. + +"A very proper young officer, Lord Walsingham; and one of parts +and intelligence as well as of bravery. Methinks we may find him +useful in our communications with the Prince of Orange; and from +his knowledge of the people we may get surer intelligence from him +of the state of feeling there with regard to the alliance they are +proposing with us, and to their offers to come under our protection, +than we can from our own envoy. It is advisable, too, at times to +have two mouthpieces; the one to speak in the public ear, the other +to deliver our private sentiments and plans." + +"He is young for so great a responsibility," Lord Walsingham said +hesitatingly. + +"If the Prince of Orange did not find him too young to act in +matters in which the slightest indiscretion might bring a score +of heads to the block, I think that we can trust him, my lord. In +some respects his youth will be a distinct advantage. Did we send +a personage of age and rank to Holland it might be suspected that +he had a special mission from us, and our envoy might complain that +we were treating behind his back; but a young officer like this +could come and go without attracting observation, and without even +Philip's spies suspecting that he was dabbling in affairs of state." + +At this time, indeed, the queen was, as she had long been, playing +a double game with the Netherlands. Holland and Zeeland were begging +the prince to assume absolute power. The Prince of Orange, who had +no ambition whatever for himself, was endeavouring to negotiate +with either England or France to take the Estates under their +protection. Elizabeth, while jealous of France, was unwilling to +incur the expenditure in men and still more money that would be +necessary were she to assume protection of Holland as its sovereign +under the title offered to her of Countess of Holland; and yet, +though unwilling to do this herself, she was still more unwilling +to see France step in and occupy the position offered to her, while, +above all, she shrank from engaging at present in a life and death +struggle with Spain. + +Thus, while ever assuring the Prince of Orange of her good-will, +she abstained from rendering any absolute assistance, although +continuing to hold out hopes that she would later on accept the +sovereignty offered. + +For the next three weeks Ned remained quietly at home. The gatherings +in the summer house were more largely attended than ever, and the +old sailors were never tired of hearing from Ned stories of the +sieges in Holland. + +It was a continual source of wonder to them how Will Martin's son, +who had seemed to them a boy like other boys, should have gone +through such perilous adventures, should have had the honour of +being in the Prince of Orange's confidence, and the still greater +honour of being received by the queen and allowed to kiss her +hand. It was little more than two years back that Ned had been a +boy among them, never venturing to give his opinion unless first +addressed, and now he was a young man, with a quiet and assured +manner, and bearing himself rather as a young noble of the court +than the son of a sea captain like themselves. + +It was all very wonderful, and scarce seemed to them natural, +especially as Ned was as quiet and unaffected as he had been as +a boy, and gave himself no airs whatever on the strength of the +good fortune that had befallen him. Much of his time was spent in +assisting his aunt to get her new house in order, and in aiding her +to move into it. This had just been accomplished when he received +an order to go down to Greenwich and call upon Lord Walsingham. +He received from him despatches to be delivered to the Prince +of Orange, together with many verbal directions for the prince's +private ear. He was charged to ascertain as far as possible the +prince's inclinations towards a French alliance, and what ground +he had for encouragement from the French king. + +"Upon your return, Captain Martin, you will render me an account of +all expenses you have borne, and they will, of course, be defrayed." + +"My expenses will be but small, my lord," Ned replied; "for it +chances that my father's ship sails tomorrow for Rotterdam, and I +shall take passage in her. While there I am sure that the prince, +whose hospitality is boundless, will insist upon my staying with +him as his guest; and, indeed, it seems to me that this would be +best so, for having so long been a member of his household it will +seem to all that I have but returned to resume my former position." + +The public service in the days of Queen Elizabeth was not sought for +by men for the sake of gain. It was considered the highest honour +to serve the queen; and those employed on embassies, missions, and +even in military commands spent large sums, and sometimes almost +beggared themselves in order to keep up a dignity worthy of their +position, considering themselves amply repaid for any sacrifices by +receiving an expression of the royal approval. Ned Martin therefore +returned home greatly elated at the honourable mission that had +been intrusted to him. His father, however, although also gratified +at Ned's reception at court and employment in the queen's service +looked at it from the matter of fact point of view. + +"It is all very well, Ned," he said, as they were talking the matter +over in family conclave in the evening; "and I do not deny that I +share in the satisfaction that all these women are expressing. It +is a high honour that you should be employed on a mission for her +majesty, and there are scores of young nobles who would be delighted +to be employed in such service; but you see, Ned, you are not +a young noble, and although honour is a fine thing, it will buy +neither bread nor cheese. If you were the heir to great estates you +would naturally rejoice in rendering services which might bring you +into favour at court, and win for you honour and public standing; +but you see you are the son of a master mariner, happily the owner +of his own ship and of other properties which are sufficient to +keep him in comfort, but which will naturally at the death of your +mother and myself go to the girls, while you will have the Good +Venture and my share in other vessels. But these are businesses +that want looking after, and the income would go but a little way +to support you in a position at court. You have now been two years +away from the sea. That matters little; but if you were to continue +in the royal service for a time you would surely become unfitted +to return to the rough life of a master mariner. Fair words butter +no parsnip, Ned. Honour and royal service empty the purse instead +of filling it. It behooves you to think these matters over." + +"I am surprised at you, Will," Dame Martin said. "I should have +thought that you would have been proud of the credit and honour +that Ned is winning. Why, all our neighbours are talking of nothing +else!" + +"All our neighbours will not be called upon, wife, to pay for Master +Ned's support, to provide him with courtly garments, and enable him +to maintain a position which will do credit to his royal mistress. +I am proud of Ned, as proud as anyone can be, but that is no reason +why I should be willing to see him spend his life as a needy hanger +on of the court rather than as a British sailor, bearing a good +name in the city, and earning a fair living by honest trade. Ned +knows that I am speaking only for his own good. Court favour is +but an empty thing, and our good queen is fickle in her likings, +and has never any hesitation in disavowing the proceedings of her +envoys. When a man has broad lands to fall back upon he can risk +the loss of court favour, and can go into retirement assured that +sooner or later he will again have his turn. But such is not Ned's +position. I say not that I wish him at once to draw back from +this course; but I would have him soberly think it over and judge +whether it is one that in the long run is likely to prove successful." + +Mrs. Martin, her sister-in-law, and the four girls looked anxiously +at Ned. They had all, since the day that he was first sent for to +Greenwich, been in a high state of delight at the honour that had +befallen him, and his father's words had fallen like a douche of +cold water upon their aspirations. + +"I fully recognize the truth of what you say, father," he said, +after a pause, "and will think it deeply over, which I shall have +time to do before my return from Holland. Assuredly it is not a +matter to be lightly decided. It may mean that this royal service +may lead to some position of profit as well as honour; although +now, as you have put it to me, I own that the prospect seems to me +to be a slight one, and that where so many are ready to serve for +honour alone, the chance of employment for one requiring money +as well as honour is but small. However, there can be no need for +instant decision. I am so fond of the sea that I am sure that, +even if away from it for two or three years, I should be ready and +willing to return to it. I am as yet but little over eighteen, and +even if I remained in the royal service until twenty-one I should +still have lost but little of my life, and should not be too old +to take to the sea again. + +"In time I shall see more plainly what the views of Lord Walsingham +are concerning me, and whether there is a prospect of advancement +in the service. He will know that I cannot afford to give my life +to the queen's service without pay, not being, as you say, a noble +or a great landowner." + +"That is very well spoken, Ned," his father said. "There is no +need in any way for you to come to any resolution on the subject +at present; I shall be well content to wait until you come of age. +As you say, by that time you will see whether this is but a brief +wind of royal favour, or whether my Lord Walsingham designs to +continue you in the royal service and to advance your fortunes. +I find that I am able to get on on board a ship better than I +had expected, and have no wish to retire from the sea at present; +therefore there will be plenty of time for you to decide when you +get to the age of one and twenty. Nevertheless this talk will not +have been without advantage, for it will be far better for you not +to have set your mind altogether upon court service; and you will +then, if you finally decide to return to the sea, not have to +suffer such disappointment as you would do had you regarded it as +a fixed thing that some great fortune was coming to you. So let +it be an understood thing, that this matter remains entirely open +until you come to the age of twenty-one." + +Ned accordingly went backwards and forwards to Holland for the next +two years, bearing letters and messages between the queen and the +Prince of Orange. + +There was some pause in military operations after the relief of +Leyden. Negotiations had for a long time gone on between the King +of Spain, acting by Royal Commissioners, on the one side, and the +prince and the Estates on the other. The Royal Commissioners were +willing in his name to make considerable concessions, to withdraw +the Spanish troops from the country, and to permit the Estates +General to assemble; but as they persisted that all heretics should +either recant or leave the provinces, no possible agreement could +be arrived at, as the question of religion was at the bottom of +the whole movement. + +During the year 1575 the only military operation of importance was +the recovery by the Spaniards of the Island of Schouwen, which, with +its chief town Zierickzee, was recovered by a most daring feat of +arms -- the Spaniards wading for miles through water up to the neck +on a wild and stormy night, and making their way across in spite +of the efforts of the Zeelanders in their ships. Zierickzee indeed +resisted for many months, and finally surrendered only to hunger; +the garrison obtaining good terms from the Spaniards, who were so +anxious for its possession that to obtain it they were even willing +for once to forego their vengeance for the long resistance it had +offered. + +In March, 1576, while the siege was still going on, Requesens died +suddenly of a violent fever, brought on partly by anxiety caused by +another mutiny of the troops. This mutiny more than counterbalanced +the advantage gained by the capture of the Island of Schouwen, for +after taking possession of it the soldiers engaged in the service +at once joined the mutiny and marched away into Brabant. + +The position of Holland had gone from bad to worse, the utmost +efforts of the population were needed to repair the broken dykes +and again recover the submerged lands. So bare was the country of +animals of all kinds, that it had become necessary to pass a law +forbidding for a considerable period the slaughter of oxen, cows, +calves, sheep, or poultry. Holland and Zeeland had now united in +a confederacy, of which the prince was at the head, and by an Act +of Union in June, 1575, the two little republics became virtually +one. Among the powers and duties granted to the prince he was to +maintain the practice of the reformed evangelical religion, and +to cause to cease the exercise of all other religions contrary to +the Gospel. He was, however, not to permit that inquisition should +be made into any man's belief or conscience, or that any man by +cause thereof should suffer trouble, injury, or hindrance. + +Upon one point only the prince had been peremptory, he would have +no persecution. In the original terms he had been requested to +suppress "the Catholic religion," but had altered the words into +"religion at variance with the Gospel." Almost alone, at a time when +every one was intolerant, the Prince of Orange was firmly resolved +that all men should have liberty of conscience. + +Holland suffered a great loss when Admiral Boisot fell in endeavouring +to relieve Zierickzee. The harbour had been surrounded by Spaniards +by a submerged dyke of piles of rubbish. Against this Boisot drove +his ship, which was the largest of his fleet. He did not succeed in +breaking through. The tide ebbed and left his ship aground, while +the other vessels were beaten back. Rather than fall into the +hands of the enemy, he and 300 of his companions sprang overboard +and endeavoured to effect their escape by swimming, but darkness +came on before he could be picked up, and he perished by drowning. + +The mutiny among the Spanish regiments spread rapidly, and the +greater part of the German troops of Spain took part in it. The +mutineers held the various citadels throughout the country, and +ravaged the towns, villages, and open country. The condition of +the people of Brabant was worse than ever. Despair led them to turn +again to the provinces which had so long resisted the authority +of Spain, and the fifteen other states, at the invitation of the +prince, sent deputies to Ghent to a general congress, to arrange for +a close union between the whole of the provinces of the Netherlands. + +Risings took place in all parts of the country, but they were always +repressed by the Spaniards; who, though in open mutiny against +their king and officers, had no idea of permitting the people of +the Netherlands to recover the liberty that had at the cost of so +much blood been wrung from them. Maastricht drove out its garrison; +but the Spaniards advanced against the town, seized a vast number +of women, and placing these before them advanced to the assault. +The citizens dared not fire, as many of their own wives or sisters +were among the women; the town was therefore taken, and a hideous +massacre followed. + +Ned Martin had now been two years engaged upon various missions to +Holland, and Lord Walsingham himself acknowledged to his mistress +that her choice of the young officer had been a singularly good +one. He had conducted himself with great discretion, his reports +were full and minute, and he had several times had audiences with +the queen, and had personally related to her matters of importance +concerning the state of Holland, and the views of the prince +and the Estates General. The congress at Ghent, and the agitation +throughout the whole of the Netherlands, had created a lively interest +in England, and Ned received orders to visit Ghent and Antwerp, +and to ascertain more surely the probability of an organization of +the provinces into a general confederation. + +When he reached Ghent he found that the attention of the citizens +was for the time chiefly occupied with the siege of the citadel, +which was held by a Spanish garrison, and he therefore proceeded +to Antwerp. This was at the time probably the wealthiest city +in Europe. It carried on the largest commerce in the world, its +warehouses were full of the treasures of all countries, its merchants +vied with princes in splendour. The proud city was dominated, +however, by its citadel, which had been erected not for the purpose +of external defence but to overawe the town. + +The governor of the garrison, D'Avila, had been all along recognized +as one of the leaders of the mutiny. The town itself was garrisoned +by Germans who still held aloof from the mutiny, but who had been +tampered with by him. The governor of the city, Champagny, although +a sincere Catholic, hated the Spaniards, and had entered into +negotiations with the prince. The citizens thought at present but +little of the common cause, their thoughts being absorbed by fears +of their own safety, threatened by the mutinous Spanish troops who +had already captured and sacked Alost, and were now assembling with +the evident intention of gathering for themselves the rich booty +contained within the walls of Antwerp. + +As they approached the town, a force of 5000 Walloon infantry and +1200 cavalry were despatched from Brussels to the aid of its sister +city. No sooner, however, did this force enter the town than it +broke into a mutiny, which was only repressed with the greatest +difficulty by Champagny. It was at this moment that Ned entered the +city. He at once communicated with the governor, and delivered to +him some messages with which he had been charged by the Prince of +Orange, whom he had visited on his way. + +"Had you arrived three days since I could have discussed these +matters with you," the governor said; "but as it is we are hourly +expecting attack, and can think of nothing but preparations for +defence. I shall be glad if you can assist me in that direction. +Half the German garrison are traitors, the Walloons who have just +entered are in no way to be relied upon, and it is the burghers +themselves upon whom the defence of the town must really fall. They +are now engaged in raising a rampart facing the citadel. I am at +once proceeding thither to superintend the work." + +Ned accompanied the governor to the spot and found twelve thousand +men and women labouring earnestly to erect a rampart, constructed +of bales of goods, casks of earth, upturned wagons, and other bulky +objects. The guns of the fortress opened upon the workers, and so +impeded them that night fell before the fortifications were nearly +completed. Unfortunately it was bright moonlight, and the artillerymen +continued their fire with such accuracy that the work was at last +abandoned, and the citizens retired to their homes. Champagny did +all that was possible. Aided by some burghers and his own servants, +he planted what few cannon there were at the weakest points; but +his general directions were all neglected, and not even scouts were +posted. + +In the morning a heavy mist hung over the city, and concealed the +arrival of the Spanish troops from all the towns and fortresses in +the neighbourhood. As soon as it was fairly daylight the defenders +mustered. The Marquis of Havre claimed for the Walloons the post +of honour in defence of the lines facing the citadel; and 6000 +men were disposed here, while the bulk of the German garrison were +stationed in the principal squares. + +At ten o'clock the mutineers from Alost marched into the citadel, +raising the force there to 5000 veteran infantry and 600 cavalry. + +Ned had been all night at work assisting the governor. He had now +laid aside his ordinary attire, and was clad in complete armour. +He was not there to fight; but there was clearly nothing else to +do, unless indeed he made his escape at once to the fleet of the +Prince of Orange, which was lying in the river. This he did not +like doing until it was clear that all was lost. He had seen the +Dutch burghers beat back the most desperate assaults of the Spanish +troops, and assuredly the Walloons and Germans, who, without counting +the burghers, considerably exceeded the force of the enemy, ought +to be able to do the same. + +Just before daybreak he made his way down to the quays, ascertained +the exact position of the fleet, and determined how he had best +get on board. He chose a small boat from among those lying at the +quay, and removed it to the foot of some stairs by a bridge. He +fastened the head rope to a ring and pushed the boat off, so that +it lay under the bridge, concealed from the sight of any who might +pass along the wharves. Having thus prepared for his own safety, +he was making his way to rejoin the governor when a woman came out +from a house in a quiet street. As she met him he started. + +"Why, Magdalene!" he exclaimed, "is it you? What are you doing in +Antwerp? Is the countess here?" + +The woman looked at him in surprise. + +"Don't you remember me, Magdalene? the boy you dressed up as a girl +at Brussels, and whom you last saw at Maastricht?" + +"Bless me!" the old servant exclaimed, "is it you, sir? I should +never have known you again." + +"Three years make a great deal of difference," Ned laughed; "and +it is more than that now since we last met." + +"Please to come in, sir; the countess will be right glad to see +you, and so will Miss Gertrude. They have talked of you hundreds +of times, and wondered what had become of you." She opened the door +again with the great key, and led the way into the house. + +"Mistress," she said, showing the way into the parlour, "here is +a visitor for you." The countess and her daughter had, like every +one else in Antwerp, been up all night, and rose from her seat by +the fire as the young officer entered. He took off his helmet and +bowed deeply. + +"What is your business with me?" the countess asked, seeing that +he did not speak. + +"I have not come exactly upon business, countess," he replied, "but +to thank you for past kindnesses." + +"Mother, it is the English boy!" exclaimed the young lady sitting +upon the side of the fire, rising from her seat. "Surely, sir, you +are Master Edward Martin?" + +"Your eyes are not in fault, Fraulein. I am Edward Martin." + +"I am glad, indeed, to see you, sir," the countess said. "How often +my daughter and I have longed for the time when we might again +meet you to tell how grateful we are for the service you did us. I +wonder now that I did not recognize you; but you have changed from +a lad into a man. You must remember it is more than four years since +we were together at Brussels. As for the meeting near Maastricht, +it was such a short one; and I was so full of joy at the thought +that Gertrude and I had escaped the fearful danger hanging over us +that I scarce noticed your appearance, nor had we any time to talk +then. We received the letter you wrote after leaving us at Brussels, +from the Hague, telling us that you had arrived there safely. But +since you did us that service at Maastricht we have never heard of +you." + +"I had not your address," Ned replied. "And even had I known where +you were I should not have dared to write; for there was no saying +into whose hands the letter might not fall. But, countess, excuse +me if I turn to other matters, for the time presses sorely. You +know that the city will be attacked today." + +"So every one says," the countess replied. "But surely you do not +think that there is any danger. The Walloons and Germans should +be able alone to hold the barricades, and behind them are all the +citizens." + +"I put little faith in the Walloons," Ned said shortly; "and some +of the Germans we know have been bribed. I would rather that all +were out of the way, and that it were left to the burghers alone +to defend the barricades. I have seen how the citizens of the +Netherlands can fight at Haarlem and Alkmaar. As for these Walloons, I +have no faith in them. I fear, countess, that the danger is great; +and if the Spaniards succeed in winning their way into the town, +there is no mercy to be expected for man, woman, or child. I consider +that it would be madness for you to stay here." + +"But what are we to do, sir?" the countess asked. + +"The only way, madam, is to make your way on board the prince's +fleet. I am known to many of the officers, and can place you on +board at once. If you wait until the Spaniards enter it will be +too late. There will be a wild rush to the river, and the boats +will be swamped. If the attack fails, and the Spaniards retire from +before the city, you can if you choose return to shore, though I +should say that even then it will be better by far to go to Rotterdam +or Delft; unless you decide to do as you once talked about, to find +a refuge for a time in England." + +"I will accept your offer gladly, sir," the countess said. "I have +long been looking for some way to leave the city. But none can go +on board the ships without a pass, and I have not dared to ask for +one. Not for worlds would I expose my daughter to the horrors of +a sack. Can we go at once?" + +"Yes, madam, I have everything in readiness, and would advise no +delay." + +"I have nothing that I need mind leaving behind. I am, as you see, +more comfortable here than I was at Brussels; but I am still forced +to keep my concealment. In five minutes we shall be ready." + + + +CHAPTER XX + +THE "SPANISH FURY" + + +In a very short time the countess and her daughter returned to the +room where Ned was awaiting them. Each carried a handbag. + +"We are ready now," the countess said. "I have my jewels and purse. +As for the things we leave behind, they are scarce worth the taking +by the Spaniards." + +Locking the door of the house behind them the three women accompanied +Ned down to the riverside. He took the first boat that came to +hand and rowed them down to the fleet, which was moored a quarter +of a mile below the town. He passed the first ship or two, and then +rowed to one with whose captain he was acquainted. + +"Captain Enkin," he said, "I have brought on board two ladies who +have long been in hiding, waiting an opportunity of being taken to +Holland -- the Countess Von Harp and her daughter. I fear greatly +that Antwerp will fall today, and wish, therefore, to place them +in safety before the fight begins. Before sunset, unless I am +mistaken, you will have a crowd of fugitives on board." + +"I am very pleased, madam," the captain said, bowing to the countess, +"to receive you, and beg to hand over my cabin for your use. The +name you bear is known to all Dutchmen; and even were it not so, +anyone introduced to me by my good friend Captain Martin would be +heartily welcome. + +"Are you going to return on shore?" he asked Ned. + +"Yes, I must do so," Ned replied. "I promised the governor to +stand by him to the last; and as he has scarce a soul on whom he +can rely, it is clearly my duty to do so. It is not for me to shirk +doing my duty as long as I can, because I fear that the day will +go against us." + +"You will have difficulty in getting off again if the Spaniards +once enter the city," the captain said. "There will be such a rush +to the boats that they will be swamped before they leave shore." + +"I have a boat hidden away in which I hope to bring off the governor +with me," Ned replied. "As to myself, I can swim like a fish." + +"Mind and get rid of your armour before you try it. All the swimming +in the world could not save you if you jumped in with all that +steel mail on you." + +"I will bear it in mind," Ned said. "Goodbye, countess. Good-bye, +Fraulein Gertrude. I trust to see you at nightfall, if not before." + +"That is a very gallant young officer," Captain Enkin said as the +two ladies sat watching Ned as he rowed to the shore. + +"You addressed him as Captain Martin?" the countess said. + +"Yes, he has been a captain in the prince's service fully three +years," the sailor said; "and fought nobly at Alkmaar, at the +naval battle on the Zuider Zee, and in the sea fight when we drove +Romero's fleet back in Bergen. He stands very high in the confidence +of the prince, but I do not think he is in our service now. He +is often with the prince, but I believe he comes and goes between +England and Holland, and is, men say, the messenger by whom private +communications between the queen of England and the prince are +chiefly carried." + +"He is young to have such confidence reposed in him," the countess +said. + +"Yes, he is young," Captain Enkin replied. "Not, I suppose, beyond +seven or eight and twenty. He was a captain and high in the prince's +confidence when I first knew him three years ago, so he must surely +have been four or five and twenty then; and yet, indeed, now you +speak of it, methinks he is greatly bigger now than he was then. +I do not think he was much taller than I am, and now he tops me +by nigh a head. But I must surely be mistaken as to that, for the +prince would scarcely place his confidence in a mere lad." + +The countess made no reply, though she exchanged a quiet smile +with her daughter. They knew that Ned could not be much more than +twenty. He was, he had said, about three years older than Gertrude, +and she had passed seventeen but by a few months. + +Ned, on returning to shore, tied up the boat, and then proceeded +to the palace of the governor. A servant was holding a horse at +the door. + +"The governor ordered this horse to be ready and saddled for you, +sir, when you arrived, and begged you to join him at once in the +marketplace, where he is telling off the troops to their various +stations." + +Leaping on the horse, Ned rode to the marketplace, and at once +placed himself under orders of the governor. + +"There is nothing much for you to do at present," Champagny said. +"The troops are all in their places, and we are ready when they +deliver the assault." + +It was not until eleven o'clock that the Spaniards advanced to the +attack -- 3000 of them, under their Eletto, by the street of St. +Michael; the remainder with the Germans, commanded by Romero, by +that of St. George. No sooner did the compact masses approach the +barricades than the Walloons, who had been so loud in their boasts +of valour, and had insisted upon having the post of danger, broke +and fled, their commander, Havre, at their head; and the Spaniards, +springing over the ramparts, poured into the streets. + +"Fetch up the Germans from the exchange!" Champagny shouted to +Ned; and leaping his horse over a garden wall, he himself rode to +another station and brought up the troops there, and led them in +person to bar the road to the enemy, trying in vain to rally the +flying Walloons he met on the way. For a few minutes the two parties +of Germans made a brave stand; but they were unable to resist the +weight and number of the Spaniards, who bore them down by sheer +force. Champagny had fought gallantly in the melee, and Ned, keeping +closely beside him, had well seconded his efforts; but when the +Germans were borne down they rode off, dashing through the streets +and shouting to the burghers everywhere to rise in defence of their +homes. + +They answered to the appeal. The bodies already collected at the +exchange and cattle market moved forward, and from every house the +men poured out. The Spanish columns had already divided, and were +pouring down the streets with savage cries. The German cavalry +of Havre under Van Eude at once deserted, and joining the Spanish +cavalry fell upon the townsmen. In vain the burghers and such of +the German infantry as remained faithful strove to resist their +assailants. Although they had been beaten off in their assaults +upon breaches, the Spaniards had ever proved themselves invincible +on level ground; and now, inspired alike by the fury for slaughter +and the lust for gold, there was no withstanding them. + +Round the exchange some of the bravest defenders made a rally, and +burghers and Germans, mingled together, fought stoutly until they +were all slain. + +There was another long struggle round the town hall, one of the +most magnificent buildings in Europe; and for a time the resistance +was effective, until the Spanish cavalry and the Germans under the +traitor Van Eude charged down upon the defenders. Then they took +refuge in the buildings, and every house became a fortress, and from +window and balcony a hot fire was poured into the square. But now +a large number of camp followers who had accompanied the Spaniards +came up with torches, which had been specially prepared for firing +the town, and in a short time the city hall and other edifices in +the square were in flames. + +The fire spread rapidly from house to house and from street to +street, until nearly a thousand buildings in the most splendid and +wealthy portion of the city were in a blaze. + +In the street behind the town hall a last stand was made. Here the +margrave of the city, the burgomasters, senators, soldiers, and +citizens fought to the last, until not one remained to wield a sword. +When resistance had ceased the massacre began. Women, children, +and old men were killed in vast numbers, or driven into the river +to drown there. + +Then the soldiers scattered on the work of plunder. The flames had +already snatched treasures estimated at six millions from their +grasp, but there was still abundance for all. The most horrible +tortures were inflicted upon men, women, and children to force +them to reveal the hiding places, where they were supposed to have +concealed their wealth, and for three days a pandemonium reigned +in the city. Two thousand five hundred had been slain, double that +number burned and drowned. These are the lowest estimates, many +placing the killed at very much higher figures. + +Champagny had fought very valiantly, joining any party of soldiers +or citizens he saw making a defence. At last, when the town hall +was in flames and all hope over, he said to Ned, who had kept +throughout the day at his side: "It is no use throwing away our +lives. Let us cut our way out of the city." + +"I have a boat lying in readiness at the bridge," Ned said. "If we +can once reach the stairs we can make our way off to the fleet." + +As they approached the river they saw a Spanish column crossing the +street ahead of them. Putting spurs to their horses they galloped +on at full speed, and bursting into it hewed their way through and +continued their course, followed, however, by a number of Spanish +infantry. + +"These are the steps!" Ned exclaimed, leaping from his horse. + +Champagny followed his example. The Spaniards were but twenty yards +behind. + +"If you pull on that rope attached to the ring a boat lying under +the bridge will come to you," Ned said. "I will keep them back till +you are ready." + +Ned turned and faced the Spaniards, and for two or three minutes +kept them at bay. His armour was good, and though many blows struck +him he was uninjured, while several of the Spaniards fell under +his sweeping blows. They fell back for a moment, surprised at his +strength; and at this instant the governor called out that all was +ready. + +Ned turned and rushed down the steps. The governor was already +in the boat. Ned leaped on board, and with a stroke of his sword +severed the head rope. Before the leading Spaniards reached the +bottom of the steps the boat was a length away. Ned seated himself, +and seizing the oars rowed down the river. Several shots were fired +at them from the bridge and wharves as they went, but they passed +on uninjured. Ned rowed to the admiral's ship and left the governor +there, and then rowed to that of Captain Enkin. + +"Welcome back," the captain said heartily. "I had begun to fear +that ill had befallen you. A few fugitives came off at noon with +the news that the Spaniards had entered the city and all was lost. +Since then the roar of musketry, mingled with shouts and yells, has +been unceasing, and that tremendous fire in the heart of the city +told its own tale. For the last three hours the river has been full +of floating corpses; and the countess and her daughter, who until +then remained on deck, retired to pray in their cabin. The number +of fugitives who have reached the ships is very small. Doubtless +they crowded into such boats as there were and sank them. At any +rate, but few have made their way out, and those chiefly at the +beginning of the fight. Now we had best let the ladies know you +are here, for they have been in the greatest anxiety about you." + +Ned went to the cabin door and knocked. "I have returned, countess." + +In a moment the door opened. "Welcome back, indeed, Captain Martin," +she said. "We had begun to fear that we should never see you again. +Thankful indeed am I that you have escaped through this terrible +day. Are you unhurt?" she asked, looking at his bruised and dented +armour and at his clothes, which were splashed with blood. + +"I have a few trifling cuts," he replied, "but nothing worth speaking +of. I am truly thankful, countess, that you and your daughter put +off with me this morning." + +"Yes, indeed," the countess said. "I shudder when I think what +would have happened had we been there in the city. What a terrible +sight it is!" + +"It is, indeed," Ned replied. The shades of night had now fallen, +and over a vast space the flames were mounting high, and a pall of +red smoke, interspersed with myriads of sparks and flakes of fire, +hung over the captured city. Occasional discharges of guns were +still heard, and the shrieks of women and the shouts of men rose +in confused din. It was an immense relief to all on board when +an hour later the admiral, fearing that the Spaniards might bring +artillery to bear upon the fleet, ordered the anchors to be weighed, +and the fleet to drop a few miles below the town. + +After taking off his armour, washing the blood from his wounds and +having them bound up, and attiring himself in a suit lent him by +the captain until he should get to Delft, where he had left his +valise, Ned partook of a good meal, for he had taken nothing but +a manchet of bread and a cup of wine since the previous night. +He then went into the cabin and spent the evening in conversation +with the countess and her daughter, the latter of whom had changed +since they had last met to the full as much as he had himself done. +She had been a girl of fourteen -- slim and somewhat tall for her +age, and looking pale and delicate from the life of confinement and +anxiety they had led at Brussels, and their still greater anxiety +at Maastricht. She was now budding into womanhood. Her figure was +lissome and graceful, her face was thoughtful and intelligent, +and gave promise of rare beauty in another year or two. He learned +that they had remained for a time in the village to which they had +first gone, and had then moved to another a few miles away, and +had there lived quietly in a small house placed at their disposal +by one of their friends. Here they had remained unmolested until two +months before, when the excesses committed throughout the country +by the mutinous soldiery rendered it unsafe for anyone to live +outside the walls of the town. They then removed to Antwerp, where +there was far more religious toleration than at Brussels; and the +countess had resumed her own name, though still living in complete +retirement in the house in which Ned had so fortunately found her. + +"The times have altered me for the better," the countess said. "The +Spaniards have retired from that part of Friesland where some of +my estates are situated, and those to whom Alva granted them have +had to fly. I have a faithful steward there, and since they have +left he has collected the rents and has remitted to me such portions +as I required, sending over the rest to England to the charge of +a banker there. As it may be that the Spaniards will again sweep +over Friesland, where they still hold some of the principal towns, +I thought it best, instead of having my money placed in Holland, +where no one can foresee the future, to send it to England, where +at least one can find a refuge and a right to exercise our religion." + +"I would that you would go there at once, countess; for surely at +present Holland is no place for two unprotected ladies. Nothing +would give my mother greater pleasure than to receive you until you +can find a suitable home for yourselves. My sisters are but little +older than your daughter, and would do all in their power to make +her at home. They too speak your language, and there are thousands +of your compatriots in London." + +"What do you say, Gertrude?" the countess asked. "But I know that +your mind has been so long made up that it is needless to question +you." + +"Yes, indeed, mother, I would gladly go away anywhere from here, +where for the last six years there has been nothing but war and +bloodshed. If we could go back and live in Friesland among our +own people in safety and peace I should be delighted to do so, but +this country is as strange to us as England would be. Our friends +stand aloof from us, and we are ever in fear either of persecution +or murder by the Spanish soldiers. I should be so glad to be away +from it all; and, as Captain Martin says, there are so many of our +own people in London, that it would scarce feel a strange land to +us." + +"You have said over and over again that you would gladly go if you +could get away, and now that we can do so, surely it will be better +and happier for us than to go on as we have done. Of course it +would be better in Holland than it has been here for the last four +years, because we should be amongst Protestants; but we should be +still exposed to the dangers of invasion and the horrors of sieges." + +"It is as my daughter says, Captain Martin; our thoughts have long +been turning to England as a refuge. In the early days of the +troubles I had thought of France, where so many of our people went, +but since St. Bartholomew it has been but too evident that there is +neither peace nor safety for those of the religion there, and that +in England alone can we hope to be permitted to worship unmolested. +Therefore, now that the chance is open to us, we will not refuse +it. I do not say that we will cross at once. We have many friends +at Rotterdam and Delft, and the prince held my husband in high +esteem in the happy days before the troubles; therefore I shall +tarry there for a while, but it will be for a time only. It will +not be long before the Spanish again resume their war of conquest; +besides, we are sick of the tales of horror that come to us daily, +and long for calm and tranquillity, which we cannot hope to obtain +in Holland. Had I a husband or brothers I would share their fate +whatever it was, but being alone and unable to aid the cause in +any way it would be folly to continue here and endure trials and +risks. You say that you come backwards and forwards often, well +then in two months we shall be ready to put ourselves under your +protection and to sail with you for England." + +The next morning the admiral despatched a ship to Rotterdam with +the news of the fate of Antwerp, and Ned obtained a passage in her +for himself, the ladies, and servant, and on arriving at Rotterdam +saw them bestowed in comfortable lodgings. He then, after an +interview with the prince, went on board a ship just leaving for +England, and upon his arrival reported to the minister, and afterwards +to the queen herself, the terrible massacre of which he had been +a witness in Antwerp. + +The Spanish fury, as the sack of Antwerp was termed, vastly enriched +the soldiers, but did small benefit to the cause of Spain. The +attack was wanton and unprovoked. Antwerp had not risen in rebellion +against Philip, but had been attacked solely for the sake of plunder; +and all Europe was shocked at the atrocities that had taken place, +and at the slaughter, which was even greater than the massacre +in Paris on the eve of St. Bartholomew. The queen remonstrated in +indignant terms, the feeling among the Protestants in Germany was +equally strong, and even in France public feeling condemned the +act. + +In the Netherlands the feeling of horror and indignation was +universal. The fate that had befallen Antwerp might be that of +any other sister city. Everywhere petitions were signed in favour +of the unity of all the Netherlands under the Prince of Orange. +Philip's new governor, Don John, had reached the Netherlands on +the very day of the sack of Antwerp, and endeavoured to allay the +storm of indignation it had excited by various concessions; but +the feeling of unity, and with it of strength, had grown so rapidly +that the demands of the commissioners advanced in due proportion, +and they insisted upon nothing less than the restoration of their +ancient constitution, the right to manage their internal affairs, +and the departure of all the Spanish troops from the country. + +Don John parleyed and parried the demands, and months were spent +in unprofitable discussions, while all the time he was working +secretly among the nobles of Brabant and Flanders, who were little +disposed to see with complacency the triumph of the democracy +of the towns and the establishment of religious toleration. Upon +all other points Don John and his master were ready to yield. The +Spanish troops were sent away to Italy, the Germans only being +retained. The constitutional rights would all have been conceded, +but on the question of religious tolerance Philip stood firm. +At last, seeing that no agreement would ever be arrived at, both +parties prepared again for war. + +The Queen of England had lent 100,000 pounds on the security of the +cities, and the pause in hostilities during the negotiations had +not been altogether wasted in Holland. There had been a municipal +insurrection in Amsterdam; the magistrates devoted to Philip had +been driven out, and to the great delight of Holland, Amsterdam, +its capital, that had long been a stronghold of the enemy, a +gate through which he could at will pour his forces, was restored +to it. In Antwerp, and several other of the cities of Brabant and +Flanders, the citizens razed the citadels by which they had been +overawed; men, women, and children uniting in the work, tearing +down and carrying away the stones of the fortress, that had worked +them such evil. + +Antwerp had at the departure of the Spanish troops been again +garrisoned by Germans, who had remained inactive during this +exhibition of the popular will. The Prince of Orange himself had +paid a visit to the city, and had, at the invitation of Brussels, +proceeded there, and had received an enthusiastic reception, and +for a time it seemed that the plans for which so many years he had +struggled were at last to be crowned with success. But his hopes +were frustrated by the treachery of the nobles and the cowardice +of the army the patriots had engaged in their service. + +Many of the Spanish troops had been secretly brought back again, +and Don John was preparing for a renewal of war. + +Unknown to the Prince of Orange, numbers of the nobles had invited +the Archduke Mathias, brother of the Emperor Rudolph of Germany, +to assume the government. Mathias, without consultation with his +brother, accepted the invitation and journeyed privately to the +Netherlands. Had the Prince of Orange declared against him he must +at once have returned to Vienna, but this would have aroused the +anger of the emperor and the whole of Germany. Had the prince upon +the other hand abandoned the field and retired into Holland, he +would have played into the hands of his adversaries. Accordingly +he received Mathias at Antwerp with great state, and the archduke +was well satisfied to place himself in the hands of the most powerful +man in the country. + +The prince's position was greatly strengthened by the queen +instructing her ministers to inform the envoy of the Netherlands +that she would feel compelled to withdraw all succour of the states +if the Prince of Orange was deprived of his leadership, as it was +upon him alone that she relied for success. The prince was thereupon +appointed Ruward of Brabant, a position almost analogous to that +of dictator. Ghent, which was second only in importance to Antwerp, +rose almost immediately, turned out the Catholic authorities, and +declared in favour of the prince. A new act of union was signed +at Brussels, and the Estates General passed a resolution declaring +Don John to be no longer governor or stadtholder of the Netherlands. +The Prince of Orange was appointed lieutenant general for Mathias, +and the actual power of the latter was reduced to a nullity, but +he was installed at Brussels with the greatest pomp and ceremony. + +Don John, who had by this time collected an army of 20,000 veterans +at Namur, and had been joined by the Prince of Parma, a general +of great vigour and ability, now marched against the army of the +Estates, of which the command had been given to the nobles of the +country in the hope of binding them firmly to the national cause. + +The patriot army fell back before that of the Spaniards, but were +soon engaged by a small body of cavalry. Alexander of Parma came +up with some 1200 horse, dashed boldly across a dangerous swamp, +and fell upon their flank. The Estates cavalry at once turned and +fled, and Parma then fell upon the infantry, and in the course of +an hour not only defeated but almost exterminated them, from 7000 +to 8000 being killed, and 600 taken prisoners, the latter being +executed without mercy by Don John. The loss of the Spaniards was +only about ten men. This extraordinary disproportion of numbers, +and the fact that 1200 men so easily defeated a force ten times +more numerous, completely dashed to the ground the hopes of the +Netherlands, and showed how utterly incapable were its soldiers of +contending in the field with the veterans of Spain. + +The battle was followed by the rapid reduction of a large number of +towns, most of which surrendered without resistance as soon as the +Spanish troops approached. In the meantime the Estates had assembled +another army, which was joined by one composed of 12,000 Germans +under Duke Casimir. Both armies were rendered inactive by want of +funds, and the situation was complicated by the entry of the Duke +of Alencon, the brother of the King of France, into the Netherlands. +Don John, the hero of the battle of Lepanto, who had shown himself +on many battlefields to be at once a great commander and a valiant +soldier, was prostrate by disease, brought on by vexation, partly +at the difficulties he had met with since his arrival in the +Netherlands, partly at the neglect of Spain to furnish him with +money with which he could set his army, now numbering 30,000, in +motion, and sweep aside all resistance. At this critical moment +his malady increased, and after a week's illness he expired, just +two years after his arrival in the Netherlands. + +He was succeeded at first temporarily and afterwards permanently +by Alexander of Parma, also a great commander, and possessing far +greater resolution than his unfortunate predecessor. + +The two years had been spent by Edward Martin in almost incessant +journeyings between London and the Netherlands. He now held, however, +a position much superior to that which he had formerly occupied. +The queen, after hearing from him his account of the sack of Antwerp +and his share in the struggle, had said to the Secretary, "I think +that it is only just that we should bestow upon Captain Martin +some signal mark of our approbation at the manner in which he has +for two years devoted himself to our service, and that without pay +or reward, but solely from his loyalty to our person, and from his +goodwill towards the state. Kneel, Captain Martin." + +The queen took the sword that Walsingham handed to her, and said, +"Rise, Sir Edward Martin. You will draw out, Mr. Secretary, our new +knight's appointment as our special envoy to the Prince of Orange; +and see that he has proper appointments for such a post. His duties +will, as before, be particular to myself and the prince, and will +not clash in any way with those of our envoy at the Hague." + +The delight of Ned's mother and sisters when he returned home and +informed them of the honour that the queen had been pleased to +bestow upon him was great indeed. His father said: + +"Well, Ned, I must congratulate you with the others; though I had +hoped to make a sailor of you. However, circumstances have been too +much for me. I own that you have been thrust into this work rather +by fortune than design; and as it is so I am heartily glad that +you have succeeded. It seems strange to me that my boy should have +become Sir Edward Martin, an officer in the service of her majesty, +and I say frankly that just at present I would rather that it had +been otherwise. But I suppose I shall get accustomed to it in time, +and assuredly none but myself will doubt for a moment that you have +gained greatly by all this honour and dignity." + +Queen Elizabeth, although in some respects parsimonious in the +extreme, was liberal to her favourites, and the new made knight +stood high in her liking. She loved to have good looking men about +her; and without being actually handsome, Ned Martin, with his +height and breadth of shoulder, his easy and upright carriage, his +frank, open face and sunny smile, was pleasant to look upon. He had +served her excellently for two years, had asked for no rewards or +favours, but had borne himself modestly, and been content to wait. +Therefore the queen was pleased to order her treasurer to issue +a commission to Sir Edward Martin, as her majesty's special envoy +to the Prince of Orange, with such appointments as would enable +him handsomely to support his new dignity and his position as her +representative. + +Even Captain Martin was now bound to confess that Ned had gained +profit as well as honour. He did indeed warn his son not to place +too much confidence in princes; but Ned replied, "I do not think the +queen is fickle in her likes and dislikes, father. But I rely not +upon this, but on doing my duty to the state for further employment. +I have had extraordinary good fortune, too; and have, without any +merit save that of always doing my best, mounted step by step from +the deck of the Good Venture to knighthood and employment by the +state. The war appears to me to be as far from coming to an end +as it did six years ago; and if I continue to acquit myself to the +satisfaction of the lord treasurer and council, I hope that at its +conclusion I may be employed upon such further work as I am fitted +for." + +"You speak rightly, Ned; and I am wrong to feel anxiety about your +future when you have already done so well. And now, Ned, you had +best go into the city and order from some tailor who supplies the +court such suits as are fitting to your new rank. The queen loves +brave dresses and bright colours, and you must cut as good a figure +as the rest. You have been somewhat of an expense to me these last two +years; but that is over now, and I can well afford the additional +outlay to start you worthily. What was good enough for Captain +Martin is not good enough for Sir Edward Martin; therefore stint +not expense in any way. I should not like that you should not hold +your own with the young fops of the court." + +It was well that Ned had provided himself with a new outfit, for +he was not sent abroad again for more than a month, and during +that time he was almost daily at court, receiving from the royal +chamberlain a notification that the queen expected to see him at +all entertainments. At the first of these Lord Walsingham introduced +him to many of the young nobles of the court, speaking very highly +of the services he had rendered; and as the queen was pleased to +speak often to him and to show him marked favour, he was exceedingly +well received, and soon found himself at ease. + +He was, nevertheless, glad when the order came for him to proceed +again to Holland with messages to the Prince of Orange. Upon his +arrival there he was warmly congratulated by the prince. + +"You have well earned your rank," the prince said. "I take some pride +to myself in having so soon discovered that you had good stuff in +you. There are some friends of yours here who will be glad to hear +of the honour that has befallen you. The Countess Von Harp and her +daughter have been here for the last six weeks. I have seen them +several times, and upon each occasion they spoke to me of their +gratitude for the services you have rendered them. One of my pages +will show you where they are lodging. They are about to proceed to +England, and I think their decision is a wise one, for this country +is at present no place for unprotected women." + +The countess and her daughter were alike surprised and pleased +when Ned was announced as Sir Edward Martin. And when a fortnight +later Ned sailed for England, they took passage in the same ship. +Ned had sent word to his mother by a vessel that sailed a week +previously that they would arrive with him, and the best room in +the house had been got in readiness for them, and they received +a hearty welcome from Ned's parents and sisters. They stayed a +fortnight there and then established themselves in a pretty little +house in the village of Dulwich. One of Ned's sisters accompanied +them to stay for a time as Gertrude's friend and companion. + +Whenever Ned returned home he was a frequent visitor at Dulwich, +and at the end of two years his sisters were delighted but not +surprised when he returned one day and told them that Gertrude +Von Harp had accepted him. The marriage was not to take place for +a time; for Ned was still young, and the countess thought it had +best be delayed. She was now receiving a regular income from her +estates; for it had been a time of comparative peace in Holland, +and that country was increasing fast in wealth and prosperity. + +Alexander of Parma had by means of his agents corrupted the greater +part of the nobility of Flanders and Brabant, had laid siege to +Maastricht, and, after a defence even more gallant and desperate +than that of Haarlem, and several terrible repulses of his soldiers, +had captured the city and put the greater part of its inhabitants +-- men and women -- to the sword. After vain entreaties to Elizabeth +to assume the sovereignty of the Netherlands, this had been offered +to the Duke of Anjou, brother of the King of France. + +The choice appeared to be a politic one, for Anjou was at the time +the all but accepted suitor of Queen Elizabeth, and it was thought +that the choice would unite both powers in defence of Holland. The +duke, however, speedily proved his incapacity. Irritated at the +smallness of the authority granted him, and the independent attitude +of the great towns, he attempted to capture them by force. He was +successful in several places; but at Antwerp, where the French +thought to repeat the Spanish success and to sack the city, the +burghers gathered so strongly and fiercely that the French troops +employed were for the most part killed, those who survived being +ignominiously taken prisoners. + +Anjou retired with his army, losing a large number of men on his +retreat by the bursting of a dyke and the flooding of the country. +By this time the Prince of Orange had accepted the sovereignty of +Holland and Zeeland, which was now completely separated from the +rest of the Netherlands. After the flight of Anjou he received many +invitations from the other provinces to accept their sovereignty; +but he steadily refused, having no personal ambition, and knowing +well that no reliance whatever could be placed upon the nobles of +Brabant and Flanders + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE SIEGE OF ANTWERP + + +On the 10th of July, 1584, a deep gloom was cast over all Holland +and England, by the assassination of the Prince of Orange. Many +attempts had been made upon his life by paid agents of the King +of Spain. One had been nearly successful, and the prince had lain +for weeks almost at the point of death. At last the hatred of Philip +and Parma gained its end, and the prince fell a victim to the bullet +of an assassin, who came before him disguised as a petitioner. His +murderer was captured, and put to death with horrible tortures, +boasting of his crime to the last. It was proved beyond all +question that he, as well as the authors of the previous attempts, +was acting at the instigation of the Spanish authorities, and had +been promised vast sums in the event of his success. + +Thus died the greatest statesman of his age; a pure patriot, a +disinterested politician, a great orator, a man possessing at once +immense talent, unbounded perseverance, a fortitude under misfortunes +beyond proof, and an unshakeable faith in God. But terrible as was +the blow to the Netherlands, it failed to have the effect which +its instigators had hoped from it. On the very day of the murder +the Estates of Holland, then sitting at Delft, passed a resolution +"to maintain the good cause, with God's help, to the uttermost, +without sparing gold or blood." The prince's eldest son had been +kidnapped from school in Leyden by Philip's orders, and had been +a captive in Spain for seventeen years under the tutorship of +the Jesuits. Maurice, the next son, now seventeen years old, was +appointed head of the States Council. + +But the position of the Netherlands was still well nigh desperate. +Flanders and Brabant lay at the feet of the Spaniards. A rising +which had lately taken place had been crushed. Bruges had surrendered +without a blow. The Duke of Parma, with 18,000 troops, besides his +garrisons, was threatening Ghent, Mechlin, Brussels, and Antwerp, and +was freely using promises and bribery to induce them to surrender. +Dendermonde and Vilvoorde both opened their gates, the capitulation +of the latter town cutting the communication between Brussels and +Antwerp. Ghent followed the example and surrendered without striking +a blow, and at the moment of the assassination of the Prince of +Orange Parma's army was closing round Antwerp. + +Sir Edward Martin was at Antwerp, where he had gone by the queen's +order, when he received the news of the murder of the prince, whom +he had seen a few days before. He was filled with grief and horror +at the loss of one who had been for six years his friend, and whom +he regarded with enthusiastic admiration. It seemed to him at first +that with the death of the prince the cause of the Netherlands was +lost, and had the former attempts of Philip's emissaries upon the +prince's life been successful such a result would no doubt have +followed; but the successful defence of their cities, and the +knowledge they had gained that the sea could be made to fight for +them, had given the people of Holland strength and hope. Their +material resources, too, were larger than before, for great numbers +of the Protestants from the other provinces had emigrated there, +and had added alike to their strength and wealth. At first, however, +the news caused something like despair in Antwerp. Men went about +depressed and sorrowful, as if they had lost their dearest friend; +but Sainte Aldegonde, who had been appointed by the prince to take +charge of the defence of Antwerp, encouraged the citizens, and their +determination to resist returned. Unfortunately there had already +been terrible blundering. William de Blois, Lord of Treslong and +Admiral of the fleet of Holland and Zeeland, had been ordered to +carry up to the city provisions and munitions of war sufficient to +last for a year, the money having been freely voted by the States +General of these provinces. + +But Treslong disobeyed the orders, and remained week after week at +Ostend drinking heavily and doing nothing else. At last the States, +enraged at his disobedience, ordered him to be arrested and thrown +into prison; but this was too late to enable the needed stores to +be taken up to Antwerp. The citizens were under no uneasiness. They +believed that it was absolutely impossible to block the river, and +that, therefore, they could at all times receive supplies from the +coast. On both sides of the river below the town the land was low +and could at any time be laid under water, and Sainte Aldegonde +brought the Prince of Orange's instructions that the great dyke, +called Blauwgaren, was to be pierced. This would have laid the +country under water for miles, and even the blocking of the river +would not have prevented the arrival of ships with provisions and +supplies. + +Unfortunately Sainte Aldegonde's power was limited. The Butchers' +Guild rose against the proposal, and their leaders appeared before +the magistrates and protested against the step being carried out. +Twelve thousand cattle grazed upon the pastures which would be +submerged, and the destruction of farms, homesteads, and orchards +would be terrible. As to the blocking up of the river, the idea was +absurd, and the operation far beyond the power of man. The butchers +were supported by the officers of the militia, who declared that +were the authorities to attempt the destruction of the dyke the +municipal soldiery would oppose it by force. + +Such was the state of things when the only man whom the democracy +would listen to and obey fell by the assassin's knife, and his +death and the obstinate stupidity of the burghers of Antwerp sealed +the fate of the city. Sainte Aldegonde had hailed the arrival of +Elizabeth's envoy, and consulted with him as to the steps to be +taken for the defence of the city. He himself did not believe in +the possibility of the river being stopped. It was nearly half a +mile in width and sixty feet in depth, with a tidal rise and fall +of eleven feet. Ned agreed with the governor or burgomaster -- for +this was Saint Aldegonde's title -- that the work of blocking this +river seemed impossible, but his reliance upon the opinion of the +prince was so great that he did what he could towards persuading +the populace to permit the plans to be carried out. But Elizabeth +had so often disappointed the people of the Netherlands that her +envoy possessed no authority, and the magistrates, with whom were +the ward masters, the deans of all the guilds, the presidents +of chambers and heads of colleges, squabbled and quarrelled among +themselves, and nothing was done. + +The garrison consisted only of a regiment of English under Colonel +Morgan and a Scotch regiment under Colonel Balfour, but these were +in a state of indiscipline, and a mutiny had shortly before broken +out among them. Many of the troops had deserted to Parma and some +had returned home, and it was not until Morgan had beheaded Captain +Lee and Captain Powell that order was restored among them. Beside +these were the burgher militia, who were brave and well trained, +but insubordinate, and ready on every occasion to refuse obedience +to authority. + +The first result of the general confusion which prevailed in Antwerp +was that Herenthals was allowed to fall without assistance. Had +this small but important city been succoured it would have enabled +Antwerp to protract its own defence for some time. + +The veteran Mondragon as he took possession remarked, "Now it is easy +to see that the Prince of Orange is dead;" and indeed it was only +under his wise supervision and authority that anything like concerted +action between the cities, which were really small republics, was +possible. + +Quietly but steadily the Duke of Parma established fortified posts +at various points on both banks of the Lower Scheldt, thereby +rendering its navigation more difficult, and covering in some +degree the spot where he intended to close the river. Nine miles +below the city were two forts -- Lillo and Liefkenshoek -- one on +either side of the stream. The fortifications of Lillo was complete, +but those of Liefkenshoek were not finished when Parma ordered +the Marquis of Richebourg to carry it by assault. It was taken by +surprise, and the eight hundred men who composed its garrison were +all killed or drowned. This first blow took place on the very day +the Prince of Orange was killed. + +Lillo was garrisoned by Antwerp volunteers, called the Young Bachelors, +together with a company of French under Captain Gascoigne, and 400 +Scotch and Englishmen under Colonel Morgan. Mondragon was ordered +to take the place at any cost. He took up his position with 5000 +men at the country house and farm of Lillo a short distance from the +fort, planted his batteries and opened fire. The fort responded +briskly, and finding that the walls were little injured by +his artillery fire Mondragon tried to take it by mining. Teligny, +however, ran counter mines, and for three weeks the siege continued, +the Spaniards gaining no advantage and losing a considerable number +of men. At last Teligny made a sortie, and a determined action took +place without advantage on either side. The defenders were then +recalled to the fort, the sluice gates were opened, and the waters +of the Scheldt, swollen by a high tide, poured over the country. +Swept by the fire of the guns of the fort and surrounded by water, +the Spaniards were forced to make a rapid retreat, struggling breast +high in the waves. + +Seeing the uselessness of the siege, the attempt to capture Lillo +was abandoned, having cost the Spaniards no less than two thousand +lives. Parma's own camp was on the opposite side of the river, at +the villages of Beveren, Kalloo, and Borght, and he was thus nearly +opposite to Antwerp, as the river swept round with a sharp curve. +He had with him half his army, while the rest were at Stabroek on +the opposite side of the river, nearly ten miles below Antwerp. +Kallo stood upon rising ground, and was speedily transformed +into a bustling town. From this point an army of men dug a canal +to Steeken, a place on the river above Antwerp twelve miles from +Kalloo, and as soon as Ghent and Dendermonde had fallen, great +rafts of timber, fleets of boats laden with provisions, munitions, +building materials, and every other requisite for the great +undertaking Parma had in view were brought to Kalloo. + +To this place was brought also by Parma's orders the shipwrights, +masons, ropemakers, sailors, boatmen, bakers, brewers, and butchers +of Flanders and Brabant, and work went on unceasingly. But while +the autumn wore on the river was still open; and in spite of +the Spanish batteries on the banks the daring sailors of Zeeland +brought up their ships laden with corn to Antwerp, where the price +was already high. Had this traffic been continued Antwerp would +soon have been provisioned for a year's siege; but the folly and +stupidity of the municipal authorities put a stop to it, for they +enacted that, instead of the high prices current for grain, which +had tempted the Zeelanders to run the gauntlet of the Spanish +batteries, a price but little above that obtainable in other places +should be given. The natural result was, the supply of provisions +ceased at once. + +"Did you ever see anything like the obstinacy and folly of these +burghers?" Sainte Aldegonde said in despair to Ned, when, in spite +of his entreaties, this suicidal edict had been issued. "What possible +avail is it to endeavour to defend a city which seems bent on its +own destruction?" + +"The best thing to do," Ned replied in great anger, "would be +to surround the town hall with the companies of Morgan's regiment +remaining here, and to hang every one of these thick headed and +insolent tradesmen." + +"It would be the best way," Sainte Aldegonde agreed, "if we had +also a sufficient force to keep down the city. These knaves think +vastly more of their own privileges than of the good of the State, +or even of the safety of the town. Here, as in Ghent, the people +are divided into sections and parties, who, when there is no one +else to quarrel with, are ever ready to fly at each other's throats. +Each of these leaders of guilds and presidents of chambers considers +himself a little god, and it is quite enough if anyone else expresses +an opinion for the majority to take up at once the opposite view." + +"I looked in at the town hall yesterday," Ned said, "and such an +uproar was going on that no one could be heard to speak. Twenty +men were on their feet at once, shouting and haranguing, and paying +not the slightest attention to each other; while the rest joined +in from time to time with deafening cries and yells. Never did I +see such a scene. And it is upon such men as these that it rests +to decide upon the measures to be taken for the safety of the city!" + +"Ah, if we had but the prince here among us again for a few hours +there would be some hope," Sainte Aldegonde said; "for he would be +able to persuade the people that in times like these there is no +safety in many counsellors, but that they must be content for the +time to obey one man." + +On the Flemish side of the river the sluices had been opened at +Saftingen. The whole country there, with the exception of the ground +on which Kalloo and the other villages stood, was under water. +Still the Blauwgaren dyke, and an inner dyke called the Kowenstyn, +barred back the water, which, had it free course, would have turned +the country into a sea and given passage to the fleets of Zeeland. +Now that it was too late, those who had so fiercely opposed the plan +at first were eager that these should be cut. But it was now out +of their power to do so. The Lord of Kowenstyn, who had a castle +on the dyke which bore his name, had repeatedly urged upon the +Antwerp magistracy the extreme importance of cutting through this +dyke, even if they deferred the destruction of the outer one. Enraged +at their obstinacy and folly, and having the Spanish armies all +round him, he made terms with Parma, and the Spaniards established +themselves firmly along the bank, built strong redoubts upon it, +and stationed five thousand men there. + +As the prince had foreseen, the opening of the Saftingen sluice had +assisted Parma instead of adding to his difficulties; for he was +now no longer confined to the canal, but was able to bring a fleet +of large vessels, laden with cannon and ammunition, from Ghent down +the Scheldt, and in through a breach through the dyke of Borght +to Kalloo. Sainte Aldegonde, in order to bar the Borght passage, +built a work called Fort Teligny upon the dyke, opposite that +thrown up by the Spaniards, and in the narrow passage between them +constant fighting went on between the Spaniards and patriots. Still +the people of Antwerp felt confident, for the Scheldt was still +open, and when food became short the Zeeland fleet could at any +time sail up to their assistance. But before winter closed in Parma +commenced the work for which he had made such mighty preparations. + +Between Kalloo and Oordam, on the opposite side, a sand bar had +been discovered, which somewhat diminished the depth of the stream +and rendered pile driving comparatively easy. A strong fort was +erected on each bank and the work of driving in the piles began. +From each side a framework of heavy timber, supported on these +massive piles, was carried out so far that the width of open water +was reduced from twenty-four to thirteen hundred feet, and strong +blockhouses were erected upon each pier to protect them from assault. +Had a concerted attack been made by the Antwerp ships from above, +and the Zeeland fleet from below, the works could at this time +have been easily destroyed. But the fleet had been paralyzed by the +insubordination of Treslong, and there was no plan or concert; so +that although constant skirmishing went on, no serious attack was +made. + +The brave Teligny, one night going down in a rowboat to communicate +with the Zeelanders and arrange for joint action, was captured by +the Spanish boats, and remained for six years in prison. His loss +was a very serious blow to Antwerp and to the cause. On the 13th +of November Parma sent in a letter to Antwerp, begging the citizens +to take compassion on their wives and children and make terms. +Parma had none of the natural bloodthirstiness of Alva, and would +have been really glad to have arranged matters without further +fighting; especially as he was almost without funds, and the +attitude of the King of France was so doubtful that he knew that +at any moment his plans might be overthrown. + +The States in January attempted to make a diversion in favour of +Antwerp by attacking Bois le Duc, a town from which the Spaniards +drew a large portion of their supplies. Parma, although feeling the +extreme importance of this town, had been able to spare no men for +its defence; and although it was strong, and its burghers notably +brave and warlike, it seemed that it might be readily captured by +surprise. Count Hohenlohe was entrusted with the enterprise, and +with 4000 infantry and 200 cavalry advanced towards the place. +Fifty men, under an officer who knew the town, hid at night near +the gate, and when in the morning the portcullis was lifted, rushed +in, overpowered the guard, and threw open the gate, and Hohenlohe, +with his 200 troopers and 500 pikemen, entered. + +These at once, instead of securing the town, scattered to plunder. +It happened that forty Spanish lancers and thirty foot soldiers had +come into the town the night before to form an escort for a convoy +of provisions. They were about starting when the tumult broke out. +As Hohenlohe's troops thought of nothing but pillage, time was +given to the burghers to seize their arms; and they, with the little +body of troops, fell upon the plunderers, who, at the sight of the +Spanish uniforms, were seized with a panic. Hohenlohe galloped to +the gate to bring in the rest of the troops; but while he was away +one of its guards, although desperately wounded at its capture, +crawled to the ropes which held up the portcullis and cut them with +his knife. Thus those within were cut off from their friends. Many +of them were killed, others threw themselves from the walls into +the moat, and very few of those who had entered made their escape. + +When Hohenlohe returned with 2000 fresh troops and found the gates +shut in his face, he had nothing to do but to ride away, the enterprise +having failed entirely through his own folly and recklessness; for +it was he himself who had encouraged his followers to plunder. Had +he kept them together until the main force entered, no resistance +could have been offered to him, or had he when he rode out to fetch +reinforcements left a guard at the gate to prevent its being shut, +the town could again have been taken. Parma himself wrote to Philip +acknowledging that "Had the rebels succeeded in their enterprise, +I should have been compelled to have abandoned the siege of Antwerp." + +But now the winter, upon which the people in Antwerp had chiefly +depended for preventing the blocking of the stream, was upon the +besiegers. The great river, lashed by storms into fury, and rolling +huge masses of ice up and down with the tide, beat against the piers, +and constantly threatened to carry them away. But the structure +was enormously strong. The piles had been driven fifty feet into +the river bed, and withstood the force of the stream, and on the +25th of February the Scheldt was closed. + +Parma had from the first seen that it was absolutely impossible +to drive piles across the deep water between the piers, and had +prepared to connect them with a bridge of boats. For this purpose +he had constructed thirty-two great barges, each sixty-two feet +in length, and twelve in breadth. These were moored in pairs with +massive chains and anchors, the distance between each pair being +twenty-two feet. All were bound together with chains and timbers +and a roadway protected by a parapet of massive beams was formed +across it. Each boat was turned into a fortress by the erection +of solid wooden redoubts at each end, mounting heavy guns, and was +manned by thirty-two soldiers and four sailors. The forts at the +end of the bridge each mounted ten great guns, and twenty armed +vessels with heavy pieces of artillery were moored in front of each +fort. Thus the structure was defended by 170 great guns. + +As an additional protection to the bridge, two heavy rafts, each +1250 feet long, composed of empty barrels, heavy timbers, ships' +masts, and woodwork bound solidly together, were moored at some +little distance above and below the bridge of boats. These rafts +were protected by projecting beams of wood tipped with iron, to +catch any vessels floating down upon them. The erection of this +structure was one of the most remarkable military enterprises ever +carried out. + +Now that it was too late the people of Antwerp bitterly bewailed +their past folly, which had permitted an enterprise that could +at any moment have been interrupted to be carried to a successful +issue. + +But if something like despair seized the citizens at the sight of +the obstacle that cut them off from all hope of succour, the feelings +of the great general whose enterprise and ability had carried out +the work were almost as depressed. His troops had dwindled to the +mere shadow of an army, the cavalry had nearly disappeared, the +garrisons in the various cities were starving, and the burghers +had no food either for the soldiers or themselves. + +The troops were two years behindhand in their pay. Parma had long +exhausted every means of credit, and his appeals to his sovereign +for money met with no response. But while in his letters to Philip +he showed the feelings of despair which possessed him, he kept +a smiling countenance to all else. A spy having been captured, he +ordered him to be conducted over every part of the encampment. The +forts and bridge were shown to him, and he was requested to count +the pieces of artillery, and was then sent back to the town to +inform the citizens of what he had seen. + +At this moment Brussels, which had long been besieged, was starved +into surrender, and Parma was reinforced by the troops who had +been engaged in the siege of that city. A misfortune now befell him +similar to that which the patriots had suffered at Bois le Duc. He +had experienced great inconvenience from not possessing a port on +the sea coast of Flanders, and consented to a proposal of La Motte, +one of the most experienced of the Walloon generals, to surprise +Ostend. On the night of the 29th of March, La Motte, with 2000 foot +and 1200 cavalry, surprised and carried the old port of the town. +Leaving an officer in charge of the position, he went back to bring +up the rest of his force. In his absence the soldiers scattered to +plunder. The citizens roused themselves, killed many of them, and +put the rest to flight, and by the time La Motte returned with the +fresh troops the panic had become so general that the enterprise +had to be abandoned. + +The people of Antwerp now felt that unless some decisive steps were +taken their fate was sealed. A number of armed vessels sailed up +from Zeeland, and, assisted by a detachment from Fort Lillo, suddenly +attacked and carried Fort Liefkenshoek, which had been taken from +them at the commencement of the siege, and also Fort St. Anthony +lower down the river. In advancing towards the latter fort they +disobeyed Sainte Aldegonde's express orders, which were that they +should, after capturing Liefkenshoek, at once follow the dyke up +the river to the point where it was broken near the fort at the +end of the bridge, and should there instantly throw up strong works. + +Had they followed out these orders they could from this point have +battered the bridge, and destroyed this barrier over the river. But +the delay caused by the attack on the Fort St. Anthony was fatal, +for at night Parma sent a strong body of soldiers and sappers in +boats from Kalloo to the broken end of the dyke, and these before +morning threw up works upon the very spot where Sainte Aldegonde had +intended the battery for the destruction of the bridge to be erected. +Nevertheless the success was a considerable one. The possession of +Lillo and Liefkenshoek restored to the patriots the command of the +river to within three miles of the bridge, and enabled the Zeeland +fleet to be brought up at that point. + +Another blow was now meditated. There was in Antwerp an Italian +named Gianobelli, a man of great science and inventive power. He +had first gone to Spain to offer his inventions to Philip, but had +met with such insolent neglect there that he had betaken himself +in a rage to Flanders, swearing that the Spaniards should repent +their treatment of him. He had laid his plans before the Council +of Antwerp, and had asked from them three ships of a hundred and +fifty, three hundred and fifty, and five hundred tons respectively, +besides these he wanted sixty flat bottomed scows. Had this request +been complied with it is certain that Parma's bridge would have +been utterly destroyed; but the leading men were building a great +ship or floating castle of their own design, from which they +expected such great things that they christened it the End of the +War. Gianobelli had warned them that this ship would certainly turn +out a failure. However, they persisted, and instead of granting +him the ships he wanted, only gave him two small vessels of seventy +and eighty tons. + +Although disgusted with their parsimony on so momentous an occasion, +Gianobelli set to work with the aid of two skilful artisans of +Antwerp to fit them up. + +In the hold of each vessel a solid flooring of brick and mortar a +foot thick was first laid down. Upon this was built a chamber of +masonry forty feet long, three and a half feet wide, and as many +high, and with side walls five feet thick. This chamber was covered +with a roof six feet thick of tombstones placed edgeways, and was +filled with a powder of Gianobelli's own invention. Above was piled +a pyramid of millstones, cannonballs, chain shot, iron hooks, and +heavy missiles of all kinds, and again over these were laid heavy +marble slabs. The rest of the hold was filled with paving stones. + +One ship was christened the Fortune, and on this the mine was to +be exploded by a slow match, cut so as to explode at a calculated +moment. The mine on board the Hope was to be started by a piece +of clockwork, which at the appointed time was to strike fire from +a flint. Planks and woodwork were piled on the decks to give to the +two vessels the appearance of simple fireships. Thirty-two small +craft, saturated with tar and turpentine and filled with inflammable +materials, were to be sent down the river in detachments of eight +every half hour, to clear away if possible the raft above the bridge +and to occupy the attention of the Spaniards. + +The 5th of April, the day after the capture of the Liefkenshoek, +was chosen for the attempt. It began badly. Admiral Jacobzoon, who +was in command, instead of sending down the fireboats in batches +as arranged, sent them all off one after another, and started the +two mine ships immediately afterwards. As soon as their approach +was discovered, the Spaniards, who had heard vague rumours that an +attack by water was meditated, at once got under arms and mustered +upon the bridge and forts. Parma himself, with all his principal +officers, superintended the arrangements. As the fleet of small +ships approached they burst into flames. The Spaniards silently +watched the approaching danger, but soon began to take heart +again. Many of the boats grounded on the banks of the river before +reaching their destination, others burned out and sank, while the +rest drifted against the raft, but were kept from touching it by the +long projecting timbers, and burned out without doing any damage. + +Then came the two ships. The pilots as they neared the bridge +escaped in boats, and the current carried them down, one on each +side of the raft, towards the solid ends of the bridge. The Fortune +came first, but grounded near the shore without touching the bridge. +Just as it did so the slow match upon deck burnt out. There was a +faint explosion, but no result; and Sir Ronald Yorke, the man who +had handed over Zutphen, sprang on board with a party of volunteers, +extinguished the fire smoldering on deck, and thrusting their +spears down into the hold, endeavoured to ascertain the nature of +its contents. Finding it impossible to do so they returned to the +bridge. + +The Spaniards were now shouting with laughter at the impotent +attempt of the Antwerpers to destroy the bridge, and were watching +the Hope, which was now following her consort. She passed just +clear of the end of the raft, and struck the bridge close to the +blockhouse at the commencement of the floating portion. A fire +was smoldering on her deck, and a party of soldiers at once sprang +on board to extinguish this, as their comrades had done the fire +on board the Fortune. The Marquis of Richebourg, standing on the +bridge, directed the operations. The Prince of Parma was standing +close by, when an officer named Vega, moved by a sudden impulse, +fell on his knees and implored him to leave the place, and not to +risk a life so precious to Spain. Moved by the officer's entreaties +Parma turned and walked along the bridge. He had just reached the +entrance to the fort when a terrific explosion took place. + +The clockwork of the Hope had succeeded better than the slow match +in the Fortune. In an instant she disappeared, and with her the +blockhouse against which she had struck, with all of its garrison, +a large portion of the bridge, and all the troops stationed upon +it. The ground was shaken as if by an earthquake, houses fell miles +away, and the air was filled with a rain of mighty blocks of stone, +some of which were afterwards found a league away. A thousand +soldiers were killed in an instant, the rest were dashed to the +ground, stunned and bewildered. The Marquis of Richebourg and most +of Parma's best officers were killed. Parma himself lay for a long +time as if dead, but presently recovered and set to work to do what +he could to repair the disaster. + +The Zeeland fleet were lying below, only waiting for the signal +to move up to destroy the rest of the bridge and carry succour to +the city; but the incompetent and cowardly Jacobzoon rowed hastily +away after the explosion, and the rocket that should have summoned +the Zeelanders was never sent up. Parma moved about among his +troops, restoring order and confidence, and as the night went on +and no assault took place he set his men to work to collect drifting +timbers and spars, and make a hasty and temporary restoration, in +appearance at least, of the ruined portion of the bridge. + +It was not until three days afterwards that the truth that the +bridge had been partially destroyed, and that the way was open, was +known at Antwerp. But by this time it was too late. The Zeelanders +had retired; the Spaniards had recovered their confidence, and +were hard at work restoring the bridge. From time to time fresh +fireships were sent down; but Parma had now established a patrol +of boats, which went out to meet them and towed them to shore far +above the bridge. In the weeks that followed Parma's army dwindled +away from sickness brought on by starvation, anxiety, and overwork; +while the people of Antwerp were preparing for an attack upon the +dyke of Kowenstyn. If that could be captured and broken, Parma's +bridge would be rendered useless, as the Zeeland fleet could pass +up over the submerged country with aid. + +Parma was well aware of the supreme importance of this dyke. He +had fringed both its margins with breastworks of stakes, and had +strengthened the whole body of the dyke with timber work and piles. +Where it touched the great Scheldt dyke a strong fortress called +the Holy Cross had been constructed under the command of Mondragon, +and at the further end, in the neighbourhood of Mansfeldt's +headquarters, was another fort called the Stabroek, which commanded +and raked the whole dyke. + +On the body of the dyke itself were three strong forts a mile +apart, called St. James, St. George, and the Fort of the Palisades. +Several attacks had been made from time to time, both upon the +bridge and dyke, and at daybreak on the 7th of May a fleet from +Lillo, under Hohenlohe, landed five hundred Zeelanders upon it +between St. George's and Fort Palisade. But the fleet that was to +have come out from Antwerp to his assistance never arrived; and +the Zeelanders were overpowered by the fire from the two forts and +the attacks of the Spaniards, and retreated, leaving four of their +ships behind them, and more than a fourth of their force. + +Upon the 26th of the same month the grand attack, from which the +people of Antwerp hoped so much, took place. Two hundred vessels +were ready. A portion of these were to come up from Zeeland, under +Hohenlohe; the rest to advance from Antwerp, under Sainte Aldegonde. +At two o'clock in the morning the Spanish sentinels saw four +fireships approaching the dyke. They mustered reluctantly, fearing +a repetition of the previous explosion, and retired to the fort. +When the fireships reached the stakes protecting the dyke, they +burned and exploded, but without effecting much damage. But in the +meantime a swarm of vessels of various sizes were seen approaching. +It was the fleet of Hohenlohe, which had been sailing and rowing +from ten o'clock on the previous night. + +Guided by the light of the fireships they approached the dyke, and +the Zeelanders sprang ashore and climbed up. They were met by several +hundred Spanish troops, who, as soon as they saw the fireships burn +out harmlessly, sallied out from their forts. The Zeelanders were +beginning to give way when the Antwerp fleet came up on the other +side, headed by Sainte Aldegonde. The new arrivals sprang from +their boats and climbed the dyke. The Spaniards were driven off, +and three thousand men occupied all the space between Fort George +and the Palisade Fort. + +With Sainte Aldegonde came all the English and Scotch troops in Antwerp +under Balfour and Morgan, and many volunteers, among whom was Ned +Martin. With Hohenlohe came Prince Maurice, William the Silent's +son, a lad of eighteen. With wool sacks, sandbags, planks, and +other materials the patriots now rapidly entrenched the position +they had gained, while a large body of sappers and miners set +to work with picks, mattocks, and shovels, tearing down the dyke. +The Spaniards poured out from the forts; but Antwerpers, Dutchmen, +Zeelanders, Scotchmen, and Englishmen met them bravely, and a +tremendous conflict went on at each end of the narrow causeway. + +Both parties fought with the greatest obstinacy, and for an hour +there was no advantage on either side. At last the patriots were +victorious, drove the Spaniards back into their two forts, and +following up their success attacked the Palisade Fort. Its outworks +were in their hands when a tremendous cheer was heard. The sappers +and miners had done their work. Salt water poured through the +broken dyke, and a Zeeland barge, freighted with provisions, floated +triumphantly into the water beyond, now no longer an inland sea. +Then when the triumph seemed achieved another fatal mistake was made +by the patriots. Sainte Aldegonde and Hohenlohe, the two commanders +of the enterprise, both leapt on board, anxious to be the first +to carry the news of the victory to Antwerp, where they arrived in +triumph, and set all the bells ringing and bonfires blazing. + +For three hours the party on the dyke remained unmolested. Parma +was at his camp four leagues away, and in ignorance of what had been +done, and Mansfeldt could send no word across to him. The latter +held a council of war, but it seemed that nothing could be done. +Three thousand men were entrenched on the narrow dyke, covered by +the guns of a hundred and sixty Zeeland ships. Some of the officers +were in favour of waiting until nightfall; but at last the advice +of a gallant officer, Camillo Capizucca, colonel of the Italian +Legion, carried the day in favour of an immediate assault, and the +Italians and Spaniards marched together from Fort Stabroek to the +Palisade Fort, which was now in extremity. + +They came in time, drove back the assailants, and were preparing +to advance against them when a distant shout from the other end of +the dyke told that Parma had arrived there. Mondragon moved from +the Holy Cross to Fort George; and from that fort and from the +Palisade the Spaniards advanced to the attack of the patriots' +position. During the whole war no more desperate encounter took +place than that upon the dyke, which was but six paces wide. The +fight was long and furious. Three times the Spaniards were repulsed +with tremendous loss; and while the patriot soldiers fought, their +pioneers still carried on the destruction of the dyke. + +A fourth assault was likewise repulsed, but the fifth was more +successful. The Spaniards believed that they were led by a dead +commander who had fallen some months before, and this superstitious +belief inspired them with fresh courage. The entrenchment was +carried, but its defenders fought as obstinately as before on the +dyke behind it. Just at this moment the vessels of the Zeelanders +began to draw off. Many had been sunk or disabled by the fire that +the forts had maintained on them; and the rest found the water +sinking fast, for the tide was now ebbing. + +The patriots, believing that they were deserted by the fleet, were +seized with a sudden panic; and, leaving the dyke, tried to wade or +swim off to the ships. The Spaniards with shouts of victory pursued +them. The English and Scotch were the last to abandon the position +they had held for seven hours, and most of them were put to the +sword. Two thousand in all were slain or drowned, the remainder +succeeded in reaching the ships on one side or other of the dyke. + +Ned Martin had fought to the last. He was standing side by side +with Justinius of Nassau, and the two sprang together into a clump +of high rushes, tore off their heavy armour and swam out to one of +the Zeeland ships, which at once dropped down the river and reached +the sea. Ned's mission was now at an end, and he at once returned +to England. + +The failure of the attempt upon the Kowenstyn dyke sealed the fate +of Antwerp. It resisted until the middle of June; when finding +hunger staring the city in the face, and having no hope whatever +of relief, Sainte Aldegonde yielded to the clamour of the mob and +opened negotiations. + +These were continued for nearly two months. Parma was unaware that +the town was reduced to such an extremity, and consented to give +honourable terms. The treaty was signed on the 17th of August. There +was to be a complete amnesty for the past. Royalist absentees were +to be reinstated in their positions. Monasteries and churches to be +restored to their former possessors. The inhabitants of the city +were to practice the Catholic religion only, while those who refused +to conform were allowed two years for the purpose of winding up +their affairs. All prisoners, with the exception of Teligny, were +to be released. Four hundred thousand florins were to be paid by +the city as a fine, and the garrison were to leave the town with +arms and baggage, and all honours of war. + +The fall of Antwerp brought about with it the entire submission of +Brabant and Flanders, and henceforth the war was continued solely +by Zeeland, Holland, and Friesland. + +The death of the Prince of Orange, and the fall of Antwerp, marked +the conclusion of what may be called the first period of the struggle +of the Netherlands for freedom. It was henceforth to enter upon +another phase. England, which had long assisted Holland privately +with money, and openly by the raising of volunteers for her service, +was now about to enter the arena boldly and to play an important +part in the struggle, which, after a long period of obstinate +strife, was to end in the complete emancipation of the Netherlands +from the yoke of Spain. + +Sir Edward Martin married Gertrude Von Harp soon after his return +to England. He retained the favour of Elizabeth to the day of her +death, and there were few whose counsels had more influence with +her. He long continued in the public service, although no longer +compelled to do so as a means of livelihood; for as Holland and Zeeland +freed themselves from the yoke of Spain, and made extraordinary +strides in wealth and prosperity, the estates of the countess +once more produced a splendid revenue, and this at her death came +entirely to her daughter. A considerable portion of Sir Edward +Martin's life, when not actually engaged upon public affairs, was +spent upon the broad estates which had come to him from his wife. + +ÿ + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, BY PIKE AND DYKE: A TALE OF THE RISE OF THE DUTCH REPUBLIC *** + +This file should be named bpike10.txt or bpike10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, bpike11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, bpike10a.txt + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext04 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext04 + +Or /etext03, 02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + |